JP2017035256A - Pachinko game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a Pachinko game machine capable of enhancing amusement of a game.SOLUTION: A first special game and a second special game do not execute performance suggesting or notifying which round unit game among a plurality of unit games is a unit game being executed in the case that execution orders of long-opening operation and short-opening operation of a big winning port to be executed in a section from a first to an N+M-th unit games are set to be the same and whichever special game is executed, do not execute performance suggesting or notifying that the game ball have passed the specific area whichever special game is executed and even when game balls pass a special area in an N-th unit game, and executes performance suggesting or notifying whether or not a game state after a first special game is over or a second special game is over becomes a specific game state in a unit game following the N-th unit game or after a final unit game is over.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 94

Description

  The present invention relates to pachinko gaming machines.

  In general, pachinko gaming machines acquire a random number for lottery when a game ball enters the starting port, and temporarily store it as a predetermined upper limit number of balls as operation holding balls. Each such operation holding ball is sequentially digested one by one every time a predetermined starting condition is satisfied, and whether or not it is a big hit is determined. If the result of the determination is a big hit, the symbols consisting of a plurality of columns are displayed in a variable manner, and then the symbols are stopped and displayed in a predetermined winning manner. Special games (big hit games) to be established.

  In this type of pachinko gaming machine, during the execution of a special game, a jackpot effect that informs information such as the number of rounds according to the progress of the game is executed (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2007-21272 A

  A large number of pachinko gaming machines adopting such a configuration already exist as conventional models. Therefore, in order to differentiate from the conventional models, it is required to improve the interest of the game by the big hit effect.

  This invention is made | formed in view of such a subject, and it aims at providing the pachinko game machine which can aim at the improvement of the interest property of a game.

In order to achieve such an object, the pachinko gaming machine according to the present invention includes a game board in which a game area is formed, a start port provided in the game area, into which a game ball can enter, and the start port. A winning / non-judgment means for determining whether or not the game ball is entered, and a winning hole provided in the gaming area, which is opened in accordance with the result of the winning / failing determination and into which a gaming ball can enter, and the large winning hole A special area in which a game ball that has entered the ball can pass, and a special game execution means for executing a special game that repeats a unit game with the opening of the big winning opening multiple times when the result of the determination is a big hit An effect display device in which a symbol indicating the result of the success / failure determination is displayed variably and a predetermined effect is displayed; a normal gaming state in which the result of the success / failure determination is a big hit with a predetermined probability; Is more than the predetermined probability A game state control means for controlling to shift to a normal game state or a specific game state, and having at least N (N of a plurality of unit games in the special game. ≧ 1) A game ball that has entered the big prize opening in the unit game for the first time is configured to be able to pass through the specific area in the big prize opening, and at least N of a plurality of unit games in the special game Identifies whether the game ball that has entered the grand prize opening in the unit game of the first time is to shift to the normal gaming state after the end of the special game, depending on whether the special area in the special prize opening has passed It is determined whether to shift to the gaming state, and as a type of special game that is executed when the result of the determination of success / failure is a big hit, a first special game that is set to be less advantageous for the player, Including at least a second special game in which the degree of advantage is set higher than that of the first special game. In the unit game, the special winning opening is opened at least once. There are a long opening operation in which the big winning opening is opened for a predetermined time or more and a short opening operation in which the big winning opening is opened for less than the predetermined time, the first special game and the second special game. In the section from the first unit game to the N + M (M ≧ 1) unit game, the execution sequence of the long opening operation and the short opening operation of the big prize opening is set to be the same. Even when one special game is being executed or when the second special game is being executed, the unit game currently being executed is the number of times of the plurality of unit games. Suggest whether it is a unit game In the N-th unit game, even if the first special game is being executed or the second special game is being executed without performing the effect to notify Even if the game ball has passed through the specific area, an effect that suggests or notifies that the game ball has passed through the specific area is not executed in the N-th unit game, and after the end of the first special game or An effect of suggesting or notifying whether or not the game state after the end of the second special game is a specific game state is executed after the unit game after the N-th unit game or after the end of the last unit game. It is characterized by that.

  According to the pachinko gaming machine according to the present invention, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

It is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. It is a rear view of a pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. It is a control block diagram of a pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. It is a functional block diagram of the main control board and effect control board of a pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the special symbol winning / losing lottery table based on this embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the symbol table per special symbol based on this embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the special symbol fluctuation pattern table based on this embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the extended villa production | presentation pattern table of the pending renzo production based on this embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the production image of the reserved in-rensou production based on this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the main control side main process based on this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the control process following FIG. 10 of the main process by the main control side based on this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the main control side timer interruption process based on this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the starting port monitoring control process based on this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol change start monitoring control process based on this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol fluctuation | variation start monitoring process in FIG. 14 based on this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol control process based on this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol control general-purpose process in FIG. 16 based on this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol change start process in FIG. 17 based on this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol change process in FIG. 17 based on this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol stop symbol display middle process in FIG. 17 based on this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the control process following FIG. 20 of the special symbol stop symbol display process based on this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special electric accessory control process based on this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the control process following FIG. 22 of the special electric accessory control process based on this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the control process following FIG. 23 of the special electric accessory control process based on this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the reset start process based on this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the production control side main process based on this embodiment. 27 is a flowchart showing command analysis processing in FIG. 26 according to the present embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the production | presentation state transfer process in FIG. 27 based on this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the change effect content determination process in FIG. 27 based on this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the pending | holding villa rendition effect A determination process in FIG. 29 based on this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the big hit effect content determination process in FIG. 27 based on this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the pending | reserved in-range resort effect B determination process in FIG. 31 based on this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the big hit effect replacement | exchange process in FIG. 31 based on this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the presentation control command reception interruption process based on this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the production control side timer interruption process based on this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the image control command transmission interruption process based on this embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the effect image of a special continuous effect based on this embodiment. It is a time chart for demonstrating the relationship between the on-hold consecutive resort production and special continuous production based on this embodiment. It is a time chart for demonstrating the relationship 1 of the on-hold extended resort effect and special effect which concerns on the 1st modification of this embodiment. It is a time chart for demonstrating the relations 2 and 3 of the reservation in-resort resort effect and the special effect based on the 1st modification of this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special effect determination process based on the 1st modification of this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the on-hold extended resort production A determination process based on the 1st modification of this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the on-hold extended resort production B determination process based on the 1st modification of this embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the extended villa production | presentation pattern table of the retained villa extended production based on the 2nd modification of this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the big hit effect content determination process based on the 2nd modification of this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the production | presentation button monitoring control process based on the 2nd modification of this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the production | presentation state transfer process based on the 2nd modification of this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the on-hold extended resort production A determination process based on the 2nd modification of this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the on-hold extended resort production B determination process based on the 2nd modification of this embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the effect image of the on-hold extended resort effect B based on the 3rd modification of this embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the extended villa production | presentation pattern table of the retained villa reproduction production based on the 3rd modification of this embodiment. It is sectional drawing of the 2nd big prize opening based on 2nd Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the symbol table per special symbol based on 2nd Embodiment. It is a time chart which shows the operation pattern of the special winning opening based on 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the big hit effect content determination process based on 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the on-hold consecutive resort production B determination process based on 2nd Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the success / failure prior determination table based on 2nd Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the special symbol winning / losing lottery table based on 3rd Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the symbol table per special symbol based on 3rd Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the special symbol fluctuation pattern table based on 3rd Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the extended villa production | presentation pattern table of the retained renso production in the third embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the on-hold consecutive resort production B determination process based on 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the on-hold consecutive villa production A determination process based on 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the on-hold consecutive resort production B determination process based on 4th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram for demonstrating an effect | action based on 4th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the content of the winning ball number notification effect based on 5th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the example of a production | presentation of on-hold consecutive villa production based on 5th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram with which it uses for description of the hold image based on 6th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the example of a production | presentation of the on-hold consecutive resort production based on 6th Embodiment. It is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine according to a seventh embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the symbol table per special symbol based on 7th Embodiment. It is a time chart which shows the action pattern of the special winning opening based on 7th Embodiment. It is a table | surface which shows the relationship between the jackpot classification and promotion effect based on 7th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the example of a production | presentation of the probability change promotion effect based on 7th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the probability variation promotion effect pattern table based on 7th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the example of an effect of a round promotion effect based on 7th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the round promotion effect pattern table based on 7th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the symbol table per special symbol based on 8th Embodiment. It is a time chart which shows the operation pattern of the special winning opening based on 8th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the symbol table per special symbol based on 9th Embodiment. It is a time chart which shows the action pattern of the big prize opening based on 9th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the jackpot symbol table based on 9th Embodiment. It is a mimetic diagram showing a big hit production pattern table concerning a 9th embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the content of the jackpot effect pattern (fierce fight bonus) based on 9th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the content of the jackpot effect pattern (phantom bonus) based on 9th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the content of the big hit effect pattern (Musou bonus) based on 9th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the content of the big hit effect pattern (seven star charge) based on 9th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the content of the start demonstration effect based on 9th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the completion | finish demonstration effect table based on 9th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the content of the end demonstration effect based on 9th Embodiment. It is a transition diagram of effect mode based on 9th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the special symbol fluctuation pattern table based on 9th Embodiment. It is a mimetic diagram showing a change production pattern table concerning a 9th embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the example of a production | presentation of the probability change promotion effect based on 9th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the example of an effect of a round promotion effect based on 9th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the example of a production | presentation of the on-hold consecutive resort production based on 9th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the example of a 7-star charge production effect based on 9th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram for demonstrating the execution process of the character selection effect based on 9th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the symbol table per special symbol based on 10th Embodiment. It is a time chart which shows the action pattern of the big prize opening based on 10th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the symbol table per special symbol based on 11th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram for demonstrating the execution process of a special game based on 11th Embodiment. It is a time chart which shows the action pattern of the big prize opening based on 12th Embodiment.

  Hereinafter, preferred embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. Note that the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment is a model in which two functions corresponding to the conventional first type pachinko gaming machine are mixed, and the first game (first special symbol game) and the second game. (Second special symbol game) can be developed.

[First Embodiment]
A front view and a rear view of a pachinko gaming machine PM according to the present embodiment are shown in FIGS.

<Basic configuration of pachinko machine>
First, the basic structure of the front side of the pachinko gaming machine PM will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko gaming machine PM is configured with a rectangular frame size adapted to the front of the opening of the outer frame 1 which forms a vertically fixed holding frame configured in an outer rectangular frame size, and can be opened and closed. The front frame 2 that forms a frame is attached so that it can be opened and closed laterally and opened and removed by upper and lower hinge mechanisms 3a, 3b arranged on the left front edge of each other, and is called a double lock provided on the front right edge. The locking device 4 is always used to maintain the closed state engaged with the outer frame 1.

  On the front side of the front frame 2, a glass frame 5 and a ball tray unit 6 are assembled so that they can be opened and closed laterally and detachably using hinge mechanisms 7 a, 7 b, 7 c provided on the left side of the front side. It is always used in a closed state covering the front surface of the front frame 2. A game board 20 is detachably set and held on the upper part of the front frame 2 located behind the glass frame 5, and a game area PA in front of the game board 20 through the double-layer glass of the glass frame 5 that is always held closed. Can be viewed.

  On the front side of the glass frame 5, there are provided a frame lamp (LED lamp) 10 that emits light according to the game development status, and a speaker 11 that generates sound effects according to the game development status. The ball tray unit 6 is provided with upper and lower ball trays (an upper ball tray 8 and a lower ball tray 9) for storing game balls, and an effect that is pressed by a player at the front center of the upper ball tray 8 is provided. A button 15 is provided, and a launch handle 12 for performing a launch operation of the game ball is provided on the front right side of the lower ball tray 9.

  The game board 20 is configured based on a board formed in a rectangular flat plate shape using a synthetic resin material such as an acrylic resin, a polycarbonate resin, or an ABS resin. On the front surface of the game board 20, an outer rail and an inner rail are fixed in an arc shape, and a substantially circular game area PA on which a game ball can roll is defined, and a windmill and a large number of games are formed in the game area PA. Along with the nail, in addition to various winning ports such as the first starting port 61, the second starting port 62, the operation gate 63, the first large winning port 64, the second large winning port 65, the first special symbol display device 71, the second Various display devices such as a special symbol display device 72, a first special symbol reservation lamp 73, a second special symbol reservation lamp 74, a normal symbol display device 75, and a general symbol reservation lamp 76 are provided. A center ornament 22 is disposed substantially at the center of the game area PA, and the screen of the effect display device 70 is provided so as to be visible through the center opening of the center ornament 22. At the lower end of the game area PA, there is provided an out port 29 through which the game balls that have tumbled down without entering each winning port are discharged to the back side of the game board 20. Hereinafter, each component provided in the game board 20 is demonstrated in order.

  The first start port 61 is provided as a start winning port corresponding to the first special symbol game, and includes a first start port switch 611 for detecting the entrance of a game ball. Entering a game ball into the first start port 61 triggers the first special symbol lottery.

  The second start port 62 is provided as a start winning port corresponding to the second special symbol game, and includes a second start port switch 621 for detecting the entrance of a game ball. Entering a game ball into the second start port 62 triggers the second special symbol lottery. The second start port 62 includes a normal electric accessory 622 and a normal electric accessory solenoid 623 for opening and closing the normal electric accessory 622. The ordinary electric accessory 622 changes between a closed state in which it is difficult for a game ball to enter the second starting port 62 and an open state in which the game ball is easier to enter than this state. Here, the second starting port 62 has a structure in which it is difficult for a game ball to enter unless the ordinary electric accessory 622 is opened. On the other hand, when the ordinary electric accessory 622 is opened, the ease of entering the second starting port 62 is enhanced.

  The operation gate 63 is provided as a start winning opening corresponding to a normal symbol game, and includes an operation gate switch 631 for detecting passage of a game ball. Note that the passing of the game ball to the operation gate 63 triggers the normal symbol lottery for determining whether or not to expand the normal electric accessory 622 of the second start port 62.

The first big winning opening 64 is formed as a winning opening having a horizontal rectangular shape that is open when a big win or a small win is won in the first special symbol or the second special symbol. The first big prize opening 64 includes a first big prize opening switch 641 for detecting the entry of a game ball, and a first special electric accessory 642 called a so-called attacker device, and the first special electric combination. Accompaniment 64
And a first large prize opening solenoid 643 for opening and closing 2. The first special electric accessory 642 is variable between a normal state in which a game ball cannot enter or difficult to enter the first grand prize opening 64 and an open state in which a game ball can enter or can easily enter.

  The second big winning opening 65 is formed as a winning opening having a horizontal rectangular shape that is open when the first special symbol or the second special symbol is determined to be a big win or a small win. The second grand prize opening 65 includes a second special prize opening switch 651 for detecting the entry of a game ball, a second special electric accessory 652 called a so-called attacker device, and the second special electric machine. And a second big prize opening solenoid 653 for opening and closing the accessory 652. The second special electric accessory 652 is variable between a normal state in which a game ball cannot enter or difficult to enter the second grand prize opening 65 and an open state in which a game ball can enter or can easily enter.

  The first big prize opening 64 and the second big prize opening 65 are provided in the right side area in the game area PA. Therefore, in a special gaming state, when a game ball is launched toward the game area PA, it is easy to enter any of the big winning holes 64 and 65 by hitting the right area, so-called right hit. It has become.

  The first special symbol display device 71 performs variable display and fixed display of the first special symbol when the game ball enters the first starting port 61. The first special symbol display device 71 is composed of, for example, 7-segment LEDs, and the first special symbol variable display is expressed according to the blinking pattern of each segment, and the blinking of the segment stops and switches to the lit display. One special symbol is confirmed and displayed. The stop symbol of the first special symbol is formed by numbers or symbols expressed by combinations of segments.

  The second special symbol display device 72 performs a variable display and a fixed display of the first special symbol when the game ball enters the second start port 62. The second special symbol display device 72 is composed of, for example, seven-segment LEDs, and the second special symbol variable display is expressed according to the blinking pattern of each segment, and the blinking of the segment stops and switches to the lit display. 2 Special symbols are finalized. The stop symbol of the second special symbol is formed by numbers or symbols expressed by combinations of segments.

  The first special figure reservation lamp 73 and the second special figure reservation lamp 74 are each composed of, for example, two LED lamps, and the number of operation reserved balls of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is indicated by lighting / flashing display of the lamps. Express (up to 4). The number of reserved balls for operation of the first special symbol is a number related to the random number value acquired based on the ball entering the first starting port 61 during the fluctuation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol or during execution of the special game. Yes, the acquired random number value is held, that is, the number of times the determination of the success / failure is temporarily held until the acceptance / rejection determination permission condition (variation start condition) is satisfied for the acquired random number value. The number of reserved balls for operation of the second special symbol is a number related to the random number value acquired based on the ball entering the second starting port 62 during the variation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol or during execution of the special game. Yes, the acquired random number value is held, that is, the number of times the determination of the success / failure is temporarily held until the acceptance / rejection determination permission condition (variation start condition) is satisfied for the acquired random number value.

The normal symbol display device 75 is composed of, for example, two LED lamps, and performs normal symbol variation display and confirmation display by lighting and blinking display of the lamps. In the present embodiment, for example, the normal symbol variation display is expressed in such a manner that the two lamps are alternately turned on and off, and depending on which of the lamps is finally turned on and stopped, Notify the lottery result. The ordinary figure holding lamp 76 is composed of, for example, two LED lamps, and represents the number of holding balls (up to 4) of normal symbols by lighting / blinking display of the lamp. On the left side of the normal symbol display device 75, the number of round games in a special game (number of rounds:
A round indicator 77 for displaying the number of times that the special electric combination items 642 and 643 are continuously operated is provided.

  The effect display device 70 mainly displays an effect image including a decorative pattern and a notice effect that fluctuately display / stop in conjunction with the first special symbol or the second special symbol, and the first special symbol and the second special symbol. Hold display. Specifically, on the screen of the effect display device 70, the first special symbol is synchronized with the decorative symbol display unit 700 on which the decorative symbol change display or the notice effect display is executed, and the first special symbol hold lamp 73. The first special figure hold display section 701 that executes the hold display of the second special figure hold display section 702 that executes the hold display of the second special symbol in synchronization with the second special figure hold lamp 74 Is provided. In the present embodiment, a liquid crystal display device is employed as the effect display device 70. The decorative symbol display unit 700 is provided with three rows of display areas (a left display area Z1, a middle display area Z2, and a right display area Z3) serving as a decorative display variable display area on a predetermined effective line (not shown). The left symbol of the decorative symbol corresponding to the left display area Z1, the middle symbol of the decorative symbol corresponding to the middle display region Z2, and the right symbol of the decorative symbol corresponding to the right display region Z3 are stopped and displayed. The In the special figure hold display sections 701 and 702, in a normal display mode, when an operation holding ball of a special symbol is generated, a holding image of a white circle is displayed, whereas when the operation holding ball is digested, it corresponds. The reserved image is lost. The reserved images are displayed in order according to the order in which the special symbols actuated on-hold balls are generated (the order of entering the balls), and a maximum of four can be displayed on each of the on-hold display units 701 and 702.

  The center decoration 22 is installed around the effect display device 70, and has functions such as a flow path of the game ball, protection of the screen of the effect display device 70, and decoration. The center ornament 22 is provided with a movable accessory 24 that performs a production operation according to the game development status. The movable accessory 24 includes a driving source such as a stepping motor or a solenoid. Further, the center decoration 22 is provided with a board lamp (LED lamp) 25 that emits light according to the game development status. In the following description, for convenience, the frame lamp 10 and the panel lamp 25 are also collectively referred to as “effect lamp LP”.

  Next, the basic structure of the back side of the pachinko gaming machine PM will be described with reference to FIG. On the back side of the front frame 2, a back set board 30 having a window that communicates with the front and rear at substantially the center and formed in a rectangular frame shape somewhat smaller than the front frame 2 is detachably attached. Each part of the back set board 30 has a storage tank 31 for storing a large number of game balls, a tank rail 32 extending from the storage tank 31 with a gentle downward slope to the right, and a lower end connected to the right end of the tank rail 32. A ball supply passage 33 extending to the ball, a prize ball payout unit 34 for paying out a game ball guided by the ball supply passage 33, and a prize for guiding the game ball discharged from the prize ball payout unit 34 to the upper ball tray 6. A ball passage portion 35 and the like are provided.

  On the back side of the game board 10, there is a main control board 100 for comprehensively controlling the operation of the pachinko gaming machine PM, an effect control board 200 for performing overall control of the game, image display according to game development, and control of sound effects. An image control board 300 for performing is attached. In the present embodiment, the effect control board 200 and the image control board 300 constitute a liquid crystal unit in an assembled state integrated with the effect display device (liquid crystal display device) 70. On the other hand, on the back side of the back set board 30, the payout control board 400 that performs control related to the launch and payout of the game balls, and the power received from the game facility side and supplied to various control boards and electric / electronic components A power supply board 500 or the like is attached. In order to prevent unauthorized modification, these control boards are respectively placed at predetermined positions on the back of the game board 20 or the back set board 30 in an assembled state housed in a transparent resin board case having a caulking structure and a sealing structure. Arranged. These control boards and the electrical / electronic components of each part of the pachinko gaming machine PM are connected to each other via a harness (connector cable) so that the pachinko gaming machine PM can be operated.

<Control configuration of pachinko machines>
Next, with reference to FIG. 3, each control board mounted in the pachinko gaming machine PM according to this embodiment will be described. FIG. 3 is a control block diagram showing a control configuration of the pachinko gaming machine PM.

  The main control board 100 includes a main CPU 101 that performs various arithmetic processes related to games, a ROM 102 that stores control programs and various data, a RAM 103 that functions as a work area and buffer memory serving as a temporary storage area, a peripheral board, A main control microcomputer (one-chip microcomputer) 110 configured to include an I / O port circuit 104 for inputting / outputting signals to / from the device is mounted, and the main CPU 101 plays a game according to a control program stored in the ROM 102. It is configured to execute main control related to the progress. In addition, although not shown in the figure, the main control board 100 is reset when a clock circuit that divides the clock signal from the crystal oscillator to generate an internal system clock and the main CPU 101 malfunctions or runs out of control. It operates as a separate system from the WDT circuit for returning to the normal state, the CTC circuit that enables real-time interrupt generation and time measurement, and the program processing (software random number) by the main CPU 101 to generate a predetermined random number (built-in random number). A random number generation circuit and the like are mounted, and these are connected to each other via an internal bus.

  The main CPU 101 executes various processes related to the main control of the game by reading various control programs stored in the ROM 102 and performing arithmetic processing based on detection information from each switch. The RAM 103 is a backup RAM as a nonvolatile storage unit that is backed up by a backup power supply (VBB) generated in the power supply substrate 500. The backup area of the RAM 103 is an area for storing data such as a stack pointer and each register held when the power is turned off when the power is turned off. ), The state of the gaming machine is restored to the state before power-off based on the information in the backup area.

  The main control board 100 is electrically connected to the first start port switch 611, the second start port switch 621, the operation gate switch 631, the first big prize port switch 641, the second big prize port switch 651, and the like. In addition, detection signals from various switches are input to the main CPU 101 via the I / O port circuit 104. The main control board 100 includes a first special symbol display device 71, a second special symbol display device 72, a first special symbol hold lamp 73, a second special figure hold lamp 74, a normal symbol display device 75, and a general figure hold lamp. 76, and is further electrically connected to the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 623 and the special electric accessory solenoids 643, 653, and is controlled by the main CPU 101 via the I / O port circuit 104. Signals are sent to various display means and various solenoids.

  The main control board 100 and the effect control board 200 are connected by eight parallel signal lines and one strobe line, and communicate only in a single direction from the main control board 100 to the effect control board 200. Various effect control commands are transmitted from the main control board 100 to the effect control board 200. Data cannot be transmitted from the effect control board 200 to the main control board 100, and the main control board 100 cannot be requested to transmit data.

The effect control board 200 includes a sub-main CPU 201 that performs various arithmetic processes related to game effects based on an effect control command from the main control board 100, a ROM 202 that stores an effect control program and various data, a work area that is a temporary storage area, Equipped with a rendering control microcomputer (one-chip microcomputer) 210 that includes a RAM 203 that functions as a buffer memory and an I / O port circuit 204 that inputs and outputs signals between peripheral boards and devices. The sub-main CPU 201 is configured to execute main control related to the game effect according to the control program stored in the ROM 202. In addition, although not shown, the production control board 200 is reset when a clock circuit that divides the clock signal from the crystal oscillator to generate an internal system clock, or when the sub main CPU 201 malfunctions or runs away. WDT circuit that returns to normal state, TPU circuit that outputs various signals based on the system clock, interrupt controller that activates various interrupts such as timer interrupts based on signals from the TPU circuit, etc. for inputting and outputting serial data A serial communication circuit and the like are mounted, and these are connected to each other via an internal bus.

  The effect control board 200 is an effect control process based on the effect control command from the main control board 100, an image control command for instructing the image and sound to the image control board 300, and a lamp control signal for controlling the lamp connection board 91. (Lamp data), a drive control signal (drive data) for controlling the motor driver 92, and the like are generated. The effect control board 200 is connected to the image control board 300 so as to be capable of bidirectional communication, and image control commands related to images and sound are transmitted from the effect control board 200 to the image control board 300. A response command (ACK command) indicating that the image control command has been successfully received is transmitted from the image control board 300 to the effect control board 200.

  The effect control board 200 is electrically connected to a lamp connection board 91 on which a plurality of LED drivers are mounted, and a lamp control signal (lamp data) for controlling the lamp connection board 91 is transmitted via a serial communication circuit. Send. In this example, the production control board 200 and the lamp connection board 91 employ clock-synchronized serial communication, and are transmitted by a signal line (clock line) different from the data line for lamp data transmission. In synchronization with the clock signal, the ramp control signal is transmitted bit by bit through the data line. The lamp connection board 91 has a built-in LED driver that functions in response to a lamp control signal for LED driving transmitted from the effect control board 200, and switches on / off the switches in the circuit based on the lamp control signal. Thus, the drive current is supplied to or cut off from the effect lamp LP, and the effect lamp LP is turned on or off.

  Further, the effect control board 200 is electrically connected to a plurality of motor drivers 92, and a drive control signal (drive data) for controlling the motor driver 92 is transmitted to the motor driver 92 via the I / O port circuit 204. Send. The motor driver 92 supplies a drive current to the stepping motor of each movable accessory 24 by switching on / off the switch in the circuit based on the drive control signal for the accessory drive transmitted from the effect control board 200. Alternatively, control is performed so that each movable accessory 24 is operated by being shut off. The data transmission to the motor driver 92 employs a parallel communication method.

The image control board 300 includes a sub-sub CPU 301 that performs various arithmetic processes related to image effects based on an image control command from the effect control board 200, a ROM 302 that stores image control programs and various data, and a work area that is a temporary storage area. And an image control microcomputer (one-chip microcomputer) 310 that includes a RAM 303 that functions as a buffer memory and an I / O port circuit 304 that inputs and outputs signals between peripheral boards and devices. The sub-sub CPU 301 is configured to execute main control related to the image effect according to the control program stored in the ROM 302. In addition, although not shown in the figure, the image control board 300 has a VDP that generates image data according to the effect content based on the control signal acquired from the sub-sub CPU 301 and an effect content based on the control signal acquired from the sub-sub CPU 301. It is equipped with a sound source IC that generates acoustic data. The VDP is a so-called image processor, reads image data stored in the image ROM in response to an instruction from the sub-sub CPU 301, and transmits a video signal (image data) generated by image processing to the effect display device. The VPD is connected to a high-speed VRAM used for developing / processing image data read from the image ROM. The sound source IC is a sub-sub CPU 3
The acoustic data stored in the voice ROM is read in response to an instruction from 01, and the acoustic data generated by synthesizing the data is output to the speaker 11 via an amplifier (digital amplifier).

  The payout control board 400 is composed mainly of a payout CPU 401, ROM 402 and RAM 403. The payout control board 400 is connected to the main control board 100 so as to be capable of bidirectional communication. The payout control board 400 drives the prize ball payout unit 34 on the basis of a payout control command from the main control board 100 and controls to pay out the prize balls. And the ball feed mechanism 13 and the launch mechanism 14 are driven synchronously based on the operation amount of the launch handle 12 to control the launch of the game ball.

  Although not shown in detail, the power supply board 500 includes a normal power supply circuit for generating a normal power supply used by each control board based on a primary power supply supplied from the power supply facility of the game island, and a backup power supply. (VBB) is generated, and a power-off monitoring circuit for monitoring power-off due to a voltage drop is provided. The electronic / electrical parts such as control boards and game machines Supply the necessary power. A power switch for starting a power circuit is connected to the power board 500, and when the power switch is turned on on the assumption that the primary power is supplied from the power supply device of the game island, the power board A predetermined power is supplied from 500 normal power supply circuits to each control board. The power supply board 500 is configured to be able to detect that the power supply from the power supply device on the amusement island has been cut off. , To the effect control board 200 and the payout control board 400. The backup power supply circuit is charged when power is supplied to the pachinko gaming machine PM from the power supply device on the game island. Further, a RAM clear switch (not shown) is connected to the power supply board 500 for temporarily erasing the temporarily stored contents of the RAM 103 of the main control board 100 and setting initial values when the pachinko gaming machine PM is turned on. ing. The RAM clear switch may be connected to the main control board 100 instead of the power supply board 500, for example.

<Basic operation of pachinko machines>
The pachinko gaming machine PM configured as described above can be used in a game in which the outer frame 1 is fixedly installed on the gaming island of the gaming facility, and the front frame 2, the glass frame 5, the ball tray unit 6 and the like are closed and locked. The game is started by storing the game ball in the upper ball tray 8 and rotating the launch handle 12. When the firing handle 12 is rotated, the game balls stored in the upper ball tray 8 are launched one by one by a ball feed mechanism 13 (see FIG. 3) disposed on the back side of the glass frame 5. 14 (see FIG. 3), and is launched into the game area PA by the launch mechanism 14.

  When a game ball rolling down in the game area PA enters one of the first starting port 61, the second starting port 62, the first major winning port 64, and the second major winning port 65, the type of the winning port The award ball corresponding to is paid out to the upper ball tray 8 or the lower ball tray 9 by the prize ball payout unit 33. When a game ball enters the first start port 61 or the second start port 62, a lottery random number value of a special symbol is acquired, and the random number value is temporarily stored as a reserved ball of the special symbol up to a predetermined upper limit number. Then, when a predetermined starting condition is satisfied, a special symbol win / no-go determination, symbol determination, and variation pattern determination are performed on the lottery random number value related to the earliest holding ball, and in a manner according to the determination result, The special symbol is variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 71 or the second special symbol display device 72, and the decorative symbol is variably displayed on the effect display device 70. The variation display of the special symbol and the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed synchronously after the variation time corresponding to the selected variation pattern has elapsed.

When the first special symbol or the second special symbol is confirmed and displayed in a stop mode indicating a big hit, the game shifts to a special game that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game, and the first big prize opening 64 or the second The opening / closing operation of the big prize opening 65 is started. The stop pattern of the decorative symbol indicating the big hit is a mode in which, for example, three types of symbols match. In this embodiment, a round game is 1 as a special game.
16R special game set to 6 times (16 rounds), 8R special game set to 8 rounds (8 rounds), and 2R special game set to 2 rounds (2 rounds) Is provided.

  In this embodiment, regardless of whether the transition is made to the 16R special game, the 8R special game, or the 2R special game, the probability variation of the special symbol after the special game ends until the number of times the special symbol changes reaches a predetermined end number. The function (also called “probability”) operates uniformly. In other words, the pachinko gaming machine PM according to the present embodiment is a gaming machine called a so-called “ST machine”, which is a time-changing probability changing machine with a probability changing entry rate of 100%. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the probability variation function of the special symbol does not continue until the next big hit, but a period until the predetermined end number (also referred to as “ST number”) is reached (also referred to as “ST period”). ). When the probability variation function of the special symbol is activated, the special symbol lottery jackpot probability shifts from the normal low probability state to the high probability state, so that a new jackpot (special game) occurs relatively early. Become.

  On the other hand, after the special game is over, a special symbol variation time shortening function (hereinafter also referred to as “short time”) may be activated in association with or independently of the special symbol probability variation function. When the special symbol variation time reduction function is activated, the average variation time of special symbols and decorative symbols tends to be shorter than usual, and the number of special symbol lotteries per unit time is improved (per jackpot per unit time). Can increase the ease of acquisition).

  Furthermore, when the special symbol variation time reduction function is activated, the electric chew support function is activated. In the electric chew support function, the probability of entering the second starting port 62 is improved by the normal symbol probability variation function, the normal symbol variation time shortening function, and the normal electric accessory 622 opening extension function being activated. This is a state (also referred to as “easy entry state”). Note that when the probability variation function of the normal symbol is activated, the winning probability of the normal symbol becomes higher than the normal state. When the normal symbol variation time shortening function is activated, the normal symbol variation time is reduced. When the opening time extension function of the ordinary electric accessory 622 is activated, the opening time of the ordinary electric accessory 622 becomes longer than the normal state. In this easy-to-enter state, the possibility that the number of fluctuations of the normal symbol per fixed time will increase more than usual and the ease of entering the second start port 62 will also increase, so that the second start port 62 will be entered. The possibility that the number of balls entering will increase. Therefore, by operating the special symbol variation time shortening function and the electric chew support function, the chance to obtain a winning ball by entering the second starting port 62 increases during the period, so that the number of possessed balls is hardly reduced. The game can be continued.

<Main functional configuration of pachinko machines>
Next, various functions of the pachinko gaming machine PM (mainly the main control board 100 / effect control board 200) according to the present embodiment will be described with additional reference to the functional block diagram of FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 4, the main control board 100 includes a ball entry judging means 110, a game lottery random number generating means 120, a holding control means 130, a prior judgment means 135, a special symbol lottery processing means 140, a normal symbol lottery processing means 145, Special game control means 150, symbol display control means 155, electric accessory control means 160, gaming state control means 165, error monitoring control means 170, main information storage means 180, and command transmission / reception means 190 are included. Note that each of the above-described means in the main control board 100 is configured by main CPU 101, ROM 102, RAM 103, hardware such as an electronic circuit provided on the main control board 100, and software such as a control program stored in the ROM 102 or the like. Is a functional representation of things.

Based on detection signals from the first start port switch 611, the second start port switch 621, the operation gate switch 631, the first big winning port switch 641, the second big winning port switch 651, etc. Judgment of game balls entering the winning opening.

  Game lottery random number generation means 120 takes in the internal random number generated by the random number generation circuit of the main control microcomputer 110 in software, in which the adding of special symbol per software random number will be described later, is used to spruce lottery special symbol Generate random numbers per special symbol. The game lottery random number generation means 120 includes a random number counter for generating various software random numbers by the program processing of the main CPU 101. These random number counters serve as random number generation means for generating random numbers in software. As this software random number, a soft random number per special symbol which is added to the above-mentioned built-in random number to form a random number per special symbol, a soft initial value random number per special symbol for determining an initial value and an end value of the soft random number per special symbol, special symbol per symbol random number used to determine the per symbol as a stop symbol of the special symbols (the symbol combination becomes actuating the condition unit), special symbols for determining the initial and end values of the special symbols per symbol random number The initial symbol random number per symbol, the random number per normal symbol, the random number per normal symbol, the random number per normal symbol, the random number per normal symbol, and the random number per normal symbol Includes initial value random numbers per normal symbol to determine, normal symbol variation pattern random number to use for selection of variation pattern of ordinary symbols, etc. That. The update time of these software random number, and updated once every timer interrupt processing occurs, also (in loop) while not running timer interrupt processing is the initial value random number also interrupt period remaining time Update using.

  The hold control means 130 includes a special symbol hold control means 131 and a normal symbol hold control means 132.

  The special symbol hold control means 131 is a lottery random number value related to special symbol games, which is a random number value per special symbol, per special symbol, when the game ball enters the first start port 61 or the second start port 62. The design random number value and the special design variation pattern random value are acquired, and the random number value is managed as the operation reserved ball information of the first special design or the second special design. The special symbol holding control means 131 is a main information storage means that combines the action holding ball information of the first special symbol or the second special symbol up to a predetermined upper limit number (4) with the entering order of the holding balls. The first special symbol reservation storage area of 180 or the second special symbol reservation storage area is temporarily stored.

  In the first special symbol reserved storage area and the second special symbol reserved storage area, the reserved 1 storage area (first reserved storage area), reserved 2 storage area (2 A reserved storage area), a reserved 3 storage area (third reserved storage area), and a reserved 4 storage area (fourth reserved storage area). Each reserved storage area can store a random number per special symbol, a random number per special symbol, and a special symbol variation pattern random number as a set as the operating reserved ball information. The operation hold ball information is stored in the order of the hold 1 storage area, the hold 2 storage area, the hold 3 storage area, and the hold 4 storage area, while the hold 1 storage area, the hold 2 storage area, the hold 3 storage area, and the hold 4 storage. Digested in order of area (first-in first-out principle). Further, when the reserved ball information in the hold 1 storage area is digested, the hold ball information stored in the hold 2 storage area, the hold 3 storage area, and the hold 4 storage area is shifted to the lower numbered storage areas, respectively. The contents of the reserved 4 storage area are cleared to zero.

  Further, the special symbol hold control means 131 has a first special symbol hold ball number counter for counting the number of active reserved balls of the first special symbol, and a second special symbol for counting the number of active hold balls of the second special symbol. It has a symbol holding ball number counter. The special symbol hold control means 131 adds 1 to the corresponding counter each time one special reserved action ball is acquired as an update process of the number of special reserved action balls. Each time the corresponding counter is decremented by 1.

  Further, when the special symbol holding control means 131 updates (adds or subtracts) the number of active reserved balls of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the effect control command ("symbol storage" This is temporarily stored in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180. This one command includes information on both the number of the operation reserved balls of the first special symbol and the number of the operation reserved balls of the second special symbol. In principle, the action-reserved balls of each special symbol are digested in the order of entry, but in this embodiment, the variable special symbol is displayed with priority over the first special symbol. In order to adopt so-called preferential digestion, while there is an operation reservation ball related to the second special symbol game, regardless of the presence of the operation reservation ball related to the first special symbol game, the operation reservation related to the second special symbol game It is configured to preferentially digest spheres. In addition, under this priority digestion, if there is an operation reservation ball of the second special symbol, even if there is an operation reservation ball of the first special symbol, the operation reservation ball of the first special symbol is digested. Will be put on hold.

  The normal symbol hold control means 132 is triggered by the entrance of the game ball into the operation gate 63, and is a lottery random value related to the normal symbol game. A random value is acquired, and the random value is managed as the operation reservation ball information of the normal symbol. The normal symbol holding control unit 132 stores the normal symbol operation holding ball information in the normal symbol holding storage area of the main information storage unit 180 in a form combined with the order of entering the holding balls up to a predetermined upper limit number (four). Memorize temporarily. Further, the normal symbol holding control means 132 has a normal symbol holding ball number counter for counting the number of normal reserved operation balls. The normal symbol hold control means 132 adds 1 to the corresponding counter each time one normal reserved actuated ball is acquired as the update processing of the number of held normal symbols of the active normal symbol. Each time the corresponding counter is decremented by 1.

  The pre-determination unit 135 executes a pre-determination for a pre-reading notice when the operation holding ball having a special symbol is acquired at a predetermined pre-determination timing. As an example of the pre-determination timing, (1) when waiting for hitting and when the action holding ball of the first special symbol is acquired while the electric chew support function is not operating, (2) waiting for hitting and When the support holding ball of the second special symbol is acquired while the support function is operating, (3) When the operation holding ball of the second special symbol is acquired during the big hit or small hit, When you are satisfied. Specifically, the pre-determining means 135 reads out the random number value corresponding to the currently acquired operation holding ball from the first special symbol holding storage area or the second special symbol holding storage area of the main information storage means 180, and determines whether or not Pre-determination (pre-determined / unpredictable), symbol lottery pre-determination (design pre-determination), and variation pattern lottery pre-determination (variation pattern pre-determination) are sequentially executed. The pre-determination table used in each pre-determination is omitted in the drawing, but corresponds to the total number of random numbers in the same way as the lottery tables (special symbol success / failure lottery table, special symbol per symbol table, variation pattern table) described later. The area is divided into a plurality of areas, and a lottery ID is assigned to each area (number of determination values). As this lottery ID, a number indicating the result of prior determination (also referred to as “preliminary determination number”) is set. Then, the preliminary determination unit 135 sequentially generates an effect control command (referred to as a “preliminary determination command”) including information on the preliminary determination result (preliminary determination number) and stores this in the command storage area of the main information storage unit 180. Store.

The special symbol lottery processing unit 140 includes a special symbol success / failure determination unit 141, a special symbol stop symbol determination unit 412, and a special symbol variation pattern determination unit 143. The special symbol lottery processing means 140, when the special symbol variation start condition is satisfied, the special symbol perturbation stored in the first storage area (hold 1 storage area) of the special symbol reservation storage area in the main information storage means 180 The numerical value, the random symbol value per special symbol, and the special symbol variation pattern random number value are read out and stored in the special symbol success / failure determination region, the special symbol determination region, and the special symbol variation pattern determination region of the main information storage unit 180, respectively. Here, “the special symbol variation start condition is satisfied” is, for example, (1) that there is no big hit or small hit, and (2) both the first special symbol and the second special symbol are waiting for fluctuation. (3) When all of the conditions of the operation holding ball exist in at least one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol are satisfied, and as a result, the special symbol can start to fluctuate. It is determined that the situation is not correct.

  The special symbol success / failure determination means 141 reads a random value per special symbol from the special symbol success / failure determination area of the main information storage means 180 and executes the determination of the success / failure. Decide what to do. The result of this determination is temporarily stored in a special symbol determination flag of the main information storage means 180 (for example, big hit data “55H”, small hit data “33H”, loss data “00H”), and is used in the subsequent processing. After that, it is cleared when the special symbol changes. The special symbol success / failure determination means 141 holds a special symbol success / failure lottery table which is referred to in the determination of success / failure.

  Here, FIG. 5 is a diagram schematically showing the special symbol winning / losing lottery table, where (A) is referred to in the normal state (low probability state), and (B) is referred to in the probability variation state (high probability state). The In this special symbol success / failure lottery table, random numbers per special symbol and judgment results of big hits, small hits, and losing are associated with each other, and the winning probabilities for big hits and small hits according to the associated random number range Is determined. As can be seen from FIG. 5, in the special symbol game winning / losing lottery, in the normal state (low probability state), only when the random value falls within the range of “0 to 163”, it is a big hit. On the other hand, in the probability variation state (high probability state), the range of the jackpot is expanded, and not only when the random number value falls within the range of “0 to 163” but also when it falls within the range of “164 to 1639”. Become. In other words, when the probability changing function of the special symbol is activated, the jackpot lottery probability changes from the low probability state (1 / 399.6) to the high probability state (1 / 39.96). As described above, the range corresponding to the jackpot changes according to the gaming state, but the winning probability of winning the jackpot is equal between the winning lottery of the first special symbol and the winning lottery of the second special symbol. Here, even if the random number value per special symbol does not correspond to the big hit range, if it falls within the predetermined range, it is a small hit. In this example, only the winning lottery of the first special symbol is configured to have a small win, but for example, a small hit is also provided in the winning lottery of the second special symbol, and the winning lottery of the second special symbol is determined. However, the winning lottery of the first special symbol may be configured to be a small hit with a high probability.

  The special symbol stop symbol determination means 142 determines the stop symbol of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, and the symbol group to which the stop symbol belongs, based on the result of the first or second special symbol determination. To do. The special symbol stop symbol determination means 142 includes a first special symbol per symbol table that is referred to when determining a stop symbol and a symbol group of the first special symbol and the second special symbol when the result of the winning / failing lottery is a big hit, It has a symbol table per second special symbol.

  FIG. 6A is a diagram schematically showing an example of a symbol table per first special symbol. In the symbol table per first special symbol, the random number of symbols per special symbol, stop symbol, symbol group, jackpot contents (number of times the probability variation function and variation time reduction function of special symbols are activated, first grand prize) The operation patterns of the mouths 64) are associated with each other. The numerical value “100” in parentheses means the number of operations of the special symbol probability variation function and variation time reduction function, that is, the ST number. In this table, the stop symbols “1” to “8” of the first special symbol are classified into two types of symbol groups A and B according to the type of jackpot.

  Specifically, symbols “1”, “2”, “3”, “4” have symbol group A (16R specified short-time symbol), symbols “5”, “6” have symbol group B. (8R specified short-lived symbol) is associated with symbols “7” and “8”, respectively, with symbol group C (2R specific short-lived symbol). In this embodiment, the “specific symbol” is a symbol that activates the probability variation function after the end of the special game, and the “normal symbol” refers to that the probability variation function is activated after the end of the special game. There is no symbol (the same applies to the second special symbol described later).

  Symbol groups A and B are specific symbols indicating so-called “probable hits” in which the gaming state after the end of the special game is shifted to a probable change state (high probability state), and the special symbol variation count is a big hit within the ST count. A special symbol probability variation function, variation time reduction function, and electric chew support function are provided only until the next big hit occurs within the number of STs. Will be. For the symbol group A, the specified number of rounds for the special game is 16 rounds, and the maximum opening time of the first big prize opening 64 in one round game is about 30 seconds. For the symbol group B, the specified number of rounds in the special game is 8 rounds, and the maximum opening time of the first big prize opening 64 in one round game is about 30 seconds.

  In the symbol group C, the number of times and the opening time of the first big prize opening 64 are different from the above “probability hit”, but the gaming state after the end of the special game is changed to the probability variation state (high probability state) of the special symbol. It is a specific symbol indicating a so-called “sudden probability change hit” to be transferred, and the next big hit occurs within the ST count until the special symbol fluctuation count ends without generating a big hit within the ST count. In the meantime, a special symbol probability variation function, a variation time shortening function, and an electric chew support function are provided. The specified number of rounds for the special game is two rounds, and the maximum opening time of the first big prize opening 64 in one round game is about 0.05 seconds.

  On the other hand, when the result of the lottery determination is a small hit, the symbol determination by the random number per special symbol is omitted, and the symbol “9” is uniquely assigned as the stop symbol. The symbol “9” is associated with the symbol group F (special electric operation symbol 1). In the case of small hits, the game state (probability variation function, variation time shortening function, electric chew support function) and variation pattern selection state will not be triggered, and the game state is maintained before and after the winning lottery. Is done. In addition, when the result of the lottery determination is out of place, the symbol “0” is uniquely assigned as the stop symbol.

  Subsequently, FIG. 6B is a diagram schematically showing an example of a symbol table per second special symbol. In the symbol table per second special symbol, the random symbol value per special symbol is the stop symbol, symbol group, jackpot content (number of times the probability variation function and variation time reduction function of the special symbol are activated, the second grand prize) The operation patterns of the mouths 65) are associated with each other. In this table, the stop symbols “11” to “18” of the second special symbol are classified into two types of symbol groups D and E according to the type of jackpot. Specifically, symbols “11”, “12”, “13”, and “14” include symbols “15”, “16”, “17”, “ 18 ”is associated with the symbol group E (8R specific time short symbol).

  Symbol groups D and E are specific symbols indicating so-called “probable hits” in which the gaming state after the end of a special game is shifted to a probable change state (high probability state). A special symbol probability variation function, variation time reduction function, and electric chew support function are provided only until the next big hit occurs within the number of STs. Will be. For the symbol group D, the specified number of rounds in the special game is 16 rounds, and the maximum opening time of the second big prize opening 65 in one round game is about 30 seconds. For the symbol group E, the specified number of rounds in the special game is 8 rounds, and the maximum opening time of the second big prize opening 65 in one round game is about 30 seconds.

  On the other hand, if the result of the lottery is a small hit, the symbol determination by the random number per special symbol is omitted, and the symbol “19” is uniquely assigned as the stop symbol. The symbol “19” is associated with the symbol group G (special electric operation symbol 2). In the case of small hits, the game state (probability variation function, variation time shortening function, electric chew support function) and variation pattern selection state will not be triggered, and the game state is maintained before and after the winning lottery. Is done. In addition, when the result of the lottery determination is out of place, the symbol “0” is uniquely assigned as the stop symbol.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, there are three types of jackpot types: 16R jackpot (16R specific time short symbol), 8R big jackpot (8R specific short symbol) and 2R big jack (2R specific short symbol). ing. The expected value for winning a prize ball in the special game (expected value for winning a prize ball) is 16R big hit> 8R big hit> 2R big hit. Therefore, hereinafter, the 16R jackpot is also referred to as a “high profit jackpot” having the highest prize ball winning expectation value, and the 2R jackpot is also referred to as a “low profit jackpot” having the lowest prize ball winning expectation value. Incidentally, the same also in the execution number of rounds, if the long open unit game (30 seconds) and short open unit game (0.05 seconds) such that mixed, jackpot that there are many long opening unit game is "high "Large profit". Specifically, such as unified 16 rounds the number running round to a special game, but has a number of common run round, it may be included special game which aspects of the unit game is changed differently at the predetermined rounds, in that case, the type of special game that opening time of the special winning opening 64 and 65 consists only of relatively short short open unit game, the opening time of the special winning opening 64, 65 relative the execution round after a predetermined number of times Special long-open unit games may be included, and the latter constitutes a “high profit jackpot”. Further, even if the same number of execution rounds is a big hit, the substantial profit, that is, the expected value for winning a winning ball may be different depending on the difference in the big winning opening opening pattern.

  Here, as can be seen from the above description, when a big win is won in the first special symbol winning lottery, 16R big hit is selected with a probability of 50%, whereas the second special symbol is positive or negative. In the case of a big hit in the lottery, a 16R big hit is selected with a probability of 75%, so that the player who wins the second starting port 62 wins more balls than the first starting port 61. It is advantageous to the player in that it can be acquired. In this example, a special game that opens and closes the first big winning opening 64 is executed when the first special symbol wins or fails, and the second special symbol wins or loses A special game for opening and closing the two large winning holes 65 is to be executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the second special winning hole 65 when the first special symbol is determined to be a big hit. A special game that opens and closes the first special winning opening 64 may be executed when the second special symbol is determined to be a big hit. Also, in this case, a special game for opening and closing the second big prize opening 65 is executed in the case of a big win in the second special symbol success / failure determination than in the case of a big hit in the first special symbol success / failure determination. You may raise the ratio done. At this time, it may be set such that the player is more advantageous to enter the second grand prize opening 65 than to enter the first grand prize opening 64, for example, per round. May be set so that the number of winning balls is high, the expected value of winning balls is high, the number of winning balls per ball is large, and the ease of entering is high. Further, even when there are a plurality of jackpots with special games of the same number of rounds, the substantial profit (expected value for winning a winning ball) may be different depending on the opening pattern of the big winning opening. The count number (regular count number) is the maximum number of game balls that can be entered into the big winning openings 64 and 65 in a unit game.

The special symbol variation pattern determining means 143 determines the variation pattern of the special symbol based on the special symbol variation pattern random number value. Here, as shown in FIGS. 7 and 8, the special symbol variation pattern determination means 143 holds a plurality of types of variation pattern tables that are referred to when selecting a variation pattern of the special symbol. The special symbol variation pattern determination unit 143 selects one variation pattern table from among a plurality of types of variation pattern tables based on the current variation pattern selection state and the result of the lottery determination. The relationship between the variation pattern selection state and the variation pattern table will be described later. Each variation pattern table defines a plurality of types of variation patterns. In each figure, “selection rate” is shown for convenience of explanation, but in actuality, a decision value (range of random values) for determining the fluctuation pattern is set according to the special symbol fluctuation pattern random value. The variation pattern is determined based on which determination value the variation pattern random value belongs to. As for the various variation patterns, the variation time is determined for each variation pattern as an end condition of the symbol variation, and it is assumed that the symbol variation by the decorative symbol composed of multiple symbols is also executed at the variation time Is defined as In this example, for convenience of explanation, only a plurality of types of variation patterns will be described as an example, but actually there are more than 100 types of variation patterns.

  FIG. 7A is a diagram schematically illustrating an example of a variation pattern table for big hits / small hits. The upper (A1) is a normal variation pattern table, the middle (A2) is a probability variation pattern table, and the lower (A3) is a special variation pattern table. In this example, the selected variation pattern is set to be different according to the variation pattern selection state or according to the jackpot type even in the same variation pattern selection state.

  In the normal fluctuation pattern table (A1), when the big hit type is 16R big hit, either the fluctuation pattern PX2 (normal reach A) or the fluctuation pattern PX3 (super reach A) is selected, and if the big hit type is 8R big hit, the fluctuation Either the pattern PY2 (normal reach A) or the fluctuation pattern PY3 (super reach A) is selected. On the other hand, in the case of 2R big hit or small hit, either the fluctuation pattern PZ2 (normal reach A) or the fluctuation pattern PZ4 (super reach D) is selected. In this normal variation pattern table for big hits / small hits, non-reach variation patterns are not selected, and only the reach variation pattern is selected when a big or small hit is made in a normal state. obtain.

  In the probability variation pattern table (A2), when the big hit type is 16R big hit or 8R big hit, only the fluctuation pattern PX7 (super reach B) is selected. On the other hand, in the case of 2R big hit or small hit, either the fluctuation pattern PZ6 (normal reach B) or the fluctuation pattern PZ8 (super reach D) is selected. In this probability variation pattern table for big hits / small hits, non-reach variation patterns are not selected, and if a big hit or small hit is made in a special symbol probability variation state, only the reach variation pattern Can be selected.

  In the special variation pattern table (A3), when the big hit type is 16R big hit, only the fluctuation pattern PX9 (non-reach C) is selected, and when the big hit type is 8R big hit, only the fluctuation pattern PY10 (super reach C) is selected. Is done. On the other hand, in the case of 2R big hit or small hit, only the fluctuation pattern PZ10 (super reach C) is selected. Here, the variation pattern PX9 in the non-reach C mode is configured as a very short variation time (2 seconds), while the variation pattern PY10, PZ10 in the super reach C mode is configured as a relatively long variation time (120 seconds). Is done.

  FIG. 7B is a diagram schematically illustrating an example of a variation pattern table for loss. The upper (B1) is a normal variation pattern table, the middle (B2) is a probability variation pattern table, and the lower (B3) is a special variation pattern table. In this example, the selected variation pattern is set differently depending on the variation pattern selection state.

  In the normal variation pattern table (B1), any one of the variation pattern PH1 (non-reach A), the variation pattern PH2 (normal reach A), the variation pattern PH3 (super reach A), and the variation pattern PH4 (super reach D) is selected. . In the probability variation pattern table (B2), any one of the variation pattern PH5 (non-reach B), the variation pattern PH6 (normal reach B), the variation pattern PH7 (super reach B), and the variation pattern PH8 (super reach D) is selected. . In the special variation pattern table (B3), only the variation pattern PH9 (non-reach C) is selected. Here, the variation pattern PH9 in the non-reach C mode is configured as a very short variation time (2 seconds).

In the above description, the variation pattern table for deviation is expressed as a single table in any case. However, when the result of the lottery decision is lost, the number of reserved balls for special symbols ( Different variation pattern tables may be selected depending on 0-4). That is, by using a variation pattern table according to the number of reserved balls for special symbols, the proportion of relatively short variation times is increased as the number of activated balls is increased, and the number of reserved operations is small. As a result, a relatively long variation time can be selected.

  The special symbol variation pattern determining means 143 selects the special symbol variation pattern, and then instructs the production control board 200 to start the variation of the decorative symbol. (Referred to as “variation pattern designation command”), special design (design group) and production control commands (referred to as “design designation commands”) including information on the gaming state (hereinafter referred to as “designation command”). This is referred to as a “variation start command”), and this is stored in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180.

  The normal symbol lottery processing unit 145 includes a normal symbol success / failure determination unit 146, a normal symbol stop symbol determination unit 147, and a normal symbol variation pattern determination unit 148. When the normal symbol variation start condition is satisfied, the normal symbol lottery processing unit 145 reads the normal symbol random number value and the normal symbol variation pattern random value stored in the first storage area in the normal symbol holding storage area, They are stored in the normal symbol success / failure determination area and the normal symbol variation pattern determination area of the main information storage unit 180, respectively.

  The normal symbol success / failure determination unit 146 reads out a random value per normal symbol from the normal symbol success / failure determination area of the main information storage unit 180 and executes the determination of success / failure, and determines whether the determination result corresponds to hit or miss. decide. The result of this lottery lottery is temporarily stored in the normal symbol determination flag of the main information storage unit 180, and after being used in the subsequent processing, it is cleared when the variation of the normal symbol is stopped. The normal symbol success / failure determination means 146 holds a normal symbol success / failure lottery table which is referred to at the time of the success / failure lottery. In the normal state (low probability state), for example, the normal symbol hit / decision unit 146 Referring to the symbol winning / losing lottery table, in the probability variation state (high probability state) of the normal symbol, for example, referring to the normal symbol winning / losing lottery table with a probability of “282/283”, the normal symbol winning / losing lottery is executed. To do.

  The normal symbol stop symbol determination means 147 refers to the symbol lottery table and assigns a predetermined winning symbol when the result of the winning / failing lottery is a win, and allocates a predetermined off symbol when the result is wrong. It has become.

  The normal symbol variation pattern determination unit 148 reads the normal symbol variation pattern random number value from the normal symbol variation pattern determination area of the main information storage unit 180, and refers to the normal symbol variation pattern table to display the variation display of the normal symbol in the normal state. In, a relatively long variation time is selected (for example, seven types of “4 seconds, 5 seconds, 6 seconds, 7 seconds, 8 seconds, 9 seconds, and 10 seconds” are uniformly selected). On the other hand, a relatively short variation time (for example, “0.5 seconds”) is selected in the short time state (easy entry state) of the normal symbol.

The special game control means 150 relates to the start demonstration effect and the end demonstration effect that are displayed on the effect display device 70 or the like during the special game according to the determined type of jackpot when the result of the lottery is a big hit. Determine the demonstration performance time. Also, the special game control means 150 provides an effect control command (referred to as a “hit start demo command”) for instructing execution of the start demo effect to the effect control board 200 side, and an effect for instructing execution of the end demo effect. A control command (referred to as “big hit end demo command”) is generated and stored in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180. Note that the jackpot start demo command also serves as an opportunity to determine the contents of a series of jackpot effects (start demo effect, round effect, end demo effect) developed during the special game on the effect control board 200 side. The special game control means 150 generates an effect control command (referred to as a “round effect designation command”) for instructing the start of a round effect corresponding to each round game in each round game during the special game. This is stored in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180. This round effect designation command includes information on the current number of rounds, information on detection of the big prize opening switches 641, 651, and the like.

  In addition, when the result of the lottery is a small hit, the special game control means 150 determines the demonstration performance time related to the small hit start demonstration effect and the small hit end demonstration effect displayed on the effect display device 70 or the like during the small hit game. decide. The special game control means 150 also provides an effect control command (“small hit start demo command”) for instructing execution of a small hit start demo effect and an effect control command (“small hit for start of a small hit end demo effect). An end demo command ") is generated and stored in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180.

  The symbol display control means 155 includes a special symbol display control means 156 and a normal symbol display control means 157. The special symbol display control means 156 displays the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 71 according to the variation pattern (variation time) of the first special symbol, and confirms and displays the first special symbol after the variation display. Let Further, the special symbol display control means 156 displays the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 72 in accordance with the variation pattern (variation time) of the second special symbol, and displays the second special symbol after the variation display. Confirm display. The special symbol display control means 156 has a special symbol game timer for managing the time (variation time, fixed display time) related to the display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. The operating states of the first special symbol display device 71 and the second special symbol display device 72 are monitored based on the special symbol game status in the main information storage means 180. The special symbol display control means 156 requests the effect control board 200 to confirm the decoration symbol when the special symbol fluctuation is stopped (that is, when the value of the special symbol game timer becomes “0”). An effect control command (referred to as “variation stop command”) is generated. The normal symbol display control means 157 variably displays the normal symbol on the normal symbol display device 75 in accordance with the variation pattern (variation time) of the ordinary symbol, and displays the regular symbol after the variation display. The normal symbol display control means 157 has a normal symbol game timer for managing the time (variation time, fixed display time) related to the display of the normal symbol. The operating state of the normal symbol display device 75 is monitored based on the normal symbol game status of the main information storage means 180.

  If the result of the special symbol winning / losing lottery is a big win, the electric accessory control means 160 outputs a control signal to the special electric accessory solenoids 643 and 653 as a special game process after the special symbol is confirmed and displayed. The electric accessories 642, 652 are opened according to a predetermined operation pattern. In the special game, one opening / closing operation of the special electric accessory 642, 652 is set as one round game, and the round game is continuously executed for the specified number of rounds (16R, 8R, 2R in this example). It is. The electric accessory control means 160 holds a special winning opening opening counter for storing the number of operations of the special electric accessories 642 and 652 (that is, the number of rounds being executed). Here, when the type of jackpot is a so-called 16R jackpot (symbol group A, D) or 8R jackpot (symbol group B, E), the first grand prize port 64 or the second grand prize port in one round game. 65 is opened for up to about 30 seconds. On the other hand, when the big hit type is so-called 2R big hit (symbol group C), the first big winning opening 64 is opened for about 0.05 seconds at the maximum in one round game. Here, the closing condition of the special winning openings 64 and 65 in the special game (unit game ending condition) is a lapse of a winning period for a predetermined number of game balls or a predetermined number of seconds.

In addition, when the result of the special symbol winning lottery is a small hit, the electric accessory control means 160 sends a control signal to the special electric accessory solenoids 643 and 653 as a small hit game process after the special symbol is determined and displayed. The special electric combination 642, 652 is opened only for a short period. The small hit game is composed of one round game, and is distinguished from a special game composed of a plurality of round games. Here, when the 2R special game and the small hit game described above are compared, although they are internally different, the point of the same opening / closing time (0.05 seconds) and the number of times of opening / closing are the same (the former is Since one opening and closing per round is twice in two rounds, and the latter is common in two opening and closing per round twice, a game with an approximate opening time / opening pattern is developed.

  In addition, when the winning combination of normal symbols is won, the electric accessory control means 160 outputs a control signal to the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 623 to open the ordinary electric accessory 622 for a predetermined opening time. Here, the electric accessory control means 160 opens the ordinary electric accessory 622 for an extremely short time (for example, 0.2 seconds) in the normal state, whereas it is normally electric in the easy to enter state (electric chew support state). The accessory 622 is opened for a relatively long time (for example, 4 seconds) compared to the normal state.

  The gaming state control means 165 determines the gaming state after the end of the special game based on the type of symbol group related to the jackpot when the result of the special symbol winning lottery is a jackpot, and after the special game is over. Switch the gaming state of. In the following, among the functions related to the special symbol and the normal symbol described above, 1) the gaming state in which the probability variation function of the special symbol, the variation time shortening function of the special symbol, and the electric chew support function operate is referred to as “probability variation state”. 2) A gaming state in which only the special symbol variation time reduction function and the electric chew support function are operated is referred to as a “short-time state”. 3) A gaming state in which only the special symbol probability variation function is activated is referred to as a “latency probability variation state”. 4) A state in which all functions are not activated is referred to as a “normal state”. It should be noted that the “probability change state”, “time-short state”, and “latency probability change state” are all advantageous game states for the player as compared to the “normal state”. In the following, each game state is divided into a combination of a special symbol game operation state (high probability / low probability) and a normal symbol game operation state (open extension / no open extension). "High probability / open extension", (2) Short time state is "low probability / open extension", (3) Latency probability change state is "high probability / non-open extension", (4) Normal state is "low probability / non-open" It may also be called “extension”. Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, since it is a so-called ST machine that cuts the number of times, the gaming state after the end of the special game has a predetermined number of times that the number of changes in the special symbol is counted from the end of the special game, In other words, the probability variation state continues until the number of STs is reached (however, if the next big hit occurs within the number of STs, the probability variation state ends with the variation). When the small hit is made during the ST period, the ST number is not reset (revived) to 0, and the ST number is continuously counted before and after the small hit occurs. In the present embodiment, the ST number is set to 100 times, but it is needless to say that the ST number may be set to another number. In addition, when changing to the probability variation state, the probability variation function of the special symbol, the special symbol variation time shortening function, and the electric chew support function operate simultaneously, and each function will continue as long as the probability variation state continues. Become. If the result of the special symbol winning lottery is a big hit, regardless of whether the game state before the big hit is the normal state or the probable change state, the special state is the normal state and after the special game the ST The number of times is limited and the probability is changed uniformly. On the other hand, if the result of the special symbol winning / losing lottery is a small hit, if the game state before the small hit is the normal state, the game state during the small hit game and after the small hit game is also in the normal state. In addition, when the gaming state before the small hit is the special symbol probability changing state, the gaming state during the small hit game and after the small hit game is also the special symbol probability changing state.

Further, the game state control means 165 determines the variation pattern selection state after the special game based on the type of the big hit (types of the symbol groups A to E) when the result of the lottery is a big hit, and the special lottery Switch the variation pattern selection state after the game. The variation pattern selection state is one of the conditions referred to when selecting the above variation pattern table. The switching timing of the variation pattern selection state is when the special game ends or when the end number of times of the variation pattern selection state has expired. In the present embodiment, there are three types of variation pattern selection states, such as “low probability normal variation state α”, “high probability reduced variation state β”, and “high probability special variation state γ”. Here, the low probability normal variation state α refers to a normal pattern variation pattern (A1, B1 in FIG. 7) selected when the gaming state is a normal state (low probability state). This is the state to be determined. The high probability shortening variation state β refers to a probability variation pattern table (A2, B2 in FIG. 7) selected when the gaming state is a probability variation state of a special symbol (excluding a limited period described later). This is a state in which the variation pattern is determined. The high probability special variation state γ is a state in which the game state is a probable variation state of a special symbol and the number of symbol variations corresponding to a certain period immediately after the end of the special game (the maximum number (4) of action-pending balls of the second special symbol) In a state in which the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined with reference to the special variation pattern table (A3 and B3 in FIG. 7) that is allowed to be selected only (period of the (four times) variation display: referred to as “limited period”). is there. In the present embodiment, regardless of which of the symbol groups A to D is selected, the variation pattern selection state is (1) immediately after the end of the special game, and the high probability special variation state γ only for a limited period of four symbol variation times. Stay, (2) after the limited period, and when the number of executions is within the ST number (100 times), stay in the high probability shortening variation state β, and (3) after the end of the ST number, The number of executions stays in the low probability normal fluctuation state γ after the 101st time. Of course, the period until the first hit occurs stays in the low probability normal fluctuation state α. The gaming state control means 165 generates an effect control command (referred to as “gaming state designation command”) including the current gaming state information and variation pattern selection state information, and stores this command in the main information storage means 180. Store in the area.

  The error monitoring control unit 170 monitors input information of the I / O port circuit 104 and inspects a magnetic detection signal by a magnetic sensor, a disconnection short circuit power supply abnormality signal, a radio wave detection signal by a radio wave sensor, a door / frame opening signal, and the like. It is determined whether the gaming machine is in an error state. If it is in an error state, an effect control command including the error information (“error effect designation command”) is requested to indicate an error state effect to the effect control board 200. Although not shown in FIG. 3, the door opening switch is a detecting unit for detecting whether or not the glass frame 5 is opened, and the frame opening switch is a detecting unit for detecting whether or not the front frame 2 is opened. The back set release switch is a detecting means for determining whether or not the back set board 30 is open. Further, the magnetic sensor and the radio wave sensor are detection means for detecting a so-called goto action.

  The main information storage means 180 stores random number value information acquired in special symbol games and normal symbol games, operation holding ball information of special symbols and normal symbols, game states related to special symbol games and normal symbol games (probability change state, time reduction state, Information on easy entry), information on variation pattern selection status, result information on winning / failing lottery (win, small hit, off), information on stop and variation patterns on special symbols and regular symbols, information on special games (round) Number, release time, release mode (number of releases per round game), etc.), status information indicating the operating state of the special symbol display devices 71 and 72, status information indicating the operating state of the special electric accessory 642, production control command It is configured to temporarily store data information and the like, and has a predetermined storage area for storing each information.

  The command transmission / reception means 190 is configured to transmit various effect control command data stored in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180 to the effect control board 200 by a parallel transmission method when a command transmission request is made. Has been. Each effect control command has a 2-byte configuration including 1-byte MODE data and 1-byte EVENT data. Bit 7 of the MOD data is “1” to distinguish MODE and EVENT. Bit 7 of the EVENT data is “0”. When these pieces of information are transmitted as valid, a strobe signal is output to each of MODE and EVENT. In principle, the effect control command generated in each process is transmitted for each interrupt period in accordance with the order set in the command storage area of the main information storage unit 180.

As shown in FIG. 4, the effect control board 200 includes an effect lottery random number generation means 210, an effect control means 220, a lamp effect control means 230, an accessory effect control means 240, an error effect control means 250, and a sub main information storage means 260. , Command transmission / reception means 270. Note that each of the above-described units in the effect control board 200 is configured by sub-main CPU 201, ROM 202, RAM 203, hardware such as an electronic circuit arranged on the effect control board 200, and software such as a control program stored in the ROM 202. Is a functional representation of things.

  The effect lottery random number generation unit 210 includes a random number counter for generating various software random numbers (effect lottery random numbers) by the program processing of the sub main CPU 201. These random number counters serve as random number generation means for generating random numbers in software. This software random number includes a pre-reading notice lottery random number used for the lottery of whether or not the pre-reading notice effect can be executed, a pre-reading notice pattern random number used for selecting the pre-reading notice pattern, a decoration design random number used for selecting a stop pattern of the decoration design, and a decoration. Fluctuation effect pattern random number used for selection of design variation effect pattern, notice effect pattern random number used for selection of notice effect pattern, jackpot effect pattern random number used for selection of jackpot effect pattern, whether or not to execute execution of rendezvous villa effect The lotus lottery lottery random number used for lottery, the lotus lotus production pattern random number used for selection of the lotus hall production pattern of the on-hold Renzo production, etc. are included. The update time of these random numbers is updated using the remaining time when the command analysis is not performed in the production control side main process described later.

  The effect supervising means 220 includes an effect mode control means 221, a hold information display control means 222, a prefetch notice control means 223, a decoration symbol determination means 224, a variable effect determination means 225, a notice effect determination means 226, and a big hit effect determination means 227. Including.

  The holding information display control means 222 includes a first reserved ball number counter for counting the number of activated reserved balls of the first special symbol, and a second reserved ball number counter for counting the number of activated reserved balls of the second special symbol. Have. When the holding information display control means 222 receives the symbol storage number command from the main control board 100, the first holding ball number counter and the second holding ball are based on the information of the operation holding ball number included in the symbol storage number command. Update the value of the number counter. In addition, the hold information display control unit 222 applies the action hold ball of the first special symbol to the hold display portions 701 and 702 of the effect display device 70 based on the values of the first hold ball number counter and the second hold ball number counter. Control is performed to display the number of reserved images corresponding to the number and the number of reserved images corresponding to the number of active reserved balls of the second special symbol. In the normal display mode, when a special design actuating ball is generated, a white-colored hold image is displayed. On the other hand, when a hold change prefetch notice effect described below is executed, it is subject to a prefetch notice. The reserved image can take any one of “blue”, “green”, “red”, and “rainbow” as a special display mode (display color) from “white” of the normal display mode (display color) . The above four special display modes are related to the reliability that the lottery result is a big hit (referred to as “big hit reliability”), and are “blue”, “green”, “red”, “rainbow” The jackpot reliability is set to be higher step by step. In this example, when the reserved image changes to “rainbow”, the big hit is deterministic in the pre-reading operation holding ball. Note that, in the hold change prefetch notice effect, the change in the display mode of the hold image may be expressed by a shape, a pattern, or the like instead of the display color.

The prefetch notice control means 223 determines whether or not the prefetch notice can be executed by a lottery when the predetermination command is received from the main control board 100. The pre-reading notice control means 223 distinguishes the information of the first special symbol pre-determined result and the information of the second special symbol pre-determined result, and enters each of up to a predetermined upper limit number (4) of the operation holding balls. Temporarily stored in the pre-read information storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260 in a form combined with the order. This pre-read information storage area has the same configuration as the reserved storage area of the main control board 100, and in the order of entering the starting ports 61 and 62, the reserved 1 storage area (first reserved storage area), A hold 2 storage area (second hold storage area), a hold 3 storage area (third hold storage area), and a hold 4 storage area (fourth hold storage area) are provided. Each reserved storage area can store information on the result of prior determination, information on the design prior determination result, and information on the variation pattern prior determination result as a set.

  When the prefetching notice control means 223 determines whether or not the prefetching notice can be executed, the prefetching notice control means 223 makes a prefetching judgment (“prefetching judgment”) for the operation holding ball that is the target of the prefetching notice based on the prejudgment result by the main control board 100. (Also called). In the present embodiment, the prefetching notice includes a normal prefetching notice and a special prefetching notice (a later-described on-hold consecutive villa effect). Usually, the pre-reading notice is generated as one aspect of a so-called continuous notice effect that predicts the possibility of a big win or reach effect over a plurality of continuous display of decorative symbols. When it is determined that the pre-reading notice effect (continuous notice effect) can be executed, information on the pre-determining command from the main control board 100 (pre-judgment result) and information on the symbol memory number command (the number of currently operating suspended balls) are obtained. Analyzing, a pre-reading notice effect pattern over a plurality of continuous variable displays is determined by lottery for an operation hold ball (referred to as “trigger hold”) that triggers the generation of this pre-reading notice effect. Note that the normal look-ahead notice includes various variations such as a pending change look-ahead notice effect, a chance eye look-ahead notice effect, and a background change look-ahead notice effect. On the other hand, the special look-ahead notice corresponds to a reserved-in-village production that suggests or informs that there is a possibility that there is an operation holding ball that becomes a big hit when the big hit is won. Hereinafter, an outline of the “reserved in-resort villa production” will be described.

  First, the “holding renrenso” means that, when a success / failure determination result is obtained when a certain operation holding ball has been digested, the winning / failing determination related to the operation holding ball is permitted until the end of the special game. This means that there is an operation holding ball (also referred to as “specific holding”) that is expected to be a big hit in one or more subsequent operation holding balls that exist at a predetermined timing within a specific period. In the following, among the subsequent operation holding balls, the operation holding balls that are expected to be out of play are also referred to as “out of hold”, and the operation holding balls that are expected to be in a small hit are also referred to as “small hit holding”. .

  In the present embodiment, so-called preferential digestion is adopted, in which the operation reservation ball of the second special symbol is preferentially digested over the operation reservation ball of the first special symbol, and the subsequent operation that is the target of the in-hold extension resort As the holding ball (specific holding), the operation holding ball of the second special symbol is targeted. Thus, in this embodiment, since the preferential digestion which preferentially digests the operation reservation ball of the 2nd special symbol is adopted in this embodiment, the reservation in the retreat in the reservation when the previous operation reservation ball is won by the big hit It occurs on the assumption that the gaming state is a specific gaming state. The “specific game state” is a state in which the probability of transition to a special game is higher than the normal state, and is at least one of a special symbol probability variation function, a special symbol variation time reduction function, and an electric chew support function. This is a state in which the function is activated. In this example, it is a condition that at least the electric chew support function (the easy entry state) is activated as the specific gaming state. Here, in this embodiment, during the ST period after the end of the special game, the probability variation function, the variation time shortening function, and the electric chew support function operate (the operation starts simultaneously and the operation ends simultaneously). Since it is configured, it can be said that it is always in a specific gaming state during the ST period. In this embodiment, when the gaming state is the normal state, if the result of the determination is a probable big hit (when the special game is finished, the situation is shifted to the specific gaming state), the subsequent Even if there is a specific hold in the operation hold ball, it is configured so that a hold-in-ream zone effect does not occur during the special game.

Subsequently, the “reserved-in-ream resort production” is an effect for suggesting or notifying that it is a reserved-in-ream resort. In this on-hold renso production, there are a first on-hold renso production (referred to as “on-hold renso production A”) that occurs during symbol variation and a second on-hold renso production that occurs during special games. Production (referred to as “reserved in-rensou production B”) is included. In addition, in this embodiment, although both the 1st on-hold consecutive villa production and the 2nd on-hold consecutive villa production are provided, you may provide either one of the on-hold consecutive villa production. .

  Whether or not the on-hold consecutive resort effect A can be executed is determined by lottery when the first execution condition is satisfied at the timing when the preceding operation holding ball is digested. In the present embodiment, it is assumed that the preceding operation holding ball becomes a high profit big hit (16R big hit), and the specific hold that becomes the high profit big hit (16R big hit) in the subsequent operation holding ball is the first specific hold. If included, the first execution condition is satisfied. In other words, even if there is a specific hold (scheduled to be a big hit) in the subsequent operation hold, if the big hit type related to the specific hold is not a high profit big hit, Not executed. Furthermore, “In the situation where there are multiple specific holds in the subsequent operation hold, the jackpot type related to the first specific hold is not a high profit jackpot, and the jackpot type related to the next specific hold is a high profit jackpot. Even in the case, the on-hold consecutive resort production A is not executed. Therefore, in this example, when the on-hold extended villa production A occurs, it becomes deterministic to perform the on-hold extended villa with a high profit big hit (16R big hit). Even if a specific hold that becomes a high profit big hit (16R big hit) is included as the earliest specific hold in the subsequent operation hold ball, the hold scheduled to be digested before that specific hold is “lost. However, if it is a specific fluctuation pattern (if it is a fluctuation pattern of a predetermined time or longer, for example, a fluctuation pattern other than the shortest fluctuation time or a fluctuation pattern related to reach) is planned to be selected " It is good also as a structure which does not perform A.

  Whether or not the on-hold consecutive resort production B can be executed is determined by lottery when the second execution condition is satisfied at the timing before the start of the special game. In the present embodiment, it is assumed that the preceding operation holding ball becomes a high profit big hit (16R big hit), and in addition to the case where the specific holding is included in the subsequent operation holding ball, all the subsequent operation holding balls are held off. Even in this case, it is assumed that the second execution condition is satisfied. Therefore, even if the on-hold consecutive villa production B occurs, it may not be determined that it is the on-hold consecutive villa production, and a so-called gasse production may occur. Similarly to the on-hold consecutive villa production A, when the on-hold consecutive villa production B occurs, a configuration in which the on-hold consecutive villa production becomes definite may be adopted. Similarly to the on-hold consecutive villa production A, when the on-hold consecutive villa production B occurs, a configuration in which the on-hold consecutive villa production becomes definite may be adopted. Also, in the in-holding Renren production B, similarly to the in-holding Renren production A, it is assumed that the preceding operation holding ball becomes a high profit big hit (16R big hit), and the high profit in the subsequent operation holding ball is obtained. The second execution condition may be satisfied when a specific hold that is a big hit (16R big hit) is included as the first specific hold. In other words, even if there is a specific hold (scheduled to be a big hit) in the subsequent operation hold, if the big hit type related to the specific hold is not a high profit big hit, Not executed. Furthermore, “In the situation where there are multiple specific holds in the subsequent operation hold, the jackpot type related to the first specific hold is not a high profit jackpot, and the jackpot type related to the next specific hold is a high profit jackpot. Even in the case, the on-hold consecutive resort production B is not executed. Therefore, in this case, when the on-hold extended resort production B occurs, it is definite to perform the on-hold extended resort with a high profit big hit (16R big hit). Even if a specific hold that becomes a high profit big hit (16R big hit) is included as the earliest specific hold in the subsequent operation hold ball, the hold scheduled to be digested before that specific hold is “lost. However, if it is a specific fluctuation pattern (if it is a fluctuation pattern of a predetermined time or longer, for example, a fluctuation pattern other than the shortest fluctuation time or a fluctuation pattern related to reach) is planned to be selected " It is good also as a structure which does not perform B.

The prefetch notice control means 223 refers to the information of the predetermination result stored in the prefetch information storage area (hold 1 storage area, hold 2 storage area, hold 3 storage area, hold 4 storage area) of the sub-main information storage means 260. Then, the pre-reading determination is performed in the order of the hold 1 storage area → the hold 2 storage area → the hold 3 storage area → the hold 4 storage area, that is, in order from the earliest one of the subsequent operation hold balls. In the case where a plurality of specific holds are included in the operation hold ball, the prefetch determination of the on-hold extended game effect A only targets the earliest specific hold, while the pre-read determination of the on-hold extended game effect B Now, we will target multiple specific holds. That is, while the number of specific holds notified in the on-hold consecutive resort effect is always one, the number of specific holds notified in the on-hold extended resort effect B is not limited to one. There may be times.

  Subsequently, the content of the on-hold consecutive villa production (referred to as “renso production pattern”) is determined based on the continuous villa production pattern table. In this example, a plurality of types of consecutive-village effect pattern tables that are referred to when determining the consecutive-village effect pattern are held.

  FIG. 8A shows the extended villa production pattern table to be referred to when selecting the extended villa production pattern of the on-hold extended villa production A, and FIG. It is a consecutive resort production pattern table referred when doing. A plurality of types of consecutive-village effect patterns are defined in each consecutive-village effect pattern table, and the contents of the effects and the execution timing are determined corresponding to each consecutive-village effect pattern. In each figure, for convenience of explanation, “selection rate” is shown, but in actuality, a determination value (range of random values) for determining the villa effect pattern according to the villa effect pattern random value Is set, and based on which judgment value the random number value of the renage effect pattern belongs to, the renage effect pattern is determined. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8, effect images AX and BX are prepared as specific effect modes of the on-hold consecutive resort effect, but the “effect image” is composed of a still image. An effect image composed of both an effect image, an effect image composed of a moving image, and a still image and a moving image can be exemplified.

  As shown in FIG. 8 (A), in the effect pattern table of the on-hold consecutive resort effect A, a plurality of types of effect patterns PA1, PA2 are defined. When the consecutive-village effect pattern PA1 is selected, a special effect image “AX1” that does not appear in any scene other than the reserved consecutive-village effect during the decoration design change is displayed. As shown in FIG. 9A, as the effect image AX1, for example, an effect in which a shooting star crosses the screen during the variation of the decorative design is applicable. When the Renso production pattern P2 is selected, as shown in FIG. 9B, a special jackpot symbol “S. An effect in which “S / S” is determined and displayed is applicable.

  In addition, in this example, in the reserved in-rendition zone effect A, the preceding operating reservation ball becomes a high profit big hit (16R specific big hit), and the high profit big hit (16R specific big hit) in the subsequent operation holding ball. Occurs only when a specific hold is scheduled Therefore, it is determined that high profit jackpots will continue at the time of the on-hold consecutive villa production A.

  As shown in FIG. 8 (B), a plurality of types of effect patterns PB1 to PB9 are defined in the effect pattern table of the on-hold consecutive resort effect B. When the production pattern PB1 is selected, a special production image “BX1” that does not appear in any scene other than the on-hold Renren production is displayed during the start demonstration production. As shown in FIG. 9C, in the start demonstration effect, character information “bonus” is displayed as the effect image BX1. When the effect patterns PB2 to PB7 are selected, a special effect image “BX2” that does not appear in any scene other than the on-hold consecutive villa effect during the round effect is displayed. As shown in FIG. 9D, the effect image BX2 corresponds to, for example, an effect in which one image imitating a secret book appears in the screen. When the production pattern PB8 is selected, a special production image “BX3” that does not appear in any scene other than the on-hold Renren production is displayed during the round production. As shown in FIG. 9E, the effect image BX3 corresponds to, for example, an effect in which two images imitating a secret book appear in the screen. This effect pattern PB8 can be selected when there are a plurality of specific holds in the subsequent operation hold balls. When the production pattern PB9 is selected, a special production image “BX4” that does not appear in any scene other than the on-hold Renren production is displayed during the end demonstration production. As shown in FIG. 9 (F), in the end demonstration effect, character information “mystery tradition” is displayed as the effect image BX4.

  As described above, the on-hold consecutive villa production B occurs in any of the start demonstration production, the round production, and the demonstration end production in the series of the big hit production. In addition, the on-hold consecutive resort effect B may occur only once (single round) or may occur multiple times (multiple rounds) in multiple round effects. In addition, in this example, on-hold consecutive resort production B is a case where a specific hold is included in a subsequent operation hold ball on the premise that the preceding operation hold ball is a high profit big hit (16R specific big hit). In addition, it may occur even when a specific hold is not included in a subsequent operation hold ball (that is, only a hold off). That is, the production patterns PB1 and PB9 that are selected as the on-hold consecutive resort production B that occurs during the start demonstration production and the end demonstration production can be selected only when specific suspension (one piece) is included. For this reason, the production patterns PB2 to PB8 that are selected as the on-hold consecutive resort production B that occurs during the round production correspond to the production that informs the confirmation of the on-hold consecutive resort. 2), it can be selected not only when a specific reservation is included, but it corresponds to an effect that suggests the possibility of a suspended resort. Therefore, even if a mystery book (one or two) appears as the reservation-in-rensou production B, the reservation-in-rensou is not necessarily fixed, and when the reservation-in-rensou production B related to the mystery book occurs. In the following operation hold ball, there is a specific hold (when the notification of the on-hold consecutive villa is true) and there is no specific hold (when the notification of the on-hold consecutive resort is Gase) It can occur alternatively. In addition, the production patterns PB2 to PB7 selected as the on-hold consecutive resort production B that occurs during the round production can be selected when one specific hold is included or when no specific hold is included. Therefore, the effect image BX2 corresponding to this can notify only the possibility that one specific hold is included in the subsequent operation hold ball, whereas the effect pattern PB8 has a plurality of specific hold. Since it can be selected when it is included or when specific hold is not included, the effect image “BX3” corresponding to this indicates the possibility that a plurality of specific holds are included in the subsequent operation hold ball. It can be notified. That is, the number of specific holds included in the subsequent operation hold ball is suggested to the player in a form corresponding to the number of secret books.

  In addition, when the on-hold extended game effect occurs, that is, when a big hit occurs in each of the preceding operation holding ball and the subsequent operation holding ball, a plurality of special games may occur in a short period of time. When scheduled, a special continuous effect for making these special game states appear as one special game state in appearance is generated. In other words, the special continuous effect is an effect that makes it appear as if the special game continues during the symbol variation effect, even though the special game has actually ended once and has shifted to the symbol variation effect. It is. In this example, for convenience of explanation, two jackpots are assumed as a plurality of jackpots. Here, the big hits and special games based on the preceding active holding balls are also referred to as “first big hits” and “first special games”, and the big hits and special games based on the subsequent active holding balls are called “subsequent big hits” and “after” It is also called “special game”.

  The special continuous performance is at least the end demonstration effect in the previous special game ("special end demonstration effect") and the symbol variation effect ("special symbol variation effect") that occurs between the previous special game and the later special game. ) And a start demonstration effect ("special start demonstration effect") in a later special game are continuously connected. Specifically, the special end demonstration production, the special symbol variation production, and the special start demonstration production are executed as a series of continuous productions, and the production has a consistent storyline in the production from the previous special game to the later special game. By using the contents, related production contents, or a series of moving image displays, it can be shown as one special game in which the previous special game and the subsequent special game are continued. For this reason, unlike the normal end demo performance, the special end demo performance at the big jackpot does not display a message to announce the end of the special game, and similarly, the special start demo performance at the subsequent big hit Then, unlike a normal start demonstration production, a message telling the start of a special game is not displayed. In addition, as the above-described modification, the special continuous effect is configured by continuously connecting the end demonstration effect in the previous special game and one or more symbol change effects until the symbol change effect related to the subsequent jackpot. It may be.

  In this example, the execution condition of the special continuous performance is that the previous jackpot is a high profit jackpot (16R specific jackpot) and the subsequent jackpot is a high profit jackpot (16R specific jackpot), that is, the preceding operation holding ball. Is that the 16R jackpot is included as the earliest specific hold in the subsequent operation hold ball. In addition, when the subsequent operation hold balls are all out of hold, or when the 8R big hit is included as the earliest specific hold in the subsequent operation hold balls, a special continuous effect is produced as a so-called “gasse effect”. End on the way.

  The special symbol variation effect constituting a part of the special continuous effect occurs within a limited period immediately after the end of the previous special game. Therefore, the content of the special symbol variation effect is based on a variation effect pattern (referred to as a “special variation effect pattern”) selected while staying in the special effect mode. In this example, the special variation effect pattern is selected only when the lottery result is 16R big hit or miss. That is, in this limited period, when the 16R big hit or lose, a special variation effect in which the variation time is set to 2 seconds shorter than the average variation time (the shortest variation time in this example) occurs. The special variation effect pattern is selected even in the case of a loss, because the earliest specific hold (16R big hit) is not necessarily the earliest in the subsequent operation hold ball, and there is a gap hold between them. However, this is because it is necessary to connect with special variation effects until the first specific hold (16R big hit) is consumed. Specifically, on the main control board 100 side, there is a transition to the high probability special variation state γ within a limited period after the special game, and the special variation pattern table is referred to in selecting the variation pattern of the special symbol. In the special variation pattern table, when the 16R big hit or miss, special variation patterns PX9 and PH9 that both have a very short variation time (2 seconds) are selected. On the side of the effect control board 200, while staying in the special effect mode, the special change effect pattern is selected in association with the change patterns PX9 and PH9, and the special change effect is executed. The reason for configuring the special variation effect from the ultra-short variation time (2 seconds) is to shorten the variation effect that occurs between the previous special game and the later special game, This is to connect seamlessly with the special game later.

  Note that if all of the subsequent operation holding balls are off, a special variation effect will occur during the limited period, but the subsequent big hit (16R big hit) will not occur. The process ends with (so-called Gase production). On the other hand, if the subsequent jackpot is an 8R jackpot, a super reach effect will appear during the limited period, and the special continuous effect will end in the middle (so-called “gase effect”), resulting in a high profit jackpot. Is also denied. Therefore, within the limited period, as the variation effect pattern, when the result of the winning / failing lottery is 16R big hit, only the super short variation mode (special variation production: 2 seconds) is selected, whereas when the result is 8R big hit. Since only the long-time variation mode (super reach production: 90 seconds) is selected, it is denied that the high-profit big hits will be held at the time when the decoration pattern variation mode has been developed into a reach production. In addition, when all the subsequent operation hold balls are only out of hold, or when the 8R big hit is included as the first specific hold in the subsequent operation hold balls, the special continuous effect is not executed. It may be configured (that is, a special continuous effect is generated only when the earliest specific hold is 16R big hit). In such a case, it is preferable that the reserved in-ream villa is determined by the occurrence of the in-reserved-ream villa effect B without including the gasse effect in the re-entry-in-ream villa effect B

  In the present embodiment, the special continuous effect includes a pseudo-count effect that occurs in a round effect in a later special game. This pseudo count effect is displayed by adding the number of rounds and the number of winning prize balls in the previous special game to the number of rounds and the number of winning prize balls in the later special game (details will be described later).

  Further, in the present embodiment, there are the following constraint conditions for executing the on-hold consecutive resort production and the special continuous production (details will be described later with reference to FIG. 38).

  1-1) In the case where the on-hold extended game effect A is generated during the symbol variation display based on the digestion of the preceding operation reserved ball, the on-hold extended game effect B is not generated during the special game after the variable display. The reason for this is that if the on-hold extended villa production B is generated again during the special game, the number of on-hold extended villa times (the number of specific holdings in the subsequent operation holding ball) is one. Regardless, there is a possibility that the player may misunderstand that there are multiple times, and because in this example it is a reserved area rendezvous production B that is not a confirmed notification effect, the player is worried about whether a retained reed resort will really occur. This is because there is a risk of memorizing it. In addition, even when the on-hold extended rens production A occurs during the symbol variation display based on the digestion of the preceding operation holding ball, the on-hold renso production B is generated during the special game after the variation display. In that case, it is preferable to configure the on-hold consecutive villa production B as a confirmed notification production of the on-hold consecutive villa production.

  1-2) In the case where the on-reserved range rendition effect A is generated during the symbol variation display based on the digestion of the preceding actuated reserve ball, the on-hold ranger during the symbol variation display when the subsequent actuated reserve ball is digested Production A does not occur again. This is because, even when trying to show two special game states as one special game state with the occurrence of the special continuous production, the on-holding renja production A as the symbol variation production occurred during the execution of this special continuous production. Then, there is a possibility of losing the meaning of concealing that the symbol variation effect is being performed. In addition, when the special continuous production is started in response to the occurrence of the on-hold consecutive resort production A, the variation time when the subsequent operation holding ball is digested during this special continuous production (within a limited period) is extremely short. Since it is set to (2 seconds), the production effect is low even if the on-hold consecutive resort production A is generated within this short time, and both productions are produced by the competition between the on-hold consecutive resort production and the special continuous production. This is because the effect may be diluted.

  1-3) In the case where the holding-in-ream zone effect A occurs during the fluctuation display based on the digestion of the preceding operation-holding ball, the reservation-in-ream resort during the jackpot effect when the subsequent operation-holding ball becomes a big hit Production B can occur. This is because even if it is during the special succession production, if it occurs during the big hit presentation, the player feels that the normal on-hold range resort production B has occurred, and it is not possible to create a sense of incongruity. In addition, since the special continuous production is connected to a series of productions from at least the end demonstration production during the previous jackpot production to the start demonstration production during the subsequent big hit production, This is because there is no inconvenience that the on-hold consecutive villa production and the special continuous production compete with each other as long as the on-hold consecutive villa production is generated at the timing after the round presentation in the special game.

  The effect mode control means 221 controls the transition of the effect mode in accordance with the game state designation command from the main control board 100 and the consistency with the game state and the variation pattern selection state managed on the main control board 100 side. Execute. In the present embodiment, a normal effect mode α, a probability change effect mode β, and a special effect mode γ are included as the three types of effect modes, and the variation patterns of the special symbols instructed from the main control board 100 are the same. In addition, the variation effect pattern (details will be described later) for specifying the specific content of the symbol variation effect is set differently for each effect mode. On the effect display device 70, an effect mode notification image (in this example, a background image to be displayed on the back of the decorative symbol) corresponding to the effect mode in which the user is currently staying is displayed, and the background images are different for each effect mode. Since it is set, the player can recognize which effect mode he is currently staying in from the type of background image.

Each production mode will be outlined. First, the normal effect mode α is set when the low probability normal variation state α is selected as the variation pattern selection state on the main control board 100 side, and “normal background” is displayed as the background image. The probability variation effect mode β is set when the high probability reduction variation state β is selected as the variation pattern selection state on the main control board 100 side, and “probability variation background” is displayed as the background image. The special effect mode γ is set when the high probability special variation state γ is selected as the variation pattern selection state on the main control board 100 side. This special effect mode stays for a period of four times (limited period) immediately after the end of the special game, and when this limited period is exceeded, transition to the probability change effect mode β. When the on-hold consecutive resort effect B occurs during the special game, that is, when the continuous variation effect is executed, “special background” is displayed as the background image. This special background is common to the background display in the special start demonstration production and the special end demonstration production, and as a series of processes during the special continuous production, a common background display is performed, so that it is an element of the special continuous production. Also works. On the other hand, when the on-hold consecutive resort effect B does not occur during the special game, that is, when the continuous variation effect is not executed, the “probable change background” common to the probability change effect mode is displayed as the background image.

  The decorative design determining means 224 is configured to combine the final stop symbols of the decorative symbols (left symbol, middle symbol, The left symbol is determined by lottery. In this example, three symbol sequences including a plurality of types of decorative symbols are configured. This decorative design is formed by, for example, an identification element made up of numbers or letters. In this example, ten types such as numbers “1” to “9” and characters “S” are set as identification elements. Each decoration symbol circulates in each display area Z1, Z2, Z3 in the order of “1” → “2” → “3” →... → “8” → “9” → “S” Display.

  The decorative symbol determination means 224 holds a plurality of types of stop symbol pattern tables that are referred to when a combination of stop symbols of decorative symbols (also referred to as “stop symbol pattern”) is determined by lottery. As the plural types of tables, there are a stop symbol pattern table for big hits, a stop symbol pattern table for small hits, a stop symbol pattern table for non-reach, a stop symbol pattern table for non-reach. The decorative symbol stop symbol is formed as a combination of three symbols, and includes “stop symbol indicating jackpot (big hit symbol)” and “stop symbol indicating loss (loss symbol)”. The big hit symbol indicating the specific big hit (probable big hit) is a combination of stop modes (for example, “7 · 7 · 7”) in which three symbols having the same odd number are arranged. The big hit symbol indicating the normal big hit (non-probable big hit) is a combination of stop modes (for example, “2.2-2.2”) in which three symbols with the same even number are arranged. The off symbol is a combination of stop modes (for example, “1 · 3 · 8”) in which at least one of the three symbols is a symbol having a number different from the other numbers. Here, of the out-of-order symbols, the out-of-reach symbol is a combination of stop modes in which only the middle symbol is shifted back and forth by several frames in a state where the left symbol and the right symbol are coincident (for example, “3.1,3”) Become. In the case of a “stop symbol indicating a small hit (small hit symbol)” or a 2R big hit symbol even if it is a big hit symbol, for example, a combination of predetermined stop modes such as “3, 5, 7” is used. There is a case. In the present embodiment, as described above, “S · S · S” is provided as a special jackpot symbol for definite notification of the on-hold range resort. When it is determined to execute the on-hold consecutive-village effect A, the decorative symbol determining means 224, when the consecutive-village effect pattern PA2 is selected, the normal jackpot symbol ("3.3.3" or the like) ) Is replaced with a special jackpot symbol (“S, S, S”).

Based on the information (variation pattern information) included in the variation start command from the main control board 100, the variation effect determining means 225 defines the variation process (effect process) from the variation start to the stop in the variation display of the decorative symbol. Determine the production pattern. In the present embodiment, the design variation effect (reach effect) performed after the reach display includes a reach effect with a simple effect content (normal reach effect) and a reach effect (super reach effect) where the effect content develops midway. . The variation effect determining means 225 holds a plurality of types of variation effect pattern tables that are referred to when selecting a variation effect pattern, and a variation pattern (variation time) of a special symbol is selected from the plurality of types of variation effect pattern tables. ) Is selected. In the variation effect pattern table, the variation effect pattern random value and the variation effect pattern are associated with each other according to the result of the variation pattern lottery of the special symbol (that is, the reach type). Here, a basic pattern (for example, “normal reach A”, “super reach A”, etc.) of the symbol variation is determined as the variation pattern on the main control board 100 side, whereas the variation control pattern on the effect control substrate 200 side Based on the basic pattern, a detailed pattern of design variation (for example, “normal reach A1, A2, A3...”, “Super reach A1, A2, A3. In this way, the variation display pattern of the decorative design defines a variation display mode of the decorative design, that is, a scenario of a series of effect display processes from the start of variation of the decorative design to the end of the variation. The timing for generating the notice effect at the stage is also defined as a time schedule. Note that the stop order for stopping the decorative symbols is predetermined for each variation effect pattern. In this embodiment, in principle, the decorative symbols are stopped in the order of left symbol → right symbol → middle symbol. However, if it is a variation effect pattern with a short variation time, the left symbol, middle symbol, and right symbol are stopped almost simultaneously, and if it is a specific variation effect pattern, the left symbol → middle symbol → right symbol It can also be stopped. At this time, if it is not the stopping order of the above principle (left symbol → right symbol → middle symbol), the big hit expectation degree tends to be relatively high.

  The notice effect determining means 226 determines the notice effect pattern that defines the content of the notice effect that is executed at each stage of the decorative symbol change process according to the scenario of the change effect pattern described above. The notice effect pattern includes an effect pattern that displays an image or animation of a specific character temporarily or stepwise, an effect pattern that outputs a specific sound, an effect pattern that operates a movable accessory, and the like. The notice effect is executed in parallel with the variation display of the decorative symbol and suggests in advance that the jackpot reliability that the symbol variation stops in the jackpot mode is high. The notice effect includes a notice effect that is executed before the reach state occurs (including when the reach occurs) in the process of changing the decorative symbol, and a notice effect that is executed after the reach state occurs. Each of the announcement effects has different jackpot reliability. Basically, the announcement effect displayed after the occurrence of the reach has a relatively higher reliability of the announcement effect displayed after the occurrence of the reach. It is high. The notice effect determining means 226 maintains a notice effect pattern table to be referred to when selecting the notice effect pattern for each type of the notice effect, and according to the type of the notice effect generated according to the scenario of the variable effect pattern. A notice effect pattern table is selected. The notice effect determining means 226 refers to the notice effect pattern table selected above and, based on the notice effect pattern random number value obtained from the effect lottery random number generating means 210, draws a lot of kinds of notice effect patterns. Choose one. In addition, as a kind of specific notice effect pattern, a comment notice effect pattern, a background notice effect pattern, an SU (step-up) notice effect pattern, a group notice effect pattern, a cut-in notice effect pattern, an accessory movable notice effect pattern, Etc. are prepared. This notice effect is basically performed by synthesizing one or a plurality of notice effects with the decorative display of the effect display device 70. For this reason, even in the case of decorative display variation display using the same variation production pattern, various production modes can be generated by combining with one or a plurality of notice productions.

The jackpot effect determining means 227 determines the contents of the jackpot effect (a jackpot effect pattern) for notifying that the special game is being played. The jackpot effect includes a start demonstration effect for notifying the start of a special game, a round effect for notifying that a round game is in progress, and an end demonstration effect for notifying the end of a special game. When the jackpot effect determining means 227 receives the jackpot start demo command from the main control board 100, the jackpot effect pattern (start demo effect pattern, round effect, etc.) based on the jackpot type information stored in the sub main information storage means 260, etc. Pattern, end demo production pattern). In the jackpot production pattern, a jackpot start demonstration production time, a round production time (production time according to the opening pattern of the big winning openings 64 and 65), and a jackpot end demonstration production time are set according to the type of jackpot. A series of production contents are set along the time axis. In addition, the jackpot effect determining means 227 executes the start demonstration effect in response to receiving the jackpot start demo command from the main control board 100 according to the jackpot effect pattern, and receives each round effect designation command as an opportunity. An effect is executed, and an end demo effect is executed when a jackpot end demo command is received.

  Here, in the normal jackpot start demonstration effect, for example, the word “start the jackpot” is displayed on the screen to announce the start of the special game. In a normal round effect, for example, the number of rounds currently being executed and the number of winning prize balls on the screen are displayed, and various images (such as animation images) that excite the special game are displayed. Then, in the normal jackpot end demonstration effect, for example, the word “End of jackpot” is displayed on the screen to notify the end of the special game.

  In addition, when the special continuous production is executed, the end demonstration production at the previous jackpot is replaced with the special production content (the production content having the integration with the special variation production) from the normal production content, and the character of the big hit end Is not displayed. In addition, when a special continuous production is executed, the start demonstration production in the later jackpot is replaced with a special production content (a production content that has a unity with the special variation production), and the character that starts the big hit Is not displayed. In addition, when a special continuous production is executed, in the round production in the later special game, the number of rounds of the later special game is added to the number of rounds of the previous special game, and the rear A pseudo-count effect is provided in which the number of prize balls obtained for the special game is added to the number of prize balls obtained for the previous special game. The jackpot effect determining means 227 executes a promotion effect (promotion success effect, promotion failure effect) as a jackpot effect during the special game (details will be described later).

  As described above, the production control unit 220 performs image control commands relating to images and sound based on the determined production content (prefetching production pattern, consecutive resort production pattern, variation production pattern, notice production pattern, stop design pattern, jackpot production pattern, etc.). And is stored in the command storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260.

  The lamp effect control means 230 controls the lighting of the effect lamp, the emission color, and the like according to the effect contents set by the effect control means 220. The lamp effect control means 230 holds a plurality of types of lamp data (lamp pattern data) for lighting control of the effect lamp LP (the frame lamp 10, the panel lamp 25), and the lamp according to the determined effect pattern. Data is read, and this lamp control signal (lamp data) is transmitted to the lamp connection board 91.

  The accessory effect control means 240 controls the driving of each movable accessory 24 according to the effect contents set by the effect supervision means 220. The accessory effect control means 240 holds a plurality of types of drive data for driving and controlling the movable accessory 24, and transmits a drive control signal (drive data) corresponding to the determined effect pattern to the motor driver 92. To do.

  The error effect control means 250 is configured to determine an error effect pattern when an error effect designation command is received from the main control board 100 and to notify the gaming machine that an error state has occurred according to the error effect pattern. Yes.

  The sub-main information storage means 260 is configured to temporarily store decoration symbol information, variation effect pattern information, notice effect pattern information, control command information, and the like, and a predetermined number for storing each information. A storage area is provided. For example, in the command storage area, an effect control command buffer for storing an effect control command from the main control board 100, an image control command buffer for storing an image control command to the image control board 300, and an image control board 300 ACK command buffer for storing ACK commands from Each command buffer is composed of a ring buffer and can store a predetermined number of effect control commands, image control commands, and ACK commands.

  The command transmission / reception means 270 is configured to receive the effect control command transmitted from the main control board 100 and store the effect control command in the effect control command buffer. The command transmission / reception means 270 generates an interruption based on the input of the strobe signal from the main control board 100 and executes an effect control command reception interrupt process (details will be described later). In this interrupt process, various effect control commands are sent. To get. When the command transmission / reception means 270 receives the strobe signal, the command transmission / reception means 270 receives the effect control command reception interrupt process preferentially over other interrupt processes (interrupt processes with a priority level less than 7 described later). ing.

  Further, the command transmission / reception means 270 stores in the sub-main information storage means 260 in order to instruct execution of the effect contents (variation effect pattern information, notice effect pattern information, decorative symbol information, etc.) set by the effect control means 220. The image control command thus transmitted is transmitted to the image control board 300 by a serial communication method. In principle, the image control command is transmitted every predetermined period (500 μs in this example) in accordance with the order set in the command storage area of the sub-main information storage unit 260. Thereby, the image control board 300 analyzes various image control commands transmitted from the effect control board 200, and causes the effect display device 70 to variably display the effect image including the decorative design according to the scenario of the change effect pattern. The notice effect is displayed in a manner superimposed on the design variation effect at each stage of the variation display process. Further, the command transmission / reception means 270 receives the ACK command transmitted from the image control board 300 and stores the ACK command in the ACK command buffer.

<Processing on the main control board>
Next, the procedure of the operation process in the main control board 100 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. The processing on the main control board 100 side includes main control side main processing and main control side timer interrupt processing.

<Main control side main processing>
10 to 11 are flowcharts showing main processing on the main control side of the main control board 100. In the main process on the main control side, after the security check of the main CPU 101 is performed by reset at power-on, the program starts and the processes after S1 are started.

  First, as an initial setting required when the power is turned on, a head address is set as an initial value of the stack area in the stack pointer (S1), and access to the RAM 103 is permitted (S2). Subsequently, a vector table storing the start address of a program to be processed when a timer interrupt occurs is set (S3), and an initial value is set in a built-in register of the main CPU 101 (S4).

  Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear switch is turned on (S5). If the RAM clear switch is on (S5: YES), the entire area of the RAM 103 is cleared to zero in S9 described later. On the other hand, when the RAM clear switch is not turned on (S5: NO), the value of the power-off information flag is read to determine whether or not the information on normal power-off is stored (S6).

Here, when the information indicating that the power is off normally is stored (S6: YES), a checksum is calculated for a predetermined area of the RAM 103 (S7). Then, it is determined whether or not this checksum is 0, that is, whether or not the checksum is normal (S8). Note that the checksum at power-on calculated here includes the complement of the checksum calculated in the power-off process described later, so if it has been backed up normally, Sam becomes “0”. In this way, it is determined when the power is turned on whether the information stored in the RAM 103 before the power is turned off is correctly backed up. At this time, if the checksum is normal (S8: YES), the process proceeds to S12, which will be described later, in order to return to the state before the power interruption. On the other hand, if the checksum is abnormal (S8: NO), the entire area of the RAM 103 is cleared to zero (S9). Next, initialization data at power-on is set in the RAM 103 (S10). Subsequently, in order to initialize the effect display device 70 and the effect lamp LP, an effect control command (“effect initial command”) is requested to the effect control board 200 (S11).

  Next, in the power-off recovery setting process, power-on normal information setting, various error initial settings, and communication initial setting with the payout control board 400 are sequentially performed in the RAM 103 (S12). Here, as the setting of the power-on normal information, in order to save that the power was correctly turned on, the power-on normal data is stored in the power-off information flag and the information on the occurrence of power-off is initialized. Turn off the power-off confirmation flag. Next, a data transfer source address, a data transfer destination address, and a transfer byte number are set, and data corresponding to the transfer byte number is transferred (S13). Then, a special symbol game status value at the time of power-off is read, and a power-off recovery process related to the special symbol game is performed (S14).

  Subsequently, a transmission request for an effect control command (“power failure return command”) at the time of power failure recovery between the main control board 100 and the effect control board 200 is made (S15). The power-off recovery command includes information related to the inspection of the communication line, the special symbol operating state, the probability variation count, the time reduction count, the easy-to-enter state count, the variation pattern selection status, and the error status. It should be noted that the command requests for untransmitted before the power is turned off are cleared. Next, in the symbol memory number command request process, the information on the number of suspended balls in the first special symbol and the second special symbol at the time of power-off is read, and an effect control command including the information on the number of suspended balls is requested ( S16).

  Subsequently, a return setting is made to return the ordinary electric accessory 622 to a state before the power is turned off (for example, the second start port 62 is opened) (S17). Further, a return setting is made to return the special electric accessory 642 to a state before the power is cut off (for example, the big prize opening 64 is opened) (S18). Subsequently, the value of the special symbol mode flag is read, and the operation state of the probability variation function of the special symbol when the power is turned off is set (S19). The special symbol mode flag is a flag for setting the operation probability (high probability or low probability) of the special symbol game. Next, in order to start a timer interrupt, a predetermined count value is set as an initial setting of the CTC circuit of the main control microcomputer 110, and a timer interrupt is generated every 4 ms (S20). Subsequently, interrupt prohibition is set to prohibit generation of timer interrupt processing (S21). Then, as a preparation for restarting the watchdog timer, clear word 1 (“55H”) is set (S22).

  Next, in order to determine the occurrence of a power interruption, the value of the power interruption confirmation flag is read to determine whether or not a power interruption has occurred (S23). If no power interruption has occurred, an initial value random number update process is executed (S24). In this initial value random number update process, the initial value random number per normal symbol, the soft initial value random number per special symbol, and the symbol initial value random number per special symbol are updated. Specifically, the numerical value of each counter is incremented by 1, and when the numerical value exceeds the maximum value, it is returned to “0” which is the minimum value.

Next, interrupt permission is set so as to allow the generation of the timer interrupt process (S25), the process returns to the above-described process for prohibiting the interrupt (S21), and the loop process of S21 to S25 is repeatedly executed. Here, the timer interrupt process is periodically executed at predetermined intervals, but using the remaining time from the completion of the previous interrupt process until the next interrupt process occurs, S21 to S25. Repeat the process up to. If there is an interrupt request in the interrupt disabled state, timer interrupt processing is started when the interrupt is enabled in S25. On the other hand, if the power-off confirmation flag is turned on in S23, that is, if a power-off has occurred, the process proceeds to S26 to execute the power-off process described below.

  Next, as power-off processing (S26 to S32), first, clear word 2 (“AAH”) is set to restart the watchdog timer (S26). Next, it is determined whether or not the content of the power-off information flag is power-on normal data (S27). If it is power-on normal information (S27: Yes), power-off normal data is set in the power-off information flag (S28). On the other hand, if the power-on normal information is not found (S27: No), the power-off abnormality data is set in the power-off information flag (S29), and the process proceeds to S32.

  Next, a checksum is calculated for a predetermined area (excluding the checksum area) of the RAM 103 (S30). Then, a complement for the checksum data is calculated, and the result value of this complement is set in the checksum area of the RAM 103 (S31). Subsequently, the access prohibition setting of the RAM 103 is set (S32), and the process is looped until the power is turned off.

《Main control timer interrupt processing》
Next, the main control side timer interrupt processing of the main control board 100 will be described. FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing of the main control board 100. This timer interrupt process is started by a clock pulse every predetermined time (for example, 4 ms) from the CTC circuit of the game control microcomputer 110, and is executed by interrupting the main process on the main control side. In addition, as the terms used below, the terms “condition device” and “actual accessory continuous actuating device” mean a conceptual control device, and “condition device” means a big hit in a special symbol game. The “actual accessory continuous actuating device” is capable of operating the special electric accessory 642 continuously a plurality of times.

  First, when this timer interrupt occurs, the contents of the register in the main CPU 101 are saved in the stack area of the RAM 103, and then an interrupt operation condition is set (S51).

  Next, a clear word 2 (“AAH”) is set to restart the watchdog timer (S52). At this time, the clear word 1 and the clear word 2 are sequentially written in the WDT clear register of the CPU 101 within a preset time-out period, whereby the watchdog timer is cleared and restarted. That is, when the main CPU 101 is executing the program normally, the clear words 1 and 2 are periodically set, so that the watchdog timer is cleared and restarted before time-out. On the other hand, when the watchdog timer times out, a user reset occurs.

  Next, input processing is executed (S53). In this input process, information of switches other than the RAM clear switch is read as various switches connected to the main control board 100. That is, input information such as the first start port switch 611, the second start port switch 621, the operation gate switch 631, the big prize port switch 641, the door opening switch, the frame opening switch, the back set opening switch, the magnetic sensor, the radio wave sensor, etc. Is read, and after the state is determined, the detection information is stored.

  Next, various random number update processes are executed (S54). In these various random number update processes, the normal symbol variation pattern random number and the special symbol variation pattern random number are updated. As for the normal symbol variation pattern random number, 1 is added to the numerical value of the random number counter, and when the numerical value exceeds the maximum value, it is returned to “0” which is the minimum value. On the other hand, for the special symbol variation pattern random number, a predetermined value (for example, 3511) is subtracted from the previous random number. When the subtraction result is less than 0, a predetermined value (for example, 50000) is added to the subtraction result.

  Next, initial value update type random number update processing is executed (S55). In this initial value update type random number update process, the random numbers per ordinary symbol, the soft random numbers per special symbol, and the symbol random numbers per special symbol are updated. Specifically, 1 is added to the numerical value of each random number counter, and when the numerical value exceeds the maximum value, it is returned to “0” which is the minimum value. Further, when the counter value makes one round, the corresponding initial value random number is set as the initial value.

  Next, an initial value random number update process is executed (S56). In this initial value random number update process, the initial value random number per normal symbol, the soft initial value random number per special symbol, and the symbol initial value random number per special symbol are updated. Specifically, 1 is added to the numerical value of each random number counter, and when the numerical value exceeds the maximum value, it is returned to “0” which is the minimum value.

  Next, timer subtraction processing is executed (S57). In this timer subtraction process, the values of various timers used for game operation control of the pachinko gaming machine PM are subtracted and updated. For example, the values of various timers are subtracted by an interrupt cycle (4 ms in this example). The various timers include special symbol game timers for managing the time (variation time, fixed display time) related to the special symbol display devices 71 and 72.

  Next, a second start port effective period setting process is executed (S58). In the second starting port effective period setting process, the winning effective period and the winning invalid period of the second starting port 62 are determined, and the effective period data or invalid period data of the second starting port 62 is set as the determination result.

  Next, a winning monitoring process is executed (S59). In this winning monitoring process, detection of the first starting port switch 611, the second starting port switch 621, the operation gate switch 631, the first large winning port switch 641, and the second large winning port switch 651 in the input process (S53). Based on the information, a game ball switch passage inspection is performed, and as a result, when it is determined that the game ball has passed through each switch, a request to send an effect control command including information indicating that the game ball has passed through each switch, And so on.

  Next, a prize ball control process is executed (S60). In this prize ball control process, a payout control command is transmitted to the payout control board 400 to instruct the number of prize balls corresponding to the type of winning prize, and the received data from the payout control board 400 is monitored to pay out the payout control board 400. Perform communication inspection with.

  Next, normal symbol operation gate monitoring processing is executed (S61). In this normal symbol operation gate monitoring process, the passing of the game ball to the operation gate 63 is monitored. In addition to updating the number of active suspension balls up to a maximum of four, random numbers related to normal symbol lottery are stored.

  Next, normal symbol control processing is executed (S62). In this normal symbol control process, since a series of processes related to the normal symbol display device 75 or the ordinary electric accessory 622 is performed, the normal symbol changing process, the normal symbol stop symbol displaying process, according to the value of the normal symbol game status The processing during normal electric accessory operation, the processing during normal electric accessory operation end demonstration, etc. are executed. In the normal symbol changing process, the display pattern number data of the normal symbol is created (updated) so that the normal symbol is variably displayed or fixedly displayed.

  Next, normal symbol variation start monitoring processing is executed (S63). In this normal symbol variation start monitoring process, when the normal symbol operating state is monitored and it is determined that the normal symbol variation start condition is satisfied, the normal symbol operation holding number of balls is digested by one, and the normal symbol variation is monitored. Determination of success / failure, determination of design, determination of variation pattern, setting of variation time, and the like are sequentially performed.

  Next, the start port monitoring control process is executed (S64). In this start port monitoring control process, the winnings of the game balls to the first start port 61 and the second start port 62 are monitored, and when there is a winning game ball, the number of reserved balls is updated and the special symbol lottery is concerned. Random number storage, prefetching notice effect determination, command memory number command request, etc. are performed in order.

  Next, a special symbol control process is executed (S65). In this special symbol control process, as a series of processes related to the special symbol display devices 71 and 72, according to the value of the special symbol game status, a special symbol variation start process (S420) and a special symbol variation process (S430) which will be described later in detail. ), Special symbol stop symbol display processing (S440), and the like.

  Next, a special electric accessory control process is executed (S66). In this process, when the lottery result of the special symbol is “big hit” or “small hit”, as the operation process related to the special electric accessory 642, setting of the operation start and operation end of the special electric accessory 642, large Update of the opening time and the number of times of opening the winning opening 64, the operation start setting of the probability variation function, the operation start setting of the variation time shortening function, the setting of the variation pattern selection state, etc. are executed in order.

  Next, a special winning opening valid period setting process is executed (S67). In this big winning opening effective period setting process, the winning effective period and the winning invalid period of the big winning opening 64 are determined, and the effective period data or invalid period data of the large winning opening 64 is set as the determination result.

  Next, a special symbol variation start monitoring control process is executed (S68). In this special symbol variation start monitoring control process, when there is an operation holding ball of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the number of the holding balls is digested, and a command request for the number of stored symbols, whether the special symbol is successful or not is determined. The determination of the special symbol, the determination of the probability variation function, the determination of the time shortening function, the setting of the operation pattern of the special electric accessory, the setting of the demonstration performance time, etc. are performed in order.

  Next, an abnormality detection process is executed (S69). In this abnormality detection process, based on the input information in the input process (S53), the magnetic detection signal by the magnetic sensor, the disconnection short circuit power supply abnormality signal, the radio wave detection signal by the radio sensor, the door / frame opening signal, etc. are inspected in order. Then, it is determined whether or not the gaming machine is in an error state. If it is in an error state, an effect control command (“error effect designation command”) including the error information is generated to request the effect control board 200 to display an error.

  Next, an entrance passage time abnormality detection process is executed (S70). In this incoming ball passing time abnormality detection process, when the ON signal of the winning detection switch is continuously detected for a predetermined time or more, the incoming ball passing time abnormality is set, and an effect control command (“error” A request for a production designation command ") and a request for outputting a security signal for output to an external terminal are made.

  Next, a game state display process is executed (S71). In this game state display process, display data such as the number of times that the special electric accessory 642 is continuously operated (the number of specified rounds), the number of reserved balls for normal symbols and special symbols, and the like are created. In addition, display data for displaying the information on the error state detected in the abnormality detection process on the status indicator lamp of the main control board 100 is created.

Next, an LED output process is executed (S73). In this LED output process, the special symbol control process (S65), in order to display special symbols and normal symbols, display the number of reserved balls, the number of times that the special electric accessory is operated continuously, display an error, etc. The display data created in the abnormality detection process (S69), the game state display process (S71), etc. are used as the special symbol display devices 71 and 72, the normal symbol display device 75, the special symbol hold lamps 73 and 74, and the general figure hold. In addition to outputting to the lamp 76, the status indicator lamp of the main control board 100, etc., the display in these various display devices is initialized.

  Next, a firing control signal output process is executed (S73). In this launch control signal output process, when no communication abnormality with the payout control board 400 or disconnection short circuit power supply abnormality is detected, a fire permission signal is output to the payout control board 400 and the game ball is allowed to be launched. To do. On the other hand, if an abnormality in communication with the payout control board 400 or an abnormality in the short circuit power supply is detected, a firing prohibition signal is output to the payout control board 400 to prohibit the launch of the game ball.

  Next, a solenoid output process is executed (S74). In this solenoid output process, in the normal symbol control process (S62) and the special electric accessory control process (S66) to operate each electric accessory 622, 642. Based on the acquired control data, an excitation signal is output to each of the electric accessory solenoids 623 and 643.

  Next, an effect control command transmission process is executed (S75). In the effect control command transmission process, the effect control command designated by the pointer is read out from the effect control commands stored in the command storage area (ring buffer) of the main information storage means 180 in the process described above. The control command is transmitted to the effect control board 200.

  Next, external information output processing is executed (S76). In the external information output process, the operating state information of the gaming machine is output as external information to an external device such as a hall computer via the external terminal board.

  Next, the contents of the saved register are restored, and the main CPU 101 is set in an interrupt enabled state (S77). As a result, the main control side timer interrupt process is terminated, the process returns to the main control side main process, and the main control side main process is executed until the next timer interrupt occurs.

If the main control board 100 detects a power-off (a decrease in supply voltage based on a predetermined threshold) during the main control-side main process or interrupt process, a non-maskable interrupt is generated and the power-off confirmation flag is turned on. To do. Then, after returning to the original process, the above-described power-off process (S
26 to S32).

≪Special design game processing≫
Next, a series of processes related to the special symbol game in the main control timer interrupt process will be described. The process related to the special symbol game includes the above-described start port monitoring control process (S64), special symbol control process (S65), special electric accessory control process (S66), special symbol variation start monitoring control process (S68), etc. Is applicable.

(Start-up port monitoring control process)
First, the start port monitoring control process (S64) will be described. FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing details of the start port monitoring control process (S64).

  First, it is determined whether or not a game winning at the first start port 61 has been detected (S201). When the winning to the first start port 61 is detected (S201: YES), it is determined whether or not the number of the operation reserved balls of the first special symbol is less than the upper limit number of 4 (S202).

When the number of reserved balls for the first special symbol is less than 4 (S202: YES), as a lottery random value for the first special symbol game, a random value per special symbol, a random symbol value per special symbol, a special symbol Fluctuation pattern random values are acquired, and each random value is stored in the first special symbol reservation storage area (hold n storage area) of the main information storage means 180 according to the order of entry (S203). Then, as an update of the number of reserved balls for operation of the first special symbol, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter is incremented by 1 (S204), and the winning check of the first start port 61 is completed.

  Subsequently, it is determined whether or not a game winning in the second starting port 62 has been detected (S205). When a winning at the second starting port 62 is detected (S205: YES), it is determined whether or not the number of operation reserved balls of the second special symbol is less than the upper limit number of 4 (S206). When the number of reserved balls in the second special symbol is less than 4 (S206: YES), a random number per special symbol, a random symbol value per special symbol, a special symbol, as a lottery random value related to the second special symbol game Fluctuation pattern random values are acquired, and each random value is stored in the second special symbol reservation storage area (hold n storage area) of the main information storage means 180 according to the order of entry (S207). Then, as the update of the number of reserved balls for operation of the second special symbol, the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter is incremented by 1 (S208), and the winning check at the second start port 62 is finished.

  Subsequently, whether or not the number of reserved balls for operation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol has been updated, that is, whether or not the number of reserved balls for operation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol has been added in S204 or S208. Is determined (S209). When there is an update of the number of balls with an operating reserve (S209: YES), a symbol memory number command including information on the number of balls with an operating reserve of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is generated, and this is stored as main information storage means. The command is stored in the command storage area 180 (S210).

  Next, the state of the gaming machine is confirmed, and it is determined whether it is a prior determination timing (S211). If it is a prior determination timing (S211: YES), a random number value per special symbol is read from the random number buffer in the reserved n storage area, and a prior determination is made (S212). Then, a validity pre-judgment command including information on the pre-judgment result (pre-judgment pre-judgment number) is generated and stored in the command storage area of the main information storage unit 180 (S213).

  Further, the symbol random number value per special symbol is read from the symbol random number buffer in the reserved n storage area, and symbol preliminary determination is performed (S214). Then, a symbol pre-determination command including this pre-determination result information (symbol pre-determination number) is generated and stored in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180 (S215). Further, the special symbol variation pattern random number value is read from the variation pattern random number buffer in the reserved n storage area, and the variation pattern prior determination is performed (S216). Then, a variation pattern advance determination command including information on the prior determination result (variation pattern advance determination number) is generated and stored in the command storage area of the main information storage unit 180 (S217).

(Special symbol variation start monitoring control process)
Next, the special symbol variation start monitoring control process (S68) will be described. FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing details of the special symbol fluctuation start monitoring control process (S68).

  In this special symbol fluctuation monitoring and monitoring control process (S68), a special symbol fluctuation start monitoring process to be described later is applied to the special symbol side satisfying the fluctuation start condition among the first special symbol and the second special symbol. (S310) is executed. When both the first special symbol and the second special symbol satisfy the variation start condition, the process on the second special symbol side is preferentially executed as described above.

  First, it is determined whether a big hit or a small hit is being made (S301). Subsequently, whether both the first special symbol and the second special symbol are waiting for change, that is, whether the first special symbol game status and the second special symbol game status are both “00H (waiting for change)”. It is determined whether or not (S302).

Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls for operation of the second special symbol is “0” (S303),
If the number of reserved balls is not “0” (S303: NO), it is considered that the variation start condition of the second special symbol is satisfied, and the address of the second special symbol variation start monitoring table (used in subsequent processing) The addresses of the various tables to be set and the addresses of the RAM storage area) are set (S304), and the process proceeds to the special symbol variation start monitoring process (S310) on the second special symbol side. That is, in the present embodiment, when there is an operation holding ball of the second special symbol, the operation holding ball of the second special symbol is given priority regardless of the presence or absence of the operation holding ball of the first special symbol. Digested. Details of the special symbol variation start monitoring process (S310) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, when the number of reserved balls for operation of the second special symbol is “0” (S303: YES), it is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls for operation of the first special symbol is “0” (S305). . If the number of reserved balls is not “0” (S305: NO), it is assumed that the first special symbol variation start condition is satisfied, and the address of the first special symbol variation start monitoring table (hereinafter referred to as “the first special symbol variation start monitoring table”). After setting the addresses of the various tables used in the processing and the addresses of the RAM storage area (S306), the process proceeds to the special symbol variation start monitoring process (S310) on the first special symbol side.

  Note that if the variation start conditions of the first special symbol and the second special symbol are not satisfied (S301: YES, S302: NO, S305: YES), the special symbol variation start monitoring process (S310) is skipped. .

(Special symbol fluctuation start monitoring process)
Next, the special symbol variation start monitoring process (S310) will be described. FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing details of the special symbol variation start monitoring process (S310).

  In the special symbol fluctuation start monitoring process (S310), the first special symbol fluctuation start monitoring table or the second special symbol fluctuation start monitoring table set in S304 or S306 described above is referred to The special symbol side process will be executed, but the processing method is the same on the first special symbol side and the second special symbol side, so the first special symbol side process is the exception unless otherwise specified. Whether or not there is a process on the second special symbol side will be described as a group without distinction.

  First, 1 is subtracted from the number of reserved balls on the special symbol side that is the subject of the current fluctuation start (S311). Then, a symbol memory number command including information on the number of suspended balls of the first special symbol and the second special symbol after the subtraction is generated and stored in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180 (S312). Subsequently, the special symbol holding storage area on the side of the special symbol subject to the start of the current change is accessed, and the random number value per special symbol and the special symbol stored in the first reserved storage area (holding 1 storage area) In order to sequentially read the design random number value and the special design variation pattern random value, and use these random number values for the special symbol success / failure determination process (S320), the symbol determination process (S330), and the variation pattern selection process (S423) described later, Transfer to the special symbol success / failure determination area, special symbol determination area, and special symbol variation pattern determination area of the main information storage means 180 (S313). Further, as the update of the hold storage area, the hold ball information stored in the hold 2 storage area to the hold 4 storage area is shifted to the lower hold storage area, and the hold 4 storage area is cleared to zero (S314).

Subsequently, a special symbol success / failure determination process is executed (S320). In the special symbol success / failure determination process (S320), first, a special symbol success / failure lottery table is acquired. At this time, if the gaming state is a special symbol probability changing state, a high-probability lottery table is obtained, and if the gaming state is a normal state, a low-probability lottery table is obtained. Next, a random value per special symbol is read from the special symbol success / failure determination area of the main information storage unit 180. Then, referring to the special symbol success / failure lottery table, the special symbol success / failure determination is executed based on the random number value per special symbol. Further, values corresponding to the determination result (big hit data “55H”, small hit data “33H”, and loss data “00H”) are stored in the special symbol determination flag of the main information storage unit 180.

  Subsequently, a symbol determination process is executed (S330). In the symbol determination process (S330), a special symbol stop symbol, a symbol group type, and a character effect number (variable added symbol information) are determined according to the result of the determination. Then, the special symbol stop symbol, the symbol group type, and the character effect number determined this time are stored in the symbol storage area of the main information storage unit 180. The character effect number includes the determined symbol group type (seven patterns of symbol groups A to G) and the special symbol and normal symbol probability variation function operating states (special symbol probability change ON / special symbol probability change OFF). Any one of 28 patterns in total is determined based on a combination of (4 patterns of normal symbol probability variation ON / normal symbol probability variation OFF). If the result of the determination is wrong, the character effect number “0” is determined.

  Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the result of the determination is a small hit (S341), and whether or not the result of the determination is a big win (S342). If the result of the determination is a small hit (S341: YES), the process proceeds to S347, and if the result of the determination is out of order (S341: NO, S342: NO), the process proceeds to S349.

  On the other hand, if the determination result is a big hit (S341: NO, S342: YES), the special symbol is displayed as the gaming state after the special game based on the type of the symbol group determined in S330 (the jackpot type). It is determined whether or not to operate the probability variation function (S343). That is, when the symbol group type (big hit type) indicates a specific symbol, it is decided to provide a probability variation function, and when the symbol group type indicates a normal symbol, the probability variation Decide not to give the function. This determination result is stored in the probability variation determination flag of the main information storage unit 180.

  In addition, based on the type of symbol group determined in S330 (big hit type), the number of times the variable time reduction function is activated is determined as the gaming state after the special game (S344), and the number of times the electric chew support function is activated is determined. (S345). This determination result (the operation time information of the variation time shortening function, the operation frequency information of the electric chew support function) is stored in the time information storage area and the easy-to-enter number storage area of the main information storage unit 180.

  Subsequently, the operation pattern of the special electric accessory 642 is set based on the type (big hit type) of the symbol group determined in S330 (S346). Specifically, as the operation pattern of the special electric accessory 642, the specified number of round games (in this example, 16 rounds, 8 rounds, 2 rounds), the maximum opening time of the big prize opening 64 (in this example, 30 rounds) Seconds, 0.05 seconds).

  Next, based on the type of symbol group determined in S330 and the current game state, a variation pattern selection state after the end of the special game or after the small hit game is set (S347). Subsequently, based on the type of symbol group determined in S330, a demonstration performance time (a hit start demo time and a hit end demo time) of the special game or the small hit game is set (S348). Next, the special symbol success / failure determination region and the special symbol / symbol determination region of the main information storage unit 180 used in the above-described special symbol success / failure determination processing (S320) and symbol determination processing (S330) are cleared (S349). Then, the special symbol game status on the special symbol side to be changed this time is changed from “00H (standby)” to “01H (change start)” (S350).

(Special symbol control processing)
Next, the special symbol control process (S65) will be described. FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing details of the special symbol control process (S65).

  First, it is determined whether or not the special electric accessory 642 is inactive, that is, whether or not the special electric accessory game status is “00H (waiting for winning)” (S401). Subsequently, when the special electric accessory 642 is not operating (S401: YES), it is determined whether or not the second special symbol game status is not "00H (standby)" (S402).

  When the second special symbol game status is not “00H (standby)” (S402: YES), the second special symbol control table (used in the subsequent processing) is executed to execute the processing related to the second special symbol. The addresses of the various tables and the addresses of the RAM storage areas are set (S403), and the process proceeds to the special symbol control general-purpose process (S410). On the other hand, when the second special symbol game status is “00H (standby)” (S402: NO), the first special symbol control table (in the subsequent processing) is executed to execute the process related to the first special symbol. The addresses of various tables to be used and the addresses of the RAM storage areas are set (S404), and the process proceeds to the special symbol control general-purpose process (S410).

  In the special symbol control general-purpose process (S410) described below, the first special symbol control table or the second special symbol control table set in S403 or S404 described above is used, and the special subject to change this time is used. The process on the symbol side will be executed, but the processing method is the same on the first special symbol side and the second special symbol side, so is it the process on the first special symbol side unless otherwise specified? A description will be given collectively without distinguishing whether the processing is on the second special symbol side. Details of this special symbol control general-purpose process (S410) will be described later with reference to FIG.

(Special design control general-purpose processing)
Subsequently, special symbol control general-purpose processing is executed (S410). FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing details of the special symbol control general-purpose process (S410).

  In this special symbol control general-purpose processing (S410), branch processing (S411 to S414) is executed to shift to processing according to the special symbol game status values ("01H", "02H", "03H"). First, it is determined whether or not the special symbol game status on the special symbol side subject to the current variation is not 0 (S411). If the special symbol game status is not “00H” (S411: YES), it is determined whether or not the special symbol game status is “01H (change start)” (S412). If the special symbol game status is “01H” (S412: YES), the process proceeds to a special symbol variation start process (S420). Details of the special symbol variation start process (S420) will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, in the case of NO in S412, it is determined whether or not the special symbol game status is “02H (changed)” (S413). When the special symbol game status is “02H” (S413: YES), the process proceeds to the special symbol changing process (S430). Details of the special symbol variation processing (S430) will be described later with reference to FIG. If NO in S413, it is determined whether or not the special symbol game status is "03H (stopped symbol display)" (S414). If the special symbol game status is “03H” (S414: YES), the process proceeds to a special symbol stop symbol display process (S440). Details of the special symbol stop symbol display processing (S440) will be described later with reference to FIG.

(Special symbol variation start processing)
Next, the special symbol variation start process (S420) will be described. FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing details of the special symbol variation start process (S420).

First, a special symbol variation pattern table is acquired based on the result of the lottery determination and the variation pattern selection state (S421). Subsequently, a special symbol variation pattern random value is read from the special symbol variation pattern determination area of the main information storage unit 180 (S422). Then, referring to the special symbol variation pattern table, one of a plurality of variation patterns is selected based on the special symbol variation pattern random value (S423).

  Next, a variation time corresponding to the variation pattern selected this time is set (S424). Then, as a special symbol variation start setting, the variation time is stored in the special symbol game timer of the symbol display control means 165 (S425), and a variation start command to the effect control board 200 is generated (S426). As the variation start command, in order to start the symbol variation effect in the effect display device 70, a variation pattern designation command and a symbol designation command are sequentially generated and stored in the command storage area of the main information storage unit 180.

  Subsequently, the contents of the special symbol variation pattern determination area of the main information storage unit 180 used for determining the variation pattern are cleared (S427). Then, the special symbol game status is changed from “01H (change start)” to “02H (change)” (S428).

(Special symbol change processing)
Next, the special symbol variation processing (S430) will be described. FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing details of the special symbol changing process (S430).

  First, a special symbol display pattern number switching process is executed in order to perform a special symbol variable display (S431). In this display pattern number switching process (S431), special pattern display pattern number data is generated for each predetermined switching time. The display pattern number data is output to the first special symbol display device 71 or the second special symbol display device 72 in the LED output process (S73) in order to display the variable special symbols in a variable manner or in a definite manner.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the special symbol game timer has reached "0 (timeout)", that is, whether or not the special symbol variation time has ended (S432). When the variation time of the special symbol is completed (S432: YES), a special symbol stop symbol to be fixedly displayed on the first special symbol display device 71 or the second special symbol display device 72 is set (S433). Subsequently, a change stop command for instructing the effect control board 200 to confirm and display the decoration symbol is generated and stored in the command storage area of the main information storage unit 180 (S434).

  Next, “500 (ms)” is stored in the special symbol game timer as a fixed display time (S435). Note that the “determined display time” is a time for definitely stopping and displaying the stopped symbol when the special symbol is suspended. Then, the special symbol game status is changed from “02H (fluctuating)” to “03H (stopping symbol display)” (S436).

(Special symbol stop symbol display processing)
Next, the special symbol stop symbol display processing (S440) will be described. 20 to 21 are flowcharts showing details of the special symbol stop symbol display processing (S440).

  First, it is determined whether or not the special symbol game timer has become “0 (timeout)”, that is, whether or not the fixed display time of the special symbol (stop symbol) has ended (S441). When the special symbol fixed display time is over (S441: YES), the special symbol game status is changed from "03H (stopped symbol display)" to "00H (standby)" (S442).

Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the winning / failing determination data stored in the special symbol determination flag of the main information storage means 180 is the big hit data “55H” (S443). When the hit / decision determination data is jackpot data (S443: YES), the special symbol probability variation function is deactivated (S444), the special symbol variation time reduction function is deactivated (S445), and the electric support function is activated. Stop (S446) is performed in order. Specifically, the special symbol mode flag is set to “00H (
(Not actuated) ”and“ 00H ”are set in the hourly number counter and the easy-to-enter state counter to zero-clear.

  Next, as a special game start demo setting process, a start demo display time is set, and an effect control command (big hit start demo command) for instructing start of the start demo effect is generated (S447). Subsequently, the number of executions of the variation pattern selection state (variation pattern selection state number counter) is cleared to zero (S448). Also, the special electric accessory game status is changed from “00H (waiting for winning)” to “01H (special game)” (S449). Then, “00H” is set to clear the contents of the success / failure determination flag (S450).

  On the other hand, if the determination data is not big hit data (S443: NO), it is determined whether or not the special symbol probability variation function is in operation (S451). When the special symbol probability variation function is in operation (S451: YES), 1 is subtracted from the probability variation counter of the main information storage means 180 as the digest of the current special symbol variation (step S452). . Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the probability variation counter is zero (step S453). When the probability variation counter is zero (S453: YES), the operation of the special symbol probability variation function is stopped (S454). If the probability variation counter after subtraction is not zero (S453: NO), S454 is skipped and the process proceeds to S455.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the special symbol variation time reduction function is in operation (S455). If the special symbol variation time reduction function is in operation (S455: YES), the time-count counter of the main information storage means 180 is decremented by 1 as the digest of the current special symbol variation (step S456). . Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the time reduction counter is zero (step S457). If the hourly number counter is zero (S457: YES), the special symbol variable time reduction function is deactivated, assuming that the number of times of termination of the special symbol time-short state has been reached (S458). If the time-count counter after subtraction is not zero (S457: NO), S458 is skipped and the process proceeds to S459.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the electric chew support function is in operation (S459). When the electric chew support function is in operation (S459: YES), 1 is subtracted from the easy-to-enter state counter of the main information storage unit 180 as the digest of the number of changes in the special symbol this time (step S460). . Next, it is determined whether or not the easy-to-enter state counter is zero (step S461). If the easy entry state number counter is zero (S461: YES), the operation of the electric chew support function is stopped (S462), assuming that the end number of easy entry states has been reached. If the easy-to-enter state counter after subtraction is not zero (S461: NO), S462 is skipped and the process proceeds to S463.

  Next, 1 is subtracted from the variation pattern selection state number counter of the main information storage means 180 (S463). Then, the variation pattern selection state is updated (S464). Specifically, referring to the variation pattern selection state number counter of the main information storage unit 180, it is determined whether or not the number of executions of the current variation pattern selection state has reached a preset end number. If it has been reached, the state is switched to the next specified variation pattern selection state. On the other hand, if the end count has not been reached, the current variation pattern selection state is maintained.

  Next, an effect control command (game state designation command) including the current gaming state information and the variation pattern selection state information updated in the above-described S451 to S464 is generated and stored in the command storage area of the main information storage unit 180. (S465). On the side of the production control board 200, the production mode is set and updated based on the information of the game state designation command.

  Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the small hit data “33H” is stored in the special symbol determination flag (S466). When the small hit data is stored (S466: YES), as the start demo setting process of the small hit game, the start demonstration display time is set, and an effect control command (small hit) that instructs the start of the start demonstration effect Start demo command) is generated (S467). Subsequently, the special electric accessory game status is changed from “00H (waiting for winning)” to “02H (small winning game)” (S468). Then, “00H” is set to clear the contents of the success / failure determination flag (S469).

  On the other hand, when the small symbol data “33H” is not stored in the special symbol determination flag (S466: NO), that is, when the shift data “00H” is stored in the special symbol determination flag, S467 to S469. To skip. Note that when the special symbol determination flag is outlier data, the process of clearing the contents of the flag was not performed because “00H” was originally stored as outlier data.

(Special electric accessory control processing)
Next, the special electric accessory control process (S66) will be described. FIGS. 22-24 is a flowchart which shows the detail of an electrically-driven accessory control process (S66).

  First, it is determined whether or not the special electric accessory game status is “01H (special game)” (S501). If the special electric accessory game status is “01H” (S501: YES), the special game process is executed in the subsequent processes. In this special game process, first, it is determined whether or not the special electric accessory 642, 652 is operating (S502). If the special electric combination 642, 652 is not operating (S502: NO), it is determined whether it is the operation start time of the special electric combination 642, 652 (S503). The operation start time of the special electric actors 642 and 652 is a timing at which the operation of the special electric actors 642 and 652 is started in each round game.

  When it is the operation start time of the special electric accessory 642, 652 (S503: YES), an effect control command (round effect designation command) is generated to start the round effect, and this is stored in the main information storage unit 180. Store in the command storage area (S504). On the side of the effect control board 200, a round effect corresponding to each round game in the special game is executed based on the information of the round effect designation command (information such as the current number of rounds). Then, the operation of the special electric actors 642 and 652 is started (S505), and the processing of S506 to S510 is executed as the operation during the operation of the special electric officers 642 and 652.

  As a process during the operation of the special electric accessory 642, 652, it is determined whether or not the game ball has won the maximum number of winning prizes 64, 65 (S506), and the special electric accessory 642, 652 is activated. It is determined whether the time (opening time) has elapsed (S507). At this time, if the game balls have won the maximum winning number 64, 65 in the maximum winning number (S506: YES) or if the operation time of the special electric accessory 642, 652 has passed (S507: YES), the special electric The operation of the accessory 642, 652 is stopped (S507). Then, it is determined whether or not the number of continuous operations of the special electric accessories 642, 652 has reached a predetermined number of rounds (S509). If the number of continuous operations has not reached the specified number of rounds (S509: NO), the number of continuous operations of the special electric accessory 642, 652 is incremented by 1 (S510).

  On the other hand, if the number of continuous operations of the special electric accessory 642, 652 has reached the specified number of rounds (S509: YES), the process proceeds to S511, and the end demo display time is set as the special game hit end demo setting process. And an effect control command (big hit end demo command) for instructing the start of the end demo effect is generated (S511).

  Subsequently, the variable time reduction number information set in S344 is stored in the time reduction number counter (S512). Further, the easy entry state number information set in S345 is stored in the easy entry state number counter (S513).

  Subsequently, referring to the content of the probability variation determination flag set in S343, it is determined whether or not the operation of the condition device is an operation based on a specific symbol (so-called probability variation symbol) (S514). When the condition device is activated by a specific symbol (S514: YES), the operation time data “7FH” is stored in the probability variation counter of the main information storage means 180, and the special symbol probability variation function is activated. (S515). On the other hand, when the condition device is not operated by the specific symbol (S514: NO), the non-operating data “00H” is stored in the probability variation counter, and S515 is skipped.

  Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the variation time shortening number information stored in the time reduction number counter is variation time shortening function operation data (data other than “00H”) (S516). If it is the variation time shortening function operation data (S516: YES), the operation of the special symbol variation time shortening function is started (S517). On the other hand, when it is not the fluctuation time shortening function operation data (S516: NO), S517 is skipped.

  Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the easy entry state number information stored in the easy entry state number counter is electric Chu support function operation data (data other than “00H”) (S518). If it is the electric Chu support function operation data (S518: YES), the operation of the electric Chu support function is started (S519 to S521). That is, the normal symbol probability variation function operation start (S519), the normal symbol variation time reduction function operation start (S520), and the normal electric accessory 622 open extension function operation start (S521) are executed in order. On the other hand, if it is not the electric Chu support function operation data, S519 to S521 are skipped.

  Next, the variation pattern selection state determined in S347 is switched to (S522). Subsequently, an effect control command (game state designation command) including the game state information after the special game and the variation pattern selection state information set in S512 to S522 described above is generated and stored in the main information storage unit 180. Store in the command storage area (S523). On the effect control board 200 side, the effect mode after the special game is set based on the information of the game state designation command. Then, the special electric accessory game status is changed from “01H (special game)” to “00H (waiting for winning)” (S524).

  On the other hand, when the special electric accessory game status is not “01H (special game)” (S501: NO), the process proceeds to S530 and whether the special electric accessory game status is “02H (small hit game)”. It is determined whether or not (S530). When the special electric accessory game status is “02H” (S530: YES), the small hit game processing is executed in the subsequent processing.

  In the small hit game processing, first, it is determined whether or not the special electric accessory 642, 652 is operating (S531). When the special electric combination 642, 652 is not operating (S531: NO), the operation of the special electric combination 642, 652 is started (S532). On the other hand, when the special electric actors 642 and 652 are operating (S531: YES), S532 is skipped.

Subsequently, as a process during the operation of the special electric accessory 642, 652, it is determined whether or not the game ball has won the maximum winning number at the special winning openings 64, 65 (S533), and the special electric accessory 642 is determined. It is determined whether the operation time (opening time) 652 has elapsed (S534). At this time, if the maximum number of game balls is won in the big winning openings 64 and 65 (S533: YES), or if the operating time of the special electric accessory 642, 652 has passed (S534: YES), the special electric The operation of the accessory 642, 652 is stopped (S535).

  Subsequently, as the end demo setting process for the small hit game, the end demo display time is set, and an effect control command (small hit end demo command) for instructing the start of the end demo effect is generated (S536). Next, the variation pattern selection state determined in S347 is switched to (S537). Subsequently, an effect control command (game state designation command) including the variation pattern selection state information after the special game set in S537 is generated and stored in the command storage area of the main information storage unit 180 ( S538). This gaming state designation command is used on the side of the production control board 200 for determining the production mode transition trigger, specifying the migration destination production mode, and the like. Then, the special electric accessory game status is changed from “01H (special game)” to “00H (waiting for winning)” (S538).

<Processing on the production control board side>
Next, the procedure of the operation process in the effect control board 200 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. The process on the side of the effect control board 200 includes a reset start process (including an effect control side main process) that is executed when the sub-main CPU 201 is reset, such as after power-on, and an effect control side timer interrupt that is activated at regular intervals. Ramp activated when triggered by the arrival of a predetermined generation time specified in the time schedule of the process, the reception control process of the effect control command activated due to the strobe signal from the main control board 100, and the time schedule of the variable effect pattern It includes a production interruption process and a transmission interruption process of an image control command activated at regular intervals.

  In each interrupt process (exception process), a priority level indicating a priority when a plurality of interrupt processes occurs is set. In this example, “reset start processing by power reset (FIG. 25): highest priority”, “reset start processing at the time of various abnormalities (FIG. 25): highest priority” → “production control command reception interrupt processing (FIG. 34): Level 7 ”→“ Reset start processing by WDT (during runaway detection) (FIG. 25): Level 3 ”→“ Image control command transmission interrupt processing (FIG. 36): Level 2 ”→“ Production control side timer interrupt processing (FIG. 35): Level 1 ”and so on, the priority levels are ranked. Note that the “reset start processing at the time of various abnormalities” is, for example, when the CPU 201 executes an illegal instruction, when the CPU 201 tries to access in an illegal area or by an illegal method, and during DMA (Direct Memory Access) transfer It starts when an error occurs. In the present embodiment, the above-described plural types of interrupt processing are illustrated, but actually other interrupt processing also exists.

  In the effect control side main process, the process is basically performed after setting all interrupts to be prohibited or interrupts other than the effect control command reception interrupt being set. Then, when the production control side main process is in an interrupt-permitted state, each interrupt process is started in a manner that interrupts the main process. In each interrupt process, when there is a request for another interrupt process during execution of the interrupt process (multiple interrupts are generated), in principle, if the interrupt process has a higher priority level than the interrupt process being executed, While the interrupt request is permitted, the interrupt request is prohibited when the interrupt process has a lower priority level or the same priority level as the interrupt process being executed. That is, each interrupt process is advanced in a state where other interrupts having the same priority level or a lower priority level are prohibited. Then, each interrupt process returns to the production control side main process with all interrupts permitted. Note that the priority order (priority level) of such interrupt factors is defined by register settings of the effect control microcomputer 210 (interrupt controller).

<Reset start processing>
First, reset start processing of the effect control board 200 will be described. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing reset start processing of the effect control board 200. In this reset start process,
The program is started after the security check of the sub-main CPU 201 is performed by any one of reset caused by power-on, reset caused by various abnormalities, and reset caused by WDT (during runaway detection). , The processing after S601 is started.

  First, as an initial setting required when the power is turned on, a head address is set as an initial value of the stack area in the stack pointer (S601). Then, all interrupt processing is prohibited until various initial settings are completed (S602).

  Subsequently, as basic settings related to hardware, an initial value is set in a built-in register provided in the sub-main CPU 201 and the I / O port circuit 204 is initialized (S603). Further, the memory area in the RAM 203 of the effect control microcomputer 210 is initialized (S604). Here, an initial value is set for a variable with an initial value, and initialization by zero clear is performed for a variable without an initial value. Further, the sub main CPU 201 appropriately develops the control program stored in the ROM 202 in the RAM 203.

  Subsequently, interrupts other than the production control command reception interrupt process are prohibited (S605). Next, among various errors set in advance for each model, a process for setting the type of error to be valid for the model is performed (S606). Furthermore, a turn-off request is made to turn off the effect lamp LP (the frame lamp 10, the panel lamp 25) (S607). Then, a watchdog timer is started to monitor the runaway of the sub-main CPU 201 (S608).

  Subsequently, an effect control side main process is executed as the main process of the game effect (S609). Details of the effect control side main process (S609) will be described later with reference to FIG. Note that when the process shifts to the production control side main process in S609, it is not normally possible to return from the main process to the reset start process, but in the unlikely event that the process returns to this process due to a program bug or the like. The mode is shifted to a low power consumption mode (sleep mode) in which power consumption is lower than that during normal operation.

<< Production control side main process >>
Next, the production control side main process (S609) of the production control board 200 will be described. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the effect control side main process (S609).

  First, an address (start address where the program is expanded) for starting a check as to whether or not the control program is correctly expanded in the RAM 203 in the production control side main process is acquired (S611). Subsequently, all interrupts are permitted (activation of various interrupt processes is permitted) (S612).

  Next, a device initialization operation is executed (S613). This initialization operation is an operation mode that is executed only once when the pachinko gaming machine PM is turned on (at the start of resetting). In order to control the operation of the movable accessory 24 by a device such as a motor or a solenoid. It is executed for the purpose of confirming the position information necessary for. At the end of the initialization operation, the movable accessory 24 returns to a preset initial position (reference position).

  Subsequently, the watchdog timer is cleared to restart the watchdog timer (S614). At this time, when the sub main CPU 201 is executing the program normally, a predetermined clear word is written to the WDT clear register of the sub main CPU 201 within a preset time-out period, so that the watchdog timer Cleared and restarted. On the other hand, when the watchdog timer times out, a user reset occurs.

  Subsequently, input port check processing is executed (S615). In this input port check processing, reading of the I / O port circuit 204 (input port) in the port input / output processing S912 in timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, is monitored each time an interrupt occurs, and is monitored a plurality of times (for example, four times). When the input port states are all “1”, the signal level is “1 (H level)”, when all the input ports are “0”, the signal level is “0 (L level)”, otherwise the signal level is set. Do not change (this determines the input signal).

  Subsequently, an error effect management process is executed (S616). In this error effect management process, error effects by various devices are started based on the error effect pattern set in the subsequent command analysis process (S620). Further, in the error presentation management process, an initial value (error presentation time) is set in the error management timer to manage the progress of the error presentation. This error management timer is subtracted and updated at an interval of 16 ms in the error management timer update process (S920) of the production control side timer interrupt process. When the error management timer times out, the error presentation is ended.

  Subsequently, the effect button monitoring control process is executed (S617). In this effect button monitoring control process, when a button notice effect is incorporated during symbol variation, the input state of the effect button 15 within the operation effective time is monitored, and a plurality of preset values are set according to the button notice effect. The content of the production according to the input state of the production button 15 is determined from the types of production content.

  Subsequently, a notice lottery management process is executed (S618). In this notice lottery management process, a notice effect pattern that defines the details of the notice effect that occurs at each stage of the decorative symbol variation process in accordance with the scenario of the variation effect pattern selected in the subsequent command analysis process (S620) ( The notice performance number) is determined by lottery. The notice effect number determined here is temporarily stored in the notice effect number storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260. In addition, an image control command for designating the notice effect number to the image control board 300 side is generated and set in the image control command buffer of the sub-main information storage unit 260. At this time, when an accessory announcement effect pattern (an accessory announcement effect number) is selected as the announcement effect pattern, an accessory request is generated, and the movable accessory 24 is obtained in the subsequent device management process (S619). Drive patterns are identified. In this example, not all of the multiple types of notice effects (notice effect patterns) that occur within one variation of the decorative symbol are drawn in one main loop process, but the main loop process efficiency is improved. Therefore, a lottery is performed across a plurality of main loop processes, divided for each time of occurrence of a notice effect (for example, a fluctuation start stage, a reach generation stage, and a fluctuation stop stage). At that time, the notice effect that occurs at the beginning of the decorative symbol change stage needs to be synchronized with the start of the decorative symbol change (send the image control command immediately). To do.

Then, to execute the device management process (S619). In this device management process, when there is an operation request (lamp request, accessory request) of various devices in a command analysis process (S620) described later, a plurality of types of pattern data (lamp pattern, drive pattern) stored in the ROM 203 ), The pattern data corresponding to the production number (lamp production number, accessory announcement production number) is specified, and control of the target device is started. In the lamp pattern data of the effect lamp LP, lamp data associated with every frame time (time required to update an image frame once: 16 ms) is stored as schedule data. In this example, one frame time corresponds to the time required for drawing processing of one frame when drawing is performed at about 60 frames per second (= about 60 fps) in the effect display device 70. Similarly, in the driving pattern data of the movable accessory 24, driving data associated with each interrupt cycle (1 ms) is stored as schedule data. As a result, control data (lamp data, drive data, etc.) is output to the target device at regular intervals in an effect control side timer interrupt process described later, and the operation of the target device is started. On the other hand, when the output of a series of control data (lamp data, drive data) is completed in the production control side timer interruption process described later, the production lamp LP is turned off or the operation of the movable accessory 24 is stopped. The control of the target device is finished.

  Subsequently, command analysis processing (S620) is executed. In this command analysis process, it is monitored whether or not an effect control command is stored in the command storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260. If an effect control command is stored, this command is read out, and the effect control command that has been read out is read out. The effect control process corresponding to the type is executed. Details of the command analysis processing (S620) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Then, it is determined whether command analysis (effect control command analysis) has been executed during the current loop processing (S621). If it is immediately after command analysis (S621: YES), the process returns to S614 and proceeds to the next loop process. On the other hand, when the command analysis is not executed (S621: NO), the effect lottery random number update process is executed (S622). In this effect lottery random number update process, effect lottery random numbers such as a pre-reading notice lottery random number, a decorative design random number, a variable effect pattern random number, and a notice effect random number are updated. Specifically, 1 is added to the numerical value of each random number counter, and when the numerical value exceeds the maximum value, the value is returned to the minimum value.

(Command analysis processing)
Next, command analysis processing (S620) will be described. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing details of the command analysis processing (S620). In this command analysis processing, it is monitored whether or not an effect control command from the main control board 100 is stored in the command storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260, and an effect corresponding to the type of the stored effect control command. Execute control processing.

  First, it is determined whether or not a gaming state designation command is stored in the command storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260 (S631). When the game state designation command is stored (step S631: YES), the process proceeds to the effect state transition process (S632). In the effect state transition process (S632), a process of changing the effect mode is executed based on the variation pattern selection state information included in the game state designation command. Details of the effect state transition process (S632) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Subsequently, it is determined whether or not a hold-related command is stored in the command storage area of the sub-main information storage unit 260 (S633). Here, the hold related commands include a symbol memory number command and a prior determination command. When the hold related command is stored (S633: YES), the process proceeds to the hold information management process (S634). In the hold information management process (S634), a symbol storage number command or a pre-determination command is read from the sub-main information storage means 260, a pre-reading determination is executed based on the information of the pre-determination result, and the hold display of the effect display device 70 is performed. Processing for updating the display number and display mode (display color, etc.) of the reserved images displayed in the sections 701 and 702 is performed.

Next, it is determined whether or not a symbol variation related command is stored in the command storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260 (S635). Here, the symbol variation related commands include a variation start command and a variation stop command. When the symbol variation related command is stored (step S635: YES), the routine proceeds to variation effect content determination processing (S636). In this variation effect content determination process (S636), if the received symbol variation related command is a variation start command, processing for starting the symbol variation effect is executed, and the received symbol variation related command is a variation stop command. In some cases, a process for ending the symbol variation effect being executed is executed. Details of the variation effect content determination process (S636) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Subsequently, it is determined whether or not a big hit effect related command is stored in the command storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260 (S637). Here, the jackpot effect-related commands include a jackpot start demonstration effect command, a round effect designation command, and a jackpot end demonstration effect command. When the big hit effect related command is stored (step S637: YES), the process proceeds to the big hit effect content determination process (S638). In this jackpot effect content determination process (S638), a process for executing a start demonstration effect, a round effect, and an end demonstration effect is performed. Details of the jackpot effect content determination process (S638) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Subsequently, it is determined whether or not a small hit effect related command is stored in the command storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260 (S639). Here, the small hit effect-related commands include a small hit start demonstration effect command and a small hit end demonstration effect command. When the small hit effect related command is stored (step S639: YES), the process proceeds to the small hit effect content determination process (S640). In the small hit effect content determination processing (S640), processing for executing the small hit start demonstration effect and the small hit end demonstration effect is performed.

  Subsequently, it is determined whether or not an error effect designation command is stored in the command storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260 (S641). When this error effect designation command is stored (S641: YES), the process proceeds to an error effect content determination process (S642). In this error effect content determination process (S642), an error effect designation command is read from the sub-main information storage means 260, and an error for notifying the error state by the image display of the effect display device 70, the light emission mode of the effect lamp LP, or the like. Determine the production pattern.

  What is the case when the effect control command is not stored in the command storage area of the sub main information storage means 260 (S631: NO, S633: NO, S635: NO, S637: NO, S639: NO, S641: NO) Then, the command analysis process is terminated.

(Production state transition process)
Next, the production state transition process (S632) will be described. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing details of the effect state transition process (S632).

  First, the contents of the game state designation command from the main control board 100 are analyzed, and information regarding the variation pattern selection state included in the contents of this command is acquired (S701). Subsequently, based on the information regarding the variation pattern selection state acquired in S701, it is determined whether or not the trigger for transition to the production mode has arrived (S702). When the timing for transition to the effect mode has arrived (S702: YES), the transition setting to the predetermined effect mode is performed in S703 and thereafter. In addition, the transition trigger of the production mode is in principle linked with the transition trigger of the variation pattern selection state, for example, when the special game ends or when the end number of the variation pattern selection state expires. Note that the final number of times of the variation pattern selection state is the number of times related to the number of variations of the special symbol.

First, it is determined whether or not the transition destination of the variation pattern selection state managed on the main control board 100 side is the low probability normal variation state α (S703). When the transition destination is the low probability normal variation state α (S703: YES), the normal rendering mode Mα is set as the transition destination of the rendering mode (S704). When the normal effect mode Mα is entered, the normal background data number is set in the background data storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260 (S705). In the normal effect mode Mα, for example, a normal background image of “wilderness” is displayed on the effect display device 70 from the next symbol variation. On the other hand, when the transition destination is not the low probability normal variation state α (S703: NO), it is determined whether or not the transition destination of the variation pattern selection state is the high probability short variation state β (S706). When the transition destination is the high-probability short-time variation state β (S706: YES), the probability variation effect mode Mβ is set as the transition destination of the effect mode (S707). When the mode changes to the probability variation effect mode A, the probability variation background data number is set in the background data storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260 (S708). Then, in the probability variation effect mode Mβ, for example, a probability variation background image of “Citadel” is displayed on the effect display device 70 from the next symbol variation.

  When the transition destination of the variation pattern selection state is not the high probability short variation state β (S706: NO), it is determined whether or not the transition destination of the variation pattern selection state is the high probability special variation state γ (S709). ). If the transition destination is the high probability special variation state γ (S709: YES), the special effect mode Mγ is set as the transition destination of the effect mode (S710). Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the special continuous effect flag in the sub-main information storage unit 260 is on (S711). The special continuous effect flag is a flag that is turned on when the special continuous effect is executed. If the special continuous effect flag is on (S711: YES), a special background data number is set in the background data storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260 (S712). In the special effect mode Mγ, for example, a special background image of “starry sky” is displayed on the effect display device 70 from the next symbol variation. On the other hand, when the special continuous effect flag is OFF (S711: NO), the probability variation background data number is set in the background data storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260 (S713). In the special effect mode Mγ, for example, a probability change background image of “Citadel” (substantially the same background image as in the probability change effect mode Mβ) is displayed on the effect display device 70 from the next symbol variation. Subsequently, an image control command for instructing display of the effect content (background image) determined in the processing is generated and stored in the command storage area of the sub-main information storage unit 260 (S721).

(Variation production content determination process)
Next, the variation effect content determination process (S636) will be described. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing details of the variation effect content determination process (S636).

  First, it is determined whether or not a change start command is stored in the sub-main information storage unit 260 (S731). If a variation start command is stored (S731: YES), the contents of this variation start command (variation pattern designation command, variation additional symbol information designation command, character effect number designation command) are analyzed, and the contents of this command are analyzed. As a result of the winning / losing lottery included, information indicating a symbol group, a variation pattern (variation time), a gaming state, etc. is acquired (S732). This acquired information is stored in the variation effect content determination area of the sub-main information storage means 260.

  Subsequently, a variation effect pattern selection process is executed (S733). In this variation effect pattern selection process, a variation effect pattern table is acquired based on the variation pattern information acquired in S732 and the effect mode set in the effect state transition process in S632, and from the effect lottery random number generation unit 210. A random effect pattern random number is acquired, and one of the variable effect patterns is selected by lottery from a plurality of types of variable effect patterns. The variation effect pattern constitutes a scenario of the effect display process in which the variation pattern of the decorative design, the type / occurrence time of the reach effect, the type / occurrence time of the notice effect, etc. are defined. The variable effect pattern number determined here is temporarily stored in the variable effect pattern storage area of the sub-main information storage unit 260. Further, a lamp effect number corresponding to the selected variable effect pattern number is requested, and the requested lamp effect number is set in the lamp request storage area of the sub-main information storage unit 260.

Next, a decorative symbol stop symbol selection process is executed (S734). In this decorative symbol stop symbol selection process, based on the symbol group information and the variation pattern information acquired in S732, combinations of stop symbols (left symbol, middle symbol, right symbol) of decorative symbols to be finally stopped are selected by lottery. decide. The decorative symbol combination number determined here is temporarily stored in the decorative symbol storage area of the sub-main information storage unit 260.

  Subsequently, as the update of the prefetch information storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260, the hold ball information stored in the hold 2 storage area to the hold 4 storage area is shifted to the lower hold storage area, and the hold 4 storage area is changed. Zero clear is performed (S735).

  Next, special effect determination processing is executed (S736). In this special effect determination process, it is determined whether or not a special effect with high rarity (so-called ascension effect) that is displayed when a predetermined condition is satisfied with respect to the so-called villa state is executed. The predetermined condition is, for example, that the number of consecutive games reaches a predetermined number, the cumulative number of specific big hits in the consecutive resort state reaches a predetermined number, the accumulated number of winning balls in the consecutive resort state reaches a predetermined number, A case where a specific effect (a specific effect during a symbol change or special game) is generated during the villa state can be cited. Details of the special effect determination process (S736) will be described later with reference to FIG. 41 in the first modification.

  Next, the on-hold consecutive villa production A determination process is executed (S737). In the on-hold consecutive villa production A determination process, whether or not to execute the on-hold consecutive villa production A is determined, and when it is determined that the on-hold consecutive villa production A is to be executed, a consecutive villa production pattern is selected. Details of the on-hold consecutive resort production A determination process (S737) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Subsequently, when executing the on-hold extended villa production A in S737, a process of replacing the contents of the symbol variation production selected in S733 and S734 according to the content of the on-hold extended villa production A is executed. (S738). For example, when the consecutive house effect pattern PA2 is selected, the normal jackpot symbol selected in S734 is replaced with a special jackpot symbol “S · S · S” as a symbol change effect replacement process. The decorative symbol combination number (big hit symbol number) replaced here is temporarily stored in the decorative symbol storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260. In the present embodiment, the target of the prefetch determination in the on-hold consecutive villa production A is the subsequent operation reservation ball that exists at the time when the previous operation reservation ball is digested (when the variation start condition is satisfied). It is. For this reason, even if the operation hold ball generated during the change is specified hold, the on-hold consecutive resort production A determination process (S737) and the replacement process (S738) are not executed, but specified during the change. In the case where a hold is generated, it is configured to execute the in-hold extended villa effect A determination process (S737) and the replacement process (S738) even during the change, and to change the change effect data set at the start of the change. Also good.

  Then, based on the effect information acquired in S733 to S738, an image control command (change effect start command) required to start the decoration symbol change is generated, and this image control command is stored in the command storage area of the sub-main information storage unit 260. Set (S739).

  On the other hand, when the change start command is not stored (S731: NO), it is determined whether or not the change stop command is stored in the sub-main information storage unit 260 (S740). When the variable stop command is stored (S740: YES), the content of the variable stop command is analyzed, and the symbol stop information included in the content of this command is acquired (S741). Then, an image control command (variation effect stop command) required to stop the decoration symbol variation is generated, and this image control command is set in the command storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260 (S742).

(On-hold Renso production A judgment process)
Next, the on-hold consecutive villa production A determination process (S737) will be described. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing details of the on-hold consecutive resort production A determination process (S737).

  First, it is determined whether or not the special continuous effect flag in the sub-main information storage means 260 is on (S761). If the special continuous effect flag is not on (S761: NO), the information stored in the variation effect content determination area of the sub-main information storage unit 260 in the above S732 (result of the lottery determination and jackpot type) is analyzed, It is determined whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol to be changed this time is 16R big hit (S762). If the lottery result is a 16R big hit (S762: YES), it is determined whether or not the pre-determination information of the operation holding ball of the second special symbol is stored in the pre-read information storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260. (S763). In this example, the pre-reading determination of the on-hold consecutive villa effect A is performed on the operation holding ball of the second special symbol that occurs before the symbol variation is started. When there is an operation holding ball of the second special symbol (S763: YES), it is determined whether or not there is a specific holding in the operation holding ball of the second special symbol (S764). If there is a specific hold (S764: YES), it is determined whether this specific hold indicates a 16R big hit (S765). If the specific hold corresponds to a 16R big hit (S765: YES), a hold-in-resort renga production A lottery process is executed to determine whether or not to execute the in-hold-ream villa production A (S766). ). In this on-hold consecutive resort production A lottery process, when the consecutive resort production lottery random value matches the determination value of “execution” or “non-execution” with reference to the unillustrated consecutive resort production A lottery table Determine whether or not to execute. In this example, for example, execution is determined at a rate of 80% and non-execution is determined at a rate of 20%.

  Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the winning in the on-hold consecutive villa production A lottery process is won (S767). In the case of winning (S767: YES), a consecutive resort production pattern selection process for determining the content of the on-hold consecutive resort production A is executed (S768). In this consecutive resort production pattern selection process, while obtaining the consecutive resort production pattern table shown in FIG. From the production patterns, one of the consecutive-village production patterns is determined by lottery. Next, the number of the extended villa effect pattern selected this time is temporarily stored in the extended villa effect pattern storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260 (S769). Then, the on-hold consecutive resort effect flag in the sub-main information storage means 260 is turned on (S770). Note that the on-hold consecutive resort production flag is a flag that is turned on when the on-hold consecutive resort production flag is executed.

(Big hit production content determination process)
Next, the big hit effect content determination process (S638) will be described. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing details of the jackpot effect content determination process (S636).

  First, it is determined whether or not a start demo command is stored in the sub-main information storage means 260 (S801). If the start demo command is stored (S801: YES), the contents of the start demo command are analyzed, and information indicating the jackpot type and the like included in the contents of this command is acquired (S802). This acquired information is stored in the big hit effect content determination area of the sub-main information storage means 260. Subsequently, the continuous resort count counter for counting the number of consecutive resorts is updated (S803). Specifically, when the big hit this time is a big hit in the normal state (referred to as “first hit”), “1” is set in the extended game count counter, and in the case of the extended game, the extended game counter is set to “ 1 ”is added.

Next, a jackpot effect pattern selection process for determining the contents of the jackpot effect pattern (start demo effect pattern, round effect pattern, end demo effect pattern) is executed (S804). In this jackpot effect pattern selection process, a jackpot effect pattern table (not shown) is acquired, and a jackpot effect pattern random number value is acquired from the effect lottery random number generating means 210, and any one of a plurality of types of jackpot effect patterns is selected. The big hit production pattern is determined by lottery. The jackpot effect pattern number (start demo pattern number, round effect pattern number, end demo pattern number) determined here is temporarily stored in the jackpot effect pattern storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260.

  Next, the on-hold consecutive resort production B determination process is executed (S805). In the on-hold consecutive villa effect B determination process, whether or not to execute the on-hold consecutive villa effect B is determined, and if it is determined to execute the on-hold consecutive villa effect B, a consecutive villa effect pattern is selected. Details of the on-hold consecutive resort production B determination process (S805) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Subsequently, a big hit effect replacement process is executed (S806). In this jackpot effect replacement process, when the on-hold consecutive resort effect B (special continuous effect) is executed, the normal start demo effect pattern and the normal end demo effect pattern are changed to the special start demo effect pattern and the special end demo effect pattern. Replace with. Details of the jackpot effect replacement process (S806) will be described later with reference to FIG. In the present embodiment, the pre-reading determination target in the on-hold consecutive resort production B exists at the start time of the special game (at the end of the change) when the preceding operation holding ball is a big hit. It is a subsequent working hold ball. Therefore, even if the operation holding ball generated during the special game is a specific hold, the on-hold consecutive villa production B determination process (S805) and the replacement process (S806) are not executed, but during the special game When a specific hold is generated, the on-hold consecutive resort stage B determination process (S805) and the replacement process (S806) are executed even during the special game, so that the big hit effect data set at the start of the special game is replaced. You may comprise.

  Then, the start demonstration effect pattern number temporarily stored in the jackpot effect pattern storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260 in S804 and S806 is transferred to the start demonstration effect storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260, and the start demonstration effect A start is set (S807).

  Subsequently, it is determined whether or not a round effect designation command is stored in the sub-main information storage means 260 (S811). When the round effect designation command is stored (S807: YES), the content of the round effect designation command is analyzed, and the number of rounds included in the content of this command and the number of winning prizes to the big winning openings 64 and 65 are calculated. The information shown is acquired (S812). This acquired information is stored in the big hit effect content determination area of the sub-main information storage means 260. Subsequently, based on the information acquired in S812, the round number counter of the sub main information storage unit 260 is updated (S813), and the big prize counter of the sub main information storage unit 260 is updated (S814). In this example, since “14” prize balls are paid out every time a game ball wins a prize winning opening 64, 65, “14” is multiplied by the number of winning prizes in the prize winning openings 64, 65. Thus, the number of winning prize balls is calculated.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the pseudo count flag of the sub main information storage unit 260 is on (S815). The pseudo count flag is a flag that is turned on when executing a pseudo count effect in which the number of rounds and the number of winning prize balls in the previous special game are added to the number of rounds and the number of winning prize balls in the subsequent special game. It is. If the pseudo count flag is on (S815: YES), that is, if the subsequent round effect (pseudo count effect) is scheduled to be executed, the round number pseudo addition process is executed (S816). In this round number pseudo addition process, the number of round games executed in the previous special game (round number: 16R) is added to the number of round games executed (round number: 1R to 16R) stored in the round number counter. to add. Thereby, in the special continuous performance, the round game of the first round in the later special game is notified as the round game of the 17th round.

Subsequently, a winning prize number pseudo-addition process is executed (S817). In this winning prize number pseudo-addition process, the number of winning prizes in the previous special game is added to the number of winnings stored in the big winning number counter. Thereby, in the special continuous performance, the number of winning balls acquired in the later special game is notified as the total number of winning balls acquired in the previous special game and the later special game.

  Then, the round effect pattern number temporarily stored in the jackpot effect pattern storage area of the sub-main information storage unit 260 in S804 and S806, together with the values of the round number counter and the big prize counter, are round effects of the sub-main information storage unit 260. Transfer to the storage area and set the start of the round effect (S818).

  Next, it is determined whether or not an end demo command is stored in the sub-main information storage unit 260 (S821). When the end demo command is stored (S821: YES), the content of the end demo command is analyzed, and information included in the content of this command is acquired (S822). This acquired information is stored in the big hit effect content determination area of the sub-main information storage means 260. Next, it is determined whether or not the special continuous effect flag in the sub-main information storage unit 260 is on (S823). When the special continuous effect flag is on (S823: YES), the value of the round number counter (number of rounds) and the value of the big prize number counter (large number of winning prizes) are stored in the previous big hit of the sub main information storage means 260. Temporarily store in the area (S824). This means that if the current big hit corresponds to the previous big hit in the special continuous performance, the final round number and the big winning number in the previous big win are the pseudo-addition processing in the later big win effect (S816, S817) Because it is scheduled to be used in the game, it is stored as record information of the previous special game. Therefore, in the pseudo addition processing in S816 and S817, the numerical values (the number of rounds and the number of winning prizes) stored in the previous jackpot storage area are added. Next, the round number counter and the big prize number counter in the sub main information storage means 260 are cleared (S825, S826).

  Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the pseudo count flag of the sub-main information storage unit 260 is on (S827). If the pseudo count flag is on (S827: YES), the pseudo count flag is turned off (S828). Next, it is determined whether or not the on-hold consecutive resort effect flag in the sub-main information storage means 260 is on (S835). If the on-hold consecutive resort effect flag is on (S835: YES), the on-hold consecutive resort effect flag in the sub-main information storage means 260 is turned off (S836).

  Next, the end demonstration effect pattern number temporarily stored in the jackpot effect pattern storage area of the sub main information storage means 260 in S804 and S806 is transferred to the end demonstration effect storage area of the sub main information storage means 260, and the end demonstration effect The start is set (S837). Then, based on the effect information acquired in S805, S807, S818, and S837, an image control command required for the jackpot effect is generated, and this image control command is set in the command storage area of the sub-main information storage unit 260 (S838). .

(Reservation Renrenso production B judgment process)
Next, the on-hold consecutive resort production B determination process (S805) will be described. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing details of the on-hold consecutive resort effect B determination process (S805).

First, it is determined whether or not the on-hold consecutive resort effect flag in the sub-main information storage means 260 is on, that is, whether or not the on-hold extended resort effect A has already been executed in the symbol variation effect (S851). If the on-hold consecutive resort effect flag is not on (S851: NO), the information stored in the variation effect content determination area of the sub-main information storage means 260 in the above-described S732 (the result of success / failure lottery and jackpot type) is analyzed. Then, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol to be changed this time is 16R big hit (S852). If the lottery result is a 16R big hit (S852: YES), it is determined whether or not the pre-determination information of the operation holding ball of the second special symbol is stored in the pre-read information storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260. (S853). In this example, the pre-reading determination of the on-hold consecutive resort production B is performed on the operation holding ball of the second special symbol that occurs until the special game is started, that is, until the jackpot start demo command is received. When there is an operation holding ball of the second special symbol (S853: YES), it is determined whether or not there is a specific holding in the operation holding ball of the second special symbol (S854). If there is a specific hold (S854: YES), the on-hold consecutive resort effect B lottery process 1 for determining whether or not to execute the on-hold extended resort effect B by lottery is executed (S856). In the on-hold consecutive resort production B lottery process 1, the consecutive resort production lottery random number value matches the determination value of “execution” or “non-execution” with reference to the unillustrated consecutive resort production B lottery table 1. If so, determine whether to execute. In this example, for example, execution is determined at a rate of 80% and non-execution is determined at a rate of 20%. It should be noted that the winning probabilities of the on-hold consecutive villa production B may be made different depending on the specific holding type (16R big hit, 8R big hit). For example, in the case of specific hold for 16R big hit, the in-hold extended resort production B is executed at a rate of 100%, and in the case of specific hold for 8R big hit, the in-hold extended resort production B is executed at a rate of 50%. It may be configured. This is to increase the player's expectation by increasing the appearance probability of the on-hold consecutive resort production B when the player has a great advantage.

  On the other hand, when there is no specific hold (S854: NO), the on-hold consecutive villa production B lottery process 2 for determining whether or not to execute the on-hold consecutive villa production B is executed by lottery (S857). . In the on-hold consecutive resort production B lottery process 2, the random resort production lottery random number value matches the determination value of “execution” or “non-execution” with reference to the unillustrated consecutive resort production B lottery table 2. If so, determine whether to execute. In this example, for example, execution is determined at a rate of 10% and non-execution is determined at a rate of 90%.

  Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the winning in the on-hold consecutive villa production B lottery process (S858). When winning (S858: YES), the extended resort production | presentation pattern selection process for determining the content of the pending | reserved extended resort production B is performed (S861). In this consecutive resort production pattern selection process, while obtaining the consecutive resort production pattern table shown in FIG. 8B, the consecutive resort production pattern random number value is obtained from the production lottery random number generating means 210, and a plurality of types of consecutive resorts are obtained. From the production patterns, one of the consecutive-village production patterns is determined by lottery. Next, the number of the villa effect pattern selected this time is temporarily stored in the villa effect pattern storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260 (S868). Then, the on-hold consecutive resort effect flag in the sub-main information storage means 260 is turned on (S870).

(Big hit production replacement process)
Next, the jackpot effect replacement process (S806) will be described. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing details of the jackpot effect replacement process (S806). In this jackpot effect replacement process, a special end demonstration effect is set in S881 to S885 in the case of the previous special game in order to execute the special continuous effect by connecting the previous special game and the subsequent special game. In the case of a later special game, a special start demonstration effect is set in S886 to S890.

  First, it is determined whether or not the special continuous effect flag in the sub-main information storage unit 260 is on, that is, whether or not the special continuous effect is already being executed (S881). If the special continuous effect flag is not on (S881: NO), it is determined whether the on-hold extended resort effect flag in the sub-main information storage means 260 is on (S882). If the on-hold consecutive resort effect flag is not on (S882: NO), information indicating that “the last big hit (01H)” is set in the special continuous effect status of the sub-main information storage means 260 (S883). Thereby, it is determined that the current big hit (special game) is the previous big hit (special game) in the special continuous performance. Subsequently, the normal end demonstration effect pattern number set in S804 is replaced with the special end / end demonstration effect pattern number (S884). Then, the special continuous effect flag is turned on to generate the special continuous effect (885).

  On the other hand, when the special continuous effect flag is on (S881: YES), that is, when the special continuous effect is already being executed, the special big effect status in the sub-main information storage means 260 is set to “subsequent big hit (02H ) ”Is set (S886). Thereby, it is determined that the current big hit (special game) is the later big hit (special game) in the special continuous performance. Next, it is determined whether or not the current jackpot is a 16R jackpot (high profit jackpot) (S887). If it is 16R big hit (S887: YES), the normal start demonstration effect pattern number set in S804 is replaced with the special end start demonstration effect pattern number (S888). Subsequently, the pseudo count flag of the sub-main information storage unit 260 is turned on to connect the special continuous effect to the pseudo count effect (S889). Then, the special continuous effect flag is turned off (S890).

《Reception interrupt processing of production control command》
Next, the reception control process of the effect control command will be described. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing an effect control command reception interrupt process. In this effect control command reception interrupt process, as described above, an interrupt is generated based on the input of the strobe signal from the main control board 100, and various effect control commands are acquired in this interrupt process. It is like that. The effect control command includes 1-byte MODE data and 1-byte EVENT data, and is transmitted from the main control board 100 to the effect control board 200 in the order of MODE data and EVENT data. Hereinafter, for convenience of explanation, MODE data is also referred to as “first command”, and EVENT data is also referred to as “second command”.

  First, when an interrupt based on the strobe signal from the main control board 100 is generated, it is determined whether or not the input value of the effect control command is confirmed (S901). Specifically, the command data is read up to five times, and the input value is determined when the same value is read twice. This is because the reading of the effect control command may fail due to noise or the like, and the input value is not finalized until the same value is read twice.

  Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the command received this time is the first command (MODE), in other words, whether the command is the first command (MODE) or the second command (EVENT) (S902). If the command received this time is the first command (S902: YES), the first command is temporarily stored in the temporary area (S903). Then, the effect lottery random number is acquired from the effect lottery random number generation means 210, and this random number information is temporarily stored in the effect lottery random number storage area of the sub main information storage means 260 (S904). Note that the production lottery random number is acquired when the production control command is received. The production control command is transmitted at a physically irregular timing, such as when a game ball starts winning or when a special symbol changes. Therefore, it is to prevent periodicity from being obtained at the acquisition time by using it as an opportunity. In this way, by making the production lottery random number acquisition time irregular, it is difficult to cause inconveniences such as the same production being unnaturally repeated in various production lotteries.

On the other hand, when the command received this time is the second command (S902: NO), it is determined whether or not the first command has already been received (S905). That is, it is determined whether or not the effect control command is received in the order of the first command (MODE) → the second command (EVENT), and it is confirmed whether there is no contradiction in the combination of the effect control commands. If there is no contradiction in the combination of effect control commands (S905: YES), the address indicated by the light pointer (writing pointer) is acquired (S906). Subsequently, the first command and the second command are stored in the effect control command buffer (ring buffer) of the sub-main information storage unit 260 according to the address indicated by the light pointer (S907). The saved command data is read out in the command analysis process (S620) in the main process, and the effect control process corresponding to the type of effect control command is executed. Next, the address indicated by the write pointer is updated (S908). Further, the command data (first command) temporarily stored in S903 is cleared (S909).

《Timer interrupt processing for production control side》
Next, the production control side timer interruption process will be described. FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing the effect control side timer interruption process. This timer interrupt process is started by a clock pulse at regular time intervals, and is executed by interrupting the above-described production control side main process.

  When a timer interrupt occurs, the contents of the register in the sub main CPU 201 are saved in the stack area of the RAM 203, and then the processing from S911 onward is executed sequentially. In this timer interrupt process, interrupts with priority level 2 or higher, such as an effect control command reception interrupt from the main control board 100 and a watchdog timer interrupt, are permitted (S911).

  Subsequently, port input / output processing is executed (S912). In this port input / output processing, port data input processing and output processing in the I / O port circuit 204 are performed. In the input processing, various signals input to the I / O port circuit 204 (input port) are read and stored as input information. In the output process, various control signals (motor control signals) temporarily stored in the sub-main information storage unit 260 are read and output from the I / O port circuit 204 (output port).

  Subsequently, device control data output processing is executed (S913). In this device control data output process, drive data for a predetermined time is read from the drive pattern data specified in the device management process (S619) and set in the drive data storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260. The drive data set in this process is data indicating control for 1 ms corresponding to the interrupt cycle. When drive data is set in this process, the drive data is output from the I / O port circuit 204 (output port) to the motor driver 92 in the next timer interrupt process. Therefore, in this device control data output process, the drive data is switched every interrupt cycle (1 ms) according to the drive pattern data.

  Next, an effect timer update process is executed (S914). In this effect timer update process, the values of various effect timers used for effect operation control are subtracted and updated every interrupt cycle (1 ms in this embodiment). The effect timer includes a timer for managing the variation time of the decorative symbol, a timer for managing the timing of occurrence of the notice effect, and the like. By this effect timer, the time schedule in the variable effect pattern is managed, and time management such as the drive timing of the movable accessory 24 and the lighting timing of the effect lamp LP is managed on the time axis. The effect timer is also used in the device control data output process (S913) and the lamp data update process (S918) in the effect control timer interrupt process.

  Subsequently, a button control timer update process is executed (S915). The value of the effective time management timer for managing the effective operation time of the effect button 15 is updated by subtracting the interrupt period (1 ms in this embodiment). The operation valid time is a time for which the operation input of the effect button 15 is valid.

Subsequently, task control counter update processing is executed (S717). In this task control counter update process, the value of the task counter (“0” to “15”) is updated for each timer interrupt. Specifically, if the value of the task counter is “0” to “14”, it is incremented by 1. If the value of the task counter is “15”, it is returned to “0”. That is, this task counter can take a circulation period of 16 ms. Various tasks (task processing) are assigned corresponding to the task counter value updated this time, and the ramp control task (lamp data update processing in S718) and runaway monitoring are performed according to the task counter value. Each process such as a task (image CPU runaway monitoring process in S719) and an error management task (error management timer update process in S720) is executed. In this example, one of the task counter values (“0” to “15”) is assigned to the lamp control task, and the other two values (values with an interval of 8 ms between each other) are used for runaway monitoring. It is assigned to the task, and another value is assigned to the error management task (the description of the other tasks is omitted). As described above, the reason why the circulation cycle of the task counter is set to 16 ms is to make it coincide with the minimum unit (16 ms) of the effect lamp LP switching control. The minimum unit (16 ms) of the effect lamp LP switching control corresponds to one frame time of the image frame, and realizes synchronization between the image effect and the lamp effect.

  Subsequently, lamp data update processing is executed (S918). In this lamp data update process, lamp data for a predetermined time is read and set from the lamp pattern data specified in the device management process (S619). The lamp data set in this processing is data indicating lighting control for 16 ms, which is the minimum unit of the effect lamp LP switching control. When the lamp data is set, the lamp data is automatically output from the output port (serial port) to the lamp connection board 91 by serial transfer. The ramp data output process is configured as a serial communication interrupt process, and is realized by sequentially writing the ramp data to the transmission buffer of the serial communication circuit. The serial communication circuit serially converts the ramp data of the transmission buffer in units of 1 byte, and outputs the converted data to the lamp connection board 91 in units of one bit in synchronization with the serial clock. This process is repeated until the transmission buffer becomes empty, whereby all the ramp data (all bytes) stored in the transmission buffer are output. Therefore, in the lamp data update process, the lamp data is switched every frame time (16 ms) according to the lamp pattern, and the lamp data is output to the lamp connection board 91 by serial transfer. The ramp data update process is executed when the task counter value reaches a predetermined value (value indicating the ramp control task) in the task control counter update process (S917) (that is, executed at a cycle of 16 ms). Processing).

  Subsequently, an image CPU runaway monitoring process is executed (S919). In this image CPU runaway monitoring process, a toggle signal input from the image control board 300 is monitored, and when the toggle signal does not continuously change for 1600 ms (about 50 to 100 frames), the image control board 300 is monitored. The sub-sub CPU 301 is determined to be out of control, and a reset signal is transmitted from the effect control board 200 to the image control board 300. Thereby, the image control board 300 side executes a predetermined reset process when the reset state of the sub sub CPU 301 occurs. The toggle signal is a signal having a waveform in which H level / L level is alternately repeated every frame time. This image CPU runaway monitoring process is a process executed when the value of the task counter becomes a predetermined value (a value indicating an image monitoring task) in the task control counter update process (S917).

  Next, error management timer processing is executed (S920). In this error management timer process, the error effect timer value for managing the error effect time set in the error effect management process (S617) is subtracted and updated. This error management timer process is a process executed when the task counter value becomes a predetermined value (a value indicating an error management task) in the task control counter update process (S917). Then, all interrupts are permitted and the saved register contents are restored. Then, the effect control side timer interrupt process is terminated, and the process returns to the original process before the occurrence of the interrupt.

《Image control command transmission interrupt processing》
Next, transmission interruption processing of an image control command will be described. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing the transmission interrupt process of the image control command. This image control command transmission interruption process occurs at predetermined intervals (500 μs).

  In this image control command transmission interrupt process, first, the image control command buffer of the sub-main information storage means 260 is checked (S931). Subsequently, a read pointer is acquired in the image control command buffer (S932). Next, it is determined whether an image control command is stored in the image control command buffer (S933). Whether or not the image control command is stored can be confirmed by, for example, the read pointer and the write pointer. If the read pointer and the write pointer match, the image control command is not stored. When the image control command is stored (S933: YES), the image control command is read from the area indicated by the read pointer (S934). The read image control command is set in the output buffer of the serial communication circuit 205 designated as the output destination (S935). As a result, the image control command is serially transmitted from the serial port to the image control board 300. Next, the command data (the command data transmitted in S935) is cleared (S936). Subsequently, the read pointer is incremented by 1 and updated (S937). Then, the transmission interruption process of the image command is ended, and the process returns to the original process before the interruption.

[Action]
Next, in order to facilitate understanding of the present embodiment, the characteristic operation of the pachinko gaming machine PM will be described.

  First, with reference to FIG. 37, description will be made regarding the flow of effects when the on-hold consecutive resort effect and the special continuous effect are executed. FIG. 37 is a schematic diagram showing effect screens of the reserved villa resort effect and the special continuous effect.

  First, as shown in FIG. 37 (A), in the round effect (final round) in the previous special game, “16 rounds” as the final round number and the number of winning prize balls “1988” in the previous special game are obtained. It is displayed. And in this last round, the image of “Mystery Book” is displayed as the on-hold extended resort production B, and the specific reserved is included in the subsequent operation holding ball, that is, the possibility of the on-hold extended resort Is suggested.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 37 (B), in the end demonstration effect in the previous special game, the special continuous effect is started with the occurrence of the on-hold consecutive resort effect B in the final round described above. In the illustrated example, a teammate character and an enemy character appear as special end demonstration effects. In addition, in this special end demonstration production, unlike the normal case, instead of displaying the character information of “Big jackpot end”, the character information of “Continue” is displayed, so that the special game continues. Can show. Internally, when the special game is ended, the symbol variation game is resumed in a state in which the special symbol probability change state and time reduction state and the electric chew support state are set.

Next, as shown in FIG. 37 (C), in the first symbol variation after the end of the previous special game, the lottery result is lost, and a super shortening variation (2 seconds) is set as the special symbol variation effect. In a very short time, the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the off mode “1-2-5”. In the example shown in the figure, in this special variation effect, a battle effect in which the same teammate character and the enemy character as in FIG. This is to display the same character as that displayed in the previous special game so as not to give the player the impression that the special game (the previous special game) has ended. During the special symbol variation effect, the decorative symbol that is displayed in a variable manner or stopped is displayed in a reduced state toward the end of the screen. As a result, the player can be shown as if the previous special game is continuing without ending. When the special symbol variation effect is not being performed, that is, during the normal symbol variation effect, the decorative symbol is displayed at substantially the center of the screen without being reduced. In addition, during the limited period (during the special variation effect), since a background image of a special background (“starry sky”) different from the normal is displayed, it is possible to increase the player's expectation for future development. In addition, it is good also as a state which cannot recognize a symbol fluctuation | variation by making the whole screen a specific display color, or cannot recognize it.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 37 (D), in the second symbol variation after the end of the previous special game, the lottery result is a big hit (16R big hit), and a super shortened variation (2 seconds) is set as a special variation effect. Therefore, the decoration symbol is stopped and displayed in the big hit mode “7-7-7” within a very short time. In the example shown in the figure, in this special variation effect, an effect in which the teammate character wins the enemy character is executed. In this way, in the special variation production in the special continuous production, the time until the transition to the subsequent special game is compressed by rapidly digesting the subsequent operation holding balls in a very short time, and the pattern is given to the player. It is configured so that it is possible to seamlessly connect to a later special game without recognizing as much as possible that the variation effect has been executed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 37 (E), the special continuous production continues in the start demonstration production in the later special game. In the example shown in the drawing, as the special start demonstration effect, an effect in which the friend character tells the enemy character “the strongest of mystery” is executed. In this start demonstration effect, unlike the usual case, the text information of “start of big hit” is not displayed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 37 (F), a pseudo-count effect is started in a round effect (starting round) in a later special game. In this pseudo-count effect, “17 rounds”, which is the cumulative number of rounds from the previous special game, and the cumulative prize from the previous special game are displayed in order to make it appear as if it is continuing as an extension of the previous special game. The number of balls “1988” is notified. Further, the same ally character and enemy character as in FIG. 37B are continuously displayed.

  As a result, the previous special game and the later special game based on the reserved game can be shown as a series of effects with the symbol variation effect interposed therebetween. Further, since the number of prize balls acquired by two special games is displayed, it is possible to give the player a sense of satisfaction that a large number of prize balls have been obtained. As a result, a new special gaming state exceeding the number of rounds and the number of prize balls restricted by the rules can be created in a pseudo manner.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 38, the relationship between the on-hold consecutive resort production and the special continuous production will be described. FIG. 38 is a time chart showing the relationship between the on-hold consecutive resort production and the special continuous production.

  When the preceding operation hold ball is digested and the winning determination is won (t11), the process shifts to the hold-in-ream zone effect A determination process, and the pre-reading determination is executed for the subsequent operation hold ball. If there is a specific hold in the subsequent operation hold ball (in the example shown, the third is a specific hold), whether or not to execute the hold-in-village production A is determined by lottery. On-hold consecutive villa production A occurs (t12).

  Subsequently, when the symbol variation is stopped and the jackpot symbol is confirmed and displayed, the special game (the previous special game) is started. At the start of this special game, the process shifts to the on-hold consecutive resort production B determination process. B does not occur (t13). The reason for this is that if the on-hold extended villa production B is generated again during the special game, the number of on-hold extended villa times (the number of specific holdings in the subsequent operation holding ball) is one. Regardless, there is a possibility that the player may misunderstand that there are multiple times, and because in this example it is a reserved area rendezvous production B that is not a confirmed notification effect, the player is worried about whether a retained reed resort will really occur. This is because there is a risk of memorizing it.

Next, the special continuous production is started at the end demonstration production in the previous special game (t14).
). This special continuous effect is continued from the end demonstration effect in the current special game (previous special game) to the round effect in the next special game (later special game) (t14 to t18). When the previous special game ends, the symbol variation effect is resumed (t15). In this example, a limited period for staying in the special effect mode Mγ is set with four symbol variations as a limit, and the special symbol variation effect is executed within this limited period.

  Then, after the end of the previous special game, when the third action holding ball (the specific hold notified in the hold-in consecutive resort at t12) is digested and the winning decision is won (t16), The process shifts to the Renso production A determination process. At this time, a new specific hold exists in the subsequent operation hold ball (the second hold is the specific hold in the illustrated example), but since the special continuous effect is already being executed, During the symbol variation effect, the on-hold consecutive resort effect A does not occur (t16). The reason for this is that, even when trying to show two special game states as one special game state with the occurrence of a special continuous production, a reserved in-village production A as a design variation production occurs during the execution of this special continuous production. This is because there is a risk of losing the meaning of concealing the fact that the symbol variation effect is being performed. In addition, when the special continuous production is started in response to the occurrence of the on-hold consecutive resort production A, the variation time when the subsequent operation holding ball is digested during this special continuous production (within a limited period) is extremely short. Since it is set to (2 seconds), the production effect is low even if the on-hold consecutive resort production A is generated within this short time, and both productions are produced by the competition between the on-hold consecutive resort production and the special continuous production. This is because the effect may be diluted.

  Next, when the symbol variation stops and the big hit symbol is confirmed and displayed, the later special game is started. In addition, at the start of a later special game, the process shifts to the on-hold consecutive resort effect B determination process, and the pre-reading determination is performed on the subsequent operation holding ball. At this time, even if the special continuous effect is being executed, if there is a specific hold in the subsequent operation hold ball (in the example shown, the second is a specific hold), whether or not the on-hold extended zone effect B can be executed is determined by lottery. If this is won and the winning game is won, the on-hold consecutive resort production B may occur during the special game (t17). The reason is that even if it is during the special hit effect, even if it occurs during the big hit effect, the player feels that the normal on-hold range resort effect B has occurred, and the player cannot feel uncomfortable. In addition, since the special continuous production is connected to a series of productions from at least the end demonstration production during the previous jackpot production to the start demonstration production during the subsequent big hit production, This is because there is no inconvenience that the on-hold consecutive villa production and the special continuous production compete with each other as long as the on-hold consecutive villa production is generated at the timing after the round presentation in the special game.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, the first on-hold extended resort production A that occurs during symbol variation and the second on-hold extended resort production B that occurs during special games are provided, In the consecutive play production A, the possibility that there is one specific hold in the subsequent operation hold ball is notified, whereas in the second hold internal play production B, there is only one specific hold in the subsequent operation hold ball. By constructing it so that it can also be notified that there are more than one, the expectation for the occurrence of the on-hold-reed villa performance will be maintained through a series of game processes from when the symbol starts to change until the special game ends. In addition, it is possible to teach the player various information related to the reserved resort in the game according to the generation timing of the reserved game in the game process. Because variations are given to the aspect It may extend the width of the hold in extended game effect, as a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, in the present embodiment, by executing a special symbol variation effect during a limited period after the end of the special game, the next jackpot (the specific reservation notified in the reserved game in the reservation) at an early stage after the end of the special game. It is possible to increase the expectation for the occurrence of big hits), and as a result, it is possible to improve the fun of the game. In addition, by configuring the special symbol variation effect with short-time shortening variation, the time interval between the previous special game and the subsequent special game can be suppressed, and the extension to the next big hit can be prevented. By prohibiting the production of the reserved renzo within the limited period, it is possible to prevent the effect of the presentation from diluting due to the competition between the special dramas within the limited period and the reserved villa production within the limited period. it can.

  Further, in this embodiment, even if there is a specific hold that becomes a big hit, the on-hold extended resort production is not necessarily executed, so even if not notified, the possibility of the on-hold extended resort is expected A feeling can be given. It should be noted that when there is a specific hold, the arrangement may be made such that the on-hold extended resort effect is always executed.

  By the way, in this embodiment, the preceding operation reservation ball becomes a big hit, and the reservation-in-ream zone effect B does not occur during the special game. If the high expectation effect (Super Reach B) is generated during the symbol change due to the digestion of the action holding ball (existing at the time of occurrence of B), there is a possibility that it will deviate from the possibility of a big hit. Is set higher.

  As shown in FIG. 5, in the game of the second special symbol, in the probability variation state of the special symbol, the probability of winning a jackpot is about 1/40, and the probability of being out of play is about 39/40.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 7, in the probability variation state of the special symbol, when the result of the determination is a big hit, regardless of the type of big hit, whether it is a 16R specific big hit or an 8R specific big hit, 100% The variation pattern PX7, PY7 of super reach B (high expectation degree production) is selected with probability. That is, in the probability variation state of the special symbol, only the variation pattern PX7 of the super reach B is selected when the 16R specific big hit, and only the variation pattern PY7 of the super reach B is selected when the big hit is 8R. On the other hand, in the probability variation state of the special symbol, if the result of the determination is wrong, the variation pattern PH7 of super reach B (high expectation degree effect) is selected with a probability of 5%.

  At this time, as described in S856 of FIG. 32, in this example, when there is a specific hold (16R big hit, 8R big hit) in the subsequent operation hold ball, the winning probability of whether or not the hold-in-range extended zone effect B can be executed. Is set to 80%, so that even if there is a specific hold (16R big hit, 8R big hit), the on-hold extended zone effect B is not executed with the remaining 20% probability.

  Under the conditions as described above, the probability X of being a big hit by the appearance of Super Reach B and the probability Y of being lost by the appearance of Super Reach B under the circumstances in which the on-hold consecutive villa production B is not executed are as follows: It becomes as follows.

X = (Probability of winning a big hit) × (Probability that the rendezvous renso production B will not occur) × (Probability of becoming Super Reach B)
Y = (probability of falling) × (probability of becoming super reach B)

  Subsequently, using the above numerical values, the probability X of being a big hit by the appearance of super reach B and the probability Y of being lost by the appearance of super reach B are specifically calculated as follows.

X = 1/40 * (100-80) / 100 * 100/100 = 20/400
Y = 39/40 × 5/100 = 195/400
It becomes.

  Therefore, if a high expectation effect is generated in the subsequent operation holding ball without generating the hold-in-rendition play effect B during the special game (when developed to Super Reach B), it can be a big hit. There is a higher possibility of detachment than sex.

  In the above-described first embodiment, basically, the pre-reading determination related to the on-hold extended villa effect is executed for the operation holding ball of the second special symbol acquired during the operation of the electric chew support function. However, this is merely an example. For example, the operation holding ball of the first special symbol (or the operation holding ball of the second special symbol) acquired when the electric chew support function is not operated is used as a target in the holding sequence. A pre-reading determination related to the villa production may be executed.

  Further, in the first embodiment described above, the determination timing of the on-hold consecutive resort effect B is set to the timing at the time of the big hit start (when the start demo command is received), but this is only an example, for example, The timing may be set at any time at the start of the big hit, at the round game, or at the end of the big hit.

  In the above-described embodiment, the first special winning a prize game 64 is associated with the first special symbol game, and the second special winning award 65 is associated with the second special game. However, the present invention is not limited thereto. Instead, the first special winning opening 64 and the second large winning opening 65 are made to correspond to at least one of the first special symbol game and the second special symbol game, and these large winning ports 64 and 65 are alternately arranged. It may be opened. Moreover, the structure which provides only one big prize opening, without providing the two big prize openings 64 and 65 may be sufficient.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, so-called preferential digestion is adopted, in which the operation reservation ball of the second special symbol is preferentially digested over the operation reservation ball of the first special symbol, but is not limited thereto. Instead, the operation holding balls may be digested according to the order in which the game balls enter the first start port 61 or the second start port 62. In addition, when employ | adopting this structure, it is preferable to make both the operation reservation ball | bowl of a 1st special symbol and the operation | movement reservation ball | bowl of a 2nd special symbol into the object of notification in an on-hold extended resort.

[First Embodiment-First Modification]
Next, a gaming machine according to a first modification of the first embodiment will be described. The gaming machine according to the first modification basically has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above, and hereinafter, the same reference numerals are assigned to the parts having the same configuration. Thus, the description is omitted, and different parts are mainly described.

(Relationship between rendezvous renso production and ascension production)
In this modification, a rare special effect (so-called ascending effect) occurs when a so-called consecutive resort continues for a specified number of times. “Renso” means that when a predetermined big hit is made during a specific game, the specific game state continues again as the game state after the end of the special game. As described above, the “special game state” is a state in which the probability of transition to a special game is higher than the normal state, the special symbol probability variation function, special symbol variation time shortening function, electric chew support function Is a state in which at least one of the functions is activated. In this example, it is a condition that at least the electric chew support function (the easy entry state) is activated as the specific gaming state. Here, in this embodiment, during the ST period after the end of the special game, the probability variation function, the variation time shortening function, and the electric chew support function operate (the operation starts simultaneously and the operation ends simultaneously). Since it is configured, it can be said that it is always in a specific gaming state during the ST period.

As an execution condition of the special effect, it is determined that the villa is continuous for a specified number of times (20 times in this example). In addition to the specified number of times, for example, the cumulative number of specific jackpots in the villa state is predetermined. When the number of times reached, the total number of rounds won or the total number of prize balls won in the consecutive house state reaches a predetermined number, and a specific effect (designated effect during symbol changes or special games) is generated during the consecutive house state Etc. may be added to the execution conditions. The total number of rounds earned in the villa state and the total number of winning balls may be added to the execution conditions. In this example, the number of consecutive resorts that repeatedly acquire a special game while continuing the specific game state (easy to enter the game) reaches the specified number (20 times), and at least the final Nth time, the high profit jackpot (16R It is a condition that it wins with big hit). The special effect is displayed across the decorative symbol variation effect and the jackpot effect on the time axis. However, the special effect ends with the round effect (final round) during the jackpot effect, and does not include the subsequent end demonstration effect. As the contents of this special effect, for example, by displaying the rare characters with high rarity that appear only in the special effect one by one in turn, it is possible to give the player a sense of satisfaction with consecutive hits. A premium feeling can be raised.

  Next, the relationship between the on-hold consecutive villa effect and the special effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 39 and 40. FIG. 39 and FIG. 40 are time charts showing the relationship between the on-hold consecutive resort production and the special production. In the following, the number of consecutive resorts is also expressed as “N” and the specified number of times is also expressed as “Nset”.

(2-1) In the event that a reserved renso production is generated due to the symbol change or special game related to the previous big hit, the big hit (later big hit) by the reserved big villa is the number of consecutive villas as the condition for generating the special effect. Will not be counted and will not be a requirement for special effects. That is, as shown in FIG. 39, when the preceding operation holding ball is digested and the winning determination is won (t21), if it is at the time of digestion, the process shifts to the holding-in-village production A determination process, If it is the time of a start, it will transfer to a pending | holding consecutive resort production B determination process. In the on-hold extended-zone play effects A and B determination processing, if there is a specific hold (the third is specified hold in the illustrated example) in the subsequent operation hold ball, whether or not the on-hold extended game effects A and B can be executed is determined. If it is determined by lottery and wins this, if the symbol is changing, the on-hold extended resort production A is generated (t22), and if it is during a special game, the on-hold extended resort production B is generated (t23). Here, if the big hit this time is the number of consecutive villas N = Nset−1, the reserved renzo production A (t2
2) When the presence of a specific reservation that becomes the big hit of the Nth consecutive resort number N is notified in the on-hold consecutive resort production B (t23), the symbol variation accompanied by the consecutive jackpot number N = Nset number of big hits (t25) ) And the special game round effect (t26), no special effect is generated. The reason for this is that in this embodiment, two special gaming states (in this example, the special gaming state of the Nset-1th time and the Nsetth time) are triggered by the occurrence of the on-hold consecutive resort effects A and B. Since a special continuous production to show as one special game state is generated (t24 to t26), the Nset big hit is not included in the number of consecutive resorts as the execution condition of the special production. The reason for avoiding the execution is that the satisfaction of the player due to the pseudo extension of the special game is not lost, and the competition between the special effect and the special continuous effect is avoided, and the overall effect can be balanced. Internally, the number of consecutive resorts is updated as one consecutive resort even if it is a big hit by the reserved resorts.

(2-2) When special effects occur across symbol variations and special games, regardless of whether or not there is a specific hold in the subsequent operation hold ball when the symbol variation starts. In the fluctuating effect, the on-hold consecutive villa effect A does not occur. That is, as shown in FIG. 40, as a result of the previous action holding ball being digested and winning / decision determination winning a high profit jackpot (t31), the number of consecutive homes N = the specified number of times Nset, and the symbol variation and special game A special effect occurs over the t (t31 to t3
3) In the case where the design variation is performed, regardless of whether or not there is a specific hold in the subsequent operation hold ball (in the illustrated example, there is a specific hold on the third), Not generated (t32). The reason for this is to avoid the fact that the production effects of the two are diluted with each other due to the competition between the special production during the symbol variation and the on-hold Renren production A.

(2-3) When a special effect occurs across the symbol variation and the special game, regardless of whether or not there is a specific hold in the subsequent operation holding ball when the symbol variation starts. In the variation production, the on-hold consecutive villa production B may occur. That is, as shown in FIG. 40, as a result of the previous action holding ball being digested and winning / decision determination winning a high profit jackpot (t31), the number of consecutive homes N = the specified number of times Nset, and the symbol variation and special game A special performance occurs across the t (t32 to t3
3) In the case of the special game, regardless of whether or not there is a specific hold in the subsequent operation hold ball (in the example shown, there is a specific hold in the third example) Can be generated (t34). This is because, as described above, the special effect is executed from the symbol variation effect to the special game round effect, and therefore the on-hold Renso effect B is generated in the end demonstration effect after the round effect (t34). This is because a situation in which the special effect and the on-hold consecutive villa effect B compete during the special game is avoided. In addition, in the case where the on-hold consecutive resort effect B is not generated during the special game, even if there is a specific hold within a limited period after the end of the special game, the symbol change effect related to the specific hold is designated as the special symbol change effect. rather than generate, instead of the special symbol variable effect, such as performing up across the normal symbol variation effect of the off pending digestion will shorten jackpot variation effect (previously completed only symbol variation effect according to the specific pending It may be generated as an instant hit effect).

  Subsequently, the procedure of the operation process in the first modification of the first embodiment will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS.

(Special effect determination process: first modification)
First, the special effect determination process (S736) according to the subroutine of S736 of FIG. 29 in the first modification will be described. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing details of the special effect determination process (S736).

First, it is determined whether or not the number of consecutive resorts N is one less than the prescribed number Nset with reference to the consecutive resort number counter of the sub-main information storage means 260 (S751). Number of consecutive resorts N
= If the specified number of times Nset-1 (S751: YES), that is, if the lottery result of the special symbol to be changed this time is a big hit, the number of consecutive resorts N is scheduled to reach the specified number of times Nset The information stored in the variation effect content determination area of the sub-main information storage unit 260 in S732 is analyzed (the result of the lottery determination and the big hit type), and the lottery result of the special symbol to be changed this time is 16R big hit. It is determined whether or not there is (S752). If the lottery result is 16R big hit (S752: YES), that is, if the number of consecutive resorts N reaches the specified number Nset and the bonus hit at this consecutive resort number N is scheduled to become a high profit jackpot, the sub main information It is determined whether or not the special continuous effect flag in the storage means 260 is on (S753).

  If the special continuous effect flag is not on (S753: NO), that is, if the special continuous effect is not being executed, the sub-main information storage unit 260 stores the effect pattern number of the special effect in order to execute the special effect. Is temporarily stored in the special effect pattern storage area (S754). Then, the special effect flag in the sub main information storage means 260 is turned on (S755). Here, the special effect flag is a flag that is turned on when the special effect is executed. Although not shown, the special effect flag is turned off when the round effect ends.

  On the other hand, if the special continuous effect flag is ON (S753), that is, if the special continuous effect is already being executed, S754 and S755 are skipped to avoid the conflict between the special effect and the special continuous effect. Then, this process ends.

(On-hold consecutive villa production A determination processing: first modification)
Next, the on-hold consecutive resort production A determination process (S737) according to the subroutine of S737 in FIG. 29 in the first modification will be described. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing details of the on-hold consecutive resort effect A determination process (S737) in the first modified example.

Here, the difference from the first embodiment described above is that the process of S760 has been added, and if the special effect is already being executed, the execution of the in-hold extended resort effect A is avoided. . In FIG. 42, the processes in S761 to S770 are the same as those in the first embodiment, and therefore, the process in S760, which is a difference, will be mainly described.

  First, it is determined whether or not the special effect flag in the sub-main information storage unit 260 is on (S760). If the special effect flag is not on (S760: NO), that is, if the special effect is not being executed, the process proceeds to the next S761 to continue the determination of whether or not the on-hold extended resort effect A can be executed. On the other hand, if the special effect flag is on (S760: YES), that is, if the special effect is already being executed, the processing after S761 is skipped in order to avoid the execution of the in-hold extended resort effect A. Then, this process ends.

(On-hold consecutive villa production B determination processing: first modification)
Next, the on-hold consecutive resort production B determination process (S805) according to the subroutine of S805 in FIG. 31 in the first modification will be described. FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing details of the on-hold consecutive resort effect B determination process (S805) in the first modified example.

  Here, the difference from the first embodiment described above is the processing of S859, S862, and S863, and depending on whether the special effect is being executed or not, The effect pattern selection process is different. In FIG. 43, the processes of S851 to S858 and S868 to S870 are the same as those of the first embodiment, and therefore the processes of S859, S862, and S863, which are different points, will be mainly described.

  First, when execution of the on-hold consecutive resort production B is determined, it is determined whether or not the special production flag of the sub-main information storage unit 260 is on (S859). If the special effect flag is not on (S859: NO), that is, if the special effect is not being executed, the extended game effect pattern selection process 1 for determining the contents of the reserved extended resort effect B is executed ( S862). In the consecutive resort production pattern selection process 1, the consecutive resort production pattern table shown in FIG. 8B is obtained, and the consecutive resort production pattern random number value is obtained from the production lottery random number generating means 210, so that a plurality of types are obtained. One of the consecutive-village production patterns is determined by lottery.

  On the other hand, if the special effect flag is on (S859: YES), that is, if the special effect is being executed, the consecutive resort effect pattern selection process 2 for determining the content of the on-hold consecutive resort effect B is performed. It executes (S863). In this consecutive resort production pattern selection process 2, while acquiring a consecutive resort production pattern table (not shown) different from the above-described FIG. 8B, a consecutive resort production pattern random number value is obtained from the production lottery random number generating means 210. Then, one of the multiple villa production patterns is determined by lottery from among the multiple types of villa production patterns. In the unillustrated consecutive-village effect pattern table, only the consecutive-village effect pattern generated in the end demonstration effect is specified, and the extended-game effect pattern generated in the start demonstration effect or the round effect is not specified. In other words, in the villa production pattern selection process 2, only the villa production pattern for the end demonstration production is selected. This is because, as described above, the special effect is executed from the variable effect to the round effect. This is because it is possible to avoid a conflict between the production and the on-hold Renso production B.

As described above, according to the first modified example of the first embodiment, when the on-hold consecutive villa production occurs and then a big hit is made on the on-hold consecutive villa, internally, the number of consecutive villas N reaches the specified number of times Nset. Even if it is, the production that prohibits the generation of the special production and continues in conjunction with the production of the on-hold consecutive villa production (in this example, the special continuous production or the special background production within the limited period) ) And the special performance can be avoided, it is possible to prevent the effect of the on-hold renso production from becoming dilute, and as a result, it is possible to improve the fun of the game.

In the above-described first modification, the expectation for the special effect is achieved in the number of unreachable times (for example, 5, 10, 15 times) before the number N of consecutive resorts reaches the specified number Nset (= 20 times). For example, a special via effect composed of a part of the special effect may be provided. At this time, in the above-described first modified example, when the special performance is executed when the number of extended games reaches the specified number (20 times), basically the execution of the on-hold extended game production is limited (terminated). However, in the case of a special route effect, it may be configured so that the on-hold consecutive villa effect can be executed simultaneously even when the special route effect is being executed. .

[First Embodiment-Second Modification]
Next, a gaming machine according to a second modification of the first embodiment will be described. The gaming machine according to the second modification basically has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above, and hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the parts having the same configuration. Thus, the description is omitted, and different parts are mainly described.

(Relationship between rendezvous renso production and production mode)
In the first embodiment described above, the presentation mode on the presentation control board 200 side is uniquely determined in accordance with the variation pattern selection state on the main control board 100 side. The production mode can be selected when the production button 15 is operated.

  That is, in this modification, when a big hit (initial hit) occurs in a normal state, during the big hit production (during the end demonstration production), the type of the symbol variation production and the big hit production after the special game ends is specified. The player himself / herself can select the production mode from a plurality of types. In this example, as the probability variation effect mode Mβ during the ST period, two effect modes (first effect mode M1 and second effect mode M2) having different effect types are prepared, and a plurality of types are provided for each effect mode. A variation production pattern is stored. With regard to this variation effect pattern, even if the variation pattern of the special symbol is the same (even when the variation start command of the same information is received), if the effect mode is different, the variation effect pattern having different effect contents is selected. It will be.

  The first effect mode M1 and the second effect mode M2 are configured as battle effect modes in which the player-side ally character battles against the enemy character, and the player-side ally character and the opponent's enemy for each effect mode. Characters are set to be different from each other.

  While staying in the first effect mode M1, a change effect pattern of effect contents in which the teammate character C1 corresponding to the effect mode M1 battles against an enemy character on the stage is selected as the symbol change effect. Further, while staying in the first effect mode M1, the first effect mode M1 is selected by selecting a jackpot effect pattern of the effect contents (attack type) that attacks the enemy character with the ally character C1 as the main character as the jackpot effect. The reciprocal relationship between the symbol variation production and the jackpot production is secured.

  While staying in the second effect mode M2, as the symbol variation effect, a variation effect pattern of effect contents in which the teammate character C2 corresponding to the effect mode M2 battles against the enemy character and the enemy's hide is selected. In addition, while staying in the second effect mode M2, as the big hit effect, the big hit effect pattern of the effect content (defense system) that protects the attack from the enemy character with the ally character C2 as the main character is selected. The mutual relationship between the symbol variation effect and the jackpot effect in the effect mode M2 is ensured.

When the first hit occurs in the normal state, the effect mode is selected by displaying a predetermined mode selection screen during the end demonstration effect in the jackpot effect. During the display of the mode selection screen, an operation valid period for validating the operation of the effect button 15 is set. On the mode selection screen, the display area of the effect display device 70 is divided into left and right parts, the name of the teammate character C1 is displayed with the related image in the left area, and the name of the teammate character C2 is displayed with the related image in the right area. The Then, effect modes M1 and M2 corresponding to the teammate characters C1 and C2 selected by the effect button 15 during the operation effective period are set. If no operation is performed during the operation valid period, any production mode is set by internal lottery.

  Subsequently, the relationship between the on-hold consecutive resort production and the production mode in the second modification will be described.

  (3-1) The execution probability (occurrence frequency) of the on-hold consecutive villa effect A is different between when staying in the first effect mode M1 and when staying in the second effect mode M2. Is set. In this example, when staying in the first effect mode M1, for example, execution is performed at a rate of 90% (high probability), non-execution is determined at a rate of 10%, while staying in the second effect mode M2 If it is, execution is determined at a rate of 10% (low probability) and non-execution is determined at a rate of 90%. In addition, as long as the execution probability of the on-hold consecutive villa production A differs for each production mode, when staying in any of the production modes, the on-hold consecutive villa production A is not executed. The execution probability of the villa production A may be set to 0%.

  (3-2) The execution probability (occurrence frequency) of the on-hold consecutive villa effect B is set to be the same when staying in the first effect mode M1 and when staying in the second effect mode M2. Yes. In this example, even when staying in any of the production modes M1 and M2, execution is determined at a rate of 80% and non-execution is determined at a rate of 20%, for example. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the execution probability of the on-hold consecutive villa effect B may be made different for each effect mode as in the on-hold consecutive villa effect A.

  (3-3) When execution of the on-hold consecutive villa production A is determined, the content of the on-hold consecutive villa production A (continuous villa production pattern) is the second when the first production mode M1 is staying. The same setting is made when the user is staying in the production mode M2. Here, FIG. 44 (A) is a schematic diagram showing a villa production pattern table of the reserved villa production A in the present modification. In this example, in the in-hold extended villa production A, any one of the same extended villa production patterns PA1 and PA2 is selected regardless of the production mode. Since the production patterns PA1 and PA2 have been described in the first embodiment, the description thereof is omitted here.

  (3-4) When execution of the on-hold consecutive villa production B is determined, the production contents (the consecutive villa production pattern) of the on-hold consecutive villa production B are the second and second cases where the first production mode M1 is staying. It is set to be different from the case where the user is staying in the production mode M2. Here, FIG. 44 (B) is a schematic diagram showing a extended villa production pattern table of the on-hold extended villa production B in the present modification. In this example, in the on-hold consecutive villa production B, one of the consecutive villa production patterns PB11, PB12, and PB13 is selected in the first production mode, and in the second production mode, the villa production patterns PB21, PB22. , PB23 is selected. In the first effect mode M1, when the consecutive-village effect patterns PB11 to PB13 are selected, special effect images “BX11” to “BX13” that do not appear in any scene other than the on-hold extended-village effect. Is displayed. As the effect images BX11 to BX13, for example, an attack-type effect content in which an image imitating an “invincible sword” or character information such as “attack is the greatest defense” appears. On the other hand, in the second effect mode M2, when the consecutive-village effect patterns PB21 to PB23 are selected, a special effect image “BX21” that does not appear in any scene other than the on-hold consecutive-village effect. “BX23” is displayed. As the effect images BX21 to BX23, for example, an image imitating “invincible armor” or a defense-related effect content in which character information such as “complete defense” appears.

  Next, the procedure of the operation process in the second modification of the first embodiment will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS.

(Big hit effect content determination processing: second modification)
First, the big hit effect content determination process (S638) according to the subroutine of S638 of FIG. 27 in the second modification will be described. FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing details of the big hit effect content determination processing (S638) in the second modification.

  Here, the difference from the first embodiment described above is the processing of S829 to S831, in that the operation of the effect button 15 is set to be effective during the end demonstration effect at the first hit. In FIG. 45, the processes of S801 to S826 and S835 to S838 are the same as those of the first embodiment, and therefore, the processes of S829 to S831 which are different points will be mainly described.

  First, it is determined whether or not the current big hit is the first hit (S829). In the case of the first hit (S829: YES), an operation effective period for measuring the operation effective period of the effect button 15 so that the effect mode can be selected according to the operation of the effect button 15 by the player. A predetermined value is set in the timer (S830). The operation valid period is a period during which the operation input of the effect button 15 is valid. Subsequently, the effect button valid flag of the sub-main information storage means 260 is turned on (S831). The effect button valid flag is a flag that is turned on when the operation of the effect button 15 is valid.

(Production button monitoring control process: second modification)
Next, the effect button monitoring control process (S617) according to the subroutine of S617 in FIG. 26 in the second modification will be described. FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing details of the effect button monitoring control process (S617).

  First, it is determined whether or not the effect button valid flag of the sub-main information storage means 260 is on (S951). If the effect button valid flag is on (S951: YES), it is determined whether or not the operation button 15 is in an operation valid period, that is, whether or not the operation valid period timer is not "0" (S952). ). As described above, the operation valid period timer is set to a predetermined value at the start of the end demonstration effect at the first hit, and is subtracted by 1 ms each time a timer interrupt process described later occurs. Further, during the operation effective period, an effect screen (mode selection screen) based on the end demonstration effect pattern set in S804 is displayed, and based on the operation input of the effect button 15, the first effect mode M1 and the second effect mode. Any one of M2 can be selected. Specifically, although not shown in the drawing, on the mode selection screen, two selected images corresponding to each effect mode are displayed on the left and right or top and bottom, and the display mode of the selected image is displayed at regular intervals during the operation effective period. By sequentially switching, one of these two selected images can be selected according to the operation timing of the effect button 15, and an effect mode corresponding to this selected image is set.

Here, when the operation button 15 is in the operation effective period (S952: YES), it is determined whether or not there is an operation input of the effect button 15 (S953). When there is an operation input of the effect button 15 (S953: YES), the operation input information of the effect button 15 is stored in the sub-main information storage unit 260 (S954). In this example, the operation input information includes information indicating that the first effect mode has been selected and information indicating that the second effect mode has been selected. Subsequently, an image control command for instructing the operation input information of the effect button 15 to the image control board 300 is generated and stored in the command storage area of the sub-main information storage unit 260 (S955). Further, when there is an operation input of the effect button 15 as described above, an operation valid flag is set in order to confirm the operation input and set the end of the operation valid period even before the operation valid period has elapsed. It is turned off (S956). On the other hand, when the operation valid period is not in effect (S952: NO), that is, when the operation valid period timer is “0”, the effect button valid flag is turned off (S956).

(Production state transition processing: second modification)
Next, an effect state transition process (S632) according to the subroutine of S632 in FIG. 27 in the second modification will be described. FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing details of the rendering state transition process (S632) in the second modified example.

  Here, the difference from the first embodiment described above is the process of S714 to S720, based on the operation input information of the effect button 15 set in the effect button monitoring control process (S617) described above (the effect by the player). The point is that the production mode is determined alternatively by the pressing operation of the button 15). In FIG. 47, the processing of S701 to S705 and S721 is the same as that of the first embodiment, and therefore, the description will be focused on the processing of S714 to S720 which is a difference.

  First, when the transition destination of the variation pattern selection state is the high probability reduced variation state β (S706: YES), it is determined whether or not the current big hit is the first hit (S714). If it is the first hit (S714: YES), it is determined whether or not the operation input information set in S954 is information indicating that the first effect mode M1 has been selected (S715). When the first effect mode M1 is selected (S715: YES), the first effect mode M1 is set as the transition destination of the effect mode (S716). When the first effect mode M1 is entered, the first probability background data is set in the background data storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260 (S717). Then, in the first effect mode M1, for example, a first probability background image of “the arena” is displayed on the effect display device 70 from the next symbol variation.

  On the other hand, when the operation input information set in S954 is information indicating that the second effect mode M2 has been selected and operated (S715: NO), the second effect mode M2 is set as the transition destination of the effect mode ( S718). When the second effect mode M2 is entered, the second probability background data is set in the background data storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260 (S719). Then, in the second effect mode M2, for example, a second probability change background image of “enemy hideout” is displayed on the effect display device 70 from the next symbol variation.

  If the current big hit is not the first hit (S714: NO), the effect mode and the background image selected at the first hit are maintained (S720). In addition, you may comprise so that not only the operation input at the time of the first hit in said S714-S719 but a certain condition may be met and a production | presentation mode may be switched. As specific conditions, for example, when a specific jackpot (including a case where the jackpot type is a specific type or a case where the jackpot effect is a specific effect), or when a predetermined condition is satisfied with respect to the extended resort state (The occurrence of the special effect described above) or a case where there is a specific operation input during a big hit (for example, a special operation input with five times or a long press as a special operation input at a specific timing at the time of a big hit).

(On-hold consecutive villa production A determination processing: second modification)
Subsequently, the on-hold consecutive resort production A determination process (S737) according to the subroutine of S737 in FIG. 29 in the second modification will be described. FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing details of the on-hold consecutive resort effect A determination process (S737) in the second modification.

Here, the difference from the first embodiment described above is the processing of S771 to S773, and the execution probability of the on-hold consecutive resort production A lottery processing is set to the production mode set in the production state transition processing (S632). The point is that they are different. In FIG. 48, S761 to S765,
Since the process of S767-S770 is the same process as 1st Embodiment, it demonstrates centering around the process of S771-S773 which is a difference.

  First, it is determined whether or not the presentation mode currently staying is the first presentation mode M1 (S771). In the case of the first effect mode M1 (S771: YES), the on-hold extended resort production A lottery for determining whether or not to execute the on-hold extended resort production A in the first effect mode M1. Process 1 is executed (S772). In the on-hold consecutive resort production A lottery process 1, the consecutive resort production lottery random value matches the determination value of “execution” or “non-execution” with reference to an unshown consecutive resort production A lottery table. Determine whether or not to execute. In this example, execution is determined at a rate of 90%, for example, and non-execution is determined at a rate of 10%.

  On the other hand, in the case where the effect mode during the stay is the second effect mode M2 (S771: NO), in order to determine by lottery whether or not to execute the on-hold extended resort effect A in the second effect mode M2. The on-hold consecutive resort production A lottery process 2 is executed (S773). In the on-hold consecutive resort production A lottery process 2, the random resort production lottery random value matches the determination value of “execution” or “non-execution” with reference to the unillustrated consecutive resort production A lottery table. Determine whether or not to execute. In this example, for example, execution is determined at a rate of 10% and non-execution is determined at a rate of 90%.

  As described above, in the present modification, the probability that the on-hold extended villa production A is executed when staying in the first presentation mode M1 and the second presentation mode M2, that is, the on-hold extended villa production. The frequency of occurrence of A is set to be different.

(On-hold consecutive villa production B determination processing: second modification)
Subsequently, the on-hold consecutive resort production B determination process (S805) according to the subroutine of S805 of FIG. 45 in the second modification will be described. FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing details of the on-hold consecutive resort effect B determination process (S805) in the second modified example.

  Here, the difference from the first embodiment described above is the processing of S860, S864, and S865, and the extended villa production pattern table of the on-hold extended villa production B is set in the production state transition process (S632). There is a point that is different according to the production mode. In FIG. 49, the processes of S851 to S857 and S869 to S870 are the same as those of the first embodiment, and therefore, the processes of S860, S864, and S865, which are different points, will be mainly described.

  First, it is determined whether or not the presentation mode currently staying is the first presentation mode M1 (S860). When it is the 1st production mode (S860: YES), the consecutive resort production pattern selection process 1 for determining the content of the on-hold consecutive resort production B is performed (S864). In the consecutive resort production pattern selection process 1, the consecutive resort production pattern table shown in FIG. 44 (B) described above is obtained, and the consecutive resort production pattern random number value is obtained from the production lottery random number generating means 210. One of the consecutive villa production patterns is determined by lottery from among the consecutive villa production patterns PB11 to PB13. As described above, in the consecutive resort production pattern selection process 1, only the consecutive resort production patterns PB11 to P13 having the attack-related contents are selected.

  On the other hand, if the effect mode during the stay is the second effect mode M2 (S860: NO), the extended resort effect pattern selection process 2 for determining the content of the on-hold extended resort effect B is executed (S865). . In this consecutive resort production pattern selection process 2, while obtaining the consecutive resort production pattern table shown in FIG. 44 (B) described above, the consecutive resort production pattern random number value is obtained from the production lottery random number generating means 210, and a plurality of types are obtained. One of the consecutive villa production patterns is determined by lottery from among the consecutive villa production patterns PB21 to PB23. As described above, in the consecutive resort production pattern selection process 2, only the consecutive resort production patterns PB21 to 23 having the contents of the defense system are selected.

  As described above, in this modified example, when execution of the on-hold extended villa effect B is decided, the case of staying in the first effect mode M1 and the case of staying in the second effect mode M2 are performed. B's display mode (renso production pattern) is set to be different.

  As mentioned above, according to the 2nd modification of 1st Embodiment, according to the classification of the production mode which the player himself selected, by changing the appearance rate and the content of the production of the on-hold consecutive villa production, It is possible to provide the player with the on-hold consecutive villa production that suits his / her preference, and as a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In addition, in this modification, although the special effect mode which stays only within the limited period after the end of a special game is not provided, it is not limited to this, You may provide a special effect mode. In this case, a first special effect mode corresponding to the first effect mode and a second special effect mode corresponding to the second effect mode are provided, and a desired special effect mode is obtained by the player's operation after the first hit. May be configured to be selectable. In this configuration, for example, a special continuous effect may be generated when shifting to the first special effect mode, and a special continuous effect may not be generated when shifting to the second special effect mode. Further, as a further modification, the fact that at least one of the one or a plurality of subsequent action-pending balls is in a specific hold makes it possible to execute the in-hold extended resort effect B in the special game effect display process. This is a special condition in which the special game triggers the transition from the first effect mode M1 to the second effect mode M2 even if the condition is fulfilling the condition for executing the rendezvous resort effect on hold In the case of a game (referred to as “special special game”), compared to the case where the special game is not a special special game (referred to as “non-special special game”), the occurrence frequency (execution probability) ) May be low. In that case, the jackpot type includes at least the first jackpot and the second jackpot, and when the first jackpot is won, the game shifts to the first effect mode after the end of the special game (non-special special game), In the case of winning the second jackpot, after the special game (special special game) is finished, the mode is shifted to the second effect mode. At this time, during the execution of the special special game, for example, a special jackpot effect that does not appear in any other scene is executed. Therefore, when winning the second jackpot, a special jackpot effect is generated during the special game (during special special game). The frequency of the villa production B is set relatively low.

[First Embodiment-Third Modification]
Next, a gaming machine according to a third modification of the first embodiment will be described. The gaming machine according to the third modification basically has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above, and hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to parts having the same configuration. Thus, the description is omitted, and different parts are mainly described.

(Director-in-residence production that requires multiple operations)
In the first embodiment described above, in the on-hold consecutive resort production, it is a configuration that suggests or notifies the possibility that there is a specific hold that becomes a big hit in the subsequent operation hold ball, but is not limited thereto, and is specified. You may comprise so that it may suggest or alert | report not only the presence or absence of a holding | maintenance but the fluctuation | variation effect aspect of a subsequent action | operation holding ball.

  In this modification, while suggesting or informing the fluctuating effect mode of the subsequent actuated ball in the on-hold extended game effect B, suggesting or informing the fluctuating effect mode of the subsequent actuated ball in the on-hold consecutive game effect A. Do not do. Note that the reason for not suggesting or notifying the variation production mode in the on-holding renso production A is that the on-holding renso production A occurs within the fluctuation, and therefore, a special game with a special game due to the big hit in the fluctuation is inserted. This is because the significance of suggesting or notifying the variation effect mode after the game is low.

  Now, the on-hold consecutive villa effect B in the present modification will be described. FIG. 50 is a schematic diagram showing an example of the contents of effects of the on-hold consecutive resort effect B in the present modification. The contents of the on-hold consecutive villa production B in this modification are obtained by opening the treasure chest displayed on the screen when the player operates the production button 15 a plurality of times. Correspondingly, the presence / absence of the specific hold in the subsequent operation hold ball and the variation effect mode are suggested or notified. Thus, in order to receive the indication or notification of the presence or absence of the specific hold and the variation effect mode in the on-hold consecutive resort effect B, a plurality of button operations by the player are required.

  In this modified example, as shown in FIG. 50, a total of three treasure chests are arranged in a horizontal row on the screen, and one treasure chest is opened by one operation of the effect button 15, and this opened treasure chest. The number of acquired points (0 points or 1 point) appears. Then, according to the total number of points obtained when all the treasure chests are opened, the presence / absence of specific holding in the subsequent operation holding ball and the changing effect mode are suggested or notified.

  As will be described in detail later, in this modified example, when the total number of acquired points is 0, it is suggested that there is a possibility that an operation holding ball with a reach effect exists in the subsequent operation holding ball. When the total number of acquired points is 1, it is definitely notified that there is an operation holding ball with a reach effect in the subsequent operation holding ball. When the total number of points acquired is two, the fact that there is a specific hold that becomes a 16R big hit or an 8R big hit in the subsequent operation hold ball, that is, the fact that there is a hold in the hold, is definitely notified. When the total number of acquired points is 3, the fact that there is a specific hold that becomes a 16R big hit in the subsequent operation hold ball, that is, a notification of a hold in the high profit big hit, is definitely notified.

  Here, the extended game effect pattern in this modification is demonstrated, referring FIG. FIG. 51 is a schematic diagram illustrating an example of a extended-village effect pattern table for the on-hold extended-village effect B in the third modified example. A plurality of types of consecutive-village effect patterns are defined in the consecutive-village effect pattern table. In each figure, for convenience of explanation, “selection rate” is shown, but in actuality, a determination value (range of random values) for determining the villa effect pattern according to the villa effect pattern random value Is set, and based on which judgment value the random number value of the renage effect pattern belongs to, the renage effect pattern is determined.

  As shown in FIG. 51, in the consecutive resort production pattern table, according to each consecutive resort production pattern, the number of points for each treasure chest that can be acquired by one button operation (the score of the first treasure chest, the second The treasure box score and the third treasure chest score) have been specified (see the column “Production contents (acquired points)” in the figure), and each consecutive villa production pattern has a total treasure chest score (0, (1 point, 2 points, 3 points). In other words, when the total score is “0”, only the extended game effect pattern PB31 is selected, and when the total acquired score is “1”, any of the extended game effect patterns PB32 to PB34 is selected. When the acquired score is “2 points”, any of the extended game effect patterns PB35 to PB37 is selected. When the total acquired score is “3 points”, only the extended game effect pattern PB38 is selected. For example, when the consecutive-village effect pattern PB35 is selected, “0 points” can be obtained by the first operation, “1 point” can be obtained by the second operation, and “1 point” can be obtained by the third operation. As a result, the total score “2 points” is determined.

  In this consecutive resort production pattern table, the selection rate of the consecutive resort production pattern is set to be different according to the result of the prefetch determination (preliminary determination). In principle, in the Renso production pattern, the selection rate is assigned according to the final total score, and when the result of the prefetch determination is a big hit, the total score is “0”, “ While the selection rate increases in the order of “1 point”, “2 points”, and “3 points”, if the result of the pre-judgment is out of place, the total score is “0 points”, “1 point” , “2 points”, “3 points”, the selection rate decreases in this order.

  Furthermore, even if the result of the pre-reading determination is out of order and the big hit, the selection rate of the villa performance pattern differs depending on the type of outage (out of reach, out of reach) and the type of big hit (8R big hit, 16R big hit). In other words, if the result of the pre-reading determination is out of reach, no more than “1” will be selected as the total number of points earned, so when the total number of points earned exceeds “1”, the subsequent operation It is deterministic that an operation holding ball with a reach effect exists in the holding ball. Even if the result of the prefetch determination is a big hit, “1 point” may be selected as the total score, but in this example, only the reach fluctuation is selected as the big hit fluctuation pattern as shown in FIG. Therefore, as described above, when the total score becomes “1 point” or more, it is definite that there is an operation holding ball with a reach effect in the subsequent operation holding ball. Does not occur.

  Similarly, when the result of the prefetch determination is a big hit, “2 points” or more may be selected as the total number of points to be acquired. On the other hand, when the result of the prefetch determination is out of reach (out of normal reach, super out of reach) Since “2 points” or more is not selected as the total number of points to be acquired, when the total number of points to be acquired is “2 points” or more, there is a specific hold in the subsequent operation hold ball, that is, It will be definitive to get on hold. Furthermore, when the result of the pre-reading determination is 16R big hit, “3 points” may be selected as the total score. On the other hand, when the result of the pre-reading determination is 8R big hit, the total score is “3 points”. Is not selected, and when the total score reaches “3 points”, there is a specific hold that is 16 big hits in the subsequent working hold ball, that is, the high profit big hit is held within the It is definitive to go to a resort.

  The contents of such a reserved in-ream villa effect B will be specifically described with reference to FIG. In this example, the case where the consecutive resort production pattern PB37 is selected is illustrated. As described above, in this consecutive-village production pattern, “0 points” can be obtained by the first operation, “1 point” can be obtained by the second operation, and “1 point” can be obtained by the third operation. Is the contents of the effect of definitely informing the occurrence of two points, that is, the occurrence of the on-hold consecutive resort.

  First, as shown in FIG. 50 (A), with the start of the operation effective period in which the operation of the effect button 15 is enabled, images of three treasure chests (closed treasure chests) are displayed on the screen, and “ "Let's open the treasure chest by pressing the button" is displayed. On the screen, “remaining time” at which the operation button 15 can be operated and “total number of points acquired” indicating the number of points acquired at the current stage are displayed. Further, a cursor pointing to the treasure chest to be operated is displayed on the screen, and the cursor is gradually shifted from left to right by one treasure according to the remaining operable time. . On the screen, the left treasure chest is also called “first treasure chest”, the central treasure chest is called “second treasure chest”, and the right treasure chest is also called “third treasure chest”.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 50B, when the effect button 15 is operated when the cursor points to the first treasure box, the first treasure box is opened. At this time, if the treasure box is out of place, the characters “0” and “sorry” appear from the treasure chest.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 50C, when the effect button is operated 15 times when the cursor points to the second treasure chest, the second treasure chest is opened. At this time, if the treasure box is a win, a character “chance” appears together with a character “1 point” from the treasure box. At this time, since “1 point” or more is assured as the total number of points acquired, it becomes definite that there is an operation holding ball with a reach effect in the subsequent operation holding ball.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 50D, when the effect button 15 is operated when the cursor points to the third treasure chest, the third treasure chest is opened. At this time, if the treasure box is a win, a character “chance” appears together with a character “1 point” from the treasure box. In addition, the characters “2 points” are displayed as “total score” obtained by adding the first score and the second score. Thereby, it is clearly notified that the specific hold is included in the subsequent operation hold ball, that is, that it becomes a hold range resort.

  When the production button 15 is not operated in spite of the occurrence of the on-hold consecutive resort production B in this way, the treasure box remains closed, and the pre-reading determination with respect to the subsequent operation holding ball is performed. You can't get results. This makes it possible for the player to recognize that each operation of the effect button 15 is meaningful. In addition, in this modification, although it was set as the structure which requires operation of multiple times, it is not limited to this, It is good also as a structure which suggests or alert | reports the change effect aspect of a subsequent action | operation hold ball only by one operation. . In addition, if the button operation is not performed even though the player has operated the button, the player can obtain “3 points”, but if the button operation is not performed, it is complementarily different from this. You may comprise so that 2 may be performed at the time of completion | finish demonstration production. In other words, if the button operation is performed at a specified timing and “3 points” can be obtained, it may be configured not to perform the in-hold extended villa effect B-2.

  As mentioned above, according to the 3rd modification of 1st Embodiment, when not only the possibility that specific reservation exists in a subsequent operation reservation ball | bowl, but the subsequent operation reservation ball | bowl was digested in the retentive in a reservation in stop. By suggesting or informing even the fluctuating production mode, it is possible to teach the player a variety of additional information according to the production result. It is possible to improve the fun of the game. In addition, the synergistic effect of the on-hold consecutive resort production and the button production can further increase the added value when the on-hold consecutive resort production occurs, and can further enhance the player-participatory presentation effect. .

[First Embodiment-Fourth Modification]
Next, a gaming machine according to a fourth modification of the first embodiment will be described. The gaming machine according to the fourth modification basically has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above, and hereinafter, the same reference numerals are assigned to the parts having the same configuration. Thus, the description is omitted, and different parts are mainly described.

(Confirmed notification timing by rendezvous production on hold)
In the first embodiment described above, the on-hold consecutive villa production becomes definitive when the on-hold consecutive villa production A occurs. However, the present invention is not limited to this. It may be configured such that the consecutive villas are determined after a predetermined condition is satisfied after the consecutive villas production A is generated without determining the consecutive villas.

  For example, in the probability variation mode in which the gaming state is a probability variation state of a special symbol, a battle effect is developed as a symbol variation effect that includes a battle between a teammate character and an enemy character. The battle effect in this modification is an effect that suggests that the player's ally character wins the enemy character immediately before the end of the symbol variation effect (immediately before the decoration symbol stops), thereby confirming the 16R jackpot with the variation. It is.

  In this modification, the on-hold consecutive villa effect A may occur as a battle effect (special battle effect) during symbol variation. In this special battle effect, a special enemy character that does not appear in the normal battle effect appears. In the case of this special battle effect, if the teammate character wins the enemy character, the 16-hit win in the change and the fact that there is a specific hold in the subsequent action holding ball, that is, the hold-in-range resort It is decided to do. On the other hand, if the teammate character is defeated by the enemy character in this special battle effect, the deviation due to the change becomes definite, and further, the occurrence of the reserved renzo is denied (so-called gasset effect). ). Thus, in this modified example, until the result of the battle in the battle effect is notified, it is not determined whether or not a reserved resort will occur. Can be increased.

  In addition, it is not limited only to the on-hold renso production A, and also on the on-hold renso production B, the on-hold renso production B is not determined at the time of the on-hold renso production B, and the on-hold renso production B is generated. Then, it is good also as a structure by which a predetermined condition is satisfied and a pending | holding range resort is decided. In this modified example, the content of the on-hold extended villa effect B is exemplified by a roulette effect that notifies the possibility of the on-hold extended villa by the roulette stop result, for example. In this roulette production, there are 3 stop positions “壱”, “弐” and “San”, and if the roulette stops at “壱”, the reserved resort is denied and stops at “弐” In such a case, it is suggested that there is a pending renage, and if it is stopped at "San", the confirmation of the banned villa will be notified. In this way, in this modified example, until the lottery result is notified in the roulette effect, it is not determined whether or not the reserved resort will occur. Can be increased. Note that the roulette may be stopped on condition of player's button operation.

  As described above, according to the fourth modified example of the first embodiment, even if the on-hold extended resort production occurs, the player is instructed whether or not the on-hold extended resort is confirmed until a predetermined condition is satisfied. Therefore, the interest in the content of the effect can be maintained until the final timing when the on-hold consecutive resort effect ends, and as a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[First Embodiment-Fifth Modification]
Next, a gaming machine according to a fifth modification of the first embodiment will be described. The gaming machine according to the fifth modification basically has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above, and hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to parts having the same configuration. Thus, the description is omitted, and different parts are mainly described.

(Button notice effect including rendezvous in the reservation)
In the first embodiment described above, the on-hold consecutive villa effect A is configured to display an effect image corresponding to the consecutive villa effect pattern, but a button notice effect that displays a notice effect image associated with a button operation by the player. It is good also as a structure including the on-hold consecutive resort production A as one aspect.

  Here, in the first embodiment described above, the notice effect pattern corresponding to the change effect pattern is selected, and the notice effect is generated during the symbol change effect. As one of the notice effects, a button operation by the player is performed. There is a button notice effect. The button notice effect is a notice effect that suggests or notifies that there is a possibility of a big hit by displaying a predetermined effect image under the condition of a button operation by the player. In the present modification, the on-hold consecutive villa effect A is generated in the form of being included in the button notice effect. At this time, in a normal button notice effect, a plurality of items A, B, and C appear on the screen, and any one item can be selected. On the other hand, in the button notice effect as the on-hold consecutive resort production A, in addition to the normal items A, B, and C, a special item D appears on the screen, and this item D can be selected. . In this way, the possibility of a reserved resort can be notified by the appearance of the special item D during the button notice effect.

  As described above, according to the fifth modification of the first embodiment, the added value when the on-hold consecutive villa production is established can be further enhanced by the synergistic effect of the on-hold consecutive villa production and the button notice effect. The effect of player participation can be enhanced, and as a result, the fun of the game can be improved.

[First Embodiment-Sixth Modification]
Next, a gaming machine according to a sixth modification of the first embodiment will be described. The gaming machine according to the sixth modification basically has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above, and hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to parts having the same configuration. Thus, the description is omitted, and different parts are mainly described.

(Combination image of the rendezvous rendezvous production and design variation production)
In the first embodiment described above, only the effects that do not appear in all other scenes are illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the effect image of the on-hold consecutive villa effect B is displayed during the symbol variation effect. It is good also as a structure which serves as one of the produced effects images. For example, in the battle effect during the symbol variation effect, if an effect image in which the teammate character unleashes the special technique may appear, this effect image may be used as the effect image of the reserved in-village effect B. Note that the reason why the effect image of the on-hold consecutive villa effect A and the effect image during the symbol variation effect is not combined is that when the image is displayed during the symbol variation effect, the effect image becomes a normal battle effect. Since it is difficult to identify whether it is displayed as a one-step process or as an on-hold range resort production A, there is a possibility that it may not be possible to accurately notify the player of the possibility of the on-hold range resort. Because it is expensive.

  As described above, according to the sixth modified example of the first embodiment, the effect image of the symbol variation effect and the effect image of the on-hold consecutive resort effect are shared in part, and thus the limited hardware of the gaming machine It is possible to prevent wasteful consumption of resources.

  In addition, you may provide the roaring effect for encouraging generation | occurrence | production of the on-hold consecutive resort effect B during a big hit effect. In this case, during the jackpot presentation, the on-hold consecutive villa production can be generated only once, while the roaring production can be generated a plurality of times. For example, if the above-mentioned combined-use image is scheduled to be displayed in a predetermined round during the big hit effect in the on-hold consecutive resort production B, for example, the on-hold consecutive resort production B (the relevant In order to avoid the occurrence of the combined image), it is also possible to display a rolled image that associates or predicts the generation of the combined image, such as the shadow of the teammate character or the afterimage of the deathblow.

[First Embodiment-Seventh Modification]
Next, a gaming machine according to a seventh modification of the first embodiment will be described. The gaming machine according to the seventh modification basically has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above, and hereinafter, the same reference numerals are assigned to the parts having the same configuration. Thus, the description is omitted, and different parts are mainly described.

(Number of notifications on hold Renso
In the first embodiment described above, it is configured that the possibility that there are a plurality of specific holds in the subsequent operation hold ball in the on-hold extended resort effect B can be notified. In order to teach the possibility that there are a plurality of specific holds in the operation hold ball, the maximum value of the number of specific holds that can be notified in the on-hold extended resort production (the “number of on-hold extended resort notifications”) is determined in advance. In addition, a configuration may be adopted in which the number of specific holdings existing in the subsequent operation holding ball within a range not exceeding the maximum value can be notified.

  In the above-described first embodiment, the maximum value of the on-hold consecutive villa notification in the on-hold consecutive villa production A is “1”, and the maximum value of the on-hold consecutive villa notification in the on-hold consecutive villa production B is “2”. That is, in the in-hold consecutive resort production A determination process, the pre-read determination for only the earliest specific hold among the subsequent operation hold balls is executed to notify the existence of one specific hold, while hold In the Inner Renso production B determination process, the pre-read determination for not only the earliest specific hold but also the subsequent specific hold among the subsequent operation hold balls is executed to notify the existence of two or more specific holds. Configured to get.

In the present modification, the number of specific reservations (referred to as “the number of extended reservations”) existing in the subsequent operation holding ball is counted in executing such determination processing of the extended reservations A and B. There is a counter for the number of in-hold retreats to do. The on-hold consecutive resort number counter is sequentially updated within a range that does not exceed a predetermined maximum number of on-hold consecutive resort notifications. The maximum value of the number of notifications in the on-hold consecutive villa is set to be larger in the on-hold consecutive villa production B than in the on-hold consecutive villa production A. Specifically, the maximum value of the number of notifications in the on-hold consecutive villas in the on-hold consecutive resort production A is “1”, and the maximum value of the in-holds in the continuous resort notification B is “3”. . In addition, the maximum value of the number of in-hold extended game notifications can be set in a range that is equal to or less than the maximum value of the number of active reserved balls of the second special symbol.

  As a notification mode of the number of in-hold resorts, the number of in-hold resorts is “1” when “one mystery” appears as in the first embodiment. If “2” appears in the “Mystery Book”, the possibility is “2” in the reserved resort, and if “3” appears in the “Reservation Book” The aspect which alert | reports possibility that it is the number of consecutive resorts "3" is illustrated.

  In addition, the maximum value of the number of in-hold extended villas in this modification is merely an example, and the maximum value of the number of in-hold extended villas in the on-hold extended villa production A may be “2” or more. "4" may be sufficient as the maximum value of the number of notifications in the on-hold consecutive villa in the on-hold consecutive villa production B.

  As described above, according to the seventh modified example of the first embodiment, the maximum value of the number of in-hold extended villa notifications for the on-hold extended villa production A and the on-hold extended villa production B is set to be different from each other. By renewing the number of reserved villas within a range that does not exceed, the display mode of the on-hold villas A and B can be abundant and varied depending on the number of consecutive villa notifications, As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Second Embodiment]
Next, a gaming machine according to the second embodiment will be described. The gaming machine of the second embodiment basically has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above, and hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the parts having the same configuration. The description is omitted, and different parts are mainly described.

  In the gaming machine of the first embodiment, the gaming state after the special game is determined based on the special symbol stop symbol (symbol group). In the gaming machine of the second embodiment, the special symbol stop symbol (symbol group). ) And the game mode during the special game, the game state after the special game is determined. In other words, the gaming machine according to the second embodiment allows a game ball to enter a special prize game having a specific area (in this example, the second large prize opening 65) and pass through the specific area. The game machine is configured as a so-called ball accuracy type game machine that decides to shift to the probability change state after the end of the special game.

FIG. 52 is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of the second grand prize winning opening 65 in the second embodiment. As described above, the second big prize opening 65 is provided with a second big prize opening switch 651 for detecting the entry of a game ball into the second big prize opening 65, and the second big prize opening. A second special electric accessory 652 for opening and closing 65 is provided. In addition, a distribution device 654 for determining a gaming state after the end of the special game is provided in the second grand prize winning port 65, located downstream of the second big prize winning port switch 651. The distribution device 654 is provided with a specific area 658 and a non-specific area 659 to which game balls that have entered the second grand prize winning opening 65 are distributed. In addition, the distribution device 654 is provided with a blade member 655 that selectively guides the game ball that has entered the second grand prize opening 65 to the specific area 658 or the non-specific area 659, and opens and closes the blade member 655. A specific area solenoid 656 is provided. In a state where the wing member 655 is in the closed position, the specific area 658 is closed by the wing member 655, and the game balls are distributed to the non-specific area 659. On the other hand, when the blade member 655 is in the open position, the specific area 658 is opened, and the game balls are distributed to the specific area 658. In the specific area 658, a specific area switch 657 for detecting a game ball that has flowed into the specific area 658 is provided. The specific area switch 657 functions as a probability change switch for shifting the gaming state after the end of the special game to a state (high probability state) in which the probability variation function of the special symbol is activated.

  In this example, the opening / closing operation of the second special electric accessory 652 and the opening / closing operation of the blade member 655 are controlled synchronously, and the opening period of the second big prize opening 65 and the opening period of the specific area 658 are temporally controlled. Are configured to overlap. Therefore, when the second grand prize opening 65 is opened, the specific area 658 is also opened, and when the second big prize opening 65 is closed, the specific area 658 is also closed. Note that the drive control of the blade member 655 (specific area solenoid 656) is executed by the main control board 100 (electric accessory control means 160).

  Based on the detection information from the specific area switch 657, the main control board 100 (the ball determining means 110) determines whether or not a game ball has entered the specific area 658 of the second big prize opening 65. When the main control board 100 (the entrance determination means 110) detects that an entry into the specific area 658 is detected, an effect control command including the specific area entrance information (“specific area entrance command”) To generate).

  Next, a special symbol stop symbol (big hit type) in the second embodiment will be described.

  The upper part of FIG. 53 is a diagram schematically showing a symbol table per first special symbol in the second embodiment. In the symbol table per first special symbol, the symbol random value per special symbol is associated with the stop symbol, the symbol group, and the action patterns of the special winning openings 64 and 65, respectively. In this table, the stop symbols “1” to “8” of the first special symbol are classified into two types of symbol groups A and B according to the type of jackpot. Specifically, symbols “1”, “2”, “3”, and “4” include symbols “A”, “6”, “7”, “ Symbol group B (8R short open big hit symbol) is associated with “8”.

  The lower part of FIG. 53 is a diagram schematically showing a symbol table per second special symbol in the second embodiment. In the second special symbol per symbol table, the special symbols per special symbol are associated with the stop symbols, the symbol groups, and the operation patterns of the special winning openings 64 and 65, respectively. In this table, the stop symbols “11” to “18” of the second special symbol are classified into two types of symbol groups C and D according to the type of jackpot. Specifically, in the symbols “11”, “12”, “13”, and “14”, the symbol group C (16R long open big hit symbol) has symbols “15”, “16”, “17”, “ 18 ”is associated with the symbol group D (8R long open big hit symbol).

  The “long open big hit” is a big hit with a round game in which the second big winning opening 65 is long open, and it is relatively easy to enter the game ball into the specific area 658. The “short open big hit” is a big win with a round game in which the second big winning opening 65 is short opened, and it is relatively difficult to enter the game ball into the specific area 658. In this embodiment, when the first special symbol is a big hit, it corresponds to a long open big hit (16R long open big hit) at a rate of 50%, and a short open big hit (8R short open big hit at the rate of the remaining 50%. ) On the other hand, in the case of a big hit with the second special symbol, it corresponds to a long open big hit (16R long open big hit, 8R long open big hit) at a rate of 100%.

Here, FIG. 54 is a time chart for explaining the operation pattern of the special winning openings 64 and 65 in the special game in the second embodiment. In the figure, the state changes of the first big prize opening 64 and the second big prize opening 65 during the special game are shown in time series from left to right. In addition, between each round, the interval time (standby time) in which the closed state of the special winning openings 64 and 65 is maintained is provided. In the operation pattern of the special winning openings 64 and 65 in this embodiment, it is determined that the second special winning opening 65 (specific area 658) is opened and closed only in a specific round of special games (also referred to as “specific round”). ing. In the present embodiment, the specific round is defined as the seventh round and the eighth round. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the specific round may be changed to a different number of rounds, or a plurality of specific rounds of three or more may be set.

  FIG. 54A shows a 16R long open pattern which is an operation pattern by 16R long open big hit. In the 16R long opening pattern, the first big prize opening 64 is continuously opened for 29 seconds in rounds other than the specific round, while the second big prize opening 65 is used in the seventh and eighth rounds which are specific rounds. Is continuously opened for 29 seconds.

  FIG. 54B shows an 8R long opening pattern which is an operation pattern by 8R long opening big hit. In the 8R long opening pattern, the first big prize opening 64 is continuously opened for 29 seconds in rounds other than the specific round, while the second big prize opening 65 is used in the seventh and eighth rounds, which are specific rounds. Is continuously opened for 29 seconds.

  Thus, when 16R long open big hit or 8R long open big hit is selected, the opening period of the second big prize opening 65 is set to a long time of 29 seconds in the specific round. Since the opening period and the opening period of the specific area 658 overlap with each other in time, a game ball that has entered from the second major winning opening 65 easily wins the specific area 658. As a result, a state in which the game ball can easily pass through the specific area 658 is maintained.

  FIG. 54 (C) shows an 8R short opening pattern which is an operation pattern by 8R short opening big hit. In the 8R short opening pattern, the first grand prize opening 64 is continuously opened for 29 seconds in rounds other than the specific round, while the second big prize opening 65 is provided in the seventh and eighth rounds, which are specific rounds. Is opened for 0.2 seconds.

  Thus, when the 8R short open big hit is selected, the second big prize opening 65 is opened only for an extremely short time of 0.2 seconds in a specific round, so that the game ball is in the second big prize opening 65. The possibility of entering the specific area 658 is extremely low. As a result, a state in which it is difficult to pass the game ball to the specific area 658, or a state in which it is substantially impossible to pass, is maintained.

  When a game ball enters the specific area 658 in a specific round, after the special game ends, the state shifts to a special symbol probability change state (high probability state). In addition, when the transition to the special symbol probability change state is made, the special symbol time reduction state and the electric chew support state are maintained as long as the special symbol probable state continues and the special symbol probable state continues. continue. In addition, after the end of the special game, if the next big hit does not occur within the number of times of change of the special symbol within the ST number (100 times), the probability change state of the special symbol is ended and the state is shifted to the normal state.

  On the other hand, if the game ball does not enter the specific area 658 in the specific round, the special symbol is in a short time state (low probability state) after the special game ends. When the special symbol shifts to the short-time state, the electronic-chu support state continues as long as the special symbol time-shift state continues. In addition, after the end of the special game, when the number of changes of the special symbol reaches a predetermined number (70 times), the short time state of the special symbol is terminated and the normal state is entered.

Next, the on-hold consecutive resort production in the second embodiment will be described. In the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not the on-hold consecutive villa effect B as the big hit effect is executable at a timing after the specific round in the special game. This is not the timing after a specific round has passed (at least after a game ball has entered a specific area), the game state after the end of the special game will shift to a high probability state or to a low probability state This is because it is difficult to notify the occurrence of the reserved resort in this uncertain state. In other words, depending on the game state after the end of the special game, the lottery result of whether or not the subsequent operation holding ball existing during the special game will be a big hit depends on, so whether or not to execute the in-hold extended zone effect B By making the lottery after the specific round, it is possible to make a notification of the reservation of the reserved resort. Therefore, in the present embodiment, it is assumed that the game ball has entered the specific area in the specific round, that is, it is assumed that the transition to the probable change state of the special symbol is completed after the special game is finished. The execution of B is determined. Accordingly, in the on-hold consecutive game production B in this example, there is a specific hold that becomes a big hit in the subsequent operation hold ball, and the game state after the special game is a special symbol probability change state (high probability state). This is significant as an effect of definite notification. That is, in the seventh round, the eighth round, or a round after that, and if there is no entry into the specific area 658, the on-hold consecutive resort production B does not occur. In other words, the seventh round or the eighth round When the on-hold consecutive resort effect B occurs in the round, it can be said that it is the same timing as the timing of entering the game ball into the specific area 658 or the timing after that.

  As described above, in the second embodiment, at the timing after the specific round (the timing after entering the specific area), referring to the preliminary determination result (preliminary determination number) from the main control board 100, When a preemptive determination of whether or not the game is in progress after the special game has ended (becomes a state of certain change by entering a specific area) is executed for the subsequent operation hold ball, and there is a specific hold that is a big hit It is configured so that only the in-hold Renso production B can be executed by lottery. Now, specific processing will be described below.

(Big hit effect content determination processing: second embodiment)
Subsequently, the jackpot effect content determination process (S638) according to the subroutine of S638 in FIG. 27 in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing details of the big hit effect content determination process (S638).

  Here, in the above-described first embodiment, the on-hold consecutive resort effect B determination process (see S805 in FIG. 31) is executed in response to the reception of the start demo command, but this second embodiment. Then, the on-hold consecutive resort effect B determination process is executed in response to the reception of the specific area entry command. This is because, as described above, it is matched with whether or not the on-hold consecutive resort effect B can be executed as the timing after the game ball enters the specific area 658. In FIG. 55, the processes of S801 to S818 and S821 to S838 are the same as those of the first embodiment, and therefore, the processes of S841 to S843 which are different points will be mainly described.

  First, it is determined whether or not a specific area entry command is stored in the sub-main information storage means 260 (S841). If the specific area entry command is stored (S841: YES), the specific area entry flag of the sub-main information storage means 260 is turned on (S842). The on-hold consecutive resort production B determination process is executed (S843). Details of the on-hold consecutive villa production B determination process (S842) will be described later with reference to FIG. Subsequently, a big hit effect replacement process is executed (S844). In this jackpot effect replacement process, when the on-hold consecutive resort effect B (special continuous effect) is executed, the normal end demo effect pattern is replaced with the special end demo effect pattern. In the preceding big hit effect replacement process (S806), when the special continuous effect is executed, the normal start demonstration effect pattern is replaced with the special start demonstration effect pattern. On the other hand, when the specific area entry command is not stored (S841: NO), S842 and S843 are skipped and the process proceeds to S821.

Although not shown in the figure, when a specific area entry command is received during a special game, the game ball has entered the specific area 658, that is, after the special game is over, the state shifts to a special symbol probability changing state. The effect pattern of the notification effect (referred to as “specific area entry notification effect”) for notifying this is determined, and the number of the effect pattern of the specific area entry notification effect is specified in the specific area of the sub main information storage means 260. Temporarily store in the entry effect pattern storage area.

(On-hold consecutive villa production B determination processing: second embodiment)
Next, the on-hold consecutive villa effect B determination process (S843) in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing details of the on-hold consecutive resort effect B determination process (S843) in the second embodiment.

  Here, the difference from the first embodiment described above is the processing of S850 and S869, and the processing after S850 is executed when the specific area entry command is received. In FIG. 56, the processes in S851 to S868 and S870 are the same as those in the first embodiment, and therefore, the processes in S860 and S869 which are different points will be mainly described.

  First, it is determined whether or not the specific area entry flag of the sub-main information storage means 260 is on (S850). When the specific area entry flag is ON (S850: YES), the on-hold consecutive resort effect B lottery process (S856), the consecutive resort effect pattern selection process (S861), and the like are executed in the processing after S851. . In this example, since the pending renso effect B determination process is performed on the premise that the game ball enters the specific area in the specific round, in this consecutive villa effect pattern selection process, the round effects after the specific round ( Only a consecutive-village effect pattern that occurs in the end demo effect) (including a specific round) can be selected. Then, in the latter half of this process, the specific area entry flag of the sub-main information storage means 260 is turned off (S869).

  In addition, in the specific round (seventh to eighth rounds) in the special game being executed this time, when there are a plurality of balls entering the specific area 658, the main processing based on the earliest ball entry (S850) ~ S870), the on-hold consecutive resort production flag is turned on. Therefore, even if this processing based on the subsequent entry is executed, a negative determination (NO) is made in S731, and the on-hold consecutive resort production is performed again. The lottery process of B is avoided.

  As described above, according to the second embodiment, by entering the specific area 658, it is possible to acquire the right to transition to the probable state of the special symbol, and the expectation for the occurrence of the on-hold consecutive resort production is enhanced. It was possible to further enhance the effect of the reaming stage directing, and the execution of the on-reserved reaming stage rendition in the situation where the game state after the end of the special game is undefined is reflected as a result of the prefetch determination. By preventing the display mode and the actual result of the on-hold renso production from being flawed, the reliability of the on-hold renso production as the pre-reading notice can be improved. It becomes possible to improve interest.

  In the above-described second embodiment, the opening pattern in which the opening period of the second grand prize opening 65 and the specific area 658 is completely overlapped is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the second grand prize winning is performed. The mouth 65 and the opening period of the specific area 658 may be partially overlapped without completely overlapping. Further, in consideration of the delay time until the game ball that has entered the second grand prize opening 65 reaches the specific area 658, the opening period of the specific area 658 is delayed with respect to the opening period of the second big prize opening 65. May be.

[Second Embodiment-First Modification]
Next, a gaming machine according to a first modification of the second embodiment will be described. The gaming machine according to the first modification basically has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described second embodiment, and hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to parts having the same configuration. Thus, the description is omitted, and different parts are mainly described.

In the second embodiment described above, the on-reserved-range resort production B determination process is executed at the timing when the game ball enters the specific area 658 in the specific round. However, the present invention is not limited to this. It is good also as a structure which performs pending | holding consecutive resort production B determination processing before a game ball enters into the specific area | region 658. FIG.

  First, in describing the above configuration, a prior determination number that is a result of the determination in advance on the main control board 100 side will be described. FIG. 57 is a diagram schematically showing the success / failure pre-determination table, where (A) is a table referred to in the pre-rejection determination of the first special symbol lottery, and (B) is referred to in the pre-failure determination of the second special symbol lottery. It is a table to be. FIG. 57 shows the contents corresponding to the special symbol success / failure lottery table (FIG. 5) referred to in the first embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 57A, in the first special symbol lottery determination, whether or not the random number value falls within the range of “0 to 163”, the preliminary determination number “1” and the random number value “164 to 1639”. ”Corresponds to the prior determination number“ 2 ”, when the random value corresponds to the range“ 1640 to 65207 ”, the prior determination number“ 3 ”, and the random value corresponds to the range“ 65208 to 65535 ” In this case, the prior determination number “4” is set as the prior determination result. This prior determination number is included in the content of the success / failure determination command together with information indicating the result of the first special symbol determination and information indicating the order of the operation holding balls, and transmitted to the effect control board 200 side. (See S213 in FIG. 13).

  As shown in FIG. 57 (B), in the second special symbol lottery determination, whether or not the random number value falls within the range of “0 to 163”, the preliminary determination number “1” and the random number value “164 to 1639”. ”Is set as the prior determination result, and when the random number value falls within the range of“ 1640 to 65535 ”, the prior determination number“ 3 ”is set as the prior determination result. This prior determination number is included in the content of the success / failure prior determination command together with information indicating the result of prior determination of the second special symbol and information indicating the order of the operation holding balls, and transmitted to the effect control board 200 side. (See S213 in FIG. 13).

  As can be seen from a comparison of the special symbol win / fail lottery table in FIG. 5 and the success / failure pre-judgment table in FIG. 57, the pre-decision number “1” does not depend on the game state (normal state / probability change state) and is always “big hit” Is a determination result derived to be “ On the other hand, the prior determination number “2” is a determination result derived to be “big hit” in the probability variation state (high probability state), but “out” in the normal state (low probability state). is there. In this example as well, as in the first embodiment described above, the target of the pre-reading determination related to the on-hold range resort production is only the operation reservation ball (pre-determination result) of the second special symbol, but the first special You may include the design operation hold ball (preliminary determination information).

  In the on-hold consecutive villa production A determination process and the on-hold continuous villa production B determination process, a pre-reading determination as to whether or not the subsequent operation holding ball (the operation holding ball of the second special symbol) includes a special holding that is a big hit. Is determined based on the prior determination number. At this time, the determination as to whether or not the on-hold consecutive resort effect B can be executed is performed before the specific round, that is, before the game ball enters the specific area (for example, before the start of the special game, at the start demonstration effect, the specific round Consider the case of playing in a previous round game).

  First, when executing the on-hold consecutive resort effect B determination process before a specific round, if there is an operation holding ball with a prior determination number of “1” in the subsequent operation holding ball, regarding this operation holding ball, Even if the game state is changed to a probable state (high probability state) or a normal state (low probability state) after the end of the special game, the determination result is a big hit, so that the game ball enters the specific area 658 Regardless of whether or not there is, there is a pending renso at this point. Therefore, in this case, the on-hold extended resort production B can be generated as a notification of the on-hold extended resort.

On the other hand, in the case where there is an operation holding ball with a pre-determined number “2”, whether or not the determination result is a big hit for this operation holding ball depends on the gaming state after the end of the special game. Therefore, considering that the gaming state changes depending on whether or not a game ball has entered the specific area 658, the on-hold range resort is not fixed at this time. Therefore, in this case, the on-hold consecutive resort production B cannot be generated as a notification of the on-hold consecutive resort, and only the possibility of the on-hold consecutive resort is suggested.

  Therefore, regardless of whether or not there is a game ball entering the specific area 658 (regardless of which game state is entered), the correctness determination result at the time when the operation holding ball is actually digested is accurately determined. If it can be specified (in the case of the prior determination number “1”), it is possible to notify the confirmation of the in-hold extended villa, and conversely, the correctness determination result at the time when the operation holding ball is actually digested is accurately specified. If this is not possible (in the case of the prior determination number “2”), it is only necessary to suggest the possibility of a reserved resort. For this reason, in this example, it is preferable to prepare the confirmation notification effect and the suggestion effect of the on-hold consecutive resort in different effect modes.

  As described above, according to the first modified example of the second embodiment, when the prefetch determination is performed in a situation where the gaming state after the end of the special game cannot be accurately specified, the big win is uniquely derived regardless of the gaming state. If it is to be performed, while the in-hold extended villa production B is generated in a manner in which the in-hold extended villa is confirmed and notified, the determination result of the on-hold extended villa varies depending on the gaming state. Even if it is the timing before the game ball enters the specific area by generating the on-hold consecutive resort production B in a manner that suggests the possibility, It is possible to prevent a notice effect that disappoints the player's expectation, such as the occurrence of a habit, and as a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In the same way, as a pre-reading notice other than the rendezvous in the rendezvous effect, for example, also in the pre-reading notice such as a change in hold, a pre-reading determination as to whether or not there is a specific holding that becomes a big hit in the working holding ball is this prior determination. This is done based on the number. At this time, when the pre-reading determination is executed for the subsequent operation holding ball under the situation where the preceding operation holding ball is a big hit, the pre-determination number is set as the pre-determination result of the operation holding ball to be pre-read. If it is “1”, an effect mode (for example, “rainbow-colored on-hold image representing the big hit decision) that informs the big hit decision may appear as the hold change pre-reading notice effect based on the operation hold ball. In other words, with regard to this operation holding ball, even if the gaming state after the end of the special game is either a probability change state (high probability state) or a normal state (low probability state) of the special symbol, It is scheduled to be a big hit when it is digested, so regardless of whether or not game balls have entered the specific area 658, the in-hold-ream villa is determined at this point, and the result of the prefetch determination is reflected There is no possibility of a discrepancy between the display mode of the held image and the actual result (for example, if the prior determination number is “2”, the game ball does not enter the specific area 658 and the special game ends) In the normal state, even if a reserved image representing the big hit decision appears, a situation that does not result in a big hit occurs.

  In this modification, only the success / failure determination table is illustrated as the prior determination table. However, for the symbol prior determination table and the variation pattern prior determination table, a prior determination number is assigned to the random number range of each determination value. It can be expressed with.

[Third Embodiment]
Next, a gaming machine according to the third embodiment will be described. The gaming machine of the third embodiment has basically the same configuration as the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above, and hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the parts having the same configuration. The description is omitted, and different parts are mainly described.

In the gaming machine of the first embodiment, the probability variation rush rate is 100%, and the number of time-changing probability modification machines, so-called “ST machines”, have been described as examples. In the third embodiment, a big hit with a specific symbol is used. In this case, the probability variation function of the special symbol continues from the end of the special game until the next big hit occurs, so-called a normal probability variation type gaming machine.

  Here, FIG. 58 is a diagram schematically showing the special symbol success / failure lottery table in the third embodiment, in which (A) is referred to in a normal state (low probability state), and (B) is a probability variation state (high probability). Status). As can be seen from FIG. 58, in the special symbol game winning / losing lottery, in the normal state (low probability state), only when the random number value falls within the range of 0 to 163, the big hit is made. On the other hand, in the probability variation state (high probability state), the range of jackpot is expanded, and not only when the random number value falls within the range of 0 to 163 but also when it falls within the range of 164 to 1639. In other words, when the probability changing function of the special symbol is activated, the jackpot lottery probability changes from the low probability state (1 / 399.6) to the high probability state (1 / 39.96). As described above, the range corresponding to the jackpot changes according to the gaming state, but the winning probability of winning the jackpot is equal between the winning lottery of the first special symbol and the winning lottery of the second special symbol. Here, even if the random number value per special symbol does not correspond to the big hit range, if it falls within the predetermined range, it is a small hit. In this example, the winning lottery of the first special symbol is a small hit with a higher probability than the winning lottery of the second special symbol.

  Then, the upper part of FIG. 59 is a figure which shows typically the symbol table per 1st special symbol in 3rd Embodiment. In the symbol table per first special symbol, the random number of symbols per special symbol, stop symbol, symbol group, jackpot contents (number of times the probability variation function and variation time reduction function of special symbols are activated, first grand prize) The operation patterns of the mouths 64) are associated with each other. In this table, the stop symbols “1” to “8” of the first special symbol are classified into three types of symbol groups A to C according to the type of jackpot.

  Specifically, symbols “1”, “2”, “3”, “4” have symbol group A (16R specified short-time symbol), symbols “5”, “6” have symbol group B. The symbol group C (2R normal time short symbol) is associated with (2R specific short symbol symbol), and symbols “7” and “8”, respectively.

  Subsequently, the lower part of FIG. 59 is a diagram schematically showing a symbol table per second special symbol in the third embodiment. In the symbol table per second special symbol, the random symbol value per special symbol is the stop symbol, symbol group, jackpot content (number of times the probability variation function and variation time reduction function of the special symbol are activated, the second grand prize) The operation patterns of the mouths 65) are associated with each other. In this table, the stop symbols “11” to “18” of the second special symbol are classified into three types of symbol groups D to F according to the type of jackpot. Specifically, symbols “11”, “12”, “13”, “14” include symbol group D (16R specific short-time symbol), symbols “15”, “16” include symbol group E. The symbol group F (2R normal time symbol) is associated with (2R specific short symbol) and symbols “17” and “18”, respectively.

  Symbol groups A, B, D, and E are specific symbols indicating so-called “probability change jackpots” that shift the gaming state after the end of the special game to a special symbol probability change state (high probability state), and are special until the next jackpot. A symbol change function, a time reduction function, and an electric chew support function are provided. When the symbol groups A and D (16R probability variation big hit) are selected, the specified number of rounds of the special game is 16, and the maximum opening time of the big winning opening 64 in one round game is about 30 seconds. When the symbol groups B and E (2R probability variation big hit) are selected, the specified number of rounds for the special game is two rounds, and the maximum opening time of the big prize opening 64 in one round game is about 0.05 seconds. . Symbol groups C, F are normal symbols indicating so-called “normal hits” in which the gaming state after the end of the special game is shifted to the normal state (low probability state), and limited to 100 times after the end of the special game. Special time-saving function and electric support function are added. When symbol groups C and F (2R normal jackpot) are selected, the number of rounds specified for special games is two rounds, as is the case with symbol groups B and E (2R probability variable jackpot). The maximum opening time of the mouths 64 and 65 is about 0.05 seconds.

  Next, FIG. 60A is a diagram schematically showing a variation pattern table for winning. The upper (A1) is a normal variation pattern table, and the lower (A2) is a probability variation pattern table. In this example, the selected variation pattern is set to be different according to the variation pattern selection state or according to the jackpot type even in the same variation pattern selection state.

  In the normal variation pattern table of (A1), when the big hit type is 16R big hit, when either the fluctuation pattern PX2 (normal reach A) or the fluctuation pattern PX3 (super reach A) is selected and 2R big hit, Any one of the fluctuation pattern PZ2 (normal reach A), the fluctuation pattern PZ3 (super reach A), and the fluctuation pattern PZ4 (super reach D) is selected. On the other hand, if it is a small hit, the fluctuation pattern PK4 (super reach D) is selected.

  In the probability variation pattern table of (A2), when the big hit type is 16R big hit, only the fluctuation pattern PX7 (super reach B) is selected, and when the big hit type is 2R big hit, the fluctuation pattern PZ7 (super reach B) One of the patterns PZ8 (super reach D) is selected. On the other hand, when it is a small hit, only the variation pattern PK8 (super reach D) is selected.

  FIG. 60B is a diagram schematically illustrating an example of the variation pattern table for loss. The upper (B1) is a normal variation pattern table, and the lower (B2) is a probability variation pattern table. In this example, the selected variation pattern is set differently depending on the variation pattern selection state.

  In the normal variation pattern table of (B1), any one of the variation pattern PH1 (non-reach A), the variation pattern PH2 (normal reach A), the variation pattern PH3 (super reach A), and the variation pattern PH4 (super reach D) is selected. The In the probability variation pattern table of (B2), any one of the variation pattern PH5 (non-reach B), the variation pattern PH6 (normal reach B), and the variation pattern PH8 (super reach D) is selected.

  Here, in this probability variation pattern table for loss, only a variation pattern that is a variation mode of non-reach B, normal reach B, and super reach D can be selected (in other words, variation of super reach B). The variation pattern is not selected, and is different from the above-described probability variation pattern table for winning. For this reason, in the probability variation state of the special symbol, the variation pattern selected depending on whether or not the variation pattern becomes super reach B is clearly distinguished from the case of the big hit and out of the super hit B ( In this example, when a variation mode that develops into battle reach) appears, the big win is decisive.

  In the present embodiment, so-called battle specs are employed, and a battle reach effect is generated when the symbol variation effect is developed to Super Reach B while staying in the probability variation effect mode Mβ as the effect mode. As described above, this battle reach production (super reach B) is selected only when the result of the determination is a big hit, so when the battle reach production occurs during the symbol variation production. The jackpot is definitive. This battle reach production is a reach production in which a teammate character and an enemy character battle each other to determine the victory or defeat. When the teammate character finally wins the enemy character, the 16R jackpot is reached, and the teammate character is ultimately defeated by the enemy character. Then 2R big hit is decided.

Next, the on-hold consecutive resort production in the third embodiment will be described. In the above-described first embodiment, the on-holding ball to be prefetched in the on-hold consecutive resort productions A and B was specific reserved (16R big hit, 8R big hit) or off hold, but the reserved ball in the third embodiment Production A, B
The operation hold ball to be pre-reading is either a specific hold (16R big hit) or a small hit hold (not including the off hold). As a reason for including a small hit, in general, when the result of the determination is wrong, there are many kinds of variation patterns. There are fewer types of variation patterns to be selected in the case of small hits than in designing whether to perform a Gase production (reserved in-rendition production), and due to the nature of the lottery result of small hits This is because it is suitable for use as a gaze effect, so that it requires only a small number of discriminators for executing the prefetch determination and can be simplified.

  FIG. 61 (A) is a consecutive resort production pattern table that is referred to when selecting a consecutive resort production pattern of the retained resort series A in the third embodiment, and FIG. 61 (B) is an on-reservation sequence in the third embodiment. It is a consecutive resort production pattern table referred when selecting the consecutive resort production pattern of the residence production B. Since these extended game effect pattern tables are basically the same as the extended game effect patterns in the first embodiment (see FIG. 8), detailed description is omitted, but as described above, The difference is that a small hit hold is included as an operation hold ball to be pre-read in Zhuang productions A and B. Now, specific processing will be described below.

(On-hold Renso production B determination processing: third embodiment)
Next, the on-hold consecutive villa effect B determination process (S843) in the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing details of the on-hold consecutive resort effect B determination process (S843) in the third embodiment.

  Here, the difference from the first embodiment described above is the processing of S871 to S874, in that the small hit hold is included in the operation hold ball to be pre-read for the in-hold extended resort effect B. In FIG. 62, the processes in S851 to S854 and S858 to S870 are the same as those in the first embodiment, and therefore, the processes in S871 to S874 which are different points will be mainly described.

  First, when there is a specific hold in the operation holding ball of the second special symbol (S854: YES), it is determined whether or not this specific hold indicates a 16R big hit (high profit big hit) (S871). . If the specific hold corresponds to a 16R big hit (S871: YES), the on-hold consecutive resort production B lottery process 1 for determining whether or not to execute the on-hold extended resort production B is performed by lottery ( S872). In the on-hold consecutive resort production B lottery process 1, the consecutive resort production lottery random number value matches the determination value of “execution” or “non-execution” with reference to the unillustrated consecutive resort production B lottery table 1. If so, determine whether to execute. In this example, for example, execution is determined at a rate of 70% and non-execution is determined at a rate of 30%.

  On the other hand, when there is no specific reservation in the action holding ball of the second special symbol (S854: NO), it is determined whether or not the small hit hold is included in the action holding ball of the second special symbol (S873). . When the small hit hold is included (S873: YES), the on-hold consecutive villa production B lottery process 2 for determining whether or not to execute the on-hold consecutive villa production B is executed by lottery (S874). . In the on-hold consecutive resort production B lottery process 2, the random resort production lottery random number value matches the determination value of “execution” or “non-execution” with reference to the unillustrated consecutive resort production B lottery table 2. If so, determine whether to execute. In this example, for example, execution is determined at a rate of 0.1% and non-execution is determined at a rate of 99.9%.

  When winning in the on-hold consecutive resort production B lottery process (S872, S874), in the following, while selecting the consecutive resort production pattern for determining the content of the on-hold consecutive resort production A (S861), this After temporarily storing it in the extended game effect pattern storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260 (S868), the on-hold extended game effect flag of the sub-main information storage means 260 is turned on (S870), and this process ends.

  By the way, as a point to be noted in this embodiment, during the execution of the special game, the on-hold extended resort effect B does not occur. If a high expectation effect (Super Reach B) occurs due to the digestion of the action-holding ball that exists at the time, the high profit big hit rather than the probability of a low profit big hit (2R probability variable big hit, 2R normal big hit) The probability of (16R probability variation big hit) is set higher.

  As shown in FIG. 59 (B), the jackpot type allocation in the second special symbol game is as follows: 70% probability with 16R probability variation jackpot, 20% probability with 2R probability variation jackpot with 10% probability with 2R normal jackpot. It has become. In this example, the 16R probability variation big hit is also referred to as “16R big hit”, the 2R probability variation big hit and the 2R normal big hit are collectively referred to as “2R big hit”.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 60, in the special symbol probability variation state, if the result of the determination is a big hit, if it is a 16R big hit, the change of the super reach B (high expectation effect) with a probability of 100%. When the pattern PX7 is selected and the 2R big hit (2R specific big hit, 2R normal big hit) is selected, the fluctuation pattern PZ7 of the super reach B (high expectation degree effect) is selected with a probability of 60%.

  At this time, as described in S872 in FIG. 62, in this example, when there is a specific hold (16R big hit) in the subsequent operation hold ball, the winning probability of whether or not the on-hold extended zone effect B is executable is 70%. Therefore, even if there is a specific hold (16R big hit), the in-hold extension resort production B is not executed with a probability of 30%.

  Under the conditions as described above, the probability X of 16R big hit by the appearance of Battle Reach (Super Reach B) and the appearance of Battle Reach (Super Reach B) in the situation where the Reservation in the Reservation in Reservation B is not executed. Thus, the probability Y of 2R big hit is as follows.

X = (Probability of winning 16R jackpot) × (Probability of not producing on-hold Renso production B) × (Probability of becoming Super Reach B)
Y = (Probability of winning 2R jackpot) × (Probability of becoming Super Reach B)

  Subsequently, using the above numerical values, the probability X of 16R jackpot due to the appearance of Super Reach B and the probability Y of 2R jackpot due to the appearance of Super Reach B are specifically calculated as follows.

X = 70/100 × (100−70) / 100 × 100/100 = 21/100
Y = (20 + 10) / 100 × 60/100 = 18/100

  Therefore, when the high expectation level effect is generated in the subsequent operation holding ball without the on-hold consecutive villa effect B being generated (when it develops to Super Reach B), it is more than the possibility of a low profit jackpot. The possibility of becoming a big hit other than the low profit big hit (that is, high profit big hit = 16R big hit) is higher.

  As described above, according to the third embodiment, even when the on-hold consecutive resort production B does not occur during the special game, the player has a high profit for the high expectation degree after the special game. It is possible to enhance the player's expectation by generating a high expectation effect without impairing the expectation for the big hit, and as a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Fourth Embodiment]
Next, a gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment will be described. The gaming machine of the fourth embodiment basically has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above, and hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the parts having the same configuration. The description is omitted, and different parts are mainly described.

  In the above-described first embodiment, regardless of the type of jackpot, the ST machine (probability change machine) with a probability change entry rate of 100% that shifts uniformly to a high probability state (special change state of the special symbol) after the special game ends. Adopted, but not limited to this, including a jackpot that shifts to a low probability state (special symbol time-short state or normal state) after the end of the special game as a part of the jackpot type, a predetermined ratio (for example, probability change) An ST machine that shifts to a probable change state of a special symbol at an entry rate of 80%) may be employed.

  In such a model, when a special big game is hit in the probability change state (high probability state) of the special game, when the special game is over, the normal state or the special symbol time shift state (low probability state), After reaching the ST period in a special game probability change state (high probability state), the game state may change, for example, when shifting to a normal state or a special symbol time-short state (low probability state).

  In this modification, when prefetching determination is performed on the effect control board 200 side based on the information of the predetermination result from the main control board 100, an operation holding ball (referred to as “target holding”) that is a target of the prefetching determination is obtained. When the game state is scheduled to change before being digested (high probability state → low probability state, etc.), the information of the pre-determined result related to the action-holding ball is ignored. That is, in the pre-reading determination of the target hold, it was determined as “big hit”, but as a result of digestion of the operation hold ball (predecessor hold) stored prior to the target hold, it becomes a normal big hit (non-probable big hit), If the game state reaches the normal state after the special game ends, or if the ST period ends after the prefetch determination and before the trigger hold is consumed, this trigger hold is actually consumed. Occasionally, a situation where it is determined to be out of place may occur. Therefore, in order to prevent such a situation, when the gaming state is scheduled to change, the information of the pre-determination result is not set as the target of the prefetch determination. Note that “ignore” includes the meaning of “received information is received but not used” and the meaning of “received information is not received”.

  As an example of applying this configuration to the pre-reading determination related to the on-hold consecutive ren production, when the preceding operation holding ball becomes a big hit as a result of digestion, the current gaming state (the preceding game in the subsequent operation holding ball) Even if there is something that is determined to be a specific hold in the game state at the time when the operation holding ball is digested), if the game state is scheduled to change before the specific hold is digested, this specification It is configured so as to ignore the information on the prior determination result related to the hold. Here, “the game state is scheduled to change” means that the game state may change before and after the execution of the special game (the special game when the preceding operation holding ball is a big hit). For example, as a result of the digestion of the preceding operation holding ball in the special symbol probable state, the game state is usually a big hit, and after the special game is finished and before the subsequent operation holding ball is digested, This is the case when switching to the normal state is planned. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the case where the special symbol is changed from the probable change state to the special symbol time-short state, the case where the special symbol is changed from the short-time state to the normal state, and the like may be included. Now, specific processing will be described below.

(On-hold consecutive villa production A determination processing: fourth embodiment)
Next, the on-hold consecutive resort production A determination process (S737) in the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing details of the on-hold consecutive resort effect A determination process (S737) in the fourth embodiment.

  Here, the difference from the first embodiment described above is the processing of S771, and when the gaming state is scheduled to change, the advance determination information is present regardless of whether or not the advance determination information related to the specific hold exists. The decision information is ignored. In FIG. 63, the processes in S761 to S770 are the same as those in the first embodiment, and therefore, the process in S771 which is a difference will be mainly described.

  First, when the pre-determined information of the operation reservation ball of the second special symbol is stored in the pre-read information storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260 (S763: YES), before the operation reservation ball is digested It is determined whether or not the current gaming state is scheduled to change (S771). Whether or not the game state is scheduled to change may be managed individually on the side of the effect control board 200 based on the information of the effect control command from the main control board 100, or a prior determination command. It may be determined based on the information of the prior determination command by adding information (detailed description below) relating to the gaming state to. If the gaming state is not scheduled to change (S771: NO), then, if there is a specific hold (16R big hit) (S764, 765), whether or not to execute the on-hold extended resort effect A will be selected by lottery. (S 766), and selects a casserole effect pattern for determining the contents of the on-hold villa effect A (S 768), and temporarily stores it in the villa effect pattern storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260. After storing (S769), the on-hold consecutive resort effect flag in the sub-main information storage means 260 is turned on (S770), and this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if the gaming state is scheduled to change (S771: YES), the process ends by ignoring the pre-determined information related to the operation hold ball regardless of whether or not the specific hold exists. . In this example, the game state is scheduled to change. (1) When a specific game state (probability change state) is a normal big hit, (2) Probability change big hit and specific hold (probability change) It is assumed that there is a specific hold that is a big hit, but there is a specific hold that is usually a big hit before the specific hold. However, in the pre-reading notice effect such as a mere change in hold, not only in the on-hold consecutive resort effect, a change in the gaming state may be scheduled, for example, when the ST period ends with the passage of a predetermined number of fluctuations.

(On-hold consecutive villa production B determination processing: fourth embodiment)
Next, the on-hold consecutive villa effect B determination process (S843) in the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing details of the on-hold consecutive resort effect B determination process (S843) in the fourth embodiment.

  Here, the difference from the first embodiment described above is the processing of S875, and when the game state is scheduled to change, regardless of whether or not the prior determination information related to the specific hold exists, The point is that the pre-determination information is ignored. In FIG. 64, the processes in S851 to S870 are the same as those in the first embodiment, and therefore, the process in S875, which is a difference, will be mainly described.

  First, when the pre-determined information of the operation reservation ball of the second special symbol is stored in the pre-read information storage area of the sub main information storage means 260 (S853: YES), before the operation reservation ball is digested It is determined whether or not the current gaming state is scheduled to change (S875). If the gaming state is not scheduled to change (S875: NO), it is determined by lottery whether or not to execute the on-hold extended resort production B (S856 and S857). Is selected (S861), and is temporarily stored in the extended zone effect pattern storage area of the sub-main information storage unit 260 (S868), and then the sub-main information storage unit 260 is selected. Is turned on (S870), and the process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if the game state is scheduled to change (S875: YES), the process ends by ignoring the prior determination information related to the operation hold ball regardless of whether or not the specific hold exists. .

  As described above, according to the fourth embodiment, it is possible to prevent a notification effect that disappoints the player's expectation, such as a discrepancy between the result notified in advance by the on-hold consecutive resort effect and the actual lottery result. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In addition, if the structure of the above-mentioned 4th Embodiment is a game machine which can mutually transfer several types of game states, such as a normal state (low probability state) and the probability variation state (high probability state) of a special symbol, for example, The present invention is not limited to the ST machine, and may be applied to a gaming machine according to the second embodiment (ball accuracy type) or the third embodiment (normal probability variation type).

[Fourth Embodiment-First Modification]
Next, a gaming machine according to a first modification of the fourth embodiment will be described. The gaming machine according to the first modification basically has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described fourth embodiment, and the same reference numerals are given to parts having the same configuration below. Thus, the description is omitted, and different parts are mainly described.

  In the above-described fourth embodiment, when the gaming state is scheduled to change, the information on the prior determination result from the main control board 100 is ignored regardless of whether there is a specific hold. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and by adding information related to the gaming state to the prior determination command, even if the gaming state is scheduled to change, the effect control is performed based on the prior determination information to which the gaming state information is added. It is good also as a structure which performs pre-reading determination by the board | substrate 200 side, and performs pending | holding consecutive resort production A and B determination processing. Here, the “preliminary determination information to which information on the gaming state is added” is correct under the gaming state at the time when the action holding ball that is the target of the prefetch determination is actually digested on the production control board 200 side. The aspect is not particularly limited as long as it is information capable of specifying the prior determination result. For example, (1) Pre-determining result in the current gaming state, (2) Pre-determining result in the next gaming state, (3) Remaining continuation number (variation number) of the current gaming state, (4) The remaining number of times until the next game state is changed (number of fluctuations), (5) that the game state is scheduled to change within a predetermined number of fluctuations, (6) the hold information in the prior judgment command is actually digested Information obtained by deriving up to the gaming state at a certain scheduled time and information such as information on the scheduled gaming state, or a combination of two or more of them as appropriate is employed. Further, as described in the above-described determination table of whether or not to win, the lottery result is determined according to the gaming state (normal state / probability change state, more specifically normal state / probability change state / short time state). May be information relating to a prior determination number such that the meaning of the random number value changes or does not change.

  As described above, according to the first modification example of the fourth embodiment, even if the gaming state is scheduled to change, the prior determination result is not ignored, and the change is based on the information related to the gaming state included in the prior determination result. By performing pre-reading determination under a later gaming state, it is possible to prevent a notification effect that disappoints the player's expectation, such as a discrepancy between the result notified in advance by the on-hold Rensou effect and the actual lottery result. In addition, it is possible to increase the execution opportunity of the on-hold consecutive villa production, and as a result, it is possible to improve the fun of the game.

[Fourth Embodiment-Second Modification]
Next, a gaming machine according to a second modification of the fourth embodiment will be described. The gaming machine according to the second modification basically has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described fourth embodiment, and hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the parts having the same configuration. Thus, the description is omitted, and different parts are mainly described. In the second modification, the following configuration can be added in any of the above-described fourth embodiment and the first modification.

In this modified example, in the on-hold consecutive game effect A determination process, when the preceding operation holding ball is a big hit, when the plurality of specific holdings are included in the subsequent operation holding ball, the first first The specific hold is treated as an active hold ball (hereinafter referred to as “target hold”) that is subject to pre-reading determination in the on-hold consecutive villa production A determination process. It is not treated as the subject hold of the villa production A determination process, but the subsequent specific determination prior determination information of the subsequent stop is ignored.
Note that “ignore” includes the meaning of “received information is received but not used” and the meaning of “received information is not received”.

  Now, the operation of this modification will be described with reference to FIG. It is assumed that there are two specific reservations X1, X3 in the subsequent operation reservation balls X1, X2, X3 when the previous operation reservation ball X0 is digested. At this time, when the previous operation holding ball X0 is digested, if it is a big hit, whether or not the on-hold extended villa production A can be executed only in relation to the first specific holding X1 of the two specific holdings X1 and X3. judge. As described above, in the pre-reading determination related to the on-hold consecutive resort production A, the pre-reading determination is performed in order from the earliest one among the subsequent operation holding balls, and a plurality of specified in the subsequent operation holding balls The reason is that if there is a hold, the determination of whether or not the in-hold extended game effect can be performed is only in relation to the first specific hold. Therefore, of the two specific hold X1 and X3 existing in the subsequent operation hold ball, the subsequent specific hold X3 is not the target of the hold-in-village production A, and the prior determination information of the specific hold X3 is not used. ignore. As described above, in the present modification, the on-hold consecutive resort production A is executed based on the presence of the first specific hold when the preceding operation hold ball is digested and becomes a big hit, but there is a second specific hold. Based on this, the on-hold consecutive villa production A is not executed.

  As described above, according to the second modification of the fourth embodiment, when there are a plurality of specific holds in the subsequent operation hold balls, the in-hold extended resort effect is executed only in relation to the first specific hold. By making it possible, it is possible to prevent the target of the villas in the hold that was originally intended from fluctuating due to the presence of other specific holds (for example, specific holds that are normally expected to be big hits). As a result, satisfaction when the on-hold consecutive villa production occurs can be enhanced, and as a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Fourth Embodiment-Third Modification]
Next, a gaming machine according to a third modification of the fourth embodiment will be described. The gaming machine according to the second modification basically has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described fourth embodiment, and hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the parts having the same configuration. Thus, the description is omitted, and different parts are mainly described. In the third modification, the following configuration can be added in any of the above-described fourth embodiment and the first modification.

  In this modified example, in the on-hold consecutive resort effect A determination process, when the preceding operation holding ball is a big hit, the plurality of specific holdings are included in the subsequent operation holding ball. On-hold Renso production A in the relationship between the jackpot and the first specific hold, and on-hold consecutive resort production A in the relationship between the big hit relating to the first specific hold and the second specific hold can occur. When comparing both the prior specific information of the advance reservation and the advance determination information of the subsequent specific reservation based on the player's advantage, only the specific reservation on-hold resort with a relatively high advantage Is suggested or notified.

  Now, the operation of this modification will be described with reference to FIG. It is assumed that there are two specific reservations X1, X3 in the subsequent operation reservation balls X1, X2, X3 when the previous operation reservation ball X0 is digested. At this time, if the first specific hold X1 is “8R big hit” and the second specific hold X3 is “16R big hit”, the second specific hold X3 has a higher advantage than the first specific hold X1. Become. Therefore, when the preceding operation hold ball X0 is a big hit as a result of digestion, since the first specific hold X1 is a specific hold with relatively low advantage, the big hit and the first hit related to the previous operation hold ball X0 The on-hold consecutive villa production A in relation to the specific hold X1 does not occur. On the other hand, if the starting action holding ball X1 is digested and results in a big hit, the subsequent specific holding X3 is a specific holding having a relatively high advantage. The on-hold consecutive villa production A in relation to the hold X3 may occur.

  As described above, according to the third modified example of the fourth embodiment, it is possible to prevent the continuous occurrence of the high-rareness on-hold ranger production and perform only the notification of the on-hold on-hold jackpot that is truly highly advantageous. Therefore, it is possible to increase the interest in the occurrence of the on-hold Renren production, and as a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Fifth Embodiment]
Next, a gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment will be described. The gaming machine of the fifth embodiment has basically the same configuration as the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above, and hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to parts having the same configuration. The description is omitted, and different parts are mainly described.

  The gaming machine of the fifth embodiment, like the gaming machine of the first embodiment, is a game called “ST machine”, which is a time-changing probability variation machine with a probability variation entry rate of 100% when a big hit is made with a special symbol. Machine.

  In the fifth embodiment, 16R special games, 8R special games, and 4R special games are prepared in the same manner as in the first embodiment. Each round game during the special game is classified into a long open round game in which the big winning opening 64 (65) is opened long and a short open round game in which the big winning opening 64 (65) is opened short. The “long open round game” is a round game in which the grand prize opening 64 (65) is opened only for 30 seconds and then closed, or even if it is less than 30 seconds, it is closed with a specified number of balls (10 balls). is there. Similarly, in the “short open round game”, the big prize opening 64 (65) is opened for 0.2 seconds and then closed, or even if it is less than 0.2 seconds, the specified number (10 balls) is entered. It is a round game of the aspect closed. As described above, in this example, the long open round game is a round game in which a prescribed number (maximum number of balls entered) can be expected during the open period of the big winning opening 64 (65), while the short open round game is This is a round game in which it is practically difficult to enter a game ball during the opening period of the grand prize opening 64 (65). In this example, during the execution of the special game, during each round game, a round effect including the current number of rounds, the number of winning prize balls, a message for prompting a right strike, and the like is executed.

The winning prize ball number notification effect in the fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 66 is a schematic diagram for explaining the contents of the award winning ball number notification effect during the special game. In the figure, the number of winning prize balls acquired by the player is associated with the contents of the winning prize number notification effect (display contents and types of sound effects). In this example, in each round during the special game, an award winning ball number notification effect for notifying the current winning ball number is executed. The “acquired number of winning balls” in this example means the total number of winning balls that the player has acquired based on entering the big winning opening 64 (65) in the special game during the so-called consecutive resort state. In the case of so-called over winning (in this example, over 10 winnings which is the prescribed count number below), the number of winning balls for the over winning may be counted as the number of winning balls, Or it is not necessary to count. Further, in the case of winning in each winning opening other than the big winning opening 64 (65), it is not counted as the number of winning balls. Here, “renso (renso state)” means that a special game is executed by a predetermined big hit in the specific game state, and the special game state is again set as the game state after the end of the special game. It means to continue. The specific game state in this example is a state in which at least the electric chew support function (open extension function) is operating as described above. In this example, an ST machine (100% turn probability change machine) is employed, so that a specific game state is in a certain period (during the ST period) after the end of the special game. In the winning prize ball number notification effect, the current winning ball number is displayed on the screen of the effect display device 70 during the execution of each round game. In this example, the effect control board 200 (the jackpot effect determination means 227) receives a command from the main control board 100 when a game ball enters the big prize opening 64 (65) during execution of the special game. In addition, the acquired award ball number counter is updated to execute the acquired award ball number notification effect. The acquired prize ball number counter is reset when the consecutive home state stops. In addition, in the acquired prize ball number notification effect, each time the specified number “2500” is acquired as the number of acquired prize balls, the enlarged number of the acquired prize balls is displayed (displayed in an enlarged manner compared to the normal display mode). That is, every time the number of winning prize balls reaches an integral multiple of 2500 (2500, 5000, 7500,...), The number of winning prizes is enlarged and displayed at the center of the screen. In that case, a predetermined sound effect (normal sound effect) is generated simultaneously with the enlarged display of the number of winning prize balls. Further, a special sound effect is generated in addition to a normal sound effect every time a certain number “10000” is acquired as the number of winning prize balls. That is, every time the number of winning prize balls reaches an integer multiple of 10,000 (10000, 20000, 30000 ...), a special sound effect is generated together with a normal sound effect. In this example, basic sound effects (SE) such as explosion sounds and metal sounds are output as normal sound effects, and sounds such as “Kitakita ~” and “Excellent sound ~” are output as special sound effects.

  In this example, “15” prize balls are set to be paid out with respect to one entry into the big prize opening 64 (65). Therefore, basically, the number of winning prize balls (the winning prize ball number counter) is updated in units of “15”. Further, the maximum number of winning award balls (the most award winning ball number) that the player can acquire in one big hit (special game) is set to “2400”. That is, when the maximum profit big hit (16R big hit) is won, in the special game (16R special game), 16 long open round games are executed, so the number of winning prize balls is 16 rounds (number of rounds) × 10 counts (specified count number) × 15 (unit prize ball number) = 2400.

  Next, the on-hold consecutive resort production in the fifth embodiment will be described. In this example, the first on-hold renso production (the on-hold renso production A) that occurs during the symbol variation and the second on-hold renso production (the on-hold renso production B) that occurs during the special game. Of these, the second on-hold Renso production (the on-hold Renso production B) is targeted. As described above, the on-hold consecutive villa is generated on the assumption that the gaming state when the preceding operation holding ball hits a big hit is a specific gaming state (in this example, at least the electric chew support function is operating). To do. In addition, the subsequent operation holding ball (specific holding) that is the target of the in-hold range resort is the operation holding ball of the second special symbol that occurs based on the ball entering the second start port 62. Whether or not the on-hold consecutive resort effect B can be executed is determined by lottery when a predetermined execution condition is established at a timing before the start of the special game. In this example, on the assumption that the preceding operation holding ball is a high profit big hit (16R big hit), a predetermined execution condition is established when there is a specific holding (big hit holding) in the subsequent operation holding ball. Shall. For this reason, in this example, the on-hold renso production is executed only as a “true effect” for definitive notification of the establishment of the on-hold renso. It may include a “gase production” that is not established. In this example, as one of the execution conditions of the on-hold consecutive resort production, it is determined that the preceding operation holding ball is a specific holding of high profit big hit (16R big hit), but it is limited to this. Instead, the preceding actuating hold ball may be a specific hold other than a high interest jackpot (16R jackpot), that is, a specific hold corresponding to a jackpot of less than 16R.

Also in this example, when a predetermined execution condition is established at the timing before the start of the special game (a big hit start demonstration), an effect lottery process is executed for determining whether or not the on-hold consecutive resort effect B can be executed by lottery. To do. When the effect lottery process is won, the reservation flag of the reserved game in the reserved zone is turned on, and the reserved game in the reserved zone is executed when the preset execution timing arrives. The execution timing of the on-hold consecutive resort production is set to the timing at which the above-mentioned enlarged display of the number of winning prize balls is performed. That is, every time “2500” is acquired as the number of winning prize balls, the execution timing of the on-hold consecutive villa production comes. Therefore, if the display timing of the number of winning prize balls arrives during one special game, the reserved game for reserved game will be executed on condition that the reservation flag for the reserved game for reserved game is turned on. . On the other hand, even if the reservation flag for the on-hold consecutive resort production is turned on, if the enlarged display timing of the number of winning prizes does not arrive during one special game, the on-hold consecutive resort production will be canceled. . As a modification, every time “2500” award balls are acquired, it may be determined whether or not to execute the on-hold consecutive resort production, and in that case, a specific reservation ( A determination whether or not there is a big hit hold) may be included.

  FIG. 67 is a schematic diagram showing an example of the effect of the on-hold consecutive villa effect in the fifth embodiment. In this example, it is assumed that the execution of the effect is determined in the on-hold consecutive resort effect lottery process at the start of the special game (the reservation flag is turned on). It should be noted that, in the situation where the reservation flag of the reserved game for the reserved game is turned on, the reserved game for the extended game is not executed during normal display (non-enlarged display) of the number of winning prize balls. First, as shown in FIG. 67 (A), in a predetermined round during the special game (the eighth round in this example), the number of winning prize balls is 30000 due to the winning of the game balls to the big prize opening 64 (65). When the number (2500 × 12th) is reached, the number of the winning prize balls is enlarged and displayed at the center of the screen. In this example, the character image “GET30000” is enlarged and displayed at the center of the screen, and it is notified that 30000 prize balls have been acquired. At this time, under the situation where the reservation flag for the on-hold consecutive resort production is turned on, the execution timing of the on-hold consecutive resort production comes due to the enlarged display of the number of winning prize balls.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 67B, the entire screen is blacked out for a moment. Then, as shown in FIG. 67 (C), a special effect image that does not appear in any scene other than the on-hold ranger effect is displayed as the on-hold ranger effect. In this example, the text information “BONUS + 1” is displayed as a special effect image, and the establishment of the on-hold park is announced. In addition, as a display mode of the on-hold consecutive resort production, “BONUS + 1” may be displayed when there is one or more specific hold (big hit hold) in the subsequent operation hold ball, or the specific hold (big hit hold) is “BONUS + 1” if there is one, “BONUS + 2” if there are two specific holds (big hit hold), etc. The display may be different. Here, when there are two (plural) specific holds in the subsequent operation holding balls, it is desirable that the two (plural) are specific holds corresponding to the high profit big hit (16R big hit). , Specific holdings corresponding to jackpots of different prescribed round numbers may be used, or specific holdings corresponding to jackpots of less than 16R may be used.

  In the fifth embodiment described above, the number of winning prize balls reaches a specific number (an integer multiple of 2500) in any round during the special game, triggered by the establishment of the on-hold range resort. In such a case, the winning prize ball number notification effect and the reserved in-ream zone effect can be executed, but in the final round, the acquired prize ball number notification effect is executed, while the in-hold-in-ream zone effect is not executed. May be. In that case, instead of the final round, the on-hold consecutive villa effect may be executed in the jackpot end demo immediately thereafter. Also, if the number of winning prizes reaches an integer multiple of “2500” at the end of the special game (for example, the 10th count in the final round or the entry just before the specified time in the final round), then the big hit ends Since it will be in a demo state, it is preferable to configure so that the on-hold consecutive villa production during the round (during the final round) is not executed. In this case, it is assumed that the enlarged display of the number of winning balls (a multiple of 2500) is not performed during the big hit end demonstration. On the other hand, if it is not the final round, even if it is just before the end of the round, since the execution of the next round is secured, it is possible to execute the on-hold consecutive villa production without any trouble. .

As described above, according to the fifth embodiment, there is no regularity in the timing at which the number of awarded prize balls reaches a specific number during the execution of the special game, and the in-hold-ream zone effect is executed in any round during the special game. It is possible to make it difficult to predict whether it will be played, so it can give unexpectedness to the timing of the on-campus rendezvous production and attract the player's interest in all rounds. It is possible to improve the interest of the game. In this example, the text information “BONUS + 1” is displayed as an aspect of the on-hold consecutive villa production, but is not limited to this. For example, the number of acquired prize balls (2500) displayed in an enlarged manner is displayed. (Multiple) character color is changed to a special color (rainbow color, etc.), an effect display is added, and this is different from the usual award winning ball number notification effect (enlarged display of the award winning ball number) Aspects may appear. Further, in this example, as described above, the maximum number of winning balls that can be acquired in one special game is set to “2400”, and the maximum number of winning balls is set as a rendezvous in a reserved game (acquired). Since the specific number “2500” which is an execution opportunity of the enlarged display of the number of prize balls is set to be smaller than the specified number “2500”, the prize ball number announcement effect and the in-hold-ream-zone effect are each twice during one special game. Although the above is not executed, the number of the most frequently won prize balls is set to be larger than the specific number “2500” or the specific number is set to be smaller than the number of most frequently won prize balls “2400” once. It may be configured such that the award winning ball number notification effect and the on-hold consecutive resort effect are executed twice or more during the special game.

[Sixth Embodiment]
Next, a gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment will be described. The gaming machine of the sixth embodiment basically has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above, and hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the parts having the same configuration. The description is omitted, and different parts are mainly described.

  As with the gaming machine of the first embodiment, the gaming machine of the sixth embodiment is a so-called “ST machine”, which is a so-called “ST machine” with a 100% probability variation rush rate when a big hit is made with a special symbol. Machine.

  In the sixth embodiment, a 16R special game, an 8R special game, and a 4R special game are prepared, as in the first embodiment described above. As described above, each round game in the special game is classified into a long open round game in which the big prize opening 64 (65) is long open and a short open round game in which the big prize opening 64 (65) is short open. The

  Next, the pending change prefetch notice effect in the sixth embodiment will be described. FIG. 68 is a schematic diagram for explaining a reserved image in the sixth embodiment. Preservation change pre-reading notice effect is a notice of the possibility that the preemption will be a big hit by changing the hold image (hold image corresponding to the trigger hold) that is the pre-read target from the normal display mode to a special display mode This is a kind of the pre-reading notice effect described above.

As described above, in a predetermined area in the screen of the effect display device 70, the first reserved display unit 701 for displaying the number of the operation reserved balls of the first special symbol and the number of the operation reserved balls of the second special symbol are displayed. A second hold display unit 702 for displaying is provided. In a normal display mode, when a special symbol of an operation holding ball is generated, a white circle “◯” holding image is displayed, and when the operation holding ball is digested, the corresponding holding image is lost. Note that the normal display mode “white” of the reserved image is represented by “white” on the drawing. The reserved images are displayed in order according to the order in which the special symbols actuated on-hold balls are generated (the order of entering the balls), and a maximum of four can be displayed on each of the on-hold display units 701 and 702. Therefore, the first hold display unit 701 includes four hold display areas X11, X12, X13, and X14 that can display hold images, respectively, and the second hold display unit 702 includes four holds that can display hold images. It consists of display areas X21, X22, X23, X24. In the hold display section 701, each time an action hold ball of the first special symbol is generated, a hold image is additionally displayed one by one from the leftmost hold display area X11, and the action hold ball of the first special symbol is displayed. Each time is digested, the first hold image displayed in the leftmost hold display area X11 disappears and the subsequent hold images displayed in the hold display area X12 to the left hold display area one by one. Shifted. Similarly, in the hold display section 702, every time an action hold ball of the second special symbol is generated, a hold image is additionally displayed one by one from the leftmost hold display region X21, and the second special symbol is displayed. Each time the action hold ball is digested, the first hold image displayed in the leftmost hold display area X21 disappears, and the subsequent hold images displayed in the hold display area X22˜ are held one by one on the left. Shifted to the display area. On the other hand, when the hold change pre-reading notice effect described below is executed, the hold display unit 701, 702 displays the hold image targeted for the pre-reading notice from a normal display mode (white display) to a special display mode ( (Special color display). Here, in the state where the open extension function is activated (electric chew support state, time reduction state), the hold change related to the operation hold ball (hold image) of the second special symbol is executed, but the first special symbol of On the other hand, the hold change related to the operation hold ball (hold image) is not executed (hold change look-ahead is prohibited), while in the state where the open extension function is not activated (non-electric Chu support state, non-time reduction state) Hold change related to the action hold ball (hold image) of the symbol is executed, but hold change related to the action hold ball (hold image) of the second special symbol is not executed (hold change look-ahead is prohibited) However, it is preferable when priority digestion is employed. In addition, in the state where the open extension function is activated (electric chew support state, short time state), only the reserved image corresponding to the operation holding ball of the second special symbol is displayed, or the operation holding ball of the second special symbol is displayed. It is desirable to highlight the corresponding hold image more than the hold image corresponding to the operation holding ball of the first special symbol, and in the state where the open extension function is not operated (non-electric Chu support state, non-time reduction state) Only the hold image corresponding to the operation hold ball of the first special symbol is displayed more than the hold image corresponding to the operation hold ball of the second special symbol. It is desirable. In the hold change prefetching, it is preferable that only one hold image is changed in the same special symbol type (first special symbol, second special symbol). However, two or more pending images may be changed, in which case no chance (such as a preceding pending change may indicate a big hit or a subsequent pending change may indicate a big hit. It is preferable that there is no complete gas). In addition, when a transition is made to a special game while leaving the reserved image that has been changed, it is desirable that the reserved image that has been changed to return to the default image (white) after the end of the special game.

  In the hold change pre-reading notice effect, based on the result of the above-described prior determination, among the hold images displayed on the hold display units 701 and 702 of the effect display device 70, the hold image that corresponds to the pre-read (corresponding to the trigger hold). An effect of changing the hold image) from a normal display mode to a special display mode is performed. In this example, during the execution of the hold change pre-reading notice effect, the display color of the hold image corresponding to the trigger hold is one of four colors of “blue”, “green”, “red”, and “rainbow”. Can take either. In the drawing, the four display modes of “blue”, “green”, “red”, and “rainbow” are represented by “grid pattern”, “diagonal line”, “shaded”, and “filled”, respectively. To do. The above four types of display modes used in the hold change prefetch notice effect are related to the reliability that the lottery result is a big hit (referred to as “hit reliability”), and are “blue”, “green”, “red” ”,“ Rainbow ”in order of the jackpot reliability is set step by step. Note that the “rainbow-colored” reserved image means a reserved image in which the big win is confirmed. Therefore, when a “rainbow-colored” reserved image appears or when the reserved image changes to “rainbow-colored”, it is ensured that the big win is won in the symbol variation display related to the reserved image (operating reserved ball). The Note that, in the hold change prefetch notice effect, the change in the display mode of the hold image may be expressed by a shape, a pattern, or the like instead of the display color.

  In this example, the pending change pre-reading notice effect can be executed during symbol variation and special games. That is, basically, the hold change pre-reading notice effect is executed while the symbols are changing, but in this example, the hold change pre-reading notice effect is executed during the special game as one aspect of the hold-in-rensou effect. There are cases (details will be described later). The execution time of the pre-reading notice lottery process is set to the timing before the start of symbol variation and before the start of the special game. At that timing, whether or not to execute the hold change prefetch notice effect and the hold change prefetch notice pattern are drawn. In the hold change prefetch notice effect, control is performed to change the display mode of the hold image based on a hold change prefetch notice pattern selected from a plurality of types.

Next, the on-hold consecutive resort production in the sixth embodiment will be described. In this example, as the on-hold renso production, the first on-hold renso production (holding renso production A) that occurs during symbol variation and the second on-hold renso production that occurs during special games ( It is intended for the rendezvous renso production B). Whether or not the on-hold consecutive resort effect A can be executed is determined by lottery when the first execution condition is satisfied at the timing when the preceding operation holding ball is digested. In this example, it is assumed that the preceding operation holding ball is a high profit big hit (16R big hit), and there is a specific holding that becomes a high profit big hit (16R big hit) in the subsequent operation holding ball, The first execution condition is assumed to be satisfied even when the operation holding ball is disengaged (in this case, whether or not there is a specific holding in the subsequent operation holding ball). Therefore, when the on-hold consecutive villa production A occurs during the design fluctuation, the establishment of the on-hold consecutive villa is not confirmed, and the so-called “gase” production (fake production) that results in “out” in the fluctuation display. ). To put it the other way around, if the result of the on-hold extended villa production A is “big hit” in the fluctuation display, the establishment of the on-hold extended villa (there is a specific hold in the subsequent operating hold ball) Is deterministic. On the other hand, whether or not the on-hold consecutive resort effect B can be executed is determined when the second execution condition is satisfied at the start timing of the special game. In this example, it is assumed that the preceding operation holding ball is a high profit big hit (16R big hit), and there is a specific hold that becomes a high profit big hit (16R big hit) in the subsequent operation holding ball. It is assumed that the second execution condition is satisfied when the consecutive resort production A occurs as a real production. In other words, the execution of the on-hold consecutive villa production B is determined in response to the fact that the on-hold consecutive villa production A has occurred as a true effect of notifying the establishment of the on-hold consecutive villa. For this reason, during the design variation, if the on-hold consecutive resort production A does not occur, and if the on-hold consecutive resort production A occurs, it is a gaze effect (the variation display is off) In the case), the on-hold consecutive villa production B does not occur. In this example, when the advance-reserved ball is digested in this way, the reserved-in-ream zone effect A is generated in the symbol variation, and when the change is a big hit, the establishment of the retained-in-ream resort is confirmed. Then, in the form of taking over the on-hold consecutive resort production A, the on-hold consecutive resort production B occurs during the execution of the special game after the change (after the big hit change). The on-hold consecutive villa production A and the on-hold consecutive villa production B are configured as production contents having continuity and relevance across the pattern variation and the special game.

FIG. 69 is a schematic diagram showing an example of the effect of the on-hold consecutive villa effect in the sixth embodiment. In the figure, (A) to (D) are examples of effects during symbol variation display (including the in-reserved renso effect A), and (E) to (H) are in special games (in-reserved renso effect B). Is an example of the production. In the normal game state (non-special game state) and the special game state, the position of the hold display area and the hold display mode (
It is preferable that the size is different. The reason for this is to emphasize the on-hold consecutive resort production B, which will be described later.

  First, as shown in FIGS. 69A and 69B, the screen is blacked out for a moment at a predetermined timing during the symbol variation display. Then, as shown in FIG. 69 (C), a special effect that does not appear in any scene other than the reserved renzo effect is displayed (premium movie is reproduced) as the reserved renzo effect A. . For example, as this premium movie, the video until the hero acquires the ultimate mystery and reaches the unimaginable area is reproduced. In this example, the on-hold consecutive villa production A includes a gaze production, and therefore the establishment of the on-hold consecutive villa is not necessarily determined only by the occurrence of the on-hold consecutive villa production A (premium movie). In addition, during the symbol change, the reserved image corresponding to the operation reserved ball of the special symbol is displayed. In this example, as shown in the figure, it is assumed that all the four reserved images (the operation special holding balls of the second special symbol) are displayed in the normal display mode (white).

  Then, as shown in FIG. 69 (D), after the premium movie is over, the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed at the jackpot symbol “7,7,7” through the reach state, and the jackpot (the jackpot related to the preceding action holding ball) ) Occurs. In this way, after the on-hold consecutive villa production A (premium movie) is executed, a big hit is generated by the change, and the establishment of the on-hold consecutive villa (presence of specific hold) is committed. In this example, when a big hit is won, a “Hyper Bonus” is normally generated as a big hit effect in that special game. As a big hit effect in the game, a “non-rebirth bonus” is generated.

  As shown in FIG. 69 (E), when the special game is started, a “non-rebirth bonus” is started as the big hit effect. At this time, even during execution of the special game, the hold image (the hold image corresponding to the operation hold ball of the second special symbol) is continuously displayed. In this example, it is assumed that the hold image is displayed in almost the entire period from the jackpot start demo to the round game to the jackpot end demo. The reserved image may not be displayed during the round game during the special game, but may be displayed only at the big hit start demonstration and the big hit end demo, or may be displayed only at the big hit end demonstration. .

  As shown in FIG. 69 (F), when the round game is started, the “unimaginary reincarnation plate” appears as the on-hold consecutive resort production B. The “non-rebirth plate” is, for example, an image in which the character information “unrebirth rebirth” is displayed in a rectangular plate of white (at least a color other than iridescent). In this example, the “non-reincarnation plate” is displayed in the entire period from the first round to the 16th round.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 69 (G), in the jackpot end demo, the “unimaginary reincarnation plate” changes to a rainbow effect, and the hold image related to the trigger hold (the hold where the pre-read result is determined to be a specific hold) Flying toward the image.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 69 (H), the rainbow effect changes the display mode of the reserved image from white to rainbow. Due to the appearance of such a rainbow-colored reserved image, the establishment of the reserved villa is visually recognized and easily communicated to the player.

  In addition, in the above-mentioned 6th Embodiment, although the rainbow-colored hold image which appears also during a pattern change is used as a reserving in-residence production during a special game, it is not limited to this. A special reserved image that does not appear during symbol variation (for example, a giraffe patterned reserved image) may be used. Further, in the above-described sixth embodiment, as an execution condition of the on-hold consecutive resort production, it is mentioned that the preceding operation holding ball wins the high profit big hit (16R big hit), but it is limited to this. Instead, the above-mentioned execution condition may be satisfied regardless of which big hit (16R big hit, 8R big hit, 4R big hit) the preceding operation holding ball is.

  As described above, according to the sixth embodiment, by changing the reserved image from the normal mode having a low jackpot expectation level to the special mode having a high jackpot expectation level, The establishment is visually intelligible and can be taught to the player, and even during a special game, a change in hold can be given to give the player a surprise or surprise. The production effect of the production can be further enhanced, and as a result, the interest of the game can be improved. In addition, when a special game (such as a special game within a reserved game) occurs when a special game (for example, a change related to a specific game) is performed after the special game has been executed, An effect that does not appear in the case of the symbol variation after the end of the special game when there is not, may be executed.

[Seventh Embodiment]
Next, a gaming machine according to the seventh embodiment will be described. The gaming machine of the seventh embodiment basically has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above, and hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the parts having the same configuration. The description is omitted, and different parts are mainly described.

As with the gaming machine of the second embodiment, the gaming machine of the seventh embodiment depends on whether or not the game ball wins a specific area (so-called “V area”) in the big prize opening during execution of the special game. Thus, it is configured as a so-called ball accuracy type gaming machine that determines whether or not the gaming state shifts to the probability changing state after the end of the special game. Note that the probability variation state may be continued until a predetermined number of times (ST number) of symbol variations is performed, or may be continued until the next big hit occurs. In this case, if it is the former, it is easier to win the big hit type that makes it easier to enter the specific area 658 when the big hit with the second special symbol than the big hit with the first special symbol, In the case of a big hit with two special symbols, it is desirable to win the big hit type that makes it easy to enter the specific area 658 with a probability of 100%. If it is the latter, it is easier to win the big hit type that makes it easier to enter the specific area 658 when the big hit with the second special symbol than the big special hit with the first special symbol, and the second special symbol It is desirable to win the big hit type that makes it easy to enter the specific area 658 with a probability of less than 100%.

  FIG. 70 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine PM according to the seventh embodiment. As shown in FIG. 70, in the seventh embodiment, only a single big winning opening 65 (a ball-like attacker having a specific area 658) is mounted in the game area PA. That is, in the second embodiment described above, the second big prize opening 65 having the specific area 658 is opened only in the specific round, and the first big prize opening not having the specific area 658 in rounds other than the specific round. 64 is configured to be opened, but in the fifth embodiment, the big prize opening 65 having the specific area 658 is opened in all rounds. Note that the configuration of the special winning opening 65 has already been described in the second embodiment described above, and a duplicate description thereof will be omitted here.

  In addition, the gaming machine of the seventh embodiment employs so-called priority digestion, in which the variation display of the second special symbol is preferentially executed over the variation display of the first special symbol, similarly to the gaming machine of the first embodiment. Therefore, while the operation holding ball of the second special symbol is present, the operation holding ball of the second special symbol is preferentially digested regardless of the presence of the operation holding ball of the first special symbol. Yes.

  Next, the jackpot type (breakdown breakdown) in the seventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 71 shows a jackpot breakdown of the special symbol lottery in the seventh embodiment.

  The upper part of FIG. 71 is a diagram schematically showing a symbol table per first special symbol in the seventh embodiment. In the symbol table per first special symbol, the symbol random number per special symbol is associated with the symbol group, the jackpot attribute, the number of times the probability variation time function is activated, and the action pattern of the big prize opening (this example) Then, for convenience, the description of the stop symbol is omitted). In the symbol table per first special symbol, three types of symbol groups A, B, and C are set according to the type of jackpot. Specifically, it is divided into symbol group A (16R long open big hit), symbol group B (6R long open big hit), and symbol group C (6R long short open big hit).

  The lower part of FIG. 71 is a diagram schematically showing a symbol table per second special symbol in the seventh embodiment. In the second special symbol per symbol table, a symbol group, jackpot attribute, the number of times of operation of the probability changing time function, and the operation pattern of the big prize opening are respectively associated with the symbol random value per special symbol (this example) Then, for convenience, the description of the stop symbol is omitted). In the symbol table per second special symbol, two types of symbol groups D and E are set according to the type of jackpot. Specifically, it is divided into a symbol group D (16R long open big hit) and a symbol group E (8R long open big hit).

As described above, each jackpot is roughly classified into “long open big hit” and “long and short open big hit”. The long open big hit is a big hit where only a long open round game exists as a round game in the special game. The long and short open big hit is a big hit in which a long open round game and a short open round game are mixed as a round game in the special game. As shown in FIG. 71, the jackpot of the first special symbol is classified as a long-open jackpot or a long-short jackpot, and all jackpots of the second special symbol are classified as a long-jacketed jackpot. In this example, a long-open round game is a round game that is set to be released for a reference time or more (for example, 30 seconds that is a reference time of 20 seconds or more), and a short-open round game is less than the reference time It is a round game that is set to be released (for example, a reference time of less than 20 seconds, such as 0.5 seconds). However, in the specific round (the specific number of rounds in which the sorting device in the specific area 658 operates), the opening pattern may be different from the other normal rounds (of course, as a modification, the opening pattern is the same) It may be) As an example, in a long open round game in a specific round, not 30 seconds open, 0.5 seconds open → 2 seconds closed → 29 seconds open (the total value of the open time is 29.5 seconds, from 30 seconds May be less). Moreover, in the short open round game in a specific round, it is good also as 0.2 second open (shorter than 0.5 second open).

  As shown in FIG. 71, each jackpot is divided into “conditional special jackpot” and “conditional regular jackpot” as attributes of the jackpot. “Condition specific big hit” is a specific big hit (probability variable big hit) on condition that a winning in a specific area 658 is set easily or possible and a game ball wins in a specific area 658 basically. Is a big hit that is fixed. The reason for “conditional” is that even if the specific area 658 is a big hit with a long open, if the game ball does not actually win the specific area 658, the result is a normal big hit (non-probable big hit). Because there is a possibility. The “conditional normal big hit” is set such that winning in the specific area 658 is difficult or impossible, and basically, the game is not won in the specific area 658, and the normal big hit (non-probable big hit). ) Is a big hit that will be confirmed. The reason for “conditional” is that even if the specific area 658 is a big hit with a short opening, if the game ball actually wins the specific area 658, there is a possibility that it will eventually become a specific big hit (probable big hit). Because there is. Here, as shown in the upper part of FIG. 71, in the first special symbol lottery, the winning probability for the conditional special jackpot is 60%, and the winning probability for the conditional normal jackpot is 40%. In addition, as shown in the lower part of FIG. 71, in the second special symbol lottery, the winning probability of the conditional special big hit is 100%.

  Here, regarding the breakdown of the jackpot in this example, the following relationships (1) to (3) are established.

(1) Expectation level of high profit jackpot In this example, the ratio of winning the high profit jackpot (the jackpot with the highest expected value for winning a prize ball) is set higher in the first special symbol lottery than in the second special symbol lottery. Has been. Specifically, the percentage of winning the high profit jackpot (16R jackpot) in the first special symbol lottery is 40%, whereas the ratio of winning the high profit jackpot (16R jackpot) in the second special symbol lottery is 25%, and the first special symbol lottery is configured to have a higher expectation of winning a high profit big hit (16R big hit) than the second special symbol lottery.

(2) Expected degree of specific special jackpot with condition In this example, the ratio of winning a special big hit with a case (equivalent to probable big hit) is higher in the second special symbol lottery than in the first special symbol lottery. Is set. Specifically, the percentage to win the conditional special jackpot in the first special symbol lottery is 60%, whereas the percentage to win the conditional special jackpot in the second special symbol lottery is 100%. The second special symbol lottery is configured to have a higher expected degree of probability change transition than the one special symbol lottery.

(3) Average number of rounds In this example, the average number of rounds of a special game executed by generating one big hit is a big win in the first special symbol lottery and a case where a big win is won in the second special symbol lottery. Are set equal. Specifically, the average number of rounds for a special game in the case of a big win in the first special symbol lottery is “10 rounds”, whereas the average number of special games in the case of a big win in the second special symbol lottery is The average number of rounds is “10 rounds”, and the average number of rounds is configured to be the same.

  Subsequently, FIG. 72 is a time chart for explaining an operation pattern of the special winning opening 65 in the seventh embodiment. In this example, a total of four types of operation patterns are prepared corresponding to the above jackpot types. In the figure, the state change of the special winning opening 65 during the special game is shown in time series from left to right. Each operation pattern shown in FIG. 72 conceptually shows the execution state of each round game, and each time width and ratio of the opening time and closing time (including interval time) of each round game is the actual time. It does not correspond to width and ratio. In the figure, “L” is added to the long open round game, and “S” is added to the short open round game.

  In this example, even if any of the above five types of big wins, the special game ends based on whether or not the game ball enters the specific area 658 in the specific round in the special game. Whether or not there is a probability change later is assigned. The specific round in this example means that the sorting member (blade member 655) opens and closes and the specific area 658 is valid (the entry detection to the specific area 658 is treated as valid, that is, the specific area 658 is entered. The probability change transition is determined by entering the ball). Hereinafter, other rounds excluding the specific round are also referred to as “normal rounds”. In this example, the specific round is set to the sixth round regardless of which jackpot corresponds. In this specific round, the special winning opening 65 and the specific area 658 are synchronized (linked), and the specific area 658 is opened when the special winning opening 65 is opened (after the time when the special winning opening 65 is opened). The specific area 658 is opened), and the specific area 658 is closed when the special winning opening 65 is closed (the specific area 658 is closed after the big winning opening 65 is closed). Therefore, basically, if the special winning opening 65 is long open, the specific area 658 is also long open, and if the large winning opening 65 is short open, the specific area 658 is also short open. In one special game, the number of executions of a specific round is not limited to one, but may be set multiple times. In the following, for convenience of explanation, among the specific rounds, a round in which the specific area 658 is long open and the V winning is easy or possible is also referred to as “V round”. Possible rounds are also referred to as “non-V rounds”.

  First, FIG. 72A shows a 16R long open pattern. In the 16R long open pattern, long open round games are executed in all rounds (normal round, specific round). In other words, the 16R long open big hit is a big hit equivalent to 16 rounds since the big winning opening 65 is opened long in any round game. It should be noted that the specific round (sixth round) is set as a V round that allows easy or possible entry into the specific area 658 because the long open round game is executed.

  FIG. 72 (B) shows a 6R long open pattern. In the 6R long open pattern, the long open round game is executed in all rounds, as in the 16R long open pattern described above. In other words, the 6R long open big hit is a big hit equivalent to six rounds since the big winning opening 65 is opened long in any round game. It should be noted that the specific round (sixth round) is set as a V round in which the entry into the specific area 658 is easy or possible.

  FIG. 72C shows a 6R long / short open pattern. In the 6R long / short open pattern, the long open round game is executed in the normal round, and the short open round game is executed in the specific round. In other words, the 6R long / short open big hit is a big hit equivalent to five rounds since the big winning opening 65 is opened long only in the normal round. The specific round (sixth round) is set as a non-V round in which it is difficult or impossible to enter the specific area 658 because the short open round game is executed.

  FIG. 72 (D) shows an 8R long open pattern. In the 8R long open pattern, the long open round game is executed in all rounds, as in the 16R long open pattern described above. In other words, the 8R long open big hit is a big hit equivalent to eight rounds since the big winning opening 65 is opened long in any round game. It should be noted that the specific round (sixth round) is set as a V round in which the entry into the specific area 658 is easy or possible.

  Then, the promotion effect in special game in 7th Embodiment is demonstrated. In this example, as a plurality of types of promotion effects, a first promotion effect (probability promotion effect) and a second probability change promotion effect (round promotion effect) are provided. The promotion effect in this example refers to the actual profit related to the jackpot during the jackpot for the profit mode related to the jackpot suggested or notified before the jackpot start or at the start of the jackpot (for convenience, “provisional profit mode”) The aspect is an effect that suggests or notifies whether the degree of profit is higher than the provisional profit aspect. In other words, suggesting or notifying whether the profit mode of the jackpot that was suggested or notified before the jackpot start or at the start of the jackpot is true (the mode of profit as it is) or false (a higher mode of profit), It is an effect that shows whether or not the jackpot profit mode is promoted (changed) through the process. Furthermore, it is an effect that suggests or reports whether the hit is actually a relatively high hit or a relatively low hit through a series of processes before or after the hit. In addition, as a form other than suggesting or notifying the truth or false information related to the profit mode before the jackpot start or at the time of the jackpot start, the information related to the above profit mode (true or false information) may not be specified at all. . For example, when a “challenge bonus” appears, until the challenge succeeds or fails, the profit mode is 1) whether the specific round is a V round or a non-V round, and 2) the specified number of special games is 16 rounds and Which of the eight rounds may be concealed. The promotion effect is executed as one aspect of the jackpot effect during the special game.

  Here, FIG. 73 is a diagram schematically showing the relationship between the jackpot type and the promotion effect. In this example, the type of promotion effect and the possibility of execution are determined according to the type of special symbol, the type of jackpot, the jackpot symbol (decorative symbol), the game state when the jackpot occurs, and the like. As will be described in detail later, in this example, when a big hit is made with the first special symbol, if the gaming state at the time of occurrence of the big hit is a normal state (low probability / no open extension), the first promotion effect is changed. When the promotion effect is executed and the gaming state at the time of occurrence of the big hit is a probability change state (high probability / with open extension), the probability change promotion effect is not executed. In addition, when the game state at the time of jackpot occurrence is a probability change state (high probability / with open extension), at least the execution of the probability change promotion effect before the specific round is prohibited, and the execution of the probability change promotion effect after the specific round is allowed May be. On the other hand, when the big special hit is the second special symbol, if the gaming state at the time of the big hit is a probable change state (high probability / with open extension), the round promotion effect is executed as the second promotion effect, When the game state at the time of occurrence is a normal state (low probability / no open extension), the round promotion effect is not executed.

Here, the jackpot symbol (stop symbol) of the decorative symbol in this example is basically “1 · 1 · 1”, “3 · 3 · 3”, “5 · 5 · 5”, “7 · 7”.・ Probability change symbols (odd symbols) indicating probability change big hits such as “7”, “9,9,9”, “2, 2, 2,” “4, 4, 4”, “6, 6, 6”, “ It is distinguished from an uncertain symbol (even number symbol) indicating a normal big hit or a probable big hit such as "8, 8, 8". Hereinafter, for convenience of explanation, among the above odd symbols, “3, 3, 3” and “7, 7, 7” are also referred to as first odd symbols, and “1 · 1 · 1”, “5 · 5” “5” and “9, 9, 9” are also referred to as second odd numbers. In this example, in both the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery, when the 16R long open big hit (high profit big hit) is won, the first odd number symbol (big hit symbol) is “ "3.3.3" or "7.7.7" is selected, and the appearance of the jackpot symbol teaches that the high profit jackpot (16 rounds) and the probability transition after special games are deterministic. . In this example, various promotion effects can be executed using the other jackpot symbols. In this example, when the big win is won with the second special symbol, only the odd symbol is selected and the even symbol is not selected as the big bonus symbol (decorative symbol). However, the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, even when the big win is won with the second special symbol, the even number symbol may be selected as the big hit symbol (decorative symbol). In this case, it is preferable that the “8 round finalized effect” and the “V finalized effect” are executed in the normal state, and the “8 round finalized effect” and the “V finalized effect” are executed even in the probability changed state. In addition, in relation to this, in the normal state, when the big win is won with the second special symbol, in addition to the “16 round finalized effect” and the “8 round finalized effect”, the “V finalized effect” is executed. Also good.

  If the first special symbol is a big hit, the V finalization effect or the probable change promotion effect can be executed during the special game. The V finalized effect is an effect that informs that the probability change acquisition is definitive before or at the start of the special game, that is, that the specific round is executed as a V round (long open round game). This is a notification effect. Probability promotion effect is an effect that suggests the expected degree of probability change acquisition in a specific round in a round before a specific round during the execution of a special game, that is, V round (long open round game) due to the occurrence of the big hit This is an effect that suggests the possibility of being executed. At this time, when the first special symbol is a big hit, which of the V finalization effect and the probable change promotion effect is executed in the special game depends on the type of the decorative symbol stoppage (big hit symbol) and the It is decided according to the game state at the time of big hit.

  As shown in FIG. 73, when the gaming state is the normal state, when the 16R long open big hit is won with the first special symbol, that is, the big hit symbol becomes the first odd symbol (for example, “7, 7, 7”). In this case, the V finalization effect is selected. On the other hand, if the game state is the normal state and the 6R long open big hit is won with the first special symbol, if the big hit symbol becomes the second odd symbol (for example, “1 · 1 · 1”), the V confirmed effect is If the jackpot symbol is an even symbol (for example, “2 · 2 · 2”), the probable promotion effect is selected. In addition, when the game state is the normal state, if the 1R special symbol is won for the 6R long / short open jackpot, that is, if the jackpot symbol is an even symbol (for example, “2.2.2”), the probability change promotion effect is Selected.

  On the other hand, when the gaming state is in the probable state, when the first special symbol is won for the 16R long open big hit, that is, when the big hit symbol is the first odd symbol (for example, “7, 7, 7”) , V finalization effect is selected. On the other hand, when the gaming state is a probable change state, if the 6R long open big hit is won with the first special symbol, that is, if the big hit symbol becomes the second odd symbol (for example, “1 · 1 · 1”), the V is determined. A production is selected. In addition, when the gaming state is in the probable state, if the 6R long / short open big hit is won with the first special symbol, that is, if the big win symbol is an even number symbol (for example, “2.2.2”), the V finalization effect is also given. Probability promotion production is not selected. That is, when the gaming state is a probable change state, if the conditional big hit (16R long open big hit, 6R long open big hit) is won as the big hit attribute, the V finalization effect is executed, while the conditional If a normal big hit (6R long / short open big hit) is won, neither the V finalization effect nor the probable promotion effect is executed.

Here, if the first special symbol is a big hit, the probability variation promotion effect is executed when the gaming state at the time of the big hit occurrence is a normal state (low probability / no open extension), that is, This is the time of the first hit. The “first hit” means a big hit that is generated by winning in the determination of whether or not the special symbol is at least when the electric chew support function is not in operation (open extension function is inactive). Therefore, the case where the first special symbol is a big hit is typically the time of the first hit, and the player pays attention to whether or not the gaming state after the first hit becomes a probable change state. By suggesting the possibility that the specific round becomes a V round (long open round game) in the promotion effect, it is possible to maintain the player's expectation during the special game.

  Next, when the second special symbol is a big hit, a round finalizing effect or a round promotion effect can be executed during the special game. The round finalizing effect is an effect of definitely informing the number of rounds (16 rounds or 8 rounds) before or at the start of the special game. Specifically, in this example, a 16-round finalized effect and an 8-round finalized effect are prepared. The round promotion effect is an effect (also referred to as a “round-up effect”) that suggests the possibility of continuing after the specified number of rounds in the round game before the specified number of rounds during execution of the special game. At this time, if the second special symbol is a big hit, whether the round finalization effect or the round promotion effect is executed in the special game, the type of the stop symbol of the decorative design (big hit symbol) and the time of the big hit It is determined according to the gaming state of

  As shown in FIG. 73, when the gaming state is the normal state, when the 16R long open big hit is won with the second special symbol, that is, the big hit symbol becomes the first odd symbol (for example, “7, 7, 7”). In this case, the 16 round finalization effect is selected. On the other hand, when the game state is the normal state, when the 8R long open big hit is won with the second special symbol, that is, when the big hit symbol becomes the second odd symbol (for example, “1 · 1 · 1”), 8 round A confirmed effect is selected.

  On the other hand, if the game state is a probable state and the 16R long open big hit is won with the second special symbol, if the big hit symbol becomes the first odd symbol (for example, “7,7,7”), 16 rounds If the confirmed effect is selected and the jackpot symbol is the second odd symbol (for example, “1 · 1 · 1”), the round promotion effect is selected. On the other hand, when the game state is in the probable state, if the 2R special symbol wins the 8R long open jackpot, that is, if the jackpot symbol is the second odd symbol (for example, “1 · 1 · 1”), the round promotion A production is selected.

  Here, when the second special symbol is a jackpot, the round promotion effect is executed when the gaming state at the time of the jackpot occurrence is a probable change state (high probability / with open extension), that is, a so-called consecutive resort It's time. As mentioned above, “Renso” is a special game where the result of the special symbol's success / failure judgment is a big hit when at least the electric chew support function is activated (the extended extension function is activated). As the gaming state after the end of, the state that the electric chew support function is operating again (the operating state of the opening extension function) continues. In other words, the case of a big hit with the second special symbol is typically at the time of a consecutive resort, and it is almost guaranteed that a probable state will be continuously given at the time of the consecutive resort. Because the focus is on the number of rounds of special games (number of balls), not on whether or not there is a probability change, it is possible to maintain the player's expectation during the special game by suggesting the possibility of continuing the second half round. .

It should be noted that the above-mentioned effect contents (promotion effect, finalized effect) may be configured to be executed only when the game is in the first special symbol, in the non-electric Chu support state, and the game in the second special symbol. If so, it may be configured to be executed only in the electric chew support state. Further, the probable promotion effect may be configured as (1) to (3) below. (1) If the first special symbol is a big hit in the non-electric chew support state, the probabilistic promotion effect is executed during the special game (during the big hit), while the second special is in the non-electric chew support state. If the game is a big hit, it may be configured to execute the probable promotion effect before the start of the special game (before the big hit) rather than during the special game (during the big hit). During the display, the combination of the decorative symbols is changed from “6, 6, 6” to “7, 7, 7”, which indicates that the probable promotion has been promoted. (2) If the first special symbol is a big hit in the electric chew support state, the probable change promotion effect is executed before the start of the special game (before the big hit) and the probable change promotion effect during the special game (during the big hit) Is not executed, and if the second special symbol is a big hit when in the electric chew support state, the probable promotion effect is executed before the start of the special game (before the big hit) (In this case, it is always easy to win a V prize) Because it ’s a big hit, you ’ll definitely be promoted.) (3) However, when the above (2) is applied, the player's sense of expectation during special games (during big hits) even if the first special symbol is a big hit in the electric chew support state Probability promotion effect may be executed during a special game (during a big hit) so as to sustain the game.

(First promotion effect)
First, the probability variation promotion effect (first promotion effect) will be described with reference to a specific effect example. FIG. 74 is a schematic diagram showing an example of the content of the probable promotion effect. When the game state is the normal state and the game state is the normal state, the probable promotion effect is the next round (specific round) over the second to fifth rounds in the special game. ) Is an effect that suggests or reports the possibility of V round (long open round game). The probable promotion effect in this example is from a ballistic effect (also referred to as “first ballistic effect”) executed from the second round to the fourth round and a V-round acquisition effect executed in the fifth round. Become.

  As shown in FIGS. 74 (A) to 74 (C), the first entry effect is displayed in the second round to the fourth round. The first winning effect is an effect in which various objects are sequentially displayed on the screen in response to the game ball entering the grand prize opening 65, and the V winning round is entered according to the display mode of the specific object. This suggests the expected level of transition (ie, the expected level of change).

  First, as shown in FIG. 74A, when the second round is started, a meter image (meter image for the second round) is displayed on the screen of the effect display device 70. This meter image is displayed in a horizontally long strip shape, and a scale is added to the inside thereof. At the start of each round game (2nd to 4th rounds), the scale of the meter image is “0”, and every time a game ball enters the big prize opening 65, an object for one scale ( The object representing the color) is displayed, and the meter image is incremented by one graduation (the graduation is cleared to zero when moving to the next round). The meter images are set to all nine scales, which correspond to the maximum number of balls (10) which are the maximum winning holes 65 in each round game. That is, when there is a maximum number of balls (10) in the grand prize opening 65 in the round game, the scale of the meter image is obtained by accumulating 10 scale objects (10 objects per scale). Becomes full. In this example, one of the two colors of “white” and “giraffe pattern” can be taken as the display mode of the object for one scale of the meter image. In the drawing, two types of display modes of white and giraffe pattern are represented by “plain” and “slashed line”, respectively. At this time, each time a giraffe pattern object of one scale appears, one star (an image imitating a star) is displayed (one star can be acquired). On the other hand, even if a white object of one scale appears, a star is not displayed (a star cannot be acquired). This example is configured to be able to display a maximum of three stars, suggesting the possibility that the specific round will be a V round (long open round game) depending on the number of stars acquired. In the example shown in the figure, in the second round, seven game balls are entered into the grand prize opening 65, so that the meter image is increased to seven scales. However, the giraffe pattern object does not appear and stars are displayed. It shows the state that could not be acquired.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 74B, when the third round is started, a new meter image (meter image for the third round) is displayed on the screen. In the example shown in the figure, in the third round, a giraffe pattern object appears by the fifth ball entering the big winning opening 65, and one star can be obtained.

Next, as shown in FIG. 74C, when the fourth round is started, a new meter image (meter image for the fourth round) is displayed on the screen. In the example shown in the figure, in the fourth round, a giraffe pattern object appears with the seventh ball entering the big winning opening 65, and another star can be acquired. At the end of the fourth round, the total number (2) of stars acquired in the first entrance effect is determined. In this example, the number of acquired giraffe pattern objects in one round game is one, but is not limited to this, so that a plurality of giraffe pattern objects can be acquired in one round game. It may be configured.

  Next, the V round acquisition effect is displayed in the fifth round, as shown in FIGS. This V-round acquisition effect is closely related to the display mode (effect result) of the first entrance effect, and the effect content corresponding to the effect result (object display mode) of the entrance effect is derived. The expected degree of probability change acquisition (expected degree of transition to the V round) is suggested according to the contents of the production.

  As shown in FIG. 74D, in the fifth round, the title image is notified with the start of the V-round acquisition effect. In this example, a title image “probability change promotion chance time” is displayed on the screen. According to the attribute of the display mode of the title (in this example, a plurality of types of display colors are prepared), the expected level of transition to the V round is notified. Although details will be described later, in this example, the title display color is set so that the expected transition to the V round increases in the order of “blue” <“green” <“purple” <“red”. The attribute (display color) of the title varies depending on the number of stars acquired in the ballistic effect. In the example shown in the figure, the title display color is “purple” corresponding to the number of stars acquired “2”. Also, a message “Press the button to see the result!” Is displayed on the screen, and the player is prompted to operate the effect button 15. In response to this, when the player operates the effect button 15, the effect result is displayed.

  As shown in FIG. 74E, when the probability change promotion is successful (when the next round becomes the V round), the characters “V round acquisition success” are displayed on the screen. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 74 (F), when the probability change promotion has failed (when the next round is a non-V round), the characters “V round acquisition failure” are displayed on the screen. . However, in actuality, since the type of jackpot (whether or not the V round is executed) is determined in advance at the time of the winning or failing lottery, the effect development (effect result) according to the type is obtained. That is, when the 6R long open big hit (conditional specific big hit) is won, the probability change promotion succeeds, and when the 6R long short open big hit (conditional normal big hit) is won, the probability change promotion fails.

  And although illustration is omitted, in the next sixth round (specific round), a round game (long open round game or short open round game) according to the notification result by the probability variation promotion effect is executed. At this time, if the sixth round is a long open round game, for example, a predetermined effect image in which a message such as “Aim for V” appears is displayed in order to prompt the player to win the specific area 658. However, in the case of a short open round game, the predetermined effect image is not displayed. However, even if the game is a short open round game in which it is difficult or impossible to enter the specific area 658, if the game can be won in the specific area 658 as a result, the game state after the end of the special game is changed to a probable state. Will be migrated.

  The content (effect pattern) of such a probability change promotion effect is selected with reference to the probability change promotion effect pattern table. FIG. 75 is a schematic diagram illustrating an example of a probability variation promotion effect pattern table. In the probability variation promotion effect pattern table, a plurality of types of probability variation promotion effect patterns are defined. In each figure, “selection rate” is shown for convenience of explanation, but in actuality, a judgment value (range of random values) for determining a probable change promotion effect pattern according to a random change value of a probable change promotion effect pattern Is set, and the probability variation promotion effect pattern is determined based on which determination value the probability variation promotion effect pattern random value belongs to.

  In the probability variation promotion effect pattern table, according to the probability variation promotion effect pattern, the contents of the ballistic effect (whether or not a giraffe pattern object appears, the number of stars acquired), the contents of the V round acquisition effect (title display color) and Is defined (see the column “Production contents” in the figure). In FIG. 75, the presence / absence of the appearance of the giraffe pattern object in each round is determined. “O” means that the giraffe pattern object appears, and “−” means that the giraffe pattern object does not appear. Yes. The number of stars acquired is determined according to the number of circles (that is, the number of appearances of giraffe pattern objects). Then, the display color of the title in the V-round acquisition effect is determined according to the number of stars acquired in this entry effect. Specifically, the title display color is “blue” for the star acquisition number “0”, the title display color is “green” for the star acquisition number “1”, and the star acquisition number “2”. The title display color “red” is specified for the title display color “purple” and the star acquisition number “3”. In addition, in the production example of FIG. 74 described above, a case where the probability variation promotion production pattern PS107 is selected is illustrated.

  In this probability variation promotion effect pattern table, the selection rate of the probability variation promotion effect pattern is set to be different depending on the type of jackpot. Basically, each production pattern is assigned a selection rate according to the final number of stars acquired and the display color of the title. That is, when the big hit type is a 6R long open big hit (when it is a big hit with a V round), the selection rate increases in the order of “0” <“1” <“2” <“3”. Thus, the selection rate increases in the order of “blue” <“green” <“purple” <“red” as the display color of the title. On the other hand, when the big hit type is 6R long / short open big hit (when it is a big hit with a non-V round), the total selection score is high in the order of “3” <“2” <“1” <“0”. Thus, the selection rate increases in the order of “red” <“purple” <“green” <“blue” as the display color of the title. Therefore, in this example, the total score is “0 points” <“1 point” <“2 points” <“3 points”, and the title display color is “blue” <“green” <“purple”. <In the order of “red”, the expected degree of transition to the V round (long open round game) increases. In addition, it is good also as a specification which a long open big hit (V round acquisition) is decided by appearance of "red" as a display color of a title. In this case, for example, the selection rate of “red” in FIG. 75 is long open big hit: long short open big hit = 20: 0.

(Second promotion effect)
Next, the round promotion effect (second promotion effect) will be described. FIG. 76 is a schematic diagram showing an example of the contents of the effect of the round promotion effect. The round promotion effect suggests that if the second special symbol is a big hit, the possibility is that the 9th round or later (that is, the second half of the 8th round) may be executed across the 7th to 8th rounds in the special game. This is a notification effect. In other words, this round promotion effect is, for example, as if it is an 8R jackpot when the decorative design is stopped, and during the round it is actually a 16R jackpot (high profit jackpot) that suggests or reports (8R jackpot is a 16R jackpot) This is a kind of production). The round promotion effect in this example includes a ball effect that is executed in the seventh round (also referred to as “second ball effect”) and a second-half round acquisition effect that is executed in the eighth round.

The second entry effect is displayed in the seventh round, as shown in FIGS. The second entry effect is an effect in which various objects are sequentially displayed on the screen according to the entry of the game ball into the grand prize opening 65, and in the latter half of the eight rounds according to the display mode of the specific object. Continuation expectation (that is, round-up expectation) is suggested. In addition, in the first ballistic effect, the expected degree of transition to the V round (long open round game) was suggested according to the number of appearances of a specific object (giraffe pattern object) among a plurality of types of objects. In the second entry effect, the round-up becomes definitive when a special object (gold object) among a plurality of types of objects appears. In the drawing, the gold display mode is expressed by “filling”. As a modification, the second entrance effect may be composed of the same effect pattern (effect content) as the first entrance effect, and in that case, depending on the number of acquired giraffe pattern objects. You may comprise so that the expectation degree of round promotion may differ.

  First, as shown in FIG. 76A, when the seventh round is started, a meter image is displayed on the screen of the effect display device 70. Also in this example, the scale of the meter image is “0” at the start of each round game, and every time a game ball enters the big winning opening 65 in the round game, an object (white color) is added to the meter image. Object or gold object) is displayed, and the meter image is incremented by one graduation. In addition, below, the description is abbreviate | omitted about the part which is common with the above-mentioned 1st entrance effect.

  As shown in FIG. 76 (B), in this example, it is assumed that no gold object appears and only a white object appears until the sixth ball entering the winning prize opening 65. Then, as shown in FIG. 76C, in this example, a golden object appears by the seventh ball entering the winning prize opening 65, and at this point, the round-up for the latter eight rounds is definitive. Become. At this time, three stars can be acquired at a time (three stars are lit) by the appearance of the golden object.

  Next, as shown in FIGS. 76D to 76F, the latter half round acquisition effect is displayed in the eighth round. This second half round acquisition effect is closely related to the display mode (display result) of the entrance effect, and is an effect in which an effect image corresponding to the display mode of the entrance effect (display mode of the object) is displayed. Depending on the image, the expected level of acquisition in the latter half 8 rounds is suggested. In this example, as shown in FIG. 76 (D), when a golden object is acquired, the three stars acquired in the previous round are continuously displayed in order to increase the satisfaction of the round promotion. An effect image (golden effect) related to the gold object is displayed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 76 (E), characters “successful acquisition of the second half round” are displayed on the screen as a successful round-up effect. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 76 (F), if a golden object cannot be acquired by the seventh round, the characters “round acquisition failure” are displayed on the screen as a round-up failure effect in the eighth round. That is, in the eighth round, the acquired results of the latter half 8 rounds (9th to 16th rounds) are confirmed and displayed. However, in actuality, since the type of jackpot (that is, the presence / absence of the latter half 8 rounds) at the time of the lottery is determined in advance, the effect development (effect result) according to the type is obtained. That is, when the 16R long open big hit is won, the round promotion is successful, and when the 8R long open big hit is won, the round promotion is failed.

  The content (effect pattern) of such a round promotion effect is selected with reference to the round promotion effect pattern table. FIG. 77 is a schematic diagram showing an example of a round promotion effect pattern table. In the round promotion effect pattern table, a plurality of types of round promotion effect patterns are defined. In each figure, “selection rate” is shown for convenience of explanation, but in actuality, a determination value (range of random values) for determining a round promotion effect pattern according to a round promotion effect pattern random value is shown. The round promotion effect pattern is determined based on which judgment value the round promotion effect pattern random value belongs to.

In the round promotion effect pattern table, the presence / absence of a special object (gold object) in the entrance effect and the display result in the latter half round acquisition effect are specified according to the round promotion effect pattern (in the drawing) (Refer to the section “Production”) In FIG. 77, the presence / absence of the appearance of a gold object in the seventh round is determined. “◯” represents the appearance of a gold object and “−” represents the absence of the gold object. Therefore, if “○” is attached to any of the round columns in the figure, the round promotion production pattern is the content of the production that results in a successful round-up, and “○” appears in any round column.
If not attached, the round promotion effect pattern is the effect of the effect of the round-up failure.

  In this round promotion effect pattern table, the selection rate of the round promotion effect pattern is set to be different depending on the type of jackpot. Basically, each performance pattern is assigned a selection rate according to the display mode (appearance / non-occurrence and appearance timing) of the golden object. That is, when the jackpot type is 16R long open jackpot (when the total number of rounds is 16 rounds), a round promotion effect pattern PS202 in which a golden object appears and the round-up is successful is selected. On the other hand, when the jackpot type is an 8R long open jackpot (when the total number of rounds is eight), the round promotion effect pattern PS201 in which the golden object does not appear and the roundup fails is selected. As described above, since the gold object is selected only when the result of the determination is 16R long open big hit (the 8R long open big hit is not a selection target), the appearance of the golden object is the final decision of 16R big hit, that is, the latter half 8 rounds. Will be shown. As a modification, even if the golden object cannot be acquired in the round promotion effect, the round promotion may be successful. Also, in the round promotion effect, when a giraffe pattern object appears and a golden object is acquired, the round promotion is confirmed. Even if the golden object cannot be acquired, the round promotion is performed according to the number of acquired giraffe pattern objects. You may comprise so that an expectation may be suggested.

  As explained so far, in this example, conditional special big hits (equivalent to probable variation big hits) and conditional regular big hits (equivalent to non-probable big hits) are provided as big hits attributes of the first special symbol, and wins for conditional special big hits In this case, the specific round is set to the V round (long open round game), while if the conditional regular big hit is won, the specific round is set to the non-V round (short open round game). Therefore, regardless of which jackpot attribute, the presence / absence of a V prize (probability change acquisition) is assigned in the specific round. Therefore, the probability variation promotion effect in this example is whether or not the specific round becomes a V round (long open round game) until the specific round is started, that is, the expectation of the probability variation promotion in the specific round. The degree is suggested or notified. On the other hand, only the conditional special jackpot is provided as the jackpot attribute of the second special symbol, and the specific round is set to V round (long open round game). In the case of a conditional special jackpot, the V prize (acquired probability change) is basically almost guaranteed in a specific round. Therefore, it can be said that the significance of executing the probable promotion effect is low before the specific round is started. Therefore, instead, when a big hit is made in the second special symbol, the possibility that the round game will continue after a predetermined round, that is, the degree of expectation of round promotion, as information on the expected value of winning a prize ball in the special game Is suggested or notified.

  As described above, according to the seventh embodiment, two types of promotion effects are executed according to the type of jackpot before a predetermined round in a special game, and two different types of promotion effects are input to the same system. When it is composed of a ball production and a big hit is made with the first special symbol, the first promotion production suggests the expected degree of probability change after the predetermined round (V round acquisition expectation), while the second special In the case of a big hit with a symbol, the second promotion effect suggests the expected level of continuation of the round after the predetermined round (expected expectation level of the second half round), so that the same-type effect that combines two types of promotion effect (on While ensuring the occurrence frequency of the ball production), the promotion production can be varied to increase the production effect of the jackpot production, and as a result, the entertainment of the game can be improved.

In the seventh embodiment described above, the configuration in which only a single big prize opening 65 (only the big prize opening 65 having the specific area 658) is provided in the game area PA is illustrated, but the present invention is limited to this configuration. For example, in the same manner as in the second embodiment described above, two big prize winning holes 64 and 65 (a big prize winning hole 64 having no specific area 658 and a special prize area 658 are provided in the game area PA). Mouth 6
You may apply to the structure provided with 5). At this time, in the above-described second embodiment, the first big prize opening 64 and the second big prize opening 65 are arranged so as to be vertically close to the lower right area in the game area PA, and during the execution of the special game Is configured to open the lower second big prize opening 65 (and the specific area 658) in the specific round and open the upper first big prize opening 65) in rounds other than the specific round. The configuration is not limited. For example, while adopting the same arrangement of the big winning openings 64 and 65 as in the second embodiment, the opening pattern of the big winning openings 64 and 65 may be different from that of the second embodiment. As an example, when the 16R special game is executed, in the odd-numbered (1R, 3R, 5R ...) round game, the upper first winning prize port 64 is opened and the even number (2R, 4R, 6R ...) is opened. In the round game, the lower second big prize opening 65 is opened. Then, in the odd number of round games, the big prize opening 64 is opened long (29 seconds open) in any round game. On the other hand, in the round game of the even number of times, in rounds other than the specific round, the big prize opening 65 is long open (29 seconds open) and the specific area 658 is always closed, while in the first specific round (1R), The big prize opening 65 and the specific area 658 are opened short (open for 0.5 seconds), and in the second specific round (7R), the big prize opening 65 and the specific area 658 are opened long (open for 29 seconds). At this time, the first big prize opening 64 and the second big prize opening 65 are alternately opened and closed every round, so that one big prize opening is closed in a certain round, and at the same time, the other big prize winning opening Will be released and the next round will begin. For this reason, there is an increased chance that a game ball that could not be entered due to the closing of one of the big winning gates in a certain round or a game ball that was not in time can enter the other big winning port adjacent to it. To do. Further, since the first grand prize winning port 64 and the second grand prize winning port 65 are close to each other in the vertical direction, the player only needs to aim at the same position, and the game can be performed without changing the launch strength of the game ball. As a result, the efficiency of entering a ball into the grand prize opening is increased, and the player's sense of gain is improved. At this time, even in the case of a long / short open big hit or a short open big hit, in the rounds other than the specific round, both the big winning openings 64 and 65 are long open (29 seconds open), and the ball entry efficiency is improved as described above. As a result, there are more opportunities to get more than before, which will be beneficial for players. As a modified example, the first round winning opening 64 is opened by an even number of round games (2R, 4R, 6R,... The mouth 65 may be opened by an odd number of round games (1R, 3R, 5R...).

Further, in the above-described seventh embodiment, during the execution of the special game, a specific round is set in which it is determined whether or not to shift to the probable change state after the end of the special game depending on whether or not the specific area 658 is entered. A specific area entry instruction directing to enter the specific area 658 by launching a game ball aiming at the big prize opening 65 (specific area 658), or a certain change after the special game ends by entering the specific area 658 A specific area entry notification effect (see the second embodiment) for notifying the transition to the state is executed. An example of the specific area entry effect is to display a message such as “Aim at V!” Or “It will change when you enter V!” On the screen. An example of the specific area entry notification effect is to display a message such as “V winning!” Or “Probability change get” on the screen. At this time, if a big hit is made with the first special symbol in the non-specific gaming state (in this example, when the opening extension function is not activated), the second special in the specific gaming state (in this example, when the opening extension function is activated) The configuration is such that the execution probability of at least one of the specific area entry instruction effect and the specific area entry instruction effect is lower than the case of a big hit with a design, or at least one of the specific area entry instruction effect and the specific area entry effect It may be configured not to execute. That is, in this example, when a big hit is made with the first special symbol (that is, in the case of the first hit), it is uncertain whether or not a probability change has been obtained (a probability change can be obtained when a 16R or 6R long open big hit is possible) And the probability of winning the probability change is low when the 6R long / short open big hit is high), and the player pays attention to the presence / absence of the probability change, so in the specific round in which the specific region 658 is long open, By executing the instruction effect and the specific area entry notification effect, it is possible to enhance the expectation and satisfaction of the probability change acquisition. On the other hand, when a big hit is made with the second special symbol (that is, in the consecutive resort state), the probability change acquisition is basically a definite situation (16R or 8R long open big hit is likely to get a positive change) Since the player's interest in acquiring the probability change is not so great, at least one of the specific area entry instruction effect and the specific area entry notification effect is not executed or even if it is executed, the above message is displayed. It may be displayed in a small size or the display mode may be simplified. In addition, when two or more specific rounds are set (both V rounds), if a V win is made in the previous specific round, a specific area entry effect (“Aim for V”) is executed in the subsequent specific round. It is not necessary (however, the specific area entry effect is executed in the previous specific round).

Further, in the seventh embodiment described above, when a so-called consecutive resort continues for a specified number of times, a rare special effect (so-called ascension effect) may be generated. Also in this example, as in the first embodiment described above, whether or not a special effect (so-called ascension effect) can be executed is determined when a predetermined condition is satisfied regarding the so-called extended resort state. The predetermined condition is, for example, that the number of consecutive games reaches a predetermined number, the cumulative number of specific big hits in the consecutive resort state reaches a predetermined number, the accumulated number of winning balls in the consecutive resort state reaches a predetermined number, A case where a specific effect (a specific effect during a symbol change or special game) is generated during the villa state can be cited. This special effect is executed across the symbol variation effect related to the jackpot of N consecutive times N = Nset (Nset: specified number) and the special game related to the Nset jackpot. As a modified example, the special effect may not extend over the symbol variation effect related to the big hit of the consecutive resort N = Nset times (Nset: the specified number) and the special game related to the Nset big hit. Good (may be performed on either side). At this time, when the special effect is executed, the execution probability of at least one of the specific area entry instruction effect and the specific area entry effect is lower in the specific round in the special game than when the special effect is not executed. Or at least one of the specific area entry instruction effect and the specific area entry effect may be omitted. Even if the specific area entry instruction effect or the specific area entry effect is executed, the message may be displayed in a small size or simplified. The reason is to avoid diluting the effects of the special effects during the execution of the special game and the specific area entry instruction effect (specific area entry notification effect). In this case, the priority is given to the execution of the rare special effect, so that the player can be satisfied.

[Eighth Embodiment]
Next, a gaming machine according to the eighth embodiment will be described. The gaming machine of the eighth embodiment has basically the same configuration as the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above, and hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the parts having the same configuration. The description is omitted, and different parts are mainly described.

  As with the gaming machine of the seventh embodiment, the gaming machine of the eighth embodiment depends on whether or not the game ball wins a specific area (so-called “V area”) in the big winning opening during execution of the special game. Thus, it is configured as a so-called ball accuracy type gaming machine that determines whether or not the gaming state shifts to the probability changing state after the end of the special game. Note that the probability variation state may be continued until a predetermined number of times (ST number) of symbol variations is performed, or may be continued until the next big hit occurs.

  In addition, the gaming machine of the eighth embodiment, like the gaming machine of the seventh embodiment, is equipped with only a single big prize opening 65 (a ball-like attacker with a specific area 658) in the gaming area PA. ing. That is, the eighth embodiment is also configured such that the big prize opening 65 having the specific area 658 is opened in all rounds. Note that the configuration of the special winning opening 65 has already been described in the second embodiment described above, and a duplicate description thereof will be omitted here.

  Next, the jackpot type (breakdown breakdown) in the eighth embodiment will be described. FIG. 78 shows the jackpot breakdown of the special symbol lottery in the eighth embodiment. In the following, for convenience of explanation, the description regarding “small hit” is omitted unless otherwise specified.

  The upper part of FIG. 78 is a diagram schematically showing a symbol table per first special symbol in the eighth embodiment. In the symbol table per first special symbol, the symbol random number per special symbol is associated with the symbol group, the jackpot attribute, the number of operations of the probability variation / short-time function, and the operation pattern of the big prize opening (this book). In the example, the description of the stop symbol is omitted for convenience). In the symbol table per 1st special symbol, the symbol group A (16R long open big hit), the symbol group B (12R long short open big hit 1), and the symbol group C (12R) as three types of symbol groups according to the type of big hit. Long and short open big hit 2) is set. As shown in the upper part of FIG. 78, in the first special symbol lottery, the winning probability of the conditional special big hit (corresponding to the probability variation big hit) is 50%, and the winning probability of the conditional normal big hit (corresponding to the non-probable variation big hit) is 50%. It is.

  The lower part of FIG. 78 is a diagram schematically showing a symbol table per second special symbol in the eighth embodiment. In the second special symbol per symbol table, a symbol group, jackpot attribute, the number of operations of the probability variation / short-time function, and the operation pattern of the big prize opening are respectively associated with the symbol random value per special symbol (this book). In the example, the description of the stop symbol is omitted for convenience). In the symbol table per second special symbol, a symbol group D (16R long open big hit) and a symbol group E (7R long open big hit) are set as two types of symbol groups according to the type of big hit. As shown in the lower part of FIG. 78, in the second special symbol lottery, the winning probability of the conditional specific big hit (corresponding to the probable big hit) is 100%.

  In this example, the average number of rounds of special games executed by one occurrence of big hit is set equal in the case of winning a big win in the first special symbol lottery and in the case of winning a big win in the second special symbol lottery. Specifically, the average number of rounds for a special game in the case of a big win in the first special symbol lottery is “12.4 rounds”, whereas the special number in the case of a big win in the second special symbol lottery The average number of rounds of the game is “12.4 rounds”, and the average number of rounds is configured to be the same.

  Subsequently, FIG. 79 is a time chart for explaining an operation pattern of the special winning opening 65 in the eighth embodiment. In this example, a total of four types of operation patterns are prepared corresponding to the above jackpot types. In the figure, the state change of the special winning opening 65 during the special game is shown in time series from left to right. Each operation pattern shown in FIG. 79 conceptually shows the execution state of each round game, and the time widths and ratios of the opening time and closing time (including interval time) of each round game are the actual time. It does not correspond to width and ratio. That is, in the figure, in order to express the progress of each round in an easy-to-understand manner, the time width of each round and each interval is described equally. It differs depending on the opening mode. In the figure, “L” is added to the long open round game, and “S” is added to the short open round game.

Here, the single opening / closing operation (opening operation) of the special winning opening 65 is a long opening (also referred to as “long opening operation”) in which the opening time is relatively long according to the length of the opening time. And short opening (also referred to as “short opening operation”) in which the opening time is relatively short. In one round game, regardless of whether the opening time is long or short, the opening / closing operation of the grand prize opening 65 is executed only once, and the opening / closing operation of the big prize opening 65 is executed a plurality of times. There is. Here, the round game is classified into a long open round game and a short open round game. In the long open round game, after the round game is started and the grand prize opening 65 is released, the number of winning game balls to the big prize opening 65 reaches a specified number (in this example, “10 balls”), or When the opening time of the grand prize opening 65 (when it is opened several times during one round, the total opening time of the plurality of times of opening) exceeds the first specified time, the big prize opening 65 is closed. This round game ends. The first specified time is a time width in which the number of winning game balls to the big winning opening 65 may reach the specified number (10 balls), and in this example, “29 seconds” is set. In this example, in the long open round game, there are cases where only one long release operation is executed, and one long release operation and one short release operation are executed. That is, in the long open round game, when the first specified time is reached by one long open action (29 seconds), one long open action (28.8 seconds) and one short open action (0. 2 seconds), the first specified time may be reached. As a modification thereof, the above-described one long opening operation may not always be 28.8 seconds, but may always be 29 seconds regardless of the combination with the short opening operation. On the other hand, in the short open round game, after the round game is started and the big prize opening 65 is opened, the opening time of the big prize opening 65 has passed the second specified time (in this example, “0.2 seconds”). The grand prize opening 65 is closed, and this round game ends. The second specified time is a time width in which it is difficult to win a game ball in the big winning opening 65, and “0.2 seconds” is set in this example. Therefore, it is virtually impossible to win a prescribed number of winnings in the big winning opening 65 in the short open round game. The short open round game may involve a plurality of short open actions in one round. In the following, “long open round game” means that at least one long open operation is included in one round, and whether or not there is a short open operation (may include a short open operation). . “Short opening round game” means that at least one short opening operation is included in one round, and a long opening operation is not included. In this example, as shown in FIGS. 79 (B) and 79 (C), the 12R long / short open patterns 1 and 2 (12R long / short open big hits 1 and 2) are both set to have a real round number of 7 rounds. ing.

  First, FIG. 79 (A) shows a 16R long open pattern. In the 16R long open pattern, long open round games are executed in all rounds (normal round, specific round). In other words, the 16R long open big hit is a big hit equivalent to 16 rounds since the big winning opening 65 is opened long in any round game. As described above, the specific round (fifth round) is set as a V round that allows easy or possible entry into the specific area 658 because the long open round game is executed.

  FIG. 79 (B) shows the 12R long / short open pattern 1. In 12R long / short open pattern 1, long open round games in the first to third rounds, short open round games in the fourth round, long open round games in the fifth to eighth rounds, short open rounds in the ninth to twelfth rounds A game is executed. The 12R long / short open big hit 1 is a big hit equivalent to seven rounds since the big winning opening 65 is opened long in seven round games out of twelve round games. Since the specific round (fifth round) is a long open round game as described above, it is set as a V round that allows easy or possible entry into the specific area 658.

  FIG. 79C shows the 12R long / short open pattern 2. In 12R long / short open pattern 2, long open round games in the first to fourth rounds, short open round games in the fifth round, long open round games in the sixth to eighth rounds, short open rounds in the ninth to twelfth rounds A game is executed. The 12R long / short open big hit 2 is a big hit equivalent to 7 rounds because the big winning opening 65 is opened long in 7 round games out of 12 round games, like the above 12R long / short open big hit 1 . As described above, the specific round (fifth round) is set as a non-V round in which it is difficult or impossible to enter the specific area 658 because the short open round game is executed.

  First, FIG. 79 (D) shows a 7R long open pattern. In the 7R long open pattern, long open round games are executed in all rounds (normal round, specific round). In other words, the 7R long open big hit is a big hit equivalent to seven rounds since the big winning opening 65 is opened long in any round game. As described above, the specific round (fifth round) is set as a V round that allows easy or possible entry into the specific area 658 because the long open round game is executed.

  Here, the opening / closing operation of the special winning opening 65 in the 12R long / short opening patterns 1 and 2 will be described in more detail. First, 12R long and short open patterns 1 and 2 together, winning opening 65 in the first to third rounds and each round of the seventh to the eighth round is long opened only once in each round of the ninth to twelfth round The grand prize winning opening 65 is opened shortly once. Therefore, in the 12R long / short opening patterns 1 and 2, the opening / closing operation of the special winning opening 65 coincides in each round. On the other hand, in the 12R long / short opening patterns 1 and 2, the opening / closing operation of the special winning opening 65 is different in each of the fourth to sixth rounds. Specifically, in the 12R length open pattern 1, short open once in the fourth round, one long open at the fifth round, one short open and one long open at the sixth round Is done. In other words, in the 12R long / short opening pattern 1, the special winning opening 65 opens and closes in the order of “short opening → long opening → short opening → long opening” in the fourth to sixth rounds. On the other hand, in the 12R long / short opening pattern 2, one short opening and one long opening are performed in the fourth round, a short opening is performed in the fifth round, and one long opening is performed in the sixth round. . In other words, in the 12R long / short opening pattern 2, the special winning opening 65 opens and closes in the order of “short opening → long opening → short opening → long opening” in the section from the fourth round to the sixth round. That is, when comparing the 12R long and short open patterns 1 and 2, when the rounds from the fourth to sixth rounds are individually viewed, the opening and closing operations of the special winning opening 65 are different, but from the fourth to the sixth rounds. When the sections are totally viewed as a series of flows, the opening and closing operations of the special prize opening 65 are the same. In the drawing, for convenience of explanation, since the time width of each round is divided equally, the interval period is expressed in various lengths, but the interval periods are actually set to be substantially the same. Therefore, as indicated by broken arrows in the figure, each operation (corresponding operation) in the section from the fourth to the sixth rounds is set at substantially the same timing on the time axis. Yes. As a modification, in FIGS. 79 (B) and 79 (C), the above-described opening pattern may be used until the fifth round, and all short opening round games may be used after the sixth round (ie, substantially the first You may finish in 5 rounds). In FIG. 79B, the opening operation in the sixth round is a combination of short opening and long opening, but is not limited to this, and only the long opening operation may be performed.

  Subsequently, the jackpot effect in the eighth embodiment will be described. In this example, as in the previous embodiment, if the first special symbol or the second special symbol is a big hit, a variety of jackpot effects in the special game (a big hit effect according to the big hit type) A movie image, instruction information for prompting the player to hit the big winning opening 65 (right strike), the number of winning balls in the big hit, and the like are displayed. On the other hand, if the first special symbol is a big hit (typically at the time of the first hit), the number of the current round in each round during that special game (and more specific) Round number display effect for notifying round number information capable of determining whether or not it is a round, and V acquisition for notifying that the game ball has passed through the specific area 658 and has acquired a certain change (that is, V winning). Execution of display effect is not set. Instead, an object indicating the number of executed long open rounds may be displayed, or an object indicating the number of long open rounds scheduled to be executed may be displayed. In the former case, the object is increased every time the long release round is executed, and in the latter case, the object is subtracted every time the long release round is executed. In other words, the object does not increase or subtract when it is a short open round. On the other hand, if the second special symbol is a big hit (typically in the case of consecutive resorts), the execution of the round number display effect and the V acquisition display effect is set in each round during the special game. Has been.

As described above, if any of the 12R long / short opening patterns 1 and 2 is executed during the special game, the information regarding the probability change transition such as the round number information and the V winning information is not concealed as the big hit effect, and the concealment state is established. It can be made difficult to determine whether or not a V prize is won from the production mode during the special game. In this example as well, various promotion effects may be executed during the special game, as in the above-described embodiment.

  Next, a special symbol variation pattern table in the sixth embodiment will be described. As described above, the gaming machine according to the present example is configured as a so-called ball size machine in which the probability change transition after the special game is determined by the game ball winning in the specific area 658 in the specific round during the special game. When the V game is not won in the specific area 658 in the special game (when the game state after the special game becomes the normal state), the normal variation pattern table is set as the special pattern variation pattern table. When V is won in the specific area 658 (when the game state after the special game is changed to the probability change state), the shortened variation pattern table is set as the variation pattern table of the special symbol. That is, also in this example, according to the gaming state after the special game, the variation pattern table selected after the special game may be different as a general rule. In this way, the variation pattern table is set according to the game state after the special game (according to whether or not the specific area 658 is won during the special game), so that the game state is the normal state. The selection tendency of the variation pattern (variation time) can be different from that in the case of the probability variation state.

  Next, the effect mode in the eighth embodiment will be described. Also in this example, effect mode transition control is executed on the effect control board 200 side in a manner consistent with the gaming state (or the variation pattern selection state) managed on the main control board 100 side. Then, on the effect display device 70, an effect mode notification image (in this example, a background image serving as a back display of the decorative symbol) corresponding to the effect mode during the stay is displayed. Since they are set to be different, the player can recognize which presentation mode is currently staying from the type of the background image. In addition, by suggesting the type of effect mode to the player in this way, based on the type of effect mode during the stay, the type of game state and the type of variable effect content (variable effect pattern) during the pattern change Is suggested to the player. At this time, in this example, as the effect mode after the special game, regardless of whether the game state after the special game is a normal state or a probable change state, the mode is shifted to the common effect mode (secret effect mode). In other words, the concealment effect mode is an effect mode in which an effect is given in which the player is scolded with the current game state (internal game state) being a normal state or a probable state as a concealment state. In this example, when the concealment effect mode is set as the effect mode, “special background” is displayed as the background image. In this example, a variation effect pattern table is set for each effect mode during the stay, and even if the variation pattern of the special symbol is different, if the effect mode is the same, the effect contents are common to each other. The variation effect pattern to be selected can be selected. That is, even if the variation time selected on the main control board 100 side (the production scale corresponding thereto) varies depending on the gaming state, on the production control board 200 side, whether the gaming state is the normal state or not surely changes. In order to shift to the same effect mode regardless of the state, the background effect and the change effect with the same effect contents are selected. Therefore, not only during the execution of the special game, but also in the symbol variation game after the end of the special game, the concealment state relating to the presence or absence of the probability change transition will be continued, and the player from the production mode It becomes difficult to determine the state, and the game can be advanced while expecting that the state has shifted to the probable change state. As described above, in this example, whether or not there is a probability change transition is determined depending on whether or not the probability change transition is determined internally depending on the presence or absence of a V prize in a specific round. By making it difficult to discriminate, it is possible to maintain the player's expectation and interest regarding the probability change transition from the special game to the symbol variation game. In addition, about the transition to this secret production mode, only a conditional specific big hit (12R long and short open big hit 1) and a conditional normal big hit (12R long and short open big hit 2) are triggered as a big hit type. In addition, when the number of symbol fluctuations after the big hit has reached a predetermined number, it may be positively notified that the current gaming state is a probable variation state.

As described above, according to the eighth embodiment, in the operation pattern related to the conditional specific big hit (12R long and short open big hit 1) and the operation pattern related to the conditional normal big hit (12R long and short open big hit 2), all the rounds A series of opening and closing operations (operation sequence of long opening and short opening) of the winning opening 65 are made substantially the same mode, and it is determined which winning type is won and in which round a specific round is executed. By making it difficult, it is possible to maintain the expectation for the probability change until the special game is finished, and as a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Ninth Embodiment]
Next, a gaming machine according to the ninth embodiment will be described. The gaming machine of the ninth embodiment basically has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described first embodiment, and hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to parts having the same configuration. The description is omitted, and different parts are mainly described.

  As with the gaming machine of the second embodiment, the gaming machine of the ninth embodiment depends on whether or not the game ball wins a specific area (so-called “V area”) in the big prize opening during execution of the special game. Thus, it is configured as a so-called ball accuracy type gaming machine that determines whether or not the gaming state shifts to the probability changing state after the special game ends. Note that the probability variation state may be continued until a predetermined number of times (ST number) of symbol variations is performed, or may be continued until the next big hit occurs.

  Similarly to the gaming machine of the seventh embodiment, the gaming machine of the ninth embodiment is equipped with only a single big prize opening 65 (a ball-like attacker with a specific area 658) in the gaming area PA. ing. That is, the ninth embodiment is also configured such that the big prize opening 65 having the specific area 658 is opened in all rounds. Note that the configuration of the special winning opening 65 has already been described in the second embodiment described above, and a duplicate description thereof will be omitted here.

  In addition, the gaming machine of the ninth embodiment adopts so-called preferential digestion that preferentially executes the variation display of the second special symbol over the variation display of the first special symbol, similarly to the gaming machine of the first embodiment. Therefore, while the operation holding ball of the second special symbol is present, the operation holding ball of the second special symbol is preferentially digested regardless of the presence of the operation holding ball of the first special symbol. Yes.

  First, the jackpot type (breakdown breakdown) in the ninth embodiment will be described. FIG. 80 shows a jackpot breakdown of the special symbol lottery in the ninth embodiment. In the following, for convenience of explanation, the description regarding “small hit” is omitted unless otherwise specified.

  The upper part of FIG. 80 is a diagram schematically showing a symbol table per first special symbol in the ninth embodiment. In the symbol table per first special symbol, the symbol random number per special symbol is associated with the symbol group, the jackpot attribute, the number of operations of the probability variation / short-time function, and the operation pattern of the big prize opening (this book). In the example, the description of the stop symbol is omitted for convenience). In the symbol table per 1st special symbol, symbol group A (15R long / short open big hit 1), symbol group B (15R long / short open big hit 2) and symbol group C ( 7R long and short open big hit) is set.

  The lower part of FIG. 80 is a diagram schematically showing a symbol table per second special symbol in the ninth embodiment. In the symbol table per first special symbol, the symbol random number per special symbol is associated with the symbol group, the jackpot attribute, the number of operations of the probability variation / short-time function, and the operation pattern of the big prize opening (this book). In the example, the description of the stop symbol is omitted for convenience). In the symbol table per first special symbol, symbol group D (16R long open big hit 1), symbol group E (16R long open big hit 2), and symbol group F ( 8R long open big hit), symbol group G (4R long open big hit 1), and design H (4R long open big hit 2) are set.

  Also in this example, each of the above jackpots is classified as “conditional special jackpot” or “conditional regular jackpot” as a jackpot attribute. As shown in the upper part of FIG. 80, in the first special symbol lottery, the winning probability of a conditional special big hit (equivalent to a probable big hit) is 50%, and the winning probability of a conditional normal big hit (equivalent to a non-probable big hit) is 50%. It is. Also, as shown in the lower part of FIG. 80, in the second special symbol lottery, the winning probability of the conditional special big hit (corresponding to the probable big hit) is 100%. In the following, among the jackpot types of the second special symbol, “16R long open big hit 1” and “4R long open big hit 1” are collectively referred to as “big hit α”, and the other big hit types are “16R” “Long Open Big Hit 2”, “8R Long Open Big Hit” and “4R Long Open Big 2” are also collectively referred to as “big hit β”. Here, the jackpot β, which will be described in detail later, is a jackpot where “seven star charge” is executed as a jackpot effect regardless of whether it is inside or outside the limited period, and a special symbol (“A. A, A ", etc.) will be available. The special symbol may be one in which only one special symbol is displayed in the middle symbol column (the left and right column symbol columns are arbitrary symbols). On the other hand, the jackpot α is a jackpot in which “seven star charge” is executed as a jackpot effect only within a limited period, and numerical symbols (odd symbols) are arranged as the jackpot symbol.

  In this example, the average number of rounds of special games executed by one big hit occurrence is set to be the same for both big wins in the first special symbol lottery and big wins in the second special symbol lottery. Yes. Specifically, the average number of rounds of a special game in the case of a big win in the first special symbol lottery is “11 rounds”, whereas the average number of special games in the case of a big win in the second special symbol lottery is The average number of rounds is “11 rounds”, and the average number of rounds is the same. Although the average number of rounds of the special game is the same in the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery, all the big bonuses of the first special symbol are set as “long and short open big hits” Because the big wins of the second special symbol are all set as “long open big hits”, the second special symbol lottery is more than the first special symbol lottery (the actual average number of rounds) Is set high.

  In this example, even if any jackpot type is won, if the game ball enters the specific area 658 in the specific round during the special game, the game state after the special game ends is changed. It becomes a state. The probability variation state is not continued until the next big hit, but is limited to a period (130 times) until the number of variations after the end of the special game reaches the probability variation end number. On the other hand, regardless of which jackpot type is won, if the game ball does not enter the specific area 658 in the specific round during the special game, the game state after the end of the special game is the short-time state. Become. The short-time state is not continued until the next big hit, but is limited to a period (100 times) until the number of fluctuations after the end of the special game reaches the short-term end number. In addition, after the end of the special game, the game state returns to the normal state when the above-mentioned final number of times (130 times or 100 times) has elapsed without generating the next big hit.

  Next, FIG. 81 is a time chart for explaining an operation pattern of the special winning opening 65 in the ninth embodiment. In this example, a total of five types of operation patterns are prepared corresponding to the above jackpot types. That is, as shown in FIG. 80, in this example, if the specified number of rounds of special games corresponding to each jackpot is the same, the same operation pattern is set (the operation pattern is common for each specified number of rounds). is there). In the figure, the state change of the special winning opening 65 during the special game is shown in time series from left to right. Each operation pattern shown in FIG. 81 conceptually shows the execution state of each round game, and the time width and ratio of the opening time and closing time (including interval time) of each round game are the actual time. It does not correspond to width and ratio. In the figure, “L” is added to the long open round game, and “S” is added to the short open round game.

In this example, regardless of which of the above five types of big hits, in the specific round in the special game, the presence or absence of a probability variable prize is determined based on whether or not the game ball enters the specific area 658 Is distributed. Hereinafter, other rounds excluding the specific round are also referred to as “normal rounds”. In this example, the specific round is set to the third round regardless of which jackpot corresponds. In this specific round, the special winning opening 65 and the specific area 658 are synchronized (linked), and the specific area 658 is opened when the special winning opening 65 is opened (after the time when the special winning opening 65 is opened). The specific area 658 is opened), and the specific area 658 is closed when the special winning opening 65 is closed (the specific area 658 is closed after the big winning opening 65 is closed). Therefore, basically, if the special winning opening 65 is long open, the specific area 658 is also long open, and if the large winning opening 65 is short open, the specific area 658 is also short open. In one special game, the number of executions of a specific round is not limited to one, but may be set multiple times.

  First, FIG. 81 (A) shows a 15R long / short open pattern. In the 15R long / short open pattern, long open round games are executed in the first round and the third to sixth rounds, and short open round games are executed in the second round and the seventh to 15th rounds. That is, the 15R long and short open big hits 1 and 2 are big hits equivalent to five rounds since the big winning opening 65 is opened long in the above five round games. Note that the specific round (third round) is set as a V round that allows easy or possible entry into the specific area 658 because the long open round game is executed.

  FIG. 81 (B) shows a 7R long / short open pattern. In the 7R long / short open pattern, long open round games are executed in the first to second rounds and the fourth to sixth rounds, and short open round games are executed in the third and seventh rounds. In other words, the 7R long / short open big hit is a big hit equivalent to five rounds since the big winning opening 65 is opened long in the five round games. The specific round (third round) is set as a non-V winning round in which it is difficult or impossible to enter the specific area 658 because the short open round game is executed. Note that the seventh round may involve nine short opening actions, and in that case, the number of short opening actions after the seventh round in the 15R long and short opening pattern may be the same. it can.

  FIG. 81C shows a 16R long open pattern. In the 16R long open pattern, long open round games are executed in all rounds (normal round, specific round). In other words, the 16R long open big hit is a big hit equivalent to 16 rounds since the big winning opening 65 is opened long in any round game. Note that the specific round (third round) is set as a V round that allows easy or possible entry into the specific area 658 because the long open round game is executed.

  FIG. 81 (D) shows an 8R long open pattern. In the 8R long open pattern, the long open round game is executed in all rounds, as in the 16R long open pattern described above. In other words, the 8R long open big hit is a big hit equivalent to eight rounds since the big winning opening 65 is opened long in any round game. Note that the specific round (third round) is set as a V-round that allows easy or possible entry into the specific area 658.

  FIG. 81 (E) shows a 4R long open pattern. In the 4R long release pattern, the long release round game is executed in all rounds, as in the 16R and 8R long release patterns described above. That is, the 4R long open big hit is a big hit equivalent to substantially four rounds because the big winning opening 65 is opened long in any round game. Note that the specific round (third round) is set as a V-round that allows easy or possible entry into the specific area 658.

  Here, the operation pattern of the big winning opening 65 when the first special symbol is a big hit, that is, the opening / closing operation of the big winning opening 65 in the 15R long / short opening pattern and the 7R long / short opening pattern will be described in more detail. First, in any of the operation patterns, the big prize opening 65 is opened only once in each round of the first round and the fifth to sixth rounds, and the big prize opening 65 is 1 in each round of the seventh to fifteenth rounds. Opened short times. Therefore, in the 15R long / short opening pattern and the 7R long / short opening pattern, the opening / closing operation of the special winning opening 65 coincides in each round. On the other hand, each operation pattern has a different opening / closing operation of the big prize opening 65 in each of the second to fourth rounds. Specifically, in the 15R long / short open pattern, there is one short open in the second round, one long open in the third round, one short open in the fourth round, and one long open. Done. In other words, in the 15R long / short opening pattern, the winning prize opening 65 opens and closes in the order of “short opening → long opening → short opening → long opening” in the second to fourth rounds. In contrast, in the 7R long / short opening pattern, one short opening and one long opening in the second round, a short opening in the third round, and one long opening in the fourth round are performed. That is, in the 7R long / short opening pattern, the winning prize opening 65 is opened / closed in the order of “short opening → long opening → short opening → long opening” in the section from the second round to the fourth round. That is, when comparing each operation pattern, when each round from the second to the fourth round is viewed individually, the opening and closing operations of the special winning opening 65 are different, but the sections from the second to the fourth round are consecutive. When viewed as a total flow, the opening and closing operations of the special winning opening 65 coincide. . In the drawing, for convenience of explanation, since the time width of each round is divided equally, the interval period is expressed in various lengths, but the interval periods are actually set to be substantially the same. Therefore, as indicated by broken arrows in the figure, each operation (corresponding operation) in the section from the fourth to the sixth rounds is set at substantially the same timing on the time axis. Yes.

  Therefore, a series of opening / closing operations (long opening) of the big winning opening 65 in the operation pattern related to the conditional special big hit (15R long / short open big hit 1, 2) and the operation pattern related to the conditional normal big hit (7R long / short open big hit). And the operation sequence of the short opening) are made to be in the same manner, making it difficult to determine which jackpot type has been won, and in which round a specific round was executed. Until the process ends, the expectation for the probability change can be maintained. Here, if the first special symbol is a big hit, as the big hit effect during that special game, at least the sixth round (the round in which the probable change promotion effect described later) is set, how many rounds the current round is The number of rounds that can be determined whether it is (or whether or not it is a specific round) and V winning information that indicates that the game ball has passed through the specific area 658 and has acquired a certain change are not notified, and the big winning mouth From the 65 operation patterns and the above-described effect modes, the presence / absence of the probability change transition is concealed (details will be described later). Instead, an object indicating the number of executed long open rounds may be displayed, or an object indicating the number of long open rounds scheduled to be executed may be displayed. In the former case, the object is increased every time the long release round is executed, and in the latter case, the object is subtracted every time the long release round is executed. In other words, the object does not increase or subtract when it is a short open round. As a modified example, as described above, the seventh round in the 7R long / short opening pattern may be configured to involve nine short opening operations, and in that case, the seventh round in the 15R long / short opening pattern Since it can be made the same as the number of short opening operations thereafter, a series of opening operations of the big prize opening 65 can be made substantially the same throughout all rounds.

Subsequently, the jackpot symbol (combination of decorative symbols for decoration) in the ninth embodiment will be described. FIG. 82 is a schematic diagram showing a jackpot symbol table (decoration symbol symbol table) in the ninth embodiment. As described above, the jackpot symbol is determined with reference to the jackpot symbol table. The jackpot symbol is basically composed of a combination of stop modes “*, *, *” in which three symbols of the same number or the same character are arranged (*: any decorative symbol). However, as shown in FIG. 82, even if the jackpot type is the same, the jackpot symbol may differ depending on the gaming state at the time of the jackpot winning. Here, the jackpot symbol (stop symbol) of the decorative symbol in this example is basically “1 · 1 · 1”, “3 · 3 · 3”, “5 · 5 · 5”, “7 · 7”.・ 7 ”,“ 9 ・ 9 ・ 9 ”,“ A ・ A ・ A ”,「 B ・ B ・ B 」,「 C ・ C ・ C 」 And “2 ・ 2 ・ 2”, “4 ・ 4 ・ 4”, “6 ・ 6 ・ 6”, “8 ・ 8 ・ 8”, etc. Differentiated. Hereinafter, for convenience of explanation, among the above odd symbols, “3, 3, 3” and “7, 7, 7” are also referred to as first odd symbols, and “1 · 1 · 1”, “5 · 5” “5” and “9, 9, 9” are also referred to as second odd numbers.

  First, when the gaming state is the normal state, if the 1R special lottery process wins 15R long / short open big hit 1, the second odd number such as “1 · 1 · 1” or “5 · 5 · 5” A symbol (probability variation) is selected. In addition, when the game state is the normal state, “2 ・ 2 ・ 2”, “4 ・ 4 ・ 4”, etc. if the 15R long / short open big hit 2 or 7R long / short open big hit is won in the lottery process of the first special symbol An even number symbol (indeterminate symbol) is selected. After the display of the indeterminate symbol is stopped, a certain change promotion effect is executed in the special game (details will be described later). On the other hand, when the game state is in the probable state or in the short time state, if the 15R long / short open big hit 1, 2 is won, the second odd symbol such as “1 · 1 · 1”, “5 · 5 · 5”, etc. If a symbol is selected and a 7R long / short open jackpot is won, an even number of symbols (indeterminate symbols) such as “2, 2, 2”, “4, 4, 4”, etc. are selected. This is because if the first special symbol is a big hit in the probability variation state or the short-time state, the probability variation promotion effect is not executed (the possibility of probability variation transition is not concealed), and the probability variation transition is based on the type of the jackpot symbol. This is to instruct the player in advance of whether or not there is any.

  Next, when the gaming state is the normal state, if the 16R long open big hit 1 is won in the lottery process of the second special symbol, the first odd symbol such as “3, 3, 3” or “7, 7, 7” (Probability variation) is selected. On the other hand, when the game state is in the probabilistic state or in the short-time state, if the above 16R long open big hit 1 is won, the first odd number such as “3.3.3”, “7.7.7” is selected by random lottery. When a symbol (probable variable symbol) is selected, and when a second odd symbol (probable variable symbol) such as "1, 1, 1", "5, 5, 5", or "9, 9, 9" is selected There is. At this time, if it is the first odd symbol, it is definitely notified that it is a high profit jackpot (16R jackpot), and if it is the second odd symbol, it is a high profit jackpot (16R jackpot) And the round promotion effect (success) is executed during the big hit. In addition, when the game state is a probable change state or a short-time state, even if the 4R long open big hit 1 is won in the lottery process of the second special symbol, as in the case where the 16R long open big hit 1 is won, “1 · 1 A second odd number design (probability variation design) such as “1”, “5 · 5 · 5”, “9 · 9 · 9” is selected, and a round promotion effect (failure) is executed during the big hit. In any game state, when the 16R long open big hit 2, 8R long open big hit 2 or 4R long open big hit 2 is won, that is, when the above big hit β is won, “A · A · A character symbol (probability variable symbol) such as “A”, “B · B · B”, “C · C · C” is selected.

Next, the big hit effect pattern in the ninth embodiment will be described. FIG. 83 is a diagram schematically showing a big hit effect pattern table in the ninth embodiment. In the jackpot effect pattern table, the correspondence between the jackpot type and the jackpot effect pattern is shown. Basically, the jackpot effect pattern is determined based on the jackpot type. However, even if the jackpot type is the same, the jackpot effect pattern may differ depending on the game state at the time of winning the jackpot or a predetermined generation condition (for example, a villa condition). In this example, fierce battle bonuses A to B, phantom battle bonuses A to D, warrior bonuses A to C, and seven-star charges A to D are prepared as 13 types of big hit effect patterns. Here, in the figure, as one of the criteria for selection of the big hit effect pattern, the game state at the time of winning the big hit is the operating state of the special symbol game (high probability / low probability) and the normal symbol game operating state (open extension) (1) Low probability / non-open extension, (2) Low probability / open extension, and (3) High probability / open extension. In other words, the gaming state described in the figure is a gaming state when a big hit corresponding to each jackpot type occurs (a gaming state when the jackpot symbol corresponding to each jackpot type is stopped). In this example, “high probability / non-open extension” is not set as the gaming state.

  First, when a 15R long / short open big hit 1 is won in the first special symbol, “Phantom Fight Bonus A” is selected as the big hit effect pattern regardless of the gaming state at the time of the big win. Also, if 15R long / short open big hit 2 is won, and if the gaming state at the time of the big hit is normal, the “fighting bonus A” is selected as the big hit presentation pattern, and the gaming state at the time of the big win is a promising state or a short time If it is in the state, “Phantom Strike Bonus A” is selected as the jackpot effect pattern. In addition, when winning the 7R long / short open big hit, if the gaming state at the time of winning the big hit is normal, the “fighting bonus B” is selected as the big hit effect pattern, and the gaming state at the time of winning the big hit is a promising state or a short time state If so, “Phantom Bonus B” is selected as the jackpot effect pattern. Here, when the gaming state is the normal state, the probabilistic promotion effect is executed with the fierce battle bonuses A and B selected when the 15R long / short open big hit 2 or 7R long / short open big hit is won. On the other hand, when the gaming state is the probable change state or the short time state, the probable promotion effect is not executed with the phantom bonus A or B selected when the 15R long / short open big hit 2 or 7R long / short open big hit is won. That is, also in this example, if the game state is the normal state and the first special symbol is a big hit, the probability change promotion effect can be executed, but the game state is the probability change state. If the symbol is a big hit, the certainty promotion promotion effect is not executed. A specific example of this probable promotion promotion effect will be described later.

  On the other hand, when the 16R long open big hit 1 is won in the second special symbol, the “Musou Bonus A” or “Phantom Bonus D” is basically used as the big hit effect pattern, regardless of the gaming state at the time of the big win. Is selected. At this time, as described above with reference to FIG. 82, if the jackpot symbol is the first odd symbol (such as “7, 7, 7”), “Musou Bonus A” is selected, and the jackpot symbol is the second symbol. If the symbol is an odd number (such as “1 · 1 · 1”), “Phantom Fight Bonus D” is selected. That is, if the first odd symbol is a big hit, a 16 round finalizing effect is executed with the Warrior Bonus A, and if the second odd symbol is a big hit, a round promotion effect is executed with the phantom bonus D . In this example, as can be seen from the selection rates (selection rates of the first odd symbol and the second odd symbol) shown in FIG. The ratio at which “A” is selected is set higher. As a modified example, when the 16R long open big hit 1 is won in the normal state, the “Musou Bonus A” may be always selected, and the round promotion effect may not be executed. Rather than winning 1, the “phantom battle bonus D” may be less likely to be selected, and the probability of executing the tied round promotion effect may be reduced. On the other hand, if a camp is established under a predetermined condition (details will be described later) and the 16R long open big hit 1 is won within a limited period after the special game, “Seven Star Charge C” is selected as the big hit effect pattern. Is done. Further, when a special condition (spanning villa condition) regarding the big hit is established, “Musou Bonus B” or “Musou Bonus C” is selected as the big hit effect pattern. The contents of the extended resort conditions will be described later.

In addition, when the 16R long open big hit 2 is won in the second special symbol, “seven star charge C” is selected as the big hit effect pattern regardless of the gaming state at the time of the big win. In addition, when winning the 8R long open big hit, “seven star charge B” is selected as the big hit effect pattern regardless of the gaming state at the time of the big win. In addition, when winning the 4R long open big hit 1, regardless of the game state at the time of the big win, the “phantom bonus B” is basically selected as the big hit effect pattern. In addition, if a reserved renzo is established under a predetermined condition (details will be described later) and the 4R long open big hit 1 is won within a limited period after the special game, “Seven Star Charge A” is selected as the big hit effect pattern Is done. In addition, when the 4R long open big hit 2 is won, “seven star charge A” is selected as the big hit effect pattern. In this way, each big hit belonging to big hit β (16R long open big hit 2, 8R long open big hit 4R long open big hit 2) is a big hit type in which only “seven star charge AC” is selected as the big hit production pattern.

  Subsequently, FIGS. 84 to 87 are schematic diagrams for explaining the contents of the jackpot effect pattern. In each figure, for each jackpot effect pattern, the correspondence between various effect contents and their generation timing is shown. Here, in the figure, the “open mode” represents the type of round game. That is, when a long open round game is set as the round game, “long open” is displayed, and when a short open round game is set as the round game, “short open” is displayed. Naturally, the “opening mode” in the drawing corresponds to the operation pattern of the special winning opening 65 in FIG.

Further, in the figure, “prefetching possible” represents a period in which prefetching can be performed with respect to the currently held suspension ball information. In other words, within the prefetchable period, it means that the lottery of the on-hold consecutive villa effect and the execution of the effect can be performed. Therefore, in this example, the second on-hold renso production (the on-hold renso production B) that occurs during the special game is targeted as the on-hold renso production. Whether or not to execute the on-hold consecutive resort production is determined when a predetermined execution condition is satisfied in the prefetchable period. In this example, as described above, the preferential digestion that preferentially digests the operation reserved ball of the second special symbol over the operation reserved ball of the first special symbol is adopted, and the jackpot and the identification related to the second special symbol are specified. Reservation is the subject of the recreational resort. And, in the on-hold consecutive villa, the gaming state when the preceding operation holding ball wins the big hit is in a probable change state (at the time of high probability / opening extension), that is, within the ST period after the special game (130 times) It occurs on the assumption that it is. Therefore, when the game state is a probable change state (high probability / opening extension), the preceding operation holding ball has won a specific big hit (high profit big hit: 16R long open big hit 1 of the second special symbol) As a premise, a predetermined execution condition is established when there is one or more specific hold in the operation hold ball of the subsequent second special symbol. In this example, there is a case where a gaze effect for encouraging the establishment of the on-hold extended resort may occur even when all the subsequent operation holding balls are off-hold. However, in this example, if the production result of the on-hold consecutive villa production is seen, it is a display mode in which it is possible to discriminate whether it is a real production or a production of Gase. In addition, the prefetching period is set in units of one round. Therefore, when it is determined by lottery whether or not to execute the reserved renzo production in the round (one round) set as the pre-readable period, and it is decided to execute the reserved renzo production On the other hand, the on-hold consecutive villa production occurs in the round. In addition, even if there is a specific hold in the subsequent operation hold ball, if you do not win the lottery of the hold-in-resort directing in all the rounds for which the pre-readable period has been set (the hold in all rounds) In the case where the consecutive resort production has not been executed), the on-hold consecutive resort production (“7-star charge announcement” described later) is executed in the jackpot end demonstration. As a variation, if the lottery of the reserved renzo production is not won in all the rounds where the pre-readable period is set (if the renegade production in the hold is not executed in all rounds), the big hit It is good also as a structure which does not perform a pending | reserved-ream villa production also in an end demo (it does not perform a reserved-ream villa production during the big hit after all). It should be noted that in the jackpot end demonstration, the on-hold consecutive villa production is actually not executed even though a pre-readable period is set in at least one of the rounds. Originally, if no pre-readable period is set for any of the rounds throughout the entire round, there will be no on-hold consecutive performance in the jackpot end demo. As a modification thereof, when the big hit is a pre-readable period that is not set throughout the entire round, the on-hold consecutive villa production may be executed in the big hit end demo. Note that, as described above, since the target of the on-hold consecutive resort production is the jackpot and specific hold of the second special symbol, the prefetchable period is set only for at least the jackpot effect pattern of the second special symbol. In addition, the prefetching period is set to a round after the specific round (third round). The reason for this is that, as described above, the game state after the end of the special game is definitely changed unless a specific round has passed (at least after it is determined whether or not a game ball has entered the specific area 658). This is because it is not determined which of the state (high probability state) and the short-time state (low probability state) is to be made, and the execution of the on-hold extended resort production in this uncertain situation is avoided. In other words, depending on the game state (high probability state or low probability state) after the end of the special game, the lottery result of whether or not the subsequent operation holding ball existing in the special game will actually be a big hit will vary For this reason, by making the lottery of whether or not to execute the on-reserved renso production effect after the specific round, it is possible to make a definite notification of the on-reserved renso. Therefore, in this example, it is determined whether or not to execute the in-hold extended villa effect on the assumption that the game ball has entered the specific area 658 in the specific round, that is, the transition to the probability change state has been committed after the special game is completed. Is determined. Therefore, the rendezvous in the hold example in this example confirms that the game state after the special game becomes a probable change state (high probability state) in addition to the presence of the specific hold that becomes a big hit in the subsequent operation hold ball This is significant as a direct notification. That is, even if a pre-readable period is set for each round, if there is no entry into the specific area 658 in the specific round, the execution lottery of the on-hold consecutive resort production is not performed. A specific example of the on-hold consecutive resort production will be described later.

  Further, in the figure, “round number display” means that the current round number (round number information) is notified during the execution of the round game. In this example, the jackpot effect pattern that informs the player of the progress status of the special game by informing the current round number, and the progress status of the special game is concealed from the player without notifying the current round number. A jackpot effect pattern to be in a state is prepared. Further, in the figure, “V acquisition display” means notifying of the occurrence of V winning (probability change) in a specific round. In this example, a jackpot effect pattern that informs the player of the probability change transition by notifying the occurrence of the V winning, and the jackpot that does not notify the occurrence of the V prize and makes the player concealed the presence or absence of the probability transition transition. A production pattern is prepared. In the jackpot effect pattern for notifying the V winning, the V winning can be notified in any one of a plurality of rounds indicated as “at the time of designation” in the drawing (the notification timing is the specification, lottery, etc.). Is set as appropriate). Further, in the figure, “identification mark” is an identification display provided for a notification effect of an effect mode that is shifted to after a special game, a promotion effect during a special game, and an on-hold consecutive resort effect. In this example, fierce battle mission marks, phantom rush marks, seven-star charge marks, extra bonus marks, and the like are set as identification marks. Now, the specific contents of each jackpot effect pattern will be described in detail with reference to the drawings.

FIG. 84 (A) shows the content of the fierce battle bonus A. FIG. The fierce battle bonus A is a big hit effect that is executed when the 15R long / short open big hit 2 of the first special symbol is won in the normal state. The fierce battle bonus A includes an effect content (probability change promotion effect) that succeeds in the probability change promotion during the jackpot. This probability change promotion effect is set in the sixth round. Then, in the sixth round, the “fierce fighting mark” (displayed from the first to fifth rounds) is changed to the “phantom fighting mark” as the identification mark, which suggests or notifies that the probability change promotion has been successful. A specific example of this probability change promotion effect will be described later. In the fierce battle bonus A, “round number display” and “V acquisition display” are not performed during the special game, and whether or not there is a probability change transition until the probability change promotion effect is executed in the sixth round. Is concealed. In addition, in the figure, “Phantom character selection” is an opportunity for determining a phantom character (design variation form of the symbol variation effect) that appears in the symbol variation effect in the fantasy battle rush mode after the jackpot ends. This is a period during which a production element) can be selected. As a result, the symbol variation effect after the end of the big hit is set to the effect display format corresponding to the selected phantom character. Therefore, although the same phantom rush mode is used as the basic mode, a production mode (for example, the character A mode, the character B mode, etc.) corresponding to the phantom character is developed as the detailed mode. This fantasy character selection period is set in the seventh to fifteenth rounds and the end demo. In this example, the section from the seventh round to the big hit end demo is set as the “takeover demo”. At this time, the 7th to 15th rounds are set as rounds when the short is released,
By using the round at the time of short opening as part of the phantom character selection period in this way, the execution time of the end demo is saved. During the phantom character selection period, a favorite character can be selected from the plurality of characters displayed on the screen by the effect button 15. In the fierce battle bonus A, the pre-readable period is not set throughout all the rounds, and the on-hold consecutive villa production does not occur. This is because, as described above, the fierce battle bonus A, which is a big hit of the first special symbol, is not the target of the on-hold consecutive villa production.

  FIG. 84 (B) shows the content of the fierce battle bonus B. The fierce battle bonus B is a big hit effect that is executed when the 7R long and short open big hit of the first special symbol is won in the normal state. This fierce battle bonus B includes the content of the production (probability promotion promotion) that fails to be promoted during the jackpot. This probability change promotion effect is set in the sixth round, similar to the fierce battle bonus A described above. In the sixth round, “fierce fighting mark” (displayed from the first to fifth rounds) is not changed to “phantom fighting mark” as an identification mark, but “fierce fighting mark” is continuously displayed as it is. It is suggested or notified that the promotion failed. Also, in the fierce battle bonus B, as in the fierce battle bonus A described above, “round number display” and “V acquisition display” are not performed during the special game, and the probable promotion effect is executed in the sixth round. Whether or not there is a probability change transition is hidden from the player. In addition, in the fierce battle bonus B, as in the fierce battle bonus A described above, the pre-readable period is not set through all the rounds, and the on-hold extended-zone effect does not occur.

  FIG. 85A shows the content of the phantom bonus A. The phantom bonus A is executed when the first special symbol 15R long / short open big hit 1 is won regardless of the gaming state, or when the first special symbol 15R long / short open big hit 2 is won in the probabilistic state or the short time state. It is a big hit production. In this fantasy battle bonus A as well, the fantasy battle character selection period is set in the seventh to fifteenth rounds and the end demo, as in the fierce battle bonus A described above. That is, even in the fierce battle bonus A, the execution time of the end demonstration is saved by using the round at the time of short opening as a part of the phantom character selection period. In this example, the section from the seventh round to the jackpot end demo is set as “takeover demo”. Further, in the phantom bonus A, “round number display” and “V acquisition display” are set in the first to sixth rounds, and it is possible to teach the progress of the game and whether or not there is a probability change transition. Yes. In addition, the phantom bonus A is scheduled to be a big hit with the first special symbol, as in the fierce battle bonuses A and B described above. There will be no recreational production. In addition, as a modified example, a big hit (specific hold) of the first special symbol may be set as a target of the reserved resort. In that case, only the round at the time of full release is set as the prefetchable period, and the round at the time of short release is not set as the prefetchable period. This is because there is no time allowance for executing the lottery processing of the on-hold consecutive villa effect and the effect display only in a short time when the short is opened.

  FIG. 85 (B) shows the content of the phantom bonus B. The phantom bonus B is a jackpot effect executed when the 4R long open jackpot 1 of the second special symbol is won. This phantom battle bonus B includes an effect content (round promotion effect) that fails in the round-up to acquire the latter 12 rounds during the jackpot. This round promotion effect is set in the fourth round. In this example, in the fourth round, the “phantom mark” (displayed from the first to the third round) is not changed to the “extra bonus mark” as the identification mark, but the “phantom mark” is continuously displayed as it is. Thus, it is suggested or notified that the round promotion has failed. A specific example of this round promotion effect will be described later.

FIG. 85 (C) shows the content of the phantom bonus C. The phantom battle bonus C is a jackpot effect that is executed when the 7R long and short open big hit of the first special symbol is won in the probability variation state or the short time state. In this phantom battle bonus C, unlike the fierce battle bonus B described above, no promising promotion effect is set in any round. In other words, even when the 7R long and short open big hit, when the transition to the fierce battle bonus B as a big hit effect, the positive change promotion effect is executed in the sixth round, the transition to the fantasy fight bonus C Sometimes, the probable promotion effect is not executed. In other words, the jackpot effect (Phantom Fight Bonus B) scheduled to win a big hit at the time of consecutive resorts is not meaningful to provide a promising promotion effect. In the fantasy battle bonus C, as in the fierce battle bonuses A and B and the fantasy battle bonus A described above, since it is scheduled as a big hit effect in the first special symbol, the prefetchable period is set through all rounds. There will be no rendezvous productions on hold. In this example, the number of rounds is displayed in each round. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the number of rounds may not be displayed. Basically, when a short open round is sandwiched between a long open round and a long open round, it is desirable not to report the number of rounds in each round.

  FIG. 85D shows the contents of the phantom bonus D. The phantom bonus D is a jackpot effect that is executed when the 16R long / short open big hit 1 of the second special symbol is won regardless of the gaming state. This phantom bonus D includes production content (round promotion production) that succeeds in the round-up to obtain the latter 12 rounds during the jackpot. In the fantasy battle bonus D, the round promotion effects are set to the fourth to fifth rounds. Then, in the fourth to fifth rounds, the “phantom mark” (displayed from the first to third rounds) as the identification mark changes to the “extra bonus mark”, suggesting or notifying that the round promotion was successful. Is done. A specific example of this round promotion effect will be described later. In the figure, the “character reselection acceptance period” is a period for accepting reselection of a fantasy character in order to change the selected fantasy character. In addition, the “character reselection period” is a period during which reselection of the fantasy character is possible on the condition that reselection of the fantasy character is accepted within the character reselection acceptance period. Here, the phantom bonus D is a jackpot effect that is executed when the second special symbol is a jackpot, and is basically a jackpot effect at the time of consecutive villas, not at the time of first hit. For this reason, in the normal case, the phantom character is supposed to be selected when it is first hit (fierce battle bonus A or phantom bonus A), so here it is expressed as “reselection” instead of “selection”. Has been. At this time, the character reselection acceptance period is set to the seventh to eleventh rounds, and the phantom character selection period is set to the twelfth to sixteenth rounds. On the other hand, the prefetchable period is set from the seventh to the 16th round. In other words, the prefetchable period overlaps with the character reselection acceptance period and the phantom character selection period. However, if re-selection of the phantom fight character is accepted during the character re-selection acceptance period, that is, if the phantom fight character is re-selected, even if the look-ahead process (reservation in the rendezvous within the reservation) Even if the lottery process) is executed, the on-hold consecutive villa production is not executed regardless of whether the production lottery is successful or not. That is, within the phantom character reselection period (provided that reselection has been accepted), the on-hold consecutive villa production is not executed. In this way, by avoiding the overlap of the prefetchable period and the fantasy character selection period, it is possible to avoid the competition (simultaneous execution) between the rendezvous renso production and the fantasy character selection production, and the production effects of both are mutually Preventing dilution. On the other hand, if it is within the character reselection acceptance period, the on-reserved Renso production can be executed on the condition that the lottery process for the on-hold Renso production is won. This character reselection reception is simply whether or not to reselect the phantom fighting character, and the effect on the production is originally low. This is because there is a low possibility that the production effect will be diluted. In addition, as a modification, it may be configured such that the lottery process for the on-hold consecutive villa production is not performed during the phantom character selection period. Moreover, even if it is within a fantasy character reselection period, if it is after a phantom character is reselected, it may be possible to execute the on-hold Renren directed effect. In the phantom bonus D, “round number display” and “V acquisition display” are set in the 1st to 16th rounds (rounds when fully opened), and the progress of the game and whether or not there is a probability change transition is set. It can be taught.

  FIG. 86A shows the contents of the Warrior Bonus A. The Warrior Bonus A is a big hit effect that is executed when the 16R long / short open big hit 1 of the second special symbol is won in a situation where a predetermined consecutive resort condition (detailed later) is not established. In the Warrior Bonus A, the character reselection acceptance period is set to the seventh to eleventh rounds, and the phantom character reselection period is set to the twelfth to sixteenth rounds, similarly to the phantom bonus D. On the other hand, the prefetchable period is set from the 4th to the 16th round, unlike the phantom bonus D described above. In other words, unlike the above-mentioned phantom bonus D, the Warrior Bonus A does not have a round promotion effect, so there is no risk of conflict between the round promotion effect and the in-reservation Rensou effect. This is because there is no need to provide it later. Further, a part of the prefetching period overlaps with the fantasy character reselection acceptance period and the fantasy character reselection period. As with the above-mentioned fantasy battle bonus D, during the phantom character reselection period, even if a pre-read process (lottery process for the on-hold Renso production) is executed, it will be held regardless of whether the production lottery is successful or not. Uchirensou directing is not executed. Also, in Musou Bonus A, “round number display” and “V acquisition display” are set in the 1st to 16th rounds (rounds when fully open), and the progress of the game and the presence or absence of probability change are taught. It has come to be able to do.

  FIG. 86 (B) shows the contents of Musou Bonus B. The Warrior Bonus B is a jackpot effect that is executed when the first consecutive resort condition is satisfied in the phantom rush mode. The establishment of the “first consecutive resort condition” means that the first 16R long open big hit after continuing the consecutive resort state for the first specified number of times (three times in this example) during a game with the same phantom character. This is when 1 was won (the first Musou Bonus was won). In other words, it occurs as the first Warrior Bonus after three big hits with the same phantom character. As described above, “renso” means that when a predetermined big hit is made in a specific game state, the specific game state continues again as a game state after the end of the special game. In this example, as described above, in addition to being in the specific game state, it is a condition that the player stays in the phantom rush mode as the effect mode. Therefore, when demoted from the phantom rush mode to another production mode (normal mode), the condition counter (first extended resort condition counter) is reset. In addition, even when the phantom character is changed, the condition counter (first extended resort condition counter) is reset. During the execution of Musou Bonus B, a special movie is played as the first special effect. The Warrior Bonus B is basically set to the Warrior Bonus A, except that the first special effect (special movie) is displayed. In the same round as the round, a character reselection acceptance period, a fantasy character reselection period, a prefetchable period, etc. are set.

FIG. 86C shows the contents of the Warrior Bonus C. The Warrior Bonus C is a jackpot effect that is executed when the second consecutive resort condition is satisfied in the phantom rush mode. Here, the establishment of the “second consecutive resort condition” means that after the number of consecutive resorts in the fantasy battle rush mode continues for the second specified number of times (19 in this example), the number of consecutive resorts starts after the 20th consecutive resort. This is when the 16R long open big hit 1 was won (the first Musou Bonus was won). In other words, it occurs as the first warrior bonus after 19 consecutive villas in the fantasy battle rush mode. During the execution of Musou Bonus C, the ending movie is played as the second special effect. If the first consecutive resort condition and the second consecutive resort condition are satisfied at the same time, priority is given to the establishment of the second extended resort condition, and the rarity of the warrior bonus C (second special effect) As an ending movie). In that case, the first consecutive resort condition is carried over until the next occurrence of Musou Bonus. In other words, the establishment of the first extended villa condition is temporarily reserved by the establishment of the second extended villa condition. However, if a pairless bonus occurs at the next big hit, the first extended villa condition is re-established. As a result, it is treated as established, and the Musou Bonus B (special movie as the first special effect) is executed. The Warrior Bonus C is basically the same setting as the Warrior Bonus A, except that the second special effect (ending movie) is displayed. In the same round as the round, a character reselection acceptance period, a fantasy character reselection period, a prefetchable period, etc. are set. As a modification, in the above-mentioned Musou Bonus B and C, the character reselection acceptance period is not set or the reselection acceptance period is set. In order to emphasize the special movie and the ending movie, the display mode may be changed. In Musou Bonus B and C, the pre-readable period is not set, or even if the pre-readable period is set, the character reselection acceptance period and the phantom character reselection period are set in the seventh to the 16th rounds. In this case, the on-hold consecutive villa production may not be executed. In addition, if the 16R long open big hit 1 is won within the limited period, even if the above-mentioned extended resort conditions are satisfied, priority is given to the execution of “Seven Star Charge C” as the big hit effect pattern, and “Musou Bonus B” The execution of “Musou Bonus C” may be postponed.

  87 (A) to 87 (C) show the contents of the seven-star charge AC. Seven Star Charge A is a big hit effect that is executed when 4R long open big hit 2 is won, Seven Star Charge B is won for 8R long open big hit, and Seven Star Charge C is won when 16R long open big hit 2 is won. is there. That is, when the big hit β is won as the big hit type, the seven-star charge A to C is selected as the big hit effect. Even if it is a jackpot type other than the above, during the limited period in the second and subsequent phantom rush modes (Lenso stage), if you win the 4R long open jackpot 1 with the second special symbol, 7-star charge A Is selected, and if the second special symbol 16R long open big hit 1 is won, the 7-star charge C is selected. In other words, in this example, when a big hit is made with the second special symbol in the limited period, the seven-star charge A to C is always selected as the big hit effect pattern. In that case, a 7-star charge introduction effect is executed in the symbol variation related to the jackpot, and an HIT number announcement effect (described later) is obtained in the jackpot start demonstration in the jackpot effect (this seven-star charge AD). The total acquired HIT number addition effect (described later) is executed in the round game and the jackpot end demo. Therefore, across the time of occurrence of the big hit, it is generated as a series of effects in which the seven-star charge introduction effect, the acquired HIT number announcement effect, and the total HIT number addition effect are continuously connected (collectively referred to as “seven-star charge effect”). To do. A specific example of this 7-star charge effect will be described later. Further, in the seven-star charge A to C, the pre-readable period is not set through all the rounds, and the on-hold consecutive villa production does not occur. This is because the 7-star charge effect is executed during the special game in the 7-star charge A to D. Therefore, it avoids the conflict (simultaneous execution) between the on-hold Renso effect and the 7-star charge effect, and both effects This is because they prevent each other from becoming diluted. In the 7-star charge A to C, “round number display” and “V acquisition display” are not performed during the special game.

FIG. 88 is a schematic diagram for explaining the contents of the start demonstration effect. In FIG. 88, the relationship between the type of start demonstration effect (effect at the time of big hit start) for the jackpot effect pattern determined above and the effect scale is defined. In this example, the type of start demonstration effect is set for each jackpot effect pattern. When the big hit effect pattern is fierce battle bonuses A and B, “fierce battle bonus (common)” is selected as the type of start demonstration effect. When the big hit effect pattern is the phantom battle bonus A to D, “phantom battle bonus (common)” is selected as the type of the start demonstration effect. If the jackpot effect pattern is Warrior Bonus A, “Musou Bonus Start (Normal)” is selected as the type of start demo effect, and if the jackpot effect pattern is Warrior Bonus B, If “bonus start (SP: special movie)” is selected and the jackpot effect pattern is the warrior bonus C, “warrior bonus start (ED: ending movie)” is selected as the type of start demo effect. Further, if the big hit effect pattern is a seven-star charge A, “starting HIT number increase effect (1 stage)” is selected as the type of the start demonstration effect, and if the big hit effect pattern is a seven-star charge B, the type of the start demonstration effect “Acquired HIT number increase effect (2 steps)” is selected, and if the big hit effect pattern is 7-star charge C, “Acquired HIT number increase effect (3 steps)” is selected as the type of start demonstration effect. Here, in this example, the time values of the jackpot start demo and the jackpot end demo described later are as follows. First of all, the execution time of the big hit start demo (the big hit start demo time) does not necessarily match the execution time of the start demo production (the start demo production time), and the execution time of the big hit end demo (the big hit end demo time) ends. The execution time of the demonstration production (end demonstration production time) does not necessarily match. That is, the start demonstration effect time and the end demonstration effect time are one period (effect time) in the execution process of the jackpot start demonstration and the jackpot end demonstration. The jackpot start demo time and jackpot end demo time are basically set in advance according to the type of jackpot. Moreover, even if the same jackpot type is won, the jackpot start demonstration time may be different and the jackpot end demonstration time may be different depending on the gaming state at the time of the jackpot winning. In addition, the above demo time value basically has the tendency to become the shortest value when winning a big hit in the probability variation state, the tendency to become the longest value when winning a big hit in the normal state, and the big hit in the short time state. When winning, it tends to be an intermediate value.

  FIG. 89 is a schematic diagram showing an end demonstration effect table. In this example, the type of the end demonstration effect is determined with reference to the end demonstration effect table shown in FIG. In this example, the types of end demonstration productions are “handover demonstration”, “fighting rush entry”, “phantom rush entry A”, “phantom fight entry B”, “seven star end A”, “seven star end B”, “seven star announcement” “A” and “Seven Star Notification B” are set. In FIG. 89, “Nanasei Announcement A” and “Nanasei Announcement B” are not set as the types of end demonstration production (see FIG. 90), but “Nanasei Announcement A” is “Phantom Fighting A”. In the situation where the reserved resorts are established, “Nanasei Announcement B” is executed in the situation where the “seven stars end A” is established and the reserved resorts are established. Therefore, “Seven Star Announcement A” and “Seven Stars Notification B” indicate that if a rendezvous in a rendezvous within a round occurs as a real rendition during the round in a probabilistic state, Although it did not occur as an event, it is an end demonstration effect that is actually executed when the on-hold range resort is established. Therefore, the 7-star announcements A and B themselves (the 7-star charge announcement effect described later) function as a reserved-in-rensou effect that announces the establishment of the in-hold-inn resort.

  The type of the end demonstration effect is basically determined based on the jackpot type, the jackpot effect pattern, the gaming state when the jackpot occurs, etc. (with some exceptions shown below). For this reason, with the exception of some of these exceptions, the type of the end demonstration effect can be determined at the start of the big hit effect, regardless of the progress status during the special game (whether or not there is a V prize). On the other hand, if the 7R long / short open big win is won in the first special symbol and the fierce battle bonus B is selected as the big win production pattern, even if the game state at the time of the big win is the same, the V prize in the special game Depending on the presence or absence, the content of the end demonstration effect may be different. Specifically, if you win a 7R long / short open big hit in the normal state (low probability / non-open extension), a fierce battle bonus B will be executed as the big hit production pattern, and if you win a V during that special game, the demonstration will end “Phantom rush entry B” is selected as the type of production, and “Phantom rush entry A” is selected as the type of end demonstration production if no V prize is awarded during the special game. That is, in this case, the type of the end demonstration effect is not determined unless it is after the end of the specific round (the presence or absence of the V prize is not determined). Therefore, in this example, 1) the type of the end demonstration effect is determined at the timing after the specific round, or 2) the type of the end demonstration effect is determined at the timing when the jackpot starts in principle. With regard to exceptions, the type of end demonstration effect is determined at a timing after a specific round. However, as a modified example, if the big hit from the normal state belongs to the conditional special big hit and there is no ball entering the specific area 658 (unless the V prize is won), the type of the end demonstration production is a fierce battle entry. Also good. In that case, what is normally the jackpot end demo time is "35 seconds" becomes "20 seconds".

Next, FIG. 90 is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the end demonstration effect. FIG. 90 defines the relationship between the type of end demonstration effect selected in the above-described end demonstration effect table, the content of the effect, and the effect scale. In this example, regardless of the type of the end demonstration effect, the mode entry effect for informing the type of effect mode (or effect stage) to be transferred after the special game ends is executed. In the mode entry direction, a fierce battle mission entry effect that notifies the transition to the fierce battle mission, a phantom battle rush entry effect that informs the transition to the fantasy battle rush mode, and a transition to the villa stage in the fantasy battle mode are reported. There is a seven-star charge announcement production. Each mode entry effect appears in such a manner that a logo, characters, and an identification mark corresponding to the type of the effect mode (or effect stage) are displayed on the screen. Further, depending on the type of the end demonstration effect, a character selection effect for selecting a teammate character (fierce fighting character, phantom fighting character) in the effect mode may be executed. As described above, character selection effects include fierce battle character selection effects and phantom battle character selection effects. The character selection effect may be completed only during the execution period of the end demo, or may be completed throughout the execution period from the round game to the end demo. That is, when a part of the character selection effect is in a round game (when the first special symbol is a big hit, when the short is released, when the second special symbol is a big hit, when the long is released) May also be executed. In addition, as described above, “Nanasei Announcement A” and “Nanasei Announcement B” are executed in response to the establishment of the reserved resort in the reservation, and these effects function as a kind of the reserved resort in the reservation. Here, the execution time of the jackpot end demo (the jackpot end demo time) in this example is set to “6 seconds”, “20 seconds”, or “30 seconds”. And even if the same jackpot type is won, the length of the jackpot end demo time can be changed according to the gaming state at the time of the jackpot winning. Basically, if the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is low, the jackpot end demo time is “35 seconds”. If the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is high, the jackpot end demo time is “6”. Second "is set. However, when a predetermined big hit (7R long short open big hit of the first special symbol) is won in a low probability state, “20 seconds” may be set as the big hit end demo time. Each end demonstration effect has a time scale of “1 second” as a missing effect at the end, but is omitted in the drawing.

  When the type of the end demonstration effect is “takeover demonstration”, the fantasy battle rush entry effect is executed for 6 seconds after the fantasy battle character selection effect is executed for 29 seconds. Therefore, the execution time (production scale) of the takeover demonstration is 35 seconds. The “handover demonstration” starts from the seventh round during the special game, and is executed across the round game and the jackpot end demo. In other words, in the seventh to fifteenth rounds (rounds when the short is released) in the aforementioned fierce battle bonus A or phantom battle bonus A, the phantom character selection effect is to be executed. Is configured as part of

  When the type of the end demonstration effect is “Fierce Battle Enter”, the fierce battle character selection effect is executed for 14 seconds, and then the fierce battle mission entry effect is executed for 6 seconds. Therefore, the execution time (production scale) of “Fighting rush” is 20 seconds. Note that, as described above, the phantom character selection effect may be executed not only during the jackpot end demonstration but also during the round, but the fierce battle character selection effect is executed only during the jackpot end demonstration. The production scale of the fierce battle character selection effect is set shorter than the production scale of the phantom character selection effect.

  When the type of the end demonstration effect is “Phantom Entry A”, the phantom rush entry effect is executed for 6 seconds. Therefore, the execution time (production scale) of “Phantom Entry A” is 6 seconds. As described above, in the phantom rush entry A, the phantom character selection effect is not set, and the effect scale is set in a short time. Note that even if no fantasy character selection effect is set for the phantom rush entry A, if some of the big hits (16R long open big hit 1) are won, before the big hit end demo is executed In the jackpot effect (Phantom Bonus D and Musou Bonus A to C), a phantom character selection effect is set using that round (during the long open round), Opportunities are secured.

When the type of the end demonstration effect is “Phantom rush entry B”, the fantasy battle rush entry effect is executed for 6 seconds after the phantom character selection effect is executed for 29 seconds. Therefore, the execution time (production scale) of “Phantom Strike B” is 35 seconds.

  When the type of the end demonstration effect is “Seven Star End A”, the total acquired HIT number display is executed for 3 seconds, and then the fantasy battle rush entry effect is executed for 3 seconds. Therefore, the execution time (production scale) of “Seven Star End A” is 6 seconds. Thus, at the end of the seven stars, the phantom character selection effect is not set, and the effect scale is set in a short time.

  When the type of the end demonstration effect is “Seven Star End B”, the total acquired HIT number display is executed for 3 seconds, and then the fantasy battle character selection effect is executed for 29 seconds, and the fantasy battle rush entry effect is executed. Is performed for 3 seconds. Therefore, the execution time (production scale) of “Seven Star End B” is 35 seconds.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 89, when the big hit α (16R long open big hit 1, 4R long open big hit 1) is won, and the gaming state at the time of the big hit is a high probability state (probability change state) , “Phantom Entry A” is selected, and when it is in a low probability state (normal state or short time state), “Phantom Entry B” is selected. As described above, in the phantom rush entry A, the phantom character selection effect is not set, and compared with the phantom rush entry B, the execution time (effect scale) is set shorter. Similarly, when the big hit β (16R long open big hit 2, 8R long open big hit, 4R long open big hit 2) is won and the gaming state at the time of the big hit is a high probability state (probability change state), When “Seven Star End A” is selected and the low probability state (normal state or short time state) is selected, “Seven Star End B” is selected. As described above, the phantom character selection effect is not set at the seven-star end A, and its execution time (effect scale) is set shorter than that at the seven-star end B. In this example, if you win a jackpot in such a probable state, after the round game, you will end the jackpot end demo early and immediately start the symbol variation to keep the promiscuous state maintained. The state can be digested smoothly and the operating efficiency of the gaming machine can be improved.

  When the type of the end demonstration effect is “Seven Star Notification A”, the Seven Star Charge Notification Effect is executed for 6 seconds. Therefore, the execution time (production scale) of “Seven Star Announcement A” is 6 seconds.

  When the type of the end demonstration effect is “Seven Star Notification B”, the total acquired HIT number display is executed for 3 seconds, and then the Seven Star Charge notification effect is executed for 3 seconds. Therefore, the execution time (production scale) of “Nanasei Announcement B” is 6 seconds.

  Here, “Seven Stars Notification A” and “Seven Stars Notification B” are used when the game state at the time of the big hit is a probable change state (high probability / open extension), triggered by the establishment of a pending reservation in the special game. It can be replaced as an alternative production of the selected “Phantom Battle A” and “Seven Star End A”. For this reason as well, in this example, as described above, it is possible to execute the reserved game in the reserved game during the special game only when the big win is won in the probability change state (high probability / open extension). I understand. Therefore, even if the “pre-readable period” is set in each of the jackpot presentation patterns described above, if the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is not a probable change state (high probability / open extension), the look-ahead process (reserved in-residence stage production) The lottery process) is not executed, or even if it is executed, the on-hold consecutive resort production is not displayed.

  Next, the effect mode in the ninth embodiment will be described. FIG. 91 is a transition diagram of the effect mode in the ninth embodiment. In this example, 1) normal mode, 2) fierce fighting mission mode, and 3) phantom fighting rush mode are set as three types of effect modes. The contents of each production mode will be described later.

First, when the game state is a normal state (low probability / non-open extension),
“Normal mode” is set. That is, the normal mode is an effect mode that suggests or notifies that the gaming state is a normal state (low probability / non-open extension). Although not shown in the figure, during the stay in the normal mode, a plurality of types of production stages having different production contents are prepared, and it is possible to go back and forth between the production stages with a predetermined number of times of digestion and stage selection lottery.

  If a big hit occurs when the production mode is the normal mode, the production mode after the end of the special game may vary depending on the type of the big hit. Specifically, in the normal mode, if you win the 7R long and short open big hit with the first special symbol, if there is no V-winning in that special game (if it does not shift to a certain change), the effect mode after the special game If "Very fighting mission mode" is set, and a V prize is generated (if the probability shifts), "Phantom fighting rush mode" is set as the effect mode after the special game. In other words, in the case of a 7R long / short open big hit, if the gaming state immediately after the special game is in the short-time state, it shifts to the “fighting battle mission mode”, and if it is in the probable state, it shifts to the “phantom fighting rush mode”. . In the normal mode, if you win 15R long / short open big hit 1 or 15R long / short open big hit 2 in the 1st special symbol, regardless of whether there is a V prize in the special game (presence of positive change) “Phantom Rush Mode” is set as the production mode. In this way, when a big hit is made with the first special symbol in the normal mode, depending on the type of the big hit and whether or not the V prize is established, the production modes after the special game are “fierce fighting mission mode” and “phantom fighting rush mode”. The transition is controlled to one of the following.

  On the other hand, when the production mode is “normal mode”, if a big hit is made with the second special symbol, regardless of the type of the big win, whether or not the V prize is established in the special game (whether or not the probability change transition). First, “Phantom Rush Mode” is set as the production mode after the special game.

  Next, the “fierce fighting mission mode” is an effect mode that suggests or notifies that the gaming state is a short time state (low probability state / open extended state). When the production mode is “Fierce Fighting Mission Mode”, if a big win is won in the lottery process of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, regardless of the type of the big hit, the V winning in the special game is established. Regardless of the presence / absence (presence / absence of probability change transition), the “phantom rush mode” is set as the effect mode after the special game. In this example, based on the occurrence of the big hit, immediately after the special game, the transition from the fierce battle mission mode to the normal mode or the re-transition from the fierce battle mission mode to the fierce battle mission mode is not set. In the fierce battle mission mode, when the next big hit does not occur and the number of changes in the special symbol exceeds 100 times, that is, when the short-time state (low probability state / open extension state) ends, the normal mode is entered. Transition.

Subsequently, the “phantom rush mode” is a mode for suggesting or notifying that the gaming state is a probability change state (high probability / open extension) or a short time state (low probability / open extension). While staying in the “Phantom Fight Rush Mode”, a battle-type effect (details will be described later) in which a teammate character and an enemy character battle each other can be executed as a reach effect during the pattern change. When the production mode is “Phantom Rush Mode”, if the first special symbol or the second special symbol is a big hit, whether or not the V prize is established in the special game regardless of the type of the big hit ( Regardless of whether there is a probability change or not), the “phantom rush rush mode” is set again as the effect mode after the special game. Here, when the transition from the fantasy rush mode to the fantasy rush mode is made again, that is, when the transition to the fantasy battle rush mode is made for the second time or later, the pattern changes four times immediately after the end of the special game. Within the extended period (referred to as “limited period”), the user stays at the “renso” stage set in the phantom rush mode. That is, the “limited period” in this example means the first four rotations in the second and subsequent phantom rush modes. When staying at “Renso Stage”, the production contents are basically the same as when staying in “Phantom Rush Mode”. However, during the special game based on the previous jackpot, the rendition within the reserved game (actual effect) is executed, and within the limited period immediately after the end of the special game, the subsequent jackpot (second special) When the symbol big hit) occurs, a special background is displayed on the screen during the period of staying at the Renso stage (the period from the end of the special game to the big hit fluctuation). In this example, as a special background, rainbow band images are displayed on the left and right edges of the screen (see FIG. 96). In this rainbow image, for example, a message “Preparing for 7-star charge” is displayed to indicate to the player that an instant hit effect (7-star charge effect) will occur within 4 rotations, which is the limited period. Also good. In addition, as a seven-star charge effect outside the limited period, there is an effect mode other than the immediate hit effect described above (for example, a long-scale effect such as the appearance of a seven-star charge in the resurrection effect after the battle is defeated). Here, as described above, the on-hold consecutive villa production is executed when winning in the lottery within the pre-readable period set for each round during the special game, and during the above round. It may be executed during the jackpot end demo without any. Therefore, depending on the situation of the action holding ball at the time of the big hit or at the end of the big hit, the possibility that the on-hold consecutive villa production will be executed during the special game varies, and within the limited period immediately after the end of the special game At least a part of the symbol variation effect may be different depending on whether or not the special background (band image) is displayed in the (Ranso stage).

  In “Renso Stage”, when the next big hit does not occur and the number of changes in the special symbol exceeds 4 times, that is, when the limited period is over, the “Renso Stage” is exited. It will return to the “Phantom Rush Mode”. In “Phantom Rush Mode”, when the next big hit does not occur and the number of changes in the special symbol exceeds a predetermined number (time-short state: 100 times, probability variation state: 120 times), that is, the time-short state or probability variation state is When it is finished, it shifts to “normal mode”. There is no transition from “Phantom Rush Mode” to “Fighting Mission Mode”. As a modified example, when a big hit is made in the “phantom fighting rush mode”, if there is no entry into the specific area 658 in a specific round, the configuration may be shifted to the “fierce fighting mission mode”.

Next, a special symbol variation pattern according to the ninth embodiment will be described. FIG. 92 is a diagram schematically illustrating a special symbol variation pattern table in the ninth embodiment. In this example, 1) a normal variation pattern table, 2) a shortened variation pattern table, and 3) a special variation pattern table are prepared as special pattern variation pattern tables. The normal variation pattern table is a variation pattern table that is selected when the gaming state is a normal state (low probability / non-open extension). The shortened variation pattern table is a variation pattern table that is selected when the gaming state is a short-time state (low probability / open extension) or a probable change state (high probability / open extension) (except for a limited period described later). . The special variation pattern table indicates that the game state is a short-time state or a certain variation state and the limited number of times (4 times the number of symbol variations corresponding to the maximum number of actuated balls of the second special symbol (four)) immediately after the end of the special game. This is a variation pattern table in which selection is allowed only during the period of variation display). In addition, the limited period in this example is set in the period corresponding to the above-mentioned extended resort stage. That is, on the main control board 100 side, consistency with the production mode managed on the production control board 200 side is maintained by the transition of the variation pattern selection state, and thus, the limited period and the extended villa stage stay period are maintained. Correspondence is taken. Further, in this example, the game state after the special game is different depending on whether or not the game ball has entered the specific area 658 in the specific round in the special game, so that the game state is selected according to the game state. The variation pattern table can also be different. Here, each variation pattern table can be different depending on the result of the lottery (big hit / miss) and the big hit type. Each variation pattern table is different for the first special symbol and the second special symbol so that even if the same special symbol variation pattern random value is acquired, different variation patterns can be selected. It is configured. At this time, as shown in the figure, the variation pattern number is common to the first special symbol and the second special symbol, but an effect control command (change start from the main control board 100 to the effect control board 200). Command) includes information that can specify whether the variation pattern is for the first special symbol or the second special symbol. In each figure, “selectivity” is shown for convenience of explanation, but in actuality, a determination value (range of random values) for determining a variation pattern according to a special symbol variation pattern random value Is set, and the variation pattern is determined based on which judgment value the special symbol variation pattern random value belongs to.

  FIG. 92A shows a variation pattern table for big hits. In the figure, the upper (A1) is a normal variation pattern table, the middle (A2) is a shortened variation pattern table, and the lower (A3) is a special variation pattern table. In the figure, all variation patterns are listed so that common points and differences with other variation pattern tables can be clearly understood.

  As shown in (A1) in the figure, in the normal fluctuation pattern table (for big hits), when the big hit is made in the first special symbol, the fluctuation pattern PX4 (normal reach) or the fluctuation pattern PX5 regardless of the type of big hit. (Super Reach 1) is selected. Also, when the big special hit is the second special symbol, if the big hit type is the big hit α, the fluctuation pattern PX4 (normal reach) or the fluctuation pattern PX5 (super reach 1) is selected, and the big hit type is the big hit β. For example, the fluctuation pattern PX4 (normal reach) or the fluctuation pattern PX6 (super reach 2) is selected. In this normal fluctuation pattern table (for big hits), the fluctuation pattern in the non-reach mode is not selected, and when the big hit is made in the normal state, the fluctuation pattern in the reach mode is always selected.

  As shown in (A2) in the figure, in the shortened fluctuation pattern table (for big hits), if the big hit is made in the first special symbol, the fluctuation pattern PX7 (super reach 3) is selected for any type of big hit. Is done. Also, when the big special hit is the second special symbol, if the big hit type is big hit α, the fluctuation pattern PX7 (super reach 3) is selected, and if the big hit type is big hit β, the fluctuation pattern PX8 (super Reach 4) is selected. In this shortened variation pattern table (for big hits), the variation pattern of the non-reach mode and the normal reach mode is not selected. Selected.

  As shown in (A3) in the figure, in the special fluctuation pattern table (for big hits), if the big hit is made in the first special symbol, the fluctuation pattern PX7 (super reach 3) is selected for any type of big hit. Is done. Also, when the big special hit is the second special symbol, the fluctuation pattern PX1 (super shortening fluctuation) is selected for any type of big hit. In this special variation pattern table (for big hits), if the first special symbol is a big hit within a limited period, the super reach mode variation pattern is selected, while the second special symbol is a big hit. In this case, the variation pattern of the ultrashort variation is selected regardless of the jackpot type.

  Next, FIG. 92B shows a variation pattern table for deviation. In the figure, the upper (B1) is a normal variation pattern table, the middle (B2) is a shortened variation pattern table, and the lower (B3) is a special variation pattern table. In the figure, all variation patterns are listed so that common points and differences with other variation pattern tables can be clearly understood.

  As shown in (B1) in the figure, in the normal variation pattern table (for loss), when there is a shift in the first special symbol, the variation pattern PH2 (shortening variation), the variation pattern PH3 (normal variation), the variation pattern PH4. Either (normal reach) or variation pattern PH5 (super reach 1) is selected. When the second special symbol is shifted, any one of the fluctuation pattern PH2 (shortening fluctuation), the fluctuation pattern PH3 (normal fluctuation), the fluctuation pattern PH4 (normal reach), and the fluctuation pattern PH6 (super reach 2) is selected. The

As shown in (B2) in the figure, in the shortened variation pattern table (for loss), the variation pattern PH3 (normal variation) is selected when there is a displacement in the first special symbol. If the second special symbol is shifted, the variation pattern PH1 (super shortened variation), variation pattern PH2 (short variation), variation pattern PH3 (normal variation), variation pattern PH4 (normal reach), variation pattern PH7 (super) One of reach 3) and fluctuation pattern PH8 (super reach 4) is selected.

  As shown in (B3) in the figure, in the special variation pattern table (for loss), the variation pattern PH3 (normal variation) is selected when there is a shift in the first special symbol. When the second special symbol is shifted, the variation pattern PH1 (super shortened variation) or the variation pattern PH2 (shortened variation) is selected.

  In addition, when the result of a lottery determination is lost, a different variation pattern table may be selected depending on the number of operation reserved balls (0 to 4) of the special symbol. That is, by using a variation pattern table according to the number of reserved balls for special symbols, the proportion of relatively short variation times is increased as the number of activated balls is increased, and the number of reserved operations is small. As a result, a relatively long variation time can be selected. In addition, said fluctuation | variation pattern table (a normal fluctuation | variation pattern table, a shortening fluctuation | variation pattern table, a special fluctuation | variation pattern table) is a table when there are 0-4 operation reservation balls.

  Next, the variation effect pattern in the ninth embodiment will be described. FIG. 93 is a diagram schematically showing a variation effect pattern table in the ninth embodiment. In this example, multiple types of variation effect pattern tables that are referred to when selecting a variation effect pattern are stored, and a special pattern variation pattern (variation time) can be selected from these multiple types of variation effect pattern tables. The changed production pattern table is selected. Also, in each variation effect pattern table, one or more variation effect patterns are associated with each variation pattern of the special symbol. A random value (number of determination values) is assigned to the variation pattern that is different from the big hit variation pattern so that one of a plurality of types of variation effect patterns can be selected. As described above, the variation effect pattern defines a variation display mode of the decorative symbol, that is, a scenario of a series of effect display processes from the start of variation to the end of variation of the decorative symbol. Timing for generating a notice effect at each stage is also defined as a time schedule. Moreover, about this variation effect pattern, even if the variation pattern of the special symbol is the same (even when the variation start command of the same information is received), if the effect mode (or effect stage) during stay is different, Variation production patterns having different production contents can be selected. That is, the variation effect pattern table is prepared for each effect mode (or effect stage) during the stay. Here, for convenience of explanation, only the variation effect pattern table for long shortening variation and super reach is shown, and the variation effect pattern table for other types is omitted. However, as shown in FIG. 93, in this example, multiple types of variation effect pattern tables are represented as a single variation effect pattern table. In each drawing, “selection rate” is shown for convenience of explanation, but in actuality, a determination value (range of random values) for determining a changing effect pattern according to a changing effect pattern random value. Is set, and the variation pattern is determined based on which determination value the variation effect pattern random value belongs to.

  Specifically, the variation effect pattern PXR11 in the phantom rush mode is associated with the big hit variation pattern PX1 (super shortened variation). As described above, the variation pattern PX1 is a variation pattern that is allowed to be selected only within the limited period, and the variation effect pattern PXR11 corresponding to the variation pattern PX1 is selected only when staying at the extended resort stage that is the limited period. Is done. When the variation effect pattern PXR11 is selected, an immediate effect (seven star charge introduction effect) is executed as the variation effect. The instant hit effect in this example is an effect in which a seven-star charge mark is displayed immediately after the start of symbol variation and a big hit is achieved.

  Moreover, the fluctuation effect patterns PX51 to 53 in the normal mode are associated with the big hit fluctuation pattern PX5 (super reach 1). When the change effect patterns PXT51 to 53 are selected, a story-type reach effect (a big hit reach effect in which a story associated with the characters A to C is developed) is executed as the change effect.

  Moreover, the fluctuation effect patterns PXT61 to 63 in the normal mode are associated with the big hit fluctuation pattern PX6 (super reach 2). When the variation effect pattern PXT61 to 63 is selected, the above-mentioned story-based reach effect is executed as the change effect, and then the seven-star charge introduction effect (the effect that the seven-star charge mark appears) is executed.

  The big hit variation pattern PX7 (super reach 3) is associated with a plurality of types of variation effect patterns for each effect mode. That is, the selected variation effect pattern is different depending on the effect mode during the stay. Specifically, when the production mode is the fierce battle mission mode, the variation production patterns PXM71 to 73 are associated with each other. When the change effect patterns PXM71 to 73 are selected, a mission success effect (success in missions A to C) is executed as the change effect. Here, the mission effect is an effect that presents to the player a command having the content that the effect should exhibit a specific aspect as a condition for the result of the lottery determination to be a big hit. In the fierce battle mission production in this example, as a command, the mission success (big hit) is achieved if the fierce battle character selected by the player can defeat the enemy character, and the mission failure (out of the game) if the enemy character is not defeated. is there. On the other hand, when the production mode is the phantom rush mode, the variation production patterns PXR71 to 73 are associated with each other. When the variation effect patterns PXR71 to 73 are selected, a battle victory effect (winning the enemy characters A to C) is executed as the variation effect. In the fantasy battle rush production in this example, as a battle system production (battle reach production), if the phantom character selected by the player can defeat the enemy character, the battle wins (big hit), and if the enemy character cannot be defeated, the battle This is a defeat.

  The big hit variation pattern PX8 (super reach 4) is associated with a plurality of types of variation effect patterns for each effect mode. That is, the selected variation effect pattern is different depending on the effect mode during the stay. Specifically, when the production mode is the fierce battle mission mode, the variation production patterns PXM81 to 83 are associated with each other. When the variation effect pattern PXM81-83 is selected, after the mission failure effect (failed to missions A to C) is executed as the change effect, the seven-star charge introduction effect (effect in which the seven-star charge mark appears) is executed. The On the other hand, when the production mode is the phantom rush mode, the variation production patterns PXR81 to 83 are associated with each other. When the variation effect pattern PXR81-83 is selected, after the battle defeat effect (defeated by the enemy characters A to C) is executed as the change effect, the seven-star charge introduction effect (the effect that the seven-star charge mark appears) is executed. Is done.

  Next, the variation pattern PH1 (PHR11) in the fierce battle mission mode or the phantom rush mode is associated with the variation pattern PH1 (super shortened variation). When the variation effect patterns PHM11 and PHR11 are selected, a non-reach off effect (super shortened variation effect) is executed as the variation effect.

  The fluctuation effect pattern PHT51 to 53 in the normal mode is associated with the deviation fluctuation pattern PH5 (super reach 1). When the variation effect patterns PHT51 to 53 are selected, a story-type reach effect (a loss reach effect in which a story associated with the characters A to C is developed) is executed as the change effect.

  Further, the fluctuation effect patterns PHT61 to 63 in the normal mode are associated with the deviation fluctuation pattern PH6 (super reach 2). When the variation effect patterns PHT61 to 63 are selected, the above-described story-based reach effect is executed as the variation effect.

  In addition, the variation pattern PH7 (super reach 3) is associated with a plurality of types of variation effect patterns for each effect mode. Specifically, when the production mode is the fierce battle mission mode, the variation production patterns PHM71 to 73 are associated with each other. When the variation effect patterns PHM71 to 73 are selected, a mission failure effect (failure in missions A to C) is executed as the variation effect. On the other hand, when the production mode is the phantom rush mode, the fluctuation production patterns PHR71 to 73 are associated with each other. When the variation effect patterns PHR71 to 73 are selected, a battle defeat effect (defeated by the enemy characters A to C) is executed as the variation effect.

  Further, the variation pattern PH8 (super reach 4) is associated with a plurality of types of variation effect patterns for each effect mode. Specifically, when the production mode is the fierce battle mission mode, the variation production patterns PHM81 to 83 are associated with each other. When the variation effect pattern PHM81 to 83 is selected, a mission failure effect (failure in missions A to C) is executed as the variation effect. On the other hand, when the production mode is the phantom rush mode, the variation production patterns PHR81 to 83 are associated with each other. When the variation effect patterns PHR81 to 83 are selected, a battle defeat effect (defeated by the enemy characters A to C) is executed as the variation effect.

  In such a configuration, the selection process of the variation pattern and the variation effect pattern within and outside the limited period will be described.

  First, a case where the second special symbol is a big hit will be described. In this example, as described above, the big hit of the second special symbol is roughly divided into the big hit α and the big hit β. In the following description, for the sake of convenience of explanation, the 16R long open big hit is 1 as the big hit α and the 8R long open big hit is given as an example as the big hit β.

  As shown in FIG. 92 (A2), when the gaming state is a probable change state or a short time state (outside the limited period), when the 16R long open big hit is 1 in the second special symbol, the fluctuation pattern PX7 (Super Reach 3 ) Is selected. At this time, in this example, it is assumed that the phantom rush mode is set as the effect mode in correspondence with the probability variation state or the short time state. Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 93, when the phantom rush mode is set, any one of the variation effect patterns PXR71 to 73 is selected as the variation effect pattern corresponding to the variation pattern PX7. When any of the variation effect patterns PXR71 to 73 is selected, a “battle victory effect” is executed as a symbol variation effect in which the phantom hero character wins the enemy character in the battle.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 92 (A2), when the gaming state is a probable change state or a short time state (outside the limited period), if the 8R long open big hit is obtained in the second special symbol, the variation pattern PX8 (super Reach 4) is selected. Similarly to the above, in this example, it is assumed that the phantom rush mode is set as the production mode in correspondence with the probability variation state or the short time state. Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 93, when the phantom rush mode is set, any of the variation effect patterns PXR81 to 83 is selected as the variation effect pattern corresponding to the variation pattern PX8. Then, when any of the variation effect patterns PXR81 to 83 is selected, immediately after the “battle defeat effect” in which the phantom fighting character defeats the enemy character in the battle is executed as the symbol variation effect, the seven-star charge The “Seven Star Charge Introduction Effect” is executed, where the mark suddenly appears.

  As described above, in this example, when the big hit is won outside the limited period in the probability variation state or the short time state, the selected variation pattern and variation effect pattern may be different depending on the type of the big hit (big hit α or big hit β). . Then, when the big hit type (big hit α) is won outside the limited period, the seven-star charge introduction effect is not executed although the battle-type effect is executed in the variable display. On the other hand, when the other big hit type (big hit β) is won outside the limited period, a battle-type effect and a seven-star charge effect are executed with the change display.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 92 (A3), when the second special symbol is within the limited period immediately after the special game and the 16R long open big hit is 1 or the 8R long open big hit, the variation pattern PX1 (super shortened) Fluctuation) is selected. In this example, it is assumed that the fantasy battle rush mode (renso stage) is set as the production mode in correspondence with the limited period. Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 93, when the phantom rush mode (renso stage) is set, the variation effect pattern PXR11 is selected as the variation effect pattern corresponding to the variation pattern PX1. When the variation effect pattern PXR11 is selected, a “seven star charge introduction effect” in which the seven star charge mark suddenly appears immediately after the symbol variation display is started as a so-called “successful effect” in the symbol variation effect. Is done.

  As described above, in this example, when the big hit is won within the limited period in the probability variation state or the short-time state, the selected variation pattern and variation effect pattern are the same regardless of the type of the big hit (big hit α or big hit β). obtain. Then, within the limited period, even if any of the big hit types (big hit α or big hit β) is won, the seven-star charge introduction effect is executed with the change display.

  Therefore, outside the limited period in the probabilistic state or short-time state, if one of the big hit types of the second special symbol (big hit α) is won, the symbol variation display “ ”Is not executed, but when the other big hit type (big hit β) is won, the“ seven star charge introduction effect ”is executed in the symbol variation display. On the other hand, within the limited period in the probabilistic state or short-running state (rensou stage), regardless of which type of big hit (big hit α or big hit β) is won, “Charge introduction effect” is executed.

  Next, the case where the first special symbol is a big hit will be described. As shown in FIG. 92 (A2), when the gaming state is a probable change state or a short time state (outside the limited period), if the first special symbol is a big hit, the variation pattern PX7 (super reach 3) is selected. The On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 92 (A3), when the gaming state is within the limited period in the probabilistic state or the short-time state, the variation pattern PX7 (super reach) also occurs when the first special symbol is a big hit. 3) is selected. At this time, in this example, similarly to the above, it is assumed that the illusionary rush mode is set as the effect mode corresponding to the probability variation state or the short time state. Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 93, when the phantom rush mode is set, any one of the variation effect patterns PXR71 to 73 is selected as the variation effect pattern corresponding to the variation pattern PX7. When any of the variation effect patterns PXR71 to 73 is selected, a “battle victory effect” is executed as a symbol variation effect in which the phantom hero character wins the enemy character in the battle.

As described above, in this example, when the gaming state is a probable change state or a short time state, regardless of whether the game state is within the limited period or outside the limited period, if the big hit is made in the first special symbol, the symbol variation display is performed. Thus, the seven star charge introduction effect is not executed (instead, the battle effect is executed). In addition, as a modification, within a limited period in the probability variation state or the short time state,
When a special symbol is a big hit, a special effect that does not appear outside the limited period may be executed. As the special effect, for example, a special enemy character that is not set in the battle effect outside the limited period may be allowed to appear. On the contrary, this special effect is executed when the first special symbol is a big hit outside the limited period in the probability variation state or the short time state, while on the second special symbol outside the limited period in the probability variation state or the short time state. You may comprise so that it may not be performed when it is a big hit.

(Operation: Ninth Embodiment)
Next, in order to facilitate understanding of the ninth embodiment, a characteristic operation of the gaming machine will be described.

  First, an example of the effect of the probable change promotion effect in the ninth embodiment will be described. FIG. 94 is a schematic diagram showing an example of a probability variation promotion effect in the ninth embodiment.

  In this example, as the first promotion effect, the probability change promotion effect in the fierce battle bonus A and the probability change promotion effect in the fierce battle bonus B are targeted. As described above, the fierce battle bonus A is a big hit effect pattern when the game state is the normal state and the 15R long / short open big hit 2 is won in the first special symbol, and the fierce battle bonus B is the normal state when the game state is normal. It is a big hit production pattern when winning the 7R long and short open big hit with the first special symbol when in the state. Here, the fierce battle bonus A includes an effect content that succeeds in the probability change promotion, and an intense battle bonus B includes an effect content that fails in the probability change promotion. In the figure, (A) to (D) are effects common to the fierce battle bonuses A and B (normal effect and roaring effect), and (E) to (F) in the figure are effects of the fierce battle bonus A (successful effect). In the figure, (G) to (H) are effects (failure effects) of the fierce battle bonus B. Therefore, in the fierce battle bonus A, the effects are developed in the order of (A) → (B) → (C) → (D) → (E) → (F) in the figure. ) → (B) → (C) → (D) → (G) → (H).

  As shown in FIG. 94 (A), the big hit symbol “2, 2, 2” is stopped and displayed in the variation variation of the decorative symbol, and the big hit occurs. In this example, it is suggested that there is a high possibility that the conditional normal big hit (equivalent to non-probable change big hit) is won by the stop display of the even number symbol (indeterminate symbol). In addition, as shown in FIG. 94 (B), a big hit start demo is displayed with the start of the special game.

  As shown in FIG. 94C, a circular mark image (identification mark) is displayed in the center of the screen in the first round. This mark image has front and back sides, a “fierce fighting mission mark” on the front side, and a “phantom fighting rush mark” on the back side. This mark image (identification mark) suggests the effect mode scheduled to shift after the end of the special game, and also indicates the type of the specific round (third round) in the special game. In other words, the fierce battle mission mark suggests that the specific round is set as a non-V round, and that there is a high possibility of shifting to the fierce battle mission mode after the special game ends. Further, the phantom rush mark indicates that the specific round is set as the V round, and there is a high possibility that the phantom rush rush mode is entered after the special game ends. In the figure, a “fierce fighting mission mark” on the front side is displayed as a default image. Although not shown, the mark image does not change in the second to fifth rounds, and the “fierce fighting mission” mark on the surface side is continuously displayed.

  As shown in FIG. 94 (D), the probable promotion effect is started in the sixth round, and the mark image starts to rotate. Rotation of the mark image increases the expectation for the probable promotion.

As shown in FIG. 94E, when the mark image stops on the back side and the “phantom rush mark” on the back side is displayed, it is notified that the probability change promotion has been successful. In that case, as shown in FIG. 94 (F), in the big hit end demonstration, the fantasy battle rush entry effect is executed, and it is notified that the transition to the fantasy battle rush mode is made after the special game is ended.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 94 (G), when the mark image stops on the surface side and the “fierce fighting mission mark” on the surface side is displayed, it is notified that the probability change promotion has failed. In that case, as shown in FIG. 94 (H), in the big hit end demonstration, a fierce battle mission entry effect is executed, and it is notified that the transition to the fierce battle mission mode is made after the special game is finished.

  However, since the type of jackpot (that is, whether or not to execute the V round) is determined in advance at the time of the lottery, the performance development (production result) according to the type is determined. In other words, if you win 15R long / short open big hit 1 (conditional special big hit), it has been determined in advance that the probability change promotion will be successful, and if you win 7R long / short open big hit (conditional normal big hit) It has been determined in advance that it will be a probable promotion failure. As a modified example, depending on whether or not there is a ball entering the specific area 658, a jackpot attribute (“ It may be configured so that only “conditional specific big hit” or “conditional normal big hit”) does not depend on the probability change promotion success / failure.

  Next, an example of the effect of the round promotion effect in the ninth embodiment will be described. FIG. 95 is a schematic diagram showing an example of a round promotion effect in the ninth embodiment.

  In this example, as the second promotion effect, a round promotion effect in the phantom bonus D and a probability change promotion effect in the phantom bonus B are targeted. As described above, the fantasy battle bonus D is a jackpot effect pattern when the 16R long open big hit 1 is won in the second special symbol, and the phantom bonus B is a 4R long open big hit 1 in the second special symbol. It is a big hit production pattern when winning. Here, the phantom battle bonus D includes production contents that succeed in the round promotion, and the phantom bonus B includes production contents that fail in the round promotion. In the figure, (A) to (D) are effects common to the phantom bonus B and D (normal effects and roaring effects), and (E) to (F) in the figure are effects of the phantom bonus D ( (G) to (H) are effects of the phantom bonus D (failure effects). Therefore, in the fantasy battle bonus D, the effects are developed in the order of (A) → (B) → (C) → (D) → (E) → (F). The effects are developed in the order of (A) → (B) → (C) → (D) → (G) → (H).

  As shown in FIG. 95 (A), the jackpot symbol “1 · 1 · 1” is stopped and displayed in the variation variation of the decorative symbol, and the jackpot is generated. In this example, there is a high possibility of winning the 4R long open jackpot (possibility of not winning the 16R long open jackpot, which is a high profit jackpot) in the stop display of the second odd symbol (probability variation). It is suggested. In addition, as shown in FIG. 95 (B), a big hit start demo is displayed with the start of the special game. In the jackpot start demonstration, the fact that the “phantom fight bonus” is displayed as the jackpot performance pattern suggests that there is a high possibility of winning the 4R long open jackpot (winning the 16R long open jackpot) If so, it ’s likely that “Musou Bonus” is displayed).

  As shown in FIG. 95C, a circular mark image (identification mark) is displayed at the center of the screen in the first round. This mark image has front and back sides, a “phantom rush mark” on the front side, and an “extra bonus mark” on the back side. In the figure, a “phantom rush” mark on the front side is displayed as a default image. Although not shown, the mark image does not change in the second to third rounds, and the “phantom rush mark” on the front side is continuously displayed.

  As shown in FIG. 95D, the promotion effect is started in the fourth round, and the mark image starts to rotate. By rotating the mark image, a sense of expectation for round-up (acquisition of the latter half 12 rounds) is increased.

  As shown in FIG. 95 (E), when the mark image stops on the back side and the “extra bonus mark” on the back side is displayed, it is notified that the round promotion (round up) is successful. . That is, it is determined that the special game will continue after the fifth round without ending in the fourth round. Then, as shown in FIG. 95 (F), in the fifth round, the text information “Musou Perfect” is displayed, and in fact, profits equivalent to the case where “Musou Bonus” is won (16R: 2400). It is informed that (equivalent to the departure) is possible. In the sixth and subsequent rounds after the promotion effect ends, the phantom bonus D progresses with the same content as the warrior bonus A (see FIGS. 85 and 86).

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 95 (G), when the mark image stops on the front side and the “phantom rush” mark on the front side is displayed, the round promotion (round-up) may have failed. Informed. In this case, as shown in FIG. 95 (H), after the end of the fourth round, the fifth round is not started, and the big hit ends through the big hit end demonstration.

  However, in actuality, since the type of jackpot (that is, whether or not the latter half of the 12th round is continued) is determined in advance at the time of the winning or failing lottery, the stage development (the stage result) according to the type is determined. In other words, if the 16R long open big hit 1 is won, it will be confirmed in advance that the round promotion will be successful, and if the 4R long open big hit 1 is won, it will be decided in advance that the round promotion will fail. Yes. In this regard, as for the second promotion effect (round promotion effect), the presence or absence of the V prize in the specific area 658 is not related to the effect result (promotion success / failure), but the first promotion effect (probability promotion effect). ), It is preferable that the presence / absence of the V prize in the specific area 658 is related to the production result (promotion success / failure).

  Next, an example of the effect of the on-hold consecutive villa effect in the ninth embodiment will be described. FIG. 96 is a schematic diagram showing an example of a reserved in-resort resort production in the ninth embodiment.

  Whether or not to execute the on-hold consecutive resort production is determined by lottery during the above-described prefetchable period. Each pre-readable period is set for each round of special games. In each round, whether or not to execute the on-hold consecutive villa production is determined, and if the execution of that production is decided, Generate on-hold Renso production. Therefore, for each round (pre-readable period), from the effect lottery to the execution of the effect related to the on-hold Renso production is completed. In the following production example, it is assumed that a high profit jackpot (16R long open jackpot 1) is won and “Musou Bonus A” is developed as a jackpot production pattern. In this incomparable bonus A, prefetchable periods are set in the fourth to sixteenth rounds. However, as described above, when the phantom character re-selection effect is executed in the 12th to 16th rounds, it is avoided that the phantom character selection effect and the in-hold Renso effect compete in the same round. For this reason, the on-hold consecutive resort production is not executed in the twelfth to sixteenth rounds. In this example, it is assumed that “specific hold (big hit hold)” exists in one or more subsequent operation hold balls existing at the start of the special game.

As shown in FIG. 96A, a circular mark image (identification mark) is displayed at the center of the screen in the first round in the special game. This mark image has a front and back, a “phantom rush mark” on the front side, and a “seven star charge mark” on the back side. In the figure, a “phantom rush mark” on the front side is displayed as a default image. In this example, although not shown in the drawing, the non-execution (non-winning) of the on-hold consecutive villa production is determined in the prefetch process in each of the fourth to fifth rounds in the prefetchable period. To do. Therefore, at the end of the fifth round, the “phantom rush mark” on the front side is continuously displayed on the mark image.

  As shown in FIG. 96 (B), in the sixth round, when execution (winning) of the on-hold extended resort effect is determined in the pre-reading process, the mark image starts to rotate as the on-hold extended resort effect.

  As shown in FIG. 96 (C), when the on-hold consecutive villa effect is generated as a true effect (determined effect of the on-hold consecutive resort), a “seven star charge mark” on the back side is displayed. On the other hand, although not shown in the drawings, when the on-hold consecutive villa effect is generated as a Gase effect, a “phantom rush mark” on the front side is displayed. In addition, when the on-hold consecutive resort production is executed in a certain round and it occurs as a true production (seven star charge mark), the pre-reading process is not performed in the remaining rounds. On the other hand, if the rendezvous renso production is generated as a Gase production (phantom rush mark), the look-ahead process is executed again in the remaining rounds until the real rendition occurs. Production can occur. In other words, in the prefetching period, the prefetching process can be executed in each round until a real effect that confirms the establishment of the on-hold extended resort is generated.

  As shown in FIG. 96 (D), when the final round is completed, the letters “seven star charge activation” are displayed in the jackpot end demonstration. In this example, since the rendezvous renso production (true production) occurs during the round, “Nanasei Charge Notification” is selected as the type of the end demonstration production, and “ The text “Seven Star Charge” is displayed. Then, after the end of the special game, the fantasy battle rush mode is set as the effect mode. In addition, stay at the Renso stage for a limited period (4 times) immediately after the end of the special game. In this example, it is assumed that there are four action-holding balls of the second special symbol at the end of the special game, and the fourth of them is a specific hold (the next big hit that was the target of the notification of the consecutive games in the hold) Suppose there is.

  As shown in FIG. 96 (E), when the special game is finished, the symbol variation display is started in the consecutive resort stage. When staying at the Renso stage, rainbow-colored band images are displayed at both ends of the screen as a special effect during the display of changes in symbols, and the next big hit may occur during a limited period (within 4 rotations). It will be noticed.

  As shown in FIG. 96 (F), the first variation display after the special game is “out of”. In this example, although not shown in the figure, the symbol variation display in the second to third times is also “out”. If it is within the limited period, special effects (band images) will continue to be displayed not only during the big hit change (the next big hit change subject to the on-hold consecutive resort announcement) but also during the extraordinary fluctuation. Is done. In other words, until the next big hit occurs, the display of the band image is continued throughout the entire period of the consecutive resort stage.

  As shown in FIG. 96 (G), as a result of digesting the specific hold that is the subject of the in-hold extended resort announcement, the “seven star charge mark” suddenly appears on the screen immediately after the start of the fourth variable display. Thus, by displaying again the mark image similar to that at the time of the on-hold consecutive resort announcement, it is possible to make the player intuitively understand that a big hit will occur in the current variation display. In addition, the display of the “Seven Star Charge Mark” this time is also used as the above-mentioned Seven Star Charge introduction effect, and it will be continuously connected to the winning HIT number announcement effect of the big hit start demonstration (omitted in the figure). . As a modified example thereof, the “seven-star charge mark” may be continuously displayed even in a big hit end demonstration or a change up to a change related to specific hold.

As shown in FIG. 96 (H), the big hit symbol “7, 7, 7” is stopped and displayed in the variation display, and the next big hit occurs. In addition, this big hit fluctuation (big hit fluctuation within a limited period)
It is configured as a quick hit effect that can be completed in a few seconds without a reach state after the symbol starts to fluctuate.

  Next, an example of a seven-star charge effect in the ninth embodiment will be described. FIG. 97 is a schematic diagram showing an example of a seven-star charge effect in the ninth embodiment.

  The seven-star charge effect is executed from (1) a seven-star charge introduction effect executed at the big hit fluctuation, (2) an obtained HIT number announcement effect executed at the big hit start demonstration, and (3) from the round game to the big hit end demo. The total acquired HIT number addition effect. The number of acquired HITs (number of acquired winning balls) shown in the figure is the total number of winning balls acquired based on winning in the special winning opening 65 in the special game during the so-called consecutive resort state. . The 7-star charge effect is displayed in the form of a change when triggered by winning the jackpot β with the second special symbol, or when winning the jackpot with the second special symbol while staying at the Renso stage (limited period). It is an effect that is executed substantially continuously from the inside to the end of the special game.

  As shown in FIG. 97 (A), a “seven-star charge mark” is displayed as a seven-star charge introduction effect during the symbol variation display. If the big hit β is won, a battle effect is executed in the variation display, and after the ally character is defeated by the enemy character, a “seven star charge mark” appears in the form of the resurgence effect. On the other hand, when the big hit is won while staying at the above-mentioned Renso stage, as already explained using FIG. "Mark" appears.

  As shown in Fig. 97 (B), "13600 HIT" is displayed on the front side of the "Nanasei Charge Mark" as the total earned HIT (acquired number of winning balls) obtained so far, and it is won by the big hit this time. “+0 HIT” is displayed as the initial value of the number of possible acquired HITs. In this example, “1HIT” is counted for “1” prize ball. Although not shown in the figure, it is assumed that the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed by the variation display and the jackpot is generated.

  As shown in FIGS. 97 (C), (D), and (E), with the start of the special game, the earned HIT number announcement effect is executed in the jackpot start demonstration. The acquired HIT number notification effect is an effect of notifying the number of winning balls (number of balls) that can be acquired by this big hit as the acquired HIT number. The number of acquired HITs increases in a maximum of three stages according to the specified number of rounds of the special game executed this time.

  If the specified number of rounds for a special game is 4 (4R long open big hit), as shown in FIG. 97 (C), the current number of acquired HITs is only one step from “+0 HIT” to “+600 HIT”. It rises (4R × 10 counts × 15 = 600 HIT).

  When the specified number of rounds of the special game is 8 (when 8R long open big hit is hit), as shown in FIGS. 97 (C) to 97 (D), the number of acquired HITs is “+0 HIT” to “+600 HIT”. , Rising from “+600 HIT” to “+1200 HIT” in two stages (8R × 10 counts × 15 = 1200 HIT).

  When the specified number of rounds for the special game is 16 (in the case of a 16R long open big hit), as shown in FIGS. 97 (C) to 97 (E), the current number of acquired HITs is “+0 HIT” to “+600 HIT”. , Rising from “+600 HIT” to “+1200 HIT” and from “+1200 HIT” to “+2400 HIT” in three stages (16R × 10 counts × 15 = 2400 HIT). In the following description, it is assumed that the number of acquired HITs is “+2400 HIT”.

  As shown in FIG. 97 (F), when the round game is started, the total acquired HIT number addition effect is executed. Specifically, every time a game ball wins a big winning opening 65, “+15 HIT” is moved from the acquired HIT number to the total acquired HIT number (15 winning balls per count).

  As shown in FIG. 97 (G), when the so-called over-winning is made, the number of HITs won this time does not include the over-winning portion (only 10 counts, which is the prescribed number per round). Therefore, instead of moving the numerical value, information “+15 HIT” is newly displayed. At the same time, a special sound effect is output, and then the value is added to the total number of acquired HITs. The “over winning” refers to a winning exceeding the prescribed number (10 balls) for the big winning opening 65.

  As shown in FIG. 97 (H), when all the rounds are completed, the total winning HIT number is enlarged and displayed in the jackpot end demonstration, and the result of the total payout (the number of winning prize balls) is announced. After that, although not shown in the figure, as a fantasy battle rush entry effect, the “Phantom Rush” logo is enlarged and displayed on the screen to notify the transition to the fantasy battle rush mode.

  Next, the execution process of the character selection effect in the big hit in the ninth embodiment will be described. FIG. 98 is a schematic diagram showing an example of the execution process of the character selection effect in the ninth embodiment.

  Regarding the execution process of the character selection effect, (A) in the figure shows the case where the first special symbol is won in the 7R long and short open big hit in the normal state, and the transition to the short time state after the special game ends is shown in (B). In the normal state (or short time state), when the 15R long and short open big hit 1 is won with the first special symbol, and the transition to the probable state after the special game ends, (C) in the figure shows the short time state ( Or, in the normal state), when winning the 16R long open big hit 1 in the second special symbol and shifting to the probability change state after the end of the special game, (D) in the figure shows the 16R length in the second special symbol in the probability change state. This shows a case where the winning big hit is won and the game is re-entered into the probability change state after the special game is completed. In each figure, the time axis is set from left to right, and the jackpot start demonstration, round game, and jackpot end demo are shown in order from left to right. Each figure conceptually shows the execution state of the jackpot effect, and each time width and ratio do not correspond to the actual time width and ratio. That is, in this example, in FIGS. 4A to 4D, different time widths are actually set to the same time width as appropriate so that the time scale of the character selection effect can be easily compared.

First, the 7R long / short open big hit of the first special symbol belongs to the conditional normal big hit as its big hit attribute. When the game state is a normal state (low probability / non-open extension), if a 7R long / short open big hit is received, basically, a V can not be won in a specific round in the special game, and the game state after the special game is short State (low probability / open extension). At this time, in the special game described above, “Fierce Fight Bonus B” is selected as the big hit effect pattern. Also, “Fierce Battle Bonus (Common)” is selected as the type of start demonstration effect, and “Fierce Battle Enter” is selected as the type of end demonstration effect. As described above, when the type of the end demonstration effect is “Fighting entry”, the execution time (effect scale) is N = 20 (seconds). In addition, a fierce battle character selection effect is set during the jackpot end demo (fierce battle entry). On the other hand, the fierce battle character selection effect is not set during the round game (fierce battle bonus B). Therefore, the fierce battle character selection effect is executed during the jackpot end demonstration (fierce battle entry). At this time, in the fierce battle character selection effect, although not shown, four types of fierce battle characters (friend characters) are displayed in a horizontal row, and the display mode of the selected image is displayed at regular intervals during the operation effective period of the effect button 15. By sequentially switching, one of the plurality of fierce fighting characters is selected according to the operation timing of the effect button 15.
One can be selected. Next, the 15R long / short open big hit 1 of the first special symbol belongs to the conditional special big hit. When the gaming state is normal (low probability / non-opening extension) and the 15R long / short opening big hit is 1, basically, the V is won in a specific round in the special game, and the game state after the special game ends Is a probabilistic state (high probability / open extension). At this time, in the special game described above, “Phantom Fight Bonus A” is selected as the big hit effect pattern. In addition, “phantom bonus (common)” is selected as the type of start demonstration effect, and “takeover demo” is selected as the type of end demonstration effect. As described above, when the type of the end demonstration effect is “handover demonstration”, the execution time (effect scale) is Y = 35 (seconds). As described above, the takeover demo is executed across the round game (seventh to fifteenth rounds) and the jackpot end demo. The production scale in the round game (7th to 15th rounds) is 29 (seconds), and the production scale in the big hit end demonstration is 6 (seconds). And, in the seventh to fifteenth rounds (short open round games) during this takeover demonstration, a fantasy character selection effect is set. Since the takeover demonstration is an effect that is continuously executed from the seventh round to the big hit end demo, the end demo production is triggered by the big hit end demo command from the main control board 100 (the takeover demo). Is not executed, but is executed starting from the seventh round. Therefore, the jackpot end command from the main control board 100 is ignored. For other end demonstration effects, the end demonstration effects are executed in response to a jackpot end demonstration command from the main control board 100.

  Next, the 16R long open big hit 1 of the second special symbol belongs to the conditional special big hit. When the gaming state is short-time state (low probability / opening extension), when the 16R long opening big hit is 1, basically, V wins in a specific round in that special game, and the gaming state after the special game ends Probability change state (high probability / open extension). At this time, in the special game described above, “Musou Bonus A” or “Phantom Fight Bonus D” is selected as the jackpot effect pattern. In the following description, it is assumed that “Musou Bonus A” is selected. Also, “Musou Bonus (Normal)” is selected as the type of the start demonstration effect, and “Phantom Plunge B” is selected as the type of the end demonstration effect. As described above, when the type of the end demonstration effect is “Phantom Entry B”, the execution time (effect scale) is N = 35 (seconds). Then, during this jackpot end demo (Phantom Fighting B), a phantom fight character selection effect is set. In this example, as described above, since the end demo (Phantom Battle Entry B) is started in response to the jackpot end demo command from the main control board 100, the phantom character selection effect is also displayed during the jackpot end demonstration. Only executed. At this time, in the phantom character selection effect, although not shown in the figure, fifteen types of phantom characters (friend characters) are prepared one screen at a time, and the screen of selectable phantom characters is displayed by switching the screen with the left and right keys. In response to the operation of the effect button 15, any one of a plurality of phantom characters can be selected. In this way, the fierce battle character selection effect and the phantom battle character selection effect are set such that the effect content and the effect scale are different from each other. In addition, some (4 types) of 15 types of phantom fighting characters are also used as fierce fighting characters.

  On the other hand, if the game state is a probable change state (high probability / open extension), and if the 16R long open big hit is 1, basically, the V game is won in a specific round of the special game, and the game after the special game ends. The state is a probabilistic state (high probability / open extension). At this time, in the special game described above, “Musou Bonus A” or “Phantom Fight Bonus D” is selected as the jackpot effect pattern. In the following description, it is assumed that “Musou Bonus A” is selected. Further, “Musou Bonus (Normal)” is selected as the type of start demonstration effect, and “Phantom Battle A” is selected as the type of end demonstration effect. As described above, when the type of the end demonstration effect is “Phantom entry A”, the execution time (effect scale) is N = 6 (seconds). And the fierce fight character selection production is not set during this jackpot end demonstration (fierce battle entry). On the other hand, phantom character selection effects are set in the 11th to 16th rounds during the round game. Accordingly, the phantom character selection effect is executed only during the round game (Musou Bonus A).

  As described above, the main effects achieved in the ninth embodiment are summarized as follows.

  First, in the operation pattern related to the conditional specific big hit (15R long and short open big hit 2) and the operation pattern related to the conditional normal big hit (7R long and short open big hit), it is large until a predetermined round after the specific round. By making a series of opening / closing operations (operation sequence of long opening and short opening) of the winning opening 65 substantially the same mode, which jackpot type has been won, a specific round is executed in which round, Since it becomes difficult to determine whether or not the V prize has actually been won, it is possible to maintain the expectation for the probability change until the predetermined round, and the effect when the probability change promotion effect occurs in the predetermined round The effect can be further enhanced, and as a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

  Secondly, even if the same jackpot type is won, the tendency of performance differs between the limited period immediately after the end of the special game and outside the limited period. There is a low possibility that a specific effect (seven star charge introduction effect) included in the symbol change effect of low profit jackpot will appear in the symbol change effect of profit jackpot, but if you stay within the limited period, Because there is a high possibility that a specific effect (7-star charge introduction effect) will appear in any symbol variation effect of low profit jackpot, while adopting a common effect in part regardless of the jackpot type and the number of fluctuations period However, it is possible to create an unprecedented variety of game play by adding clarity to the performance within and outside the limited period, and as a result, it is possible to improve the fun of the game.

  Thirdly, when a character selection effect is selected that selects an effect format that is changing during the execution of a special game, the execution of the in-reserved renso effect is prohibited in the execution round of the character selection effect. By avoiding the situation in which the rendezvous in the same round and the character selection production compete in the same round, the production effects of both productions can be prevented from diluting each other. It becomes possible to improve.

  Fourth, when a round promotion effect is executed during the execution of a special game, a pre-readable period is set for a round after the execution round of the round promotion effect, and the reservation in the same round By avoiding a situation in which the production and the round promotion production compete, it is possible to prevent the production effects of both productions from being diluted with each other, and as a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  Fifth, in the normal state, by winning the conditional normal big hit (7R long and short open big hit) with the first special symbol in the normal state, when shifting to the short time state after the end of the special game, the second special symbol in the short time state By winning the conditional special big hit (16 long open big hit 1), and changing to the promiscuous state after the end of the special game, the execution time (direction scale) of the big hit end demo is different, Depending on the scene and situation at the time of game state transition, it can prevent various changes in the production content and time passage when transitioning from special game to symbol variation game, and prevent the game taste from becoming monotonous, As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game. In addition, even when a big hit occurs in the second special symbol lottery in a situation where there is a specific hold in the subsequent action holding ball, the game state at the time of the big hit is simply the easy entry state. Not only when the probability of winning or failing lottery of the second special symbol is in a high probability state, that is, on the premise that it is in the probability variation consecutive resort, it is possible to execute the on-hold consecutive resort production, It is possible to further improve the player's sense of expectation for the generation of the on-hold Renren production.

Sixth, based on the type of jackpot and the game state when the jackpot occurs, regardless of whether the transition destination of the production mode varies depending on whether or not there is a V-winning during a special game, and whether or not there is a V-winning during a special game It is possible to give diversity and unexpectedness to the transition mode of the production mode by mixing the cases where the transition destination of the production mode is made the same, and as a result, to improve the fun of the game Is possible.

[Tenth embodiment]
Next, a gaming machine according to the tenth embodiment will be described. The gaming machine of the tenth embodiment basically has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described first embodiment, and hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to parts having the same configuration. The description is omitted, and different parts are mainly described.

  As with the gaming machine of the second embodiment, the gaming machine of the tenth embodiment depends on whether or not the game ball wins a specific area (so-called “V area”) in the big prize opening during execution of the special game. Thus, it is configured as a so-called ball accuracy type gaming machine that determines whether or not the gaming state shifts to the probability changing state after the end of the special game. Note that the probability variation state may be continued until a predetermined number of times (ST number) of symbol variations is performed, or may be continued until the next big hit occurs.

  Also, the gaming machine of the tenth embodiment is equipped with only a single big prize opening 65 (a ball-like attacker with a specific area 658) in the gaming area PA, similarly to the gaming machine of the seventh embodiment. ing. In other words, the tenth embodiment is configured such that the big prize opening 65 having the specific area 658 is opened in all rounds. Note that the configuration of the special winning opening 65 has already been described in the second embodiment described above, and a duplicate description thereof will be omitted here.

  First, the jackpot type (breakdown breakdown) in the tenth embodiment will be described. FIG. 99 shows a jackpot breakdown of the special symbol lottery in the tenth embodiment.

  The upper part of FIG. 99 is a diagram schematically showing a symbol table per first special symbol in the tenth embodiment. In the symbol table per first special symbol, the symbol random number per special symbol is associated with the symbol group, the jackpot attribute, the number of operations of the probability variation / short-time function, and the operation pattern of the big prize opening (this book). In the example, the description of the stop symbol is omitted for convenience). In the symbol table per 1st special symbol, the symbol group A (16R long open big hit), the symbol group B (12R long short open big hit 1), and the symbol group C (12R) as three types of symbol groups according to the type of big hit. Long and short open big hit 2) is set.

  The lower part of FIG. 99 is a diagram schematically showing a symbol table per second special symbol in the tenth embodiment. In the second special symbol per symbol table, a symbol group, jackpot attribute, the number of operations of the probability variation / short-time function, and the operation pattern of the big prize opening are respectively associated with the symbol random value per special symbol (this book). In the example, the description of the stop symbol is omitted for convenience). In the symbol table per second special symbol, a symbol group D (16R long open big hit) and a symbol group E (7R long short open big hit) are set as two types of symbol groups corresponding to the type of big hit.

  Subsequently, FIG. 100 is a time chart for explaining an operation pattern of the special winning opening 65 in the tenth embodiment. In this example, a total of four types of operation patterns are prepared corresponding to the above jackpot types. In the figure, the state change of the special winning opening 65 during the special game is shown in time series from left to right. Each operation pattern shown in FIG. 100 conceptually shows the execution state of each round game, and the time widths and ratios of the opening time and closing time (including interval time) of each round game are the actual time. It does not correspond to width and ratio. In this example, regardless of which of the above five types of big hits, in the specific round in the special game, the presence or absence of a probability variable prize is determined based on whether or not the game ball enters the specific area 658 Is distributed. The specific round is set to the fifth round regardless of which jackpot is applicable. In the figure, “L” is added to the long open round game, and “S” is added to the short open round game.

  FIG. 100A shows a 16R long open pattern. In the 16R long open pattern, long open round games are executed in all rounds (normal round, specific round). In other words, the 16R long open big hit is a big hit equivalent to 16 rounds since the big winning opening 65 is opened long in any round game. Note that the specific round (fifth round) is set as a V round that allows easy or possible entry into the specific area 658 because a long open round game is executed.

  FIG. 100 (B) shows the 12R long / short open pattern 1. In the 12R long / short open pattern 1, long open round games are executed in the first to fifth rounds, and short open round games are executed in the sixth to twelfth rounds. That is, the 12R long / short open big hit 1 is a big hit equivalent to substantially five rounds because the big winning opening 65 is long opened in the above five round games. Note that the specific round (fifth round) is set as a V round that allows easy or possible entry into the specific area 658 because a long open round game is executed.

  FIG. 100 (C) shows the 12R long / short open pattern 2. In the 12R long / short open pattern 2, long open round games are executed in the first to fourth and sixth rounds, and short open round games are executed in the fifth and seventh to twelfth rounds. That is, the 12R long / short open big hit 2 is a big hit equivalent to substantially five rounds because the big winning opening 65 is opened long in the five round games. Note that the specific round (third round) is set as a non-V round in which it is difficult or impossible to enter the specific area 658 because the short open round game is executed.

  FIG. 100D illustrates a 7R long / short open pattern. In the 7R long / short open pattern, long open round games are executed in the first to fifth rounds, and short open round games are executed in the sixth to seventh rounds. In other words, the 7R long / short open big hit is a big hit equivalent to five rounds since the big winning opening 65 is opened long in the five round games. Note that the specific round (fifth round) is set as a V round that allows easy or possible entry into the specific area 658 because a long open round game is executed.

  Thus, in this example, the 16R long open big hit is a big hit of “substantial 16 rounds”, while the other big hits (12R long short open big hit 1, 2, 7R long short open big hits) are “substantial 5 rounds”. A big hit.

Here, as shown in FIG. 99, in this example, in the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery, either the long open big hit or the long short open big hit is won as the big hit type. As described above, the long open big hit is a big hit in which only a long open round game exists as a round game in the special game. The long and short open big hit is a big hit in which a long open round game and a short open round game are mixed as a round game in the special game. At this time, in the first special symbol lottery, the winning probability for the long open big hit is 10%, and the winning probability for the long and short open big hit is 90%. On the other hand, in the second special symbol lottery, the winning probability for a long open big hit is 60%, and the winning probability for a long and short open big hit is 40%. For this reason, the winning probability of the long and short open big hit is set higher in the case of winning the big win in the first special symbol lottery than in the case of making the big win in the second special symbol lottery. Here, in this example, in both the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery, when a long and short open big hit is won, a short open round game is executed in at least one normal round in the special game. The Therefore, the big hit type (long and short open big hit) with one or more short open round games in the normal round is the big win in the first special symbol lottery than the big special win in the second special symbol lottery. The winning probability is set high. In other words, basically, the ratio of the short-open round game being executed at least once in the normal round is higher in the case of the big win in the first special symbol than in the case of the big win in the second special symbol. It has become. In this example, not only a normal round but also a specific round can be a short open round game. That is, as described above, when the 12R long / short open big hit 2 is won, a specific round in the special game (12R long / short open pattern 2) is set as the short open round game. In this example, both the first special symbol and the second special symbol are set as long and short open big hits as the big hit type, but the long and short open big hit is set only for the first special symbol and the second special symbol is set. A configuration may be adopted in which long and short open big hits are not set (that is, only long open big hits are set).

  Also, in this example, the average number of rounds of special games executed by one big hit occurrence is set equal in the case of a big win in the first special symbol lottery and in the case of a big win in the second special symbol lottery. Yes. Specifically, the average number of rounds for a special game in the case of a big win in the first special symbol lottery is “12.4 rounds”, whereas the special number in the case of a big win in the second special symbol lottery The average number of rounds of the game is “12.4 rounds”, and the average number of rounds is configured to be the same. Therefore, the types of jackpots in the first special symbol lottery (16R long open big hit, 12R long and short open big hits 1, 2) and types of jackpots in the second special symbol lottery (16R long open big hit, 7R long and short open big hits) are at least Although the expected value of winning ball is different, the number of round games executed (the number of rights to be able to enter the big winning opening 65) obtained on the occurrence of one big hit is the same on average.

  In addition, as can be seen from the above description, when the first special symbol is a big hit, a big hit with a short open round game in the normal round (12R long short open big hit 1, 2) and a short hit in the normal round It is distributed to big hits (16R long open big hits) without an open round game. In the following, for convenience of explanation, a big hit with a short open round game in the normal round (12R long short open big hit 1, 2) is a “long / short open big hit X”, and a big hit without a short open round game in the normal round (16R long) Open big hit) is called “long open big hit Y”. As shown in FIG. 100, when a long / short open big hit X (12R long / short open big hit 1, 2) is selected among a plurality of big hit types, a short open round game can be executed in the normal round in the special game. However, the short open round game is set to a round at least after the specific round (that is, the sixth round and thereafter) among a plurality of normal rounds.

Here, when the long and short open big hit X is won with the first special symbol, the big hit bonus X is selected as the big hit effect pattern in the special game. When the jackpot bonus X is selected, a character selection effect is executed in the jackpot end demo. The character selection effect is an effect of selecting a character appearing in the effect mode after the end of the special game, like the character selection effect in the ninth embodiment described above. At this time, when the big hit bonus X is executed, the execution time (end demo time) of the end demo is “Tx”. On the other hand, when a long open big hit Y is won in the first special symbol, “big hit bonus Y” is selected as the big hit effect pattern in the special game. When the big hit bonus Y is selected, the character selection effect is executed in the big hit end demo. At this time, when the big hit bonus Y is executed, the execution time (end demo time) of the end demo is “Ty”. Here, the end demo time Tx of the jackpot bonus X and the end demo time Ty of the jackpot bonus Y are set as different time values. In this example, the end demo time Tx of the big hit bonus X is shorter than the end demo time Ty of the big hit bonus Y (Tx <Ty). At this time, in the end demonstration of the jackpot bonus Y, the entire process of producing the character selection effect is executed, whereas in the end demo of the jackpot bonus X, only a part (second half) of the effect process of the character selection effect is executed. Is done. That is, when the long and short open big hit X is won, in the special game, the first half of the character selection effect is executed during the short open round game (sixth to twelfth round), and the second half of the character selection effect is It is executed during the end demonstration immediately after the short opening round. The first half and the second half of the character selection production are configured as a series of productions having continuity.

  As described above, in this example, the end demonstration time Tx is set to be shorter than the end demonstration time Ty. However, by using the round game production scale, the production scale of the character selection production is ensured. That is, when the long open big hit Y is accompanied by only the long open round game in the special game, the character selection effect is completed only by the big hit end demo, while when the long open short hit big hit X, the special game In the round at the time of the short opening when it is difficult or impossible to enter the big prize opening 65 because the long opening round game and the short opening round game are involved in the game (because the short opening round game is executed in the second half round) The character selection effect is completed across the short open round game and the jackpot end demo by making effective use. As a result, even if the long and short open big hit X and the long open big hit Y are different from each other in the end demonstration time during the big hit, it is possible to execute a common character selection effect on the same time scale. By shortening the end demo time, it is possible to prevent the entire jackpot effect from being delayed.

  It should be noted that the character selection effect of the big hit bonus X and the character selection effect of the big hit bonus Y are not necessarily completely the same, and some of them may include different contents of the effect. For example, the types of characters that can be selected by the player are different at least in part, and the background display during the presentation and the method for selecting the characters are also different.

  As described above, according to the tenth embodiment, the first special symbol than the second special symbol lottery is set while the average number of rounds in the case of winning the jackpot in the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery is set to be the same. Increase the percentage that the lottery wins long and short open big hits (big hit with short open round games) and increase the percentage of short open round games executed in both the specific round and the regular round in that special game Therefore, by adjusting the actual number of rounds and the actual number of rounds, it is possible to differentiate the profits that can be obtained by the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery, and to create a well-rounded game. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Eleventh embodiment]
Next, a gaming machine according to the eleventh embodiment will be described. The gaming machine of the eleventh embodiment has basically the same configuration as the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above, and hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to parts having the same configuration. The description is omitted, and different parts are mainly described.

  As with the gaming machine of the second embodiment, the gaming machine of the eleventh embodiment depends on whether or not the game ball wins a specific area (so-called “V area”) in the big winning opening during execution of the special game. Thus, it is configured as a so-called ball accuracy type gaming machine that determines whether or not the gaming state shifts to the probability changing state after the end of the special game. Note that the probability variation state may be continued until a predetermined number of times (ST number) of symbol variations is performed, or may be continued until the next big hit occurs.

  Also, the gaming machine of the eleventh embodiment is equipped with only a single big prize opening 65 (a ball-like attacker having a specific area 658) in the gaming area PA, similarly to the gaming machine of the seventh embodiment. ing. That is, the eleventh embodiment is also configured such that the big prize opening 65 having the specific area 658 is opened in all rounds. Note that the configuration of the special winning opening 65 has already been described in the second embodiment described above, and a duplicate description thereof will be omitted here.

  First, the jackpot type (breakdown breakdown) in the eleventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 101 shows a jackpot breakdown of the special symbol lottery in the eleventh embodiment.

The upper part of FIG. 101 is a diagram schematically showing a symbol table per first special symbol in the eleventh embodiment. In the symbol table per first special symbol, the symbol random number per special symbol is associated with the symbol group, the jackpot attribute, the number of operations of the probability variation / short-time function, and the operation pattern of the big prize opening (this book). In the example, the description of the stop symbol is omitted for convenience). In the symbol table per 1st special symbol, the symbol group A (12R long / short open big hit 1), symbol group B (12R long / short open big hit 2), and symbol group C (4 8R long / short open big hit 1) and symbol group D (8R long / short open big hit 2) are set. As shown in the upper part of FIG. 101, in the first special symbol lottery, the winning probability of a conditional special big hit (corresponding to a probable big hit) is 60%, and the winning probability of a conditional normal big hit (equivalent to a non-probable big hit) is 40%. It is.

  The lower part of FIG. 101 is a diagram schematically showing a symbol table per second special symbol in the eleventh embodiment. In the second special symbol per symbol table, a symbol group, jackpot attribute, the number of operations of the probability variation / short-time function, and the operation pattern of the big prize opening are respectively associated with the symbol random value per special symbol (this book). In the example, the description of the stop symbol is omitted for convenience). In the symbol table per second special symbol, symbol group E (16R long open big hit) and symbol group F (4R long open big hit) are set as two types of symbol groups corresponding to the type of big hit. As shown in the lower part of FIG. 101, in the second special symbol lottery, the winning probability of the conditional specific big hit (corresponding to the probability variation big hit) is 100%.

  The first special symbol jackpot type includes 12 rounds of 12R long / short open jackpots (they are also collectively referred to as “12R jackpots”), and the number of rounds of special games is 8 rounds. There are 8R long and short open big hits 1, 2 (collectively referred to as “8R big hit”). That is, two types of jackpots are prepared for each specified number of rounds. Here, among 12R big hits, 12R long / short open big hit 1 belongs to a conditional special big hit in which a specific round is configured as a V round (long open round game), and 12R long / short open big hit 2 is a non-V round with a specific round It belongs to a conditional regular jackpot configured as (short open round game). Among the 8R jackpots, 8R long / short open big hit 1 belongs to a conditional special big hit with a specific round configured as a V round (long open round game), and 8R long / short open big hit 2 has a specific round that is not a V round ( It belongs to a conditional regular jackpot configured as a short open round game. At this time, if 12R big hit, the probability of being a conditional special big hit is “45 / (45 + 35) × 100 = 56%”, and if 8R big hit, the probability of being a conditional specific big hit is “15 / (15 + 5) × 100 = 75% ”. Therefore, the specific round is V round (long open round game) in the case where the 8R big win is won and the 8R special game is executed, compared to the case where the 12R big win is won and the 12R special game is executed. The ratio is set high. As a result, even when winning a jackpot type with a small number of special game prescribed rounds, the expectation of probability change is set higher than when winning a jackpot type with a large number of special game prescribed rounds. Therefore, equalization of profits is attempted. As a variation, if the first special symbol is a big hit, the average number of real rounds for a conditional special big hit is set to be less than the average number of real rounds for a conditional normal big hit May be. In other words, if it is a conditional big hit, the actual number of rounds (expected value of the winning ball) may be set larger because the V winning in the specific round is difficult or impossible.

On the other hand, the 2nd special symbol jackpot type includes a 16R long open jackpot (collectively referred to as “16R jackpot”), in which the specified number of rounds of special games is 16 rounds, and a specified round number of special games of 4 rounds. There is a certain 4R long open jackpot (collectively referred to as “4R jackpot”). In the case of a big hit in the second special symbol, regardless of the type of big hit (16R big hit, 4R big hit), the specific round belongs to a conditional specific big hit configured as a V round (long open). In addition, since the big hits (16R big hit, 4R big hit) of the second special symbol are all long open big hits, only the long open round game is set in all rounds (the short open round game is not set). Therefore, in this example, only when a big hit is made with the first special symbol, a short open round game is set for each round of the special game. In addition, even in the case of a big win in the second special symbol, a short open round game may be set for each round of the special game. In the case of a big win with one special pattern, it is desirable that the ratio of the short open round game to be executed in each round of the special game is set higher.

  FIG. 102 is a schematic diagram for explaining the execution process of the special game. In this example, regardless of the type of jackpot, the fourth round is set as the specific round, and rounds other than the fourth round are set as the normal round. First, as shown in FIGS. 102 (A) and 102 (B), no matter which 12R big hit (12R long / short open big hit 1, 2) is won, in that special game, a total of 12 round games are 8 times. Therefore, the actual number of rounds (the number of rounds in which a prize ball can be actually acquired) is “8 rounds”. That is, in the case of 12R big hit, “12 rounds” is set as the specified number of rounds for the special game, but the actual number of rounds that can actually win a prize ball is “8 rounds”. Note that the actual number of rounds is determined by the number of long open round games that are set to be easy or possible to enter the big prize opening 65. On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 102 (C) and (D), regardless of which 8R big win (8R long / short open big hit 1, 2) is won, in the special game, a total of 8 round games are 4 times. Therefore, the actual number of rounds (the number of rounds in which a prize ball can be actually acquired) is “4 rounds”. That is, in the case of 8R big hit, “8 rounds” is set as the specified number of rounds for the special game, but the actual number of rounds that can actually win a prize ball is “4 rounds”. Therefore, if the first special symbol is a big hit, the average number of rounds of the special game is 7.2 rounds, so the minimum prescribed round number “8 rounds” is larger than the maximum prescribed round number “12 rounds”. It can be said that the number of rounds is close to.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 102 (E) and 102 (F), the second special symbol big hit (16R big hit, 4R big hit) is set as a long open big hit. Only games are executed. Therefore, the actual round number of the special game when 16R big hit is "16 rounds", and the real round number of the special game when 4R big hit is "4 rounds". Accordingly, when the second special symbol is a big hit, the average value of the actual number of rounds is “11.2 rounds”, so the maximum specified number of rounds “16 rounds” is larger than the minimum specified number of rounds “4”. It can be said that the number of rounds is close to.

  As described above, according to the eleventh embodiment, in the first special symbol lottery, the expected prize winning value is lower (substantial round) than in the case of winning the 12R jackpot with the higher expected winning prize value (large number of actual rounds). The number of 8R jackpots (with a small number) is set to be higher than the first special due to the higher probability (probability of expected change) that the big winning opening and the specific area will be long open in the specific round in that special game. It is possible to equalize the profits obtained when winning a jackpot in the design, and it is possible to eliminate unfairness according to the type of jackpot, and as a result, it is possible to improve the fun of the game It becomes. Also, multiple types of big wins with different number of rounds (4R <8R <12R <16R) are provided, and in the case of winning big wins in the first special symbol lottery and in the case of winning big wins in the second special symbol lottery, While the internal average number of rounds that can be earned in special games is the same, the actual average number of rounds that can actually win prize balls is differentiated to differentiate the profits earned by both players It becomes possible to create playability.

[Twelfth embodiment]
Next, a gaming machine according to the twelfth embodiment will be described. The gaming machine of the twelfth embodiment basically has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above, and hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to parts having the same configuration. The description is omitted, and different parts are mainly described.

  As with the gaming machine of the second embodiment, the gaming machine of the twelfth embodiment depends on whether or not the game ball wins a specific area (so-called “V area”) in the big prize opening during execution of the special game. Te, the special game state after the end of the game to determine whether to shift to the probability variation state, configured as a game machine of the so-called ball probability type. Note that the probability variation state may be continued until a predetermined number of times (ST number) of symbol variations is performed, or may be continued until the next big hit occurs.

  Similarly to the gaming machine of the seventh embodiment, the gaming machine of the twelfth embodiment is equipped with only a single big prize opening 65 (a ball-like attacker having a specific area 658) in the gaming area PA. ing. That is, also in the twelfth embodiment, the big winning opening 65 having the specific area 658 is opened in all rounds. Note that the configuration of the special winning opening 65 has already been described in the second embodiment described above, and a duplicate description thereof will be omitted here.

  In the embodiments so far, the specific area 658 is opened (long open or short open) in the specific round, and the specific area 658 is always closed in the normal round. On the other hand, in this example, the specific area 658 can be opened (long open or short open) not only in the specific round but also in the normal round. In this example, even if the specific area 658 is released, the specific area 658 is switched between valid and invalid according to the opened round, and only the balls entering the specific area 658 in the effective round (valid period) are valid. On the other hand, a ball entering the specific area 658 in the invalid round (invalid period) is treated as invalid. Here, the valid period is a period during which the specific area 658 is validated, that is, the detection of the game ball by the specific area switch 657 is valid. The invalid period is a period in which the specific area 658 is invalidated, that is, the detection of the game ball by the specific area switch 657 is invalid. Therefore, a round in which the specific area 658 is valid (valid period) is a “specific round”, and a round in which the specific area 658 is invalid (invalid period) is a “normal round”. Therefore, the specific round in this example refers to a round in which the sorting member (blade member 655) opens and closes and the specific area 658 is valid (valid period). On the other hand, a round in which the sorting member (blade member 655) opens and closes may be provided as the normal round. In that case, unlike the above-described specific round, even if a game ball enters the specific area 658, the specific area 658 is invalidated (invalid period), that is, the game ball is detected by the specific area switch 657. Is preferably invalidated. Therefore, as a general rule, the transition to probability change by entering the game ball into the specific area 658 is only the specific round in which the specific area 658 is valid, and the game ball is specified even if the specific area 658 is invalid. Even if the player can enter the area 658, the game ball does not enter and is not triggered by the probability change. Further, in any of the specific round and the normal round in this example, the detection of the game ball by the specific area switch 657 may be effective. In this case, the game ball is detected by the specific area switch 657 in the specific round, and will be described later. It is preferable that the probability variation reservation flag to be turned on is turned on, and the probability variation reservation flag to be described later is turned off in the normal round while the game ball is detected by the specific area switch 657. In the following, only the first special symbol game will be described and the second special symbol game will be omitted, but the configuration described below may be applied to the second special symbol game.

  In this example, 1) long and short open big hit A and 2) long and short open big hit B are provided as big hit types of the first special symbol. Note that the number of execution rounds (specified number of rounds) of special games by each jackpot is N (in this example, “N ≧ 3”). The long and short open big hit A belongs to “conditional specific big hit” as a big hit attribute, and the long and short open big hit B belongs to “conditional normal big hit” as a big hit attribute.

Subsequently, FIG. 103 is a time chart for explaining an operation pattern of the special winning opening 65 in the twelfth embodiment. In this example, a total of two types of operation patterns are prepared corresponding to the above jackpot type. Specifically, the “long / short open pattern A” is associated with the long / short open big hit A, and the “long / short open pattern B” is associated with the long / short open big hit B. In the figure, the state change of the special winning opening 65 during the special game is shown in time series from left to right. Each operation pattern shown in FIG. 103 conceptually shows the execution state of each round game, and the time width and ratio of the opening time and closing time (including interval time) of each round game are the actual time. It does not correspond to width and ratio.

  103 (A) shows the long / short open pattern A, and FIG. 103 (B) shows the long / short open pattern B. FIG. In each drawing, in addition to the opening / closing operation mode of the big winning opening 65 and the specific area 658 in each round, the presence / absence of a game ball entering the big winning opening 65 and the specific area 658 is shown as an example. In this example, among the multiple rounds, the specific area 658 is opened in the first to third rounds, and the specific area 658 is always closed in the fourth and subsequent rounds. Therefore, in the following, the description after the fourth round is omitted except for special cases. In this example, the second round is set as a specific round, and the other first round and third round are set as normal rounds. Therefore, as described above, the specific area 658 is “valid” in the second round (specific round), and the specific area is “invalid” in the first and third rounds (normal round).

Therefore, in this example, the following correspondences (1) to (3) are established.
(1) Entering a game ball into the specific area 658 in the A round (the first round) does not trigger the probability change transition.
(2) Entering a game ball into the specific area 658 in the B round (second round) triggers the probability change transition.
(3) Entering a game ball in the specific area 658 in the C round (third round) does not trigger the probability change transition.

  In the long / short open pattern A, as shown in FIG. 103 (A), the first round is set as a short open round game, the second round is set as a long open round game, and the third round is set as a short open round game. In this example, in the first to third rounds, the opening / closing operation of the special winning opening 65 and the opening / closing operation of the specific area 658 are synchronously controlled, and the opening period of the special winning opening 65 and the opening of the specific area 658 are controlled. The period is configured to overlap in time. In the long and short open pattern A, since the short open round game is executed in the first and third rounds (normal rounds), it is difficult or impossible to enter the big winning opening 65 and the specific area 658. Since the long open round game is executed in the second round (specific round), it is easy or possible to enter the big winning opening 65 and the specific area 658. Therefore, as shown in the figure, the game ball can be entered into the specific area 658 in the second round. At this time, since the second round is set as the valid period of the specific area 658, the detection of the game ball by the specific area switch 657 is treated as valid, and at this time, the probability variation reservation flag is turned on, and after the special game ends. The gaming state becomes a high probability state (probability change state).

In the long / short open pattern B, as shown in FIG. 103 (B), the first round is set as a long open round game, the second round is set as a short open round game, and the third round is set as a short open round game. In this example, in the first to third rounds, the opening / closing operation of the special winning opening 65 and the opening / closing operation of the specific area 658 are synchronously controlled, and the opening period of the special winning opening 65 and the opening of the specific area 658 are controlled. The period is configured to overlap in time. In this long / short open pattern B, since the short open round game is executed in the second round (specific round) and the third round (normal round), it is difficult or impossible to enter the big winning opening 65 and the specific area 658. Although it is possible, since the long open round game is executed in the first round (normal round), it is easy or possible to enter the big winning opening 65 and the specific area 658. Therefore, as shown in the drawing, a game ball can be entered into the specific area 658 in the first round. At this time, since the first round is set as the invalid period of the specific area 658, the detection of the game ball by the specific area switch 657 is treated as invalid, the probability variation reservation flag remains off, and after the special game ends The gaming state becomes a low probability state (normal state or short time state).

  Here, the open / close operations of the long and short open patterns A and B in the first to third rounds are compared. In the long / short release pattern A, one short release is performed in the first round, one long release in the second round, and two short releases in the third round. That is, in the long / short opening pattern A, the winning prize opening 65 and the specific area 658 are opened / closed in the order of “short opening → long opening → short opening → short opening” in the first to third rounds. On the other hand, in the long / short opening pattern B, one short opening and one long opening in the first round, one short opening in the second round, and one short opening in the third round are performed. That is, in the long / short opening pattern B, the winning prize opening 65 and the specific area 658 are opened / closed in the order of “short opening → long opening → short opening → short opening” in the first to third rounds. That is, when comparing each of the first to third rounds to compare the long and short open patterns A and B, the opening and closing operations of the special winning opening 65 and the specific area 658 are different, but the first to first rounds are different. When the section up to three rounds is viewed as a series of flows, the opening and closing operations of the special prize opening 65 and the specific area 658 are the same. Accordingly, in the long and short opening patterns A and B, through all rounds, the series of opening / closing operations (the operation sequence of long opening and short opening) of the special winning opening 65 and the specific area 658 are made substantially the same, By making it difficult to determine which jackpot type has been won and in which round a specific round was executed, it is possible to maintain the expectation for probability change until the end of the special game Become.

  As described above, according to the twelfth embodiment, there are a specific round in which the specific area 658 is valid and a non-specific round (normal round) in which the specific area 658 is invalid, and a game to the specific area 658 in any round. While it is possible to enter the ball substantially, only the entrance to the specific area 658 in the specific round is triggered by the probability change transition, and further, the big winning opening 65 and the specific area 658 of the specific area and the normal round are By matching the opening / closing operation mode, it is possible to make it difficult to determine which jackpot type (opening / closing pattern) is won based on the opening / closing operation mode and whether or not there is a ball entering a specific area. Regardless of whether the territory has transitioned to the valid period or invalid period, the player has earned a certain amount of change by entering the specific area 658. While waiting can proceed special game, as a result, it is possible to improve the flavor Xing of the game.

  In the correspondences (1) to (3), the A round, the B round, and the C round are exemplified as the first round, the second round, and the third round. However, “B = A + 1” and “C = If the relationship of “B + 1” is satisfied, specific numerical values of A, B, and C can be arbitrarily set. That is, the above correspondences (1) to (3) are not set in the first half (first to third rounds) in the special game of a plurality of times, but the second half (for example, the fourth to sixth rounds and the second round) 14 to 16th round, etc.).

In the above-described embodiment, since the correspondences (1) to (2) are established, that is, the specific area is invalid in the A round (first round), the game ball enters the specific area. While the ball is not triggered by the probability change, the specific area becomes effective in the B round (second round), so that the entry of the game ball into the specific area is a trigger for the probability change transition. While reversing the correspondences (1) to (3), for example, in the A round (the first round), the specific area is made effective, and the entrance of the game ball into the specific area is triggered by the probability change transition. Then, it is good also as a structure which invalidates a specific area | region in B round (2nd round), and does not use the ball of the game ball to enter a specific area as the opportunity of a probability change transfer. At that time, the jackpot attributes of the long and short open big hits A and B are also reversed, the long and short open big hit A belongs to the conditional normal big hit, and the long and short open big hit B belongs to the conditional specific big hit. In that case, the operation pattern for the conditional special jackpot and the operation pattern for the conditional normal jackpot are reversed. That is, the conditional special jackpot operating pattern is a long / short opening pattern B, and the conditional normal jackpot operating pattern is a long / short opening pattern A. Therefore, when the above correspondences (1) to (2) are established, the C-round (third round) in the conditional specific jackpot operation pattern (in this case, “long / short open pattern A” is applicable) When the above correspondences (1) to (2) are reversed while two or more opening operations (short opening operations) are performed, the conditional specific jackpot operation pattern (in this case, “ In “long / short open pattern B”), two or more open operations (short open operations) are executed in the A round (first round). As a modification, the above-described correspondence (3) is not applied, and only the correspondences (1) and (2) are applied.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the V acquisition notification (notification that the probability change has been acquired by the V winning within the valid period) is performed in a round after the specific round (the third round and thereafter in this example). May be. In addition, in each round, an effect that suggests whether the specific area is “valid” or “invalid” may be performed to further increase the player's sense of expectation.

[Common variations]
Next, a gaming machine according to a common modification of the first to twelfth embodiments will be described. The gaming machine according to this common modification basically has the same configuration as that of any of the above-described first to twelfth embodiments, and hereinafter the same configuration. Parts having the same reference numerals are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof is omitted, and different parts are mainly described.

(Common modification 1)
In the first modification, when a big hit is made with the second special symbol in the non-probable change state (short time state, easy entry state), execution of the on-hold extended resort production is more effective than a big win with the second special symbol in the probability change state. The configuration is configured such that the probability is low, or the on-hold consecutive resort production is not executed. As described above, in the non-probability change state and the probability change state, since the transition is made to different effect modes, the tendency of the effect during the symbol variation is different. Therefore, in the non-probable change state, if the second special symbol is a big hit, and the transition to the probable change state after the end of the special game, the non-probable change will occur through the event of the reserved villa Designed as a series of continuous effects (consistent story effects) by seamlessly connecting the symbol variation effect during the state, the previous special game, the symbol variation effect during the probabilistic state, and the later special game. Is difficult. Therefore, even if it is a situation where the second special symbol is a big hit in the uncertain change state and the reserved renso is confirmed, there is a high possibility that the effect of the reserved renso production will not be fully demonstrated. The execution probability is reduced or not executed. As an example, in the production mode (battle mode) in the probabilistic state, a special jackpot symbol dedicated to the production mode (a jackpot symbol “fist / fist / fist”) is set, and the stoppage display of this particular jackpot symbol is performed. Considering the case where special continuous production (battle-type special continuous production) is started when the on-hold continuous resort is finalized, when the production mode in the short time state (non-battle mode), Even under the circumstances where the occurrence of this is not possible, the specific jackpot symbol does not appear, and if the special continuous performance is not generated, the connection between the front and rear jackpots and the consistency of the performance can be achieved. Because.

(Common modification 2)
In the first embodiment described above, even if any one of the multiple types of big hits (16R big hit, 8R big hit, 2R big hit) corresponds to a big hit (second special bonus) The limited frequency table (high probability special variation state γ) is shifted to the limited frequency table only for a limited period of time (variable display over the variable display of the number of symbol fluctuations (4 rotations) corresponding to the maximum number (4) of activated balls on the symbol). With reference to (special variation pattern table), a variation pattern of a special symbol is selected. On the other hand, in the second modification, the special game is terminated only when a specific big hit (high profit big hit: 16R big hit) among a plurality of types of big hits (16R big hit, 8R big hit, 2R big hit). It shifts to the limited frequency state only for a certain period (four rotations) immediately after, and the variation pattern of the special symbol is selected with reference to the limited frequency table. In the limited frequency state, when the determination result is a specific big hit, a variation pattern of shortening variation (for example, variation time = 2 seconds) is selected. At this time, as mentioned above, a specific big hit (high profit big hit) among multiple types of big hits is a big hit with the second special symbol than a big hit with the first special symbol The probability of becoming is high. Therefore, basically, if you win a big hit with the second special symbol (in the case of Renso) than if you win a big hit with the first special symbol (first win), the special game It can be said that it is easy to shift to the limited frequency state immediately after the end. In this limited frequency state, a shortened variation pattern (for example, variation time = 2 seconds) is selected on the main control board 100 side, and various design variation effects corresponding to this shortened variation pattern are displayed on the effect control board 200 side. Is to be selected.

  Here, the operation holding ball of the second special symbol (especially, the operation holding ball of the second special symbol that is scheduled to be digested four times after the big hit (after the end of the special game) is generated before the big hit starts. There are cases where it occurs after the start of jackpot. Specifically, when the game ball enters the second starting port during the symbol variation display and the action holding ball of the second special symbol occurs, the number of action holding balls of the second special symbol is four (maximum There may be a case in which a game ball enters the second start port and an operation hold ball of the second special symbol occurs during execution of the special game under a situation where the number of the hold is less than the hold number). In addition, in the situation where the number of active reserve balls of the second special symbol is less than 4 (maximum number of reserves) at the end of the special game, the change of the second special symbol after the end of the special game When the game ball enters the second starting port 62, the operation holding ball of the second special symbol may occur. At this time, as described above, whether or not to execute the on-hold consecutive villa effect (special continuous effect) is determined at the start of the big hit, so in order to generate the on-hold consecutive villa effect (special continuous effect), at least the big hit It is assumed that there is a specific hold at the start. For this reason, when a specific hold is generated before the big hit starts with reference to the time of the big hit, the on-hold consecutive villa production B (special continuous production) can be generated, but the specific hold is generated after the big hit starts. In this case, it is not possible to generate the on-hold consecutive villa effect B (special continuous effect). As a result, if a specific hold occurs before the big hit starts, a special symbol variation effect will occur within the limited period (four rotations) immediately after the special game ends, If a specific suspension occurs after the start, special symbol variation effects will not occur within a limited period (four rotations) immediately after the end of the special game. As described above, the four rotations that are the limited period correspond to the maximum number (four) of the operation-reserved balls of the second special symbol.

Therefore, when a specific suspension is generated before the big hit starts, the on-hold extended resort is established, and the symbol variation related to the specific suspension corresponds to a shortened variation in the limited frequency state (for example, variation time = 2 seconds). A special symbol variation effect (for example, a series of movie images is developed and a pattern variation and a big hit are inconspicuous) is made consistent with the previous special game, the symbol variation effect and the later special game. Connect seamlessly with stylistic performance. On the other hand, when a specific hold is generated after the big hit starts and the in-hold extended resort is established, the special symbol variation effect (special continuous effect) does not occur in the symbol variation related to the specific hold, but the shortened variation in the limited frequency state By generating an immediate hit effect (a mode in which the occurrence of a big hit is emphasized) corresponding to (for example, the variation time = 2 seconds), the delay until the big hit is prevented is prevented. That is, in the second modification, even if the timing of occurrence of the specific suspension is before or after the start of the big hit, if the specific big hit symbol is a big hit, the variation pattern selection state after the special game is Since the transition is made to the limited frequency state, the contents of the subsequent big hit variation effect can be made different according to the timing of occurrence of the specific hold with the occurrence of the shortening variation in the limited frequency state. In this modified example, when determining whether or not to execute the on-hold consecutive villa production (special continuous production), it was set at the time of the big hit, but it is not limited to this, and during the big hit (special game execution) The middle timing may be set as the predetermined timing.

(Common modification 3)
Further, in the above-described first to twelfth embodiments, the configuration in which only one type of off symbol is provided as the special symbol stop symbol is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of types of off symbol are provided. May be. At this time, for example, only when a specific loss symbol is selected as the prior determination result, the on-hold consecutive villa effect (gase effect) may be generated. In addition, in the seventh to twelfth embodiments described above, a configuration (one attacker type) having only a single big prize opening 65 having a specific area in the game area PA is adopted. Not limited, as in the second embodiment described above, a configuration (two-attacker format) including a large winning opening 64 having no specific area and a large winning opening 65 having a specific area is adopted. May be.

  In addition, this invention is not limited to the said embodiment and modification, If it is a range which does not deviate from the summary of this invention, it can improve suitably. In addition, the components described in the above embodiments and modified examples are appropriately combined, or some of the components described in the above described embodiments and modified examples are deleted or converted by known / conventional techniques, etc. These are also included in the scope of the present invention. Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, the two types of on-hold consecutive villas A and B having different generation times have been described as examples. The generation of the on-hold renso production A is not sufficient, and it may be the specification that the on-hold renso is confirmed when a predetermined condition is satisfied. The specification that the villa is determined may be sufficient, or the generation of the on-hold consecutive villa production B is not sufficient, and the specification that the on-hold consecutive villa B is fixed when a predetermined condition is satisfied may be used. Moreover, in the said embodiment, even if it is the structure performed only when one or more specific reservation exists in the subsequent operation reservation ball | bowl, specific reservation in a subsequent operation reservation ball | bowl is carried out. Even if it does not exist (as a so-called gas effect), the configuration may be executed. Further, in the present invention and the above embodiment, “not executed” may include a low execution probability (occurrence frequency), and “low execution probability” includes not being executed. May be.

PM Pachinko machine PA Game area 1 Outer frame 2 Front frame 5 Glass frame 20 Game board 61 First starting port 62 Second starting port 64 First major winning port 65 Second major winning port 70 Production display device 71 First special symbol Display device 72 Second special symbol display device 100 Main control board 130 Holding control means 135 Predetermining means 140 Special symbol lottery processing means 141 Special symbol success / failure determining means 142 Special symbol stop symbol determining means 143 Special symbol variation pattern determining means 150 Special game Control means 156 Special symbol display control means 160 Electric accessory control means 165 Game state control means 200 Effect control board 220 Effect control means 223 Pre-reading notice control means 225 Fluctuation effect determination means 300 Image control board 657 Specific area switch 658 Specific area

Claims (1)

A game board in which a game area is formed;
A start opening provided in the game area and into which a game ball can enter;
NG determination means for executing NG determination triggered by entering the starting opening,
A large winning opening that is provided in the gaming area and is opened according to the result of the success / failure determination and into which a gaming ball can enter;
A specific area through which game balls that have entered the big prize opening can pass;
Special game execution means for executing a special game that repeats a unit game multiple times with opening of the big winning opening when the result of the determination of success or failure is a big hit;
An effect display device in which a predetermined effect is displayed at the same time that the design showing the result of the determination of validity is variably displayed.
The normal gaming state in which the result of the success / failure determination is a big hit with a predetermined probability, and the specific gaming state in which the result of the success / failure determination is a big hit with a higher probability than the predetermined probability. Game state control means for performing control to shift,
A game ball that has entered the grand prize opening in at least N (N ≧ 1) unit games among the plurality of unit games in the special game is configured to be able to pass through the specific area in the special prize opening. And
Depending on whether or not a game ball that has entered the big prize opening in at least the Nth unit game among the plurality of unit games in the special game has passed the specific area in the special prize opening, the special game After the game is finished, it is determined whether to shift to the normal gaming state or to the specific gaming state,
As a type of special game that is executed when the result of the success / failure determination becomes a big hit, a first special game that is set to be less advantageous for the player, and the advantage is higher than that of the first special game. At least a set second special game,
In the unit game, the special winning opening is opened at least once, and as a kind of the opening operation, a long opening operation in which the special winning opening is opened for a predetermined time or more and the special winning opening is less than the predetermined time. There is a short opening action that is opened across
In the first special game and the second special game, the long opening operation and the short opening operation of the big prize opening executed in the section from the first unit game to the N + M (M ≧ 1) unit game. Are set to the same execution order,
Whether the first special game is being executed or the second special game is being executed, what is the unit game currently being executed out of the plurality of unit games? Do not perform the effect to suggest or inform whether it is the unit game of the second time,
Whether the first special game is being executed or the second special game is being executed, the game ball has passed the specific area in the Nth unit game. Even after the end of the first special game or after the end of the second special game, an effect that suggests or notifies that the game ball has passed the specific area is not executed in the N-th unit game. A pachinko gaming machine characterized in that an effect of suggesting or notifying whether or not the gaming state becomes a specific gaming state is executed after the unit game after the Nth unit game or after the end of the last unit game. .

Images